DELL S2815DN User Manual
Dell™ Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw  
Dell™ Smart Multifunction Printer | S2815dn  
User's Guide  
Regulatory Model: Dell H815dw / Dell S2815dn  
Contents  
Before Beginning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25  
Notes, Cautions, and Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
About License.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
27  
As for RSA BSAFE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
ICC Profile Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
JPEG Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
Math Library. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
libtiff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
Zlib. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
1
Dell™ Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw  
Dell™ Smart Multifunction Printer | S2815dn  
User's Guide  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
31  
Conventions.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
31  
2
3
4
Finding Information  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
33  
35  
39  
Product Features  
.
.
.
About the Printer  
.
Front and Rear Views.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
39  
39  
40  
Front View  
Rear View  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF)  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
41  
42  
42  
43  
43  
43  
Space Requirements  
Operator Panel  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Optional Accessory.  
Securing the Printer  
Ordering Supplies  
.
Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007  
Contents  
3
Setting Up the Printer (Printer Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45  
5
6
Overview of the Printer Setup  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
47  
Installing Optional Accessory  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
49  
Installing the Optional 550-Sheet Feeder.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
49  
Updating Your Driver to Detect 550-Sheet Feeder.  
53  
7
Connecting and Setting Up Your Printer  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
57  
58  
Turning on the Printer  
Configuring Initial Settings on the Operator Panel  
Connecting to a Computer or a Network  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
58  
.
.
.
.
.
.
65  
65  
66  
66  
Connecting to a Computer Using the USB Cable (Direct Connection)  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Connecting to a Network Using the Ethernet Cable.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Connecting to a Wireless Network  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Connecting to the Telephone Line  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
66  
Setting Up the Printer Using Dell Printer Easy Install (Windows® Only)  
Basic Setup  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
68  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
68  
To set up the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw as a wireless printer  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
68  
68  
68  
70  
To set up the printer as a network (wired) printer.  
To set up the printer as a USB printer  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Setting Up the Printer in Another Connection Method  
Configuring the Wireless Settings  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
71  
71  
72  
74  
77  
Determining the Wireless Network Settings  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Configuring the Wireless Settings Using Dell Printer Easy Install  
Configuring the Wireless Settings Without Using Dell Printer Easy Install  
Reconfiguring the Wireless Settings  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
8
Setting the IP Address  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
79  
Assigning an IP Address  
.
.
.
79  
79  
80  
81  
When Using the Dell Printer Easy Install  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
When Using the Operator Panel.  
.
.
.
.
When Using the Tool Box  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Verifying the IP Settings  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
81  
Verifying the Settings Using Operator Panel  
81  
4
Contents  
Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007  
Verifying the Settings Using System Settings Report  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
82  
82  
Verifying the Settings Using Ping Command  
.
.
.
.
9
Loading Paper  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
83  
87  
®
10 Installing Printer Drivers on Windows Computers  
.
.
.
.
.
Identifying Printer Driver Pre-install Status  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
87  
Changing the firewall settings before installing your printer  
87  
Starting Dell Printer Easy Install  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
87  
88  
92  
USB Cable Connection Setup  
.
.
.
Network Connection Setup  
.
Setting Up for Shared Printing  
97  
97  
99  
Enabling Shared Printing from the Computer  
Checking the Shared Printer  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
11 Installing Printer Drivers on Macintosh Computers  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
101  
Installing the Drivers and Software  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
101  
Adding a Printer on Mac OS X 10.5, Mac OS X 10.6, Mac OS X 10.7, OS X 10.8,  
OS X 10.9, or OS X 10.10  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
101  
103  
Configuring Settings.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
12 Installing Printer Drivers on Linux Computers (CUPS)  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
105  
Operation on Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 Desktop.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
105  
105  
105  
105  
106  
106  
106  
Setup Overview  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Installing the Printer Driver  
Setting Up the Queue  
.
.
.
.
Setting the Default Queue  
Specifying the Printing Options  
Uninstalling the Printer Driver.  
Operation on SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 11  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
107  
107  
107  
108  
109  
109  
110  
Setup Overview  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Installing the Printer Driver  
Setting Up the Queue  
.
.
.
.
Setting the Default Queue  
Specifying the Printing Options  
Setting the Password for Authority as the Printer Administrator.  
Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007  
Contents  
5
Uninstalling the Printer Driver  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
110  
Operation on Ubuntu 12.04 LTS  
Setup Overview  
.
.
.
110  
110  
110  
111  
112  
112  
112  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Installing the Printer Driver  
Setting Up the Queue  
.
.
.
Setting the Default Queue  
.
Specifying the Printing Options  
Uninstalling the Printer Driver  
.
Using Your Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113  
13 Operator Panel  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
115  
About the Operator Panel  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
115  
115  
115  
Dell™ Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw  
Dell Smart Multifunction Printer | S2815dn  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Basic Operations on the Touch Panel  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
117  
117  
117  
To Select the Item on the Screen  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
To Scroll the Screen or the Listed Items.  
About the Home Screen.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
118  
118  
118  
119  
119  
119  
119  
119  
119  
119  
Dock Menu.  
Notification Bar  
Lock Icon.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Envelope Mode Icon  
Wi-Fi Direct Connection Status Icon  
Wireless LAN Connection Status Icon  
Time/Network Information  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Account Name  
Tiles  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Moving, Adding or Deleting the Tiles  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
120  
120  
120  
120  
To Move the Tiles  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
To Add the Tiles  
.
To Delete the Tiles  
Using the Keyboard Displayed on the Touch Panel  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
121  
To Change the Keyboard Layout  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
121  
Using the Number Pad  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
122  
122  
122  
122  
Number Pad Numbers  
Changing Numbers  
Inserting a Pause  
.
.
.
6
Contents  
Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007  
Printing a Panel Settings Report  
Changing the Language  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
122  
.
.
.
.
123  
123  
123  
When Using the Operator Panel  
When Using the Tool Box .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Setting the Power Saver Timer Option  
About the Concurrent Jobs Feature  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
123  
124  
.
14 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
125  
Overview  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
125  
Setting Up the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
126  
126  
126  
Setting Up From Web Browser  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Setting Up From Operator Panel  
Starting the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
127  
Overview of the Menu Items  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
127  
127  
127  
127  
127  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
Printer Status  
Printer Jobs  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Printer Settings  
Print Server Settings  
Copy Printer Settings  
Print Volume  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Address Book  
.
.
.
Printer Information  
Tray Management  
.
E-Mail Server Settings Overview  
Set Password  
Online Help  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Order Supplies at:  
Contact Dell Support at:  
Dell Document Hub at:  
Page Display Format  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
129  
129  
130  
130  
Top Frame  
Left Frame  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Right Frame  
Changing the Settings of the Menu Items  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
131  
131  
134  
135  
136  
152  
Details of the Menu Items  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Printer Status  
Printer Jobs  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Printer Settings  
Print Server Settings  
Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007  
Contents  
7
Copy Printer Settings  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
171  
171  
172  
179  
Print Volume  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Address Book  
.
.
Tray Management  
15 Understanding the Printer Menus  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
181  
Report / List  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
181  
181  
181  
181  
181  
181  
181  
181  
181  
182  
182  
182  
182  
182  
182  
182  
182  
182  
183  
183  
System Settings  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Panel Settings  
PCL Fonts List  
.
.
PCL Macros List  
PS Fonts List  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
PDF Fonts List  
Job History  
Error History  
Print Meter  
Demo Page.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
Protocol Monitor  
Speed Dial  
.
.
.
Address Book  
.
Server Address  
Fax Activity.  
.
.
Fax Pending  
.
.
Stored Documents  
Printing a Report/List Using the Operator Panel  
Printing a Report/List Using the Tool Box  
.
.
.
.
Wi-Fi | WPS  
Wi-Fi  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
183  
183  
183  
183  
183  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Wi-Fi Direct  
WPS (Connect via PBC)  
WPS (Connect via PIN)  
Paired Device  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
184  
Admin Settings  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
184  
184  
184  
191  
192  
194  
201  
209  
220  
224  
Phone Book  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
PCL  
PS  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
PDF  
Network  
Fax Settings  
System Settings  
Maintenance.  
Secure Settings  
.
8
Contents  
Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007  
USB Settings  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
228  
Default Settings.  
.
229  
229  
229  
229  
Copy Defaults  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Fax Defaults  
.
Scan Defaults  
Direct Print Defaults (available on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer |  
H815dw only) USB Direct Print Defaults (available on the Dell Smart  
Multifunction Printer | S2815dn only)  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
230  
Tray Management.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
230  
230  
236  
Tray Settings.  
Tray Priority  
.
Language Settings  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
236  
236  
237  
Panel Language  
Keyboard Layout.  
Print  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
237  
237  
238  
238  
238  
239  
239  
Private Mailbox  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Public Mailbox.  
Proof Print  
.
.
.
Secure Print  
.
.
Secure Fax Receive  
Tile Settings  
.
.
.
.
Copy  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
239  
239  
239  
240  
241  
241  
242  
242  
243  
243  
243  
244  
244  
244  
Quantity  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Darken / Lighten  
Select Tray.  
2 Sided Copying  
Sharpness  
Reduce/Enlarge  
.
.
.
.
.
Original Size  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Original Type.  
Collation  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2-Up  
.
.
Margin  
.
Auto Exposure  
Save Settings  
ID Copy  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
244  
Save Settings  
244  
Scan  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
245  
245  
245  
245  
Scan to Email  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Scan to Network Folder  
Scan to USB  
.
.
.
.
.
.
Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007  
Contents  
9
Scan to Computer  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
245  
246  
249  
Scan Settings  
Save Settings  
.
.
.
.
Fax  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
250  
250  
251  
Fax Settings  
Save Settings  
Print PDF/TIFF  
Print JPEG  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
252  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
252  
252  
254  
Print Settings.  
Save Settings  
Dell Document Hub  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
254  
254  
255  
255  
256  
258  
259  
Search for Files  
Browse for Files  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Scan  
Smart OCR Scan  
E-mail Me  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Business Card Reader  
SharePoint  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
259  
259  
260  
260  
Print  
Scan  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
File Name Option.  
Add Apps  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
260  
Panel Lock  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
260  
260  
261  
Enabling the Panel Lock  
Disabling the Panel Lock  
Resetting Defaults  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
261  
When Using the Operator Panel.  
262  
16 Print Media Guidelines  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
263  
Paper  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
263  
263  
263  
264  
264  
264  
Recommended Paper  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Unacceptable Paper  
Selecting Paper  
.
.
.
.
Selecting Pre-Printed Media and Letterheads  
Selecting Pre-Punched Paper  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Envelopes  
Labels  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
265  
266  
.
.
10  
Contents  
Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007  
Storing Print Media.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
266  
Identifying Print Media and Specifications  
267  
267  
268  
268  
Supported Paper Sizes  
Supported Paper Types  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Paper Type Specifications  
17 Loading Print Media  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
269  
269  
Capacity.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Print Media Dimensions  
269  
Loading Print Media in Tray1 and the Optional 550-Sheet Feeder  
Loading Letterhead (Pre-Printed and Pre-Punched Paper)  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
270  
.
270  
Loading Print Media in the MPF  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
271  
Loading Small Print Media in the MPF  
272  
Printing on Envelopes – Envelope Mode.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
275  
275  
276  
278  
278  
279  
279  
279  
To Set the Printer to the Envelope Mode  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
To Cancel the Envelope Mode.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Loading Envelopes in the MPF  
Envelope #10, DL.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Monarch  
C5  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Loading Letterhead in the MPF  
Using the MPF  
Linking Trays  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
280  
280  
.
Printing, Copying, Scanning, Faxing, and Dell Document  
Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281  
18 Printing  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
283  
Tips for Successful Printing  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
283  
283  
283  
Tips on Storing Print Media  
Avoiding Paper Jams  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Sending a Job to Print  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
283  
Canceling a Print Job.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
284  
Canceling a Job From the Operator Panel  
284  
Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007  
Contents  
11  
Canceling a Job From a Computer Running Windows® Operating System  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
284  
Duplex Printing  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
285  
285  
285  
Duplex Printing With Duplex Unit  
Using Booklet Print  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Using the Stored Print Feature  
Overview  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
286  
286  
288  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Procedures for Printing Stored Print  
Printing from USB Memory (USB Direct Print)  
Supported File Formats  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
289  
290  
290  
290  
291  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Inserting and Removing a USB Memory  
Printing a PDF/TIFF File in a USB Memory  
Printing a JPEG File in a USB Memory  
.
.
Printing With Web Services on Devices (WSD)  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
291  
291  
292  
292  
Adding Roles of Printer Services  
Printer Setup  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Installing a Printer Driver Using the Add Printer Wizard  
Printing With Wi-Fi Direct  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
293  
293  
295  
296  
296  
296  
Setting Up Wi-Fi Direct  
Printing via Wi-Fi Direct  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Disconnecting Wi-Fi Direct Network  
Resetting the Passphrase  
Resetting the PIN  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Mobile Printing and Scanning  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
297  
297  
297  
Android OS  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Apple iOS.  
Printing With AirPrint  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
298  
298  
298  
Setting Up AirPrint on Your Printer  
Printing via AirPrint  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Printing With Google Cloud Print.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
298  
298  
299  
299  
300  
301  
301  
301  
Preparing to Use the Printer with Google Cloud Print.  
Enabling Google Cloud Print on the Printer .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Selecting the Version of the Google Cloud Print Service  
Registering the Printer to the Google Cloud Print Service  
Sharing the Printer Using the Google Cloud Print Service  
Canceling Registration to Google Cloud Print  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Printing via Google Cloud Print  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Mopria Print Service  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
302  
Setting Up Mopria Print Service on Your Printer  
302  
12  
Contents  
Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007  
Printing via Mopria Print Service  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
303  
Printing a Report Page  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
303  
Printer Settings  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
303  
Using the Operator Panel to Change the Printer Settings  
303  
Using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool to Change the Printer Settings  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
303  
19 Copying  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
305  
305  
305  
305  
306  
307  
Loading Paper for Copying  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Selecting Paper Tray  
.
.
.
.
.
Preparing a Document  
Making Copies From the Document Glass  
Making Copies From the DADF.  
.
.
.
.
.
Setting Copy Options  
Quantity  
Darken / Lighten  
Select Tray.  
2 Sided Copying  
Sharpness  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
308  
308  
308  
309  
309  
310  
310  
311  
311  
312  
313  
314  
314  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Reduce / Enlarge  
Original Size  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Original Type.  
Collation  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2-Up  
.
.
Margin  
.
Auto Exposure  
Using the ID Copy.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
314  
315  
Changing the Default Settings  
20 Scanning  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
317  
Scanning Overview.  
.
317  
317  
317  
318  
Tips for Easy Network Scanning  
Scanning - With scanner driver  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Scanning - Without scanner driver  
Scanning to a Computer With a USB Connection  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
318  
Changing the Location to Save the Scanned Data  
319  
Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007  
Contents  
13  
Scanning to a Computer Connected With Web Services on Devices (WSD)  
Preparations for Scanning Using Web Services on Devices (WSD)  
.
.
.
.
.
.
319  
.
.
319  
Scanning and Sending Images to the Computer Using Web Services on  
Devices (WSD)  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
319  
Scanning From a Computer Using Web Services on Devices (WSD)  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
320  
320  
321  
Preparations for scanning from the computer  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Scanning from the computer  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Scanning Using the TWAIN Driver  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
322  
324  
Scanning Using the Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) Driver  
Scanning With Wi-Fi Direct  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
325  
Scanning via Wi-Fi Direct  
325  
Scanning to a PC or Server via SMB/FTP  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
326  
326  
327  
327  
329  
331  
336  
Overview  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Procedures.  
Setting a Login Name and a Password (SMB Only)  
Creating a Shared Folder (SMB Only)  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Adding a Scanning Destination to the Printer's Address Book  
Sending the Scanned File on the Network Folder.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
Scanning to a USB Memory  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
337  
337  
337  
337  
Types of a USB Memory  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Procedures.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
Specifying a Folder to Save the Scanned Image  
Sending an E-Mail With the Scanned Image.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
338  
338  
338  
339  
340  
341  
341  
Preparing the Printer to Send the E-Mail  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Setting the DNS Server Address  
.
.
.
.
Setting the Information Necessary to Access the Mail Server  
Setting the Administrator's E-mail Address  
Adding a New E-Mail Address to the Printer's Address Book  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Sending an E-mail With the Scanned File  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Managing the Scanner  
Port Settings  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
342  
342  
343  
343  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Search Criteria Dialog Box (Windows® only)  
Password Setting  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
21 Faxing  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
345  
345  
Specifying the Fax Initial Settings Using the Dell Printer Easy Install  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Setting Your Country  
Setting the Printer ID  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
346  
346  
14  
Contents  
Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007  
Setting the Time and Date  
Changing the Clock Mode  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
347  
347  
Setting Sounds  
Speaker Volume  
Ringer Volume  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
347  
347  
348  
.
Specifying the Fax Settings Options  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
348  
348  
348  
352  
Changing the Fax Settings Options  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Available Fax Settings Options  
.
.
Advanced Fax Settings  
.
.
.
.
.
.
Sending a Fax.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
354  
354  
355  
356  
356  
357  
357  
357  
Loading an Original Document  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Adjusting the Document Resolution.  
Adjusting the Document Contrast  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Sending a Fax From Memory  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Sending a Fax Manually  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Confirming Transmissions  
Automatic Redialing  
Sending a Delayed Fax  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
358  
Sending a Fax from the Driver (Direct Fax)  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
358  
Example  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
358  
Receiving a Fax.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
363  
363  
363  
363  
363  
About Receiving Modes  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Loading Paper for Receiving Faxes  
Receiving a Fax Automatically in the Fax Mode  
Receiving a Fax Manually in the Telephone Mode  
Receiving a Fax Automatically in the Telephone / Fax or Ans Machine/Fax  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
364  
Receiving a Fax Manually Using an External Telephone (Remote Receive)  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
364  
364  
365  
365  
Receiving Faxes Using the DRPD  
Receiving Faxes in the Memory  
.
Polling Receive  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Automatic Dialing  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
365  
365  
365  
366  
366  
366  
367  
367  
Speed Dialing  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Setting Speed Dial.  
Sending a Fax Using Speed Dial  
Group Dialing  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Setting Group Dial  
Editing Group Dial  
Sending a Fax Using Group Dial (Multi-address Transmission)  
Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007  
Contents  
15  
Printing a Speed Dial List  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
367  
Phone Book  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
368  
Other Ways to Fax.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
368  
368  
369  
370  
Using the Secure Receiving Mode  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Using an Answering Machine  
.
.
.
Using a Computer Modem  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Printing a Report  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
370  
370  
Changing Setting Options.  
22 Dell Document Hub  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
371  
Registering the User and Signing In to the Dell Document Hub  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
371  
371  
372  
Registering a New User to the Dell Document Hub  
Signing In to the Dell Document Hub  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
When the Favorite List Screen is Displayed When You Tap the Tile on the Dell  
Document Hub Screen.  
Returning to the Home Screen  
Logging Out From the Printer  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
372  
372  
372  
.
Searching for and Printing Files  
Browsing and Printing Files  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
373  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
374  
Searching for the Files in the Selected Cloud Service  
375  
Scanning  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
375  
376  
376  
Searching for the Location Across the Cloud Services  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Searching for the Location in the Selected Cloud Service  
Scanning the Document Using Optical Character Recognition (OCR).  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
377  
378  
379  
Receiving the Scanned File as an E-Mail  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Receiving the Scanned Image of the Business Card as an E-Mail  
®
23 Printing and Scanning Directly From SharePoint  
.
.
.
.
.
381  
Registering the SharePoint® Server  
Editing the Server URL List.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
381  
.
.
.
382  
Signing In to the SharePoint® Server  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
382  
Returning to the Home Screen  
.
.
.
382  
Browsing and Printing Files  
Scanning  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
383  
383  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
16  
Contents  
Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007  
Know Your Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385  
24 Understanding Your Printer Software  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
387  
Overview  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
387  
Dell Printer Hub/Dell Printer Management Tool (for Microsoft® Windows®)  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
388  
388  
Printer Status Window (for OS X and Linux).  
.
.
Status Monitor Widget (for OS X)  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
389  
389  
389  
390  
390  
390  
392  
393  
Status Monitor Widget Feature  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Before Installing the Status Monitor Widget  
Installing the Status Monitor Widget  
.
.
.
.
Opening and Closing the Status Monitor Widget  
Printer Status Window  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Order Window  
Preferences  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Status Monitor Console (for Linux).  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
394  
394  
394  
394  
395  
395  
396  
397  
398  
398  
Status Monitor Console Feature  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Before Installing the Status Monitor Console.  
Installing the Status Monitor Console.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Starting the Status Monitor Console  
.
.
.
Printer Selection Window  
Printer Status Window  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Dell Supplies Management System Window  
Service Tag Window  
Settings Window  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Tool Box (for Microsoft® Windows®)  
To start the Tool Box  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
399  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
399  
Address Book Editor (for Microsoft® Windows® and OS X)  
Types of Address Books.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
399  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
399  
Adding and Editing Entries to the Address Books Using the Address Book  
Editor  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
400  
402  
402  
ScanButton Manager (for OS X)  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
User Setup Disk Creating Tool (for Microsoft® Windows®)  
App Manager (for Microsoft® Windows®)  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
403  
403  
403  
Preparing to use the App Manager  
Starting the App Manager.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007  
Contents  
17  
25 User Authentication  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
405  
Creating and Editing the User Accounts  
.
405  
405  
406  
406  
Creating a New User Account.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Editing the User Account  
.
.
.
Deleting the User Account.  
.
.
Logging In to the User Account on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
406  
406  
407  
407  
Logging In Using the Touch Panel  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Logging In Using the NFC Authentication Card  
Logging Out  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Logging In to the User Account on the Dell Smart Multifunction Printer | S2815dn  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
407  
407  
407  
407  
408  
408  
Specifying the User Authentication Method  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Preparations for Remote Authentication  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Logging In for Remote Authentication.  
.
.
.
Logging In for Local Authentication  
.
.
Logging Out  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
26 Tile Customization  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
409  
Adding a New Tile  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
409  
409  
409  
Selecting From the Pre-defined Tiles  
Creating a New Tile Including the Job Settings  
27 Using the Server Address Book and Server Phone Book  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
411  
Preparing the Printer to Access the External LDAP Server  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
411  
411  
411  
412  
413  
Starting the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Setting Authentication Type  
Setting LDAP Server  
Setting LDAP User Mapping  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Sending an E-mail With the Scanned File Using the E-mail Server Address Book  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
414  
414  
Sending a Fax Using the Fax Server Phone Book  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
28 Using Digital Certificates  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
415  
Managing Certificates  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
415  
415  
416  
Preparing to Manage Certificates  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Creating and Downloading a Certificate Signing Request (CSR)  
18  
Contents  
Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007  
Importing a Digital Certificate  
Setting a Digital Certificate  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
416  
417  
418  
418  
419  
.
Confirming the Settings of a Digital Certificate  
Deleting a Digital Certificate  
Exporting a Digital Certificate  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Setting the Features  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
419  
420  
420  
420  
420  
Setting the SSL/TLS-use Server Certificate (HTTP/IPP)  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Setting SMTP-SSL/TLS Communication  
Setting LDAP-SSL/TLS Communication  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Setting for Wireless LAN WPA-Enterprise (EAP-TLS)  
Setting for Wireless LAN WPA-Enterprise (PEAPV0-MS-CHAPV2,  
EAP-TTLS PAP, EAP-TTLS CHAP)  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
422  
29 Understanding Printer Messages  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
425  
425  
Status Codes  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Error Messages  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
432  
30 Specifications  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
435  
435  
435  
435  
435  
Operating System Compatibility  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Power Supply  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Dimensions  
Memory  
.
.
.
.
Page Description Language (PDL)/Emulation, Operating System, and Interface  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
436  
MIB Compatibility  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
436  
Environment.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
436  
436  
436  
436  
436  
Operation  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Print Quality Guarantee  
Storage  
Altitude  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Cables.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
437  
437  
438  
438  
439  
Print Specifications  
Copy Specifications  
Scanner Specifications  
Facsimile Specifications  
Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007  
Contents  
19  
Wireless Connection Specifications  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
439  
Maintaining Your Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441  
31 Maintaining Your Printer  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
443  
443  
Determining the Status of Supplies  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Conserving Supplies  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
443  
Ordering Supplies.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
443  
443  
443  
444  
444  
Using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
Using Dell Printer Hub or Dell Printer Management Tool for Windows®  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
For OS X  
For Linux  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Storing Print Media  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
444  
444  
Storing Consumables  
Replacing the Toner Cartridge  
445  
445  
446  
Removing the Toner Cartridge  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Installing a Toner Cartridge  
.
Replacing the Drum Cartridge  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
448  
448  
449  
Removing the Drum Cartridge  
Installing a Drum Cartridge  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Replacing the Fusing Unit, the Transfer Unit, and the Retard Roller  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
452  
452  
453  
454  
454  
455  
456  
Removing the Fusing Unit  
Installing a Fusing Unit.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Removing the Transfer Unit  
Installing a Transfer Unit.  
.
Removing the Retard Roller in Tray1.  
Installing a Retard Roller in Tray1  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Cleaning the Scanner  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
458  
459  
459  
462  
464  
Cleaning the DADF Feed Roller  
Cleaning Inside the Printer  
Moving the Printer  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Removing the Optional 550-Sheet Feeder  
20  
Contents  
Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007  
32 Clearing Jams  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
469  
469  
Avoiding Jams  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Identifying the Location of Paper Jams  
Clearing Paper Jams From the DADF  
470  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
471  
471  
473  
If status code: 005-112, 005-121, or 005-900 appears:  
If status code: 005-110 appears:.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Clearing Paper Jams From the MPF  
Clearing Paper Jams From Tray1  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
473  
477  
.
.
Clearing Paper Jams From the Fusing Unit  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
480  
If status code: 050-130 appears:.  
.
.
.
480  
Clearing Paper Jams From the Duplexer  
If status code: 050-131 appears:.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
483  
.
.
483  
Clearing Paper Jams From the Regi Roll.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
484  
484  
487  
If status code: 050-142 appears:.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
If status code: 050-132 appears:.  
Clearing Paper Jams From the Optional 550-Sheet Feeder  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
491  
Clearing Paper Jams From the Trays.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
494  
494  
496  
If status code 050-134 appears:  
If status code 050-133 appears:  
.
.
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499  
33 Troubleshooting Guide  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
501  
501  
Basic Printer Problems.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Display Problems  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
501  
Printing Problems  
501  
Print Quality Problems  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
502  
503  
505  
506  
506  
508  
509  
510  
The output is too light  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Toner smears or print comes off  
Random spots/Blurred images  
.
The entire output is blank  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Streaks appear on the output  
Pitched dots  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Vertical blanks.  
Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007  
Contents  
21  
Mottle  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
511  
512  
513  
513  
514  
515  
516  
516  
517  
517  
Ghosting  
Light-induced fatigue  
Fog  
Bead-Carry-Out (BCO)  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Jagged characters.  
.
.
.
Banding  
.
.
.
.
.
.
Auger mark.  
.
.
.
.
Wrinkled/Stained paper  
Damage on the leading edge of paper  
Jam/Alignment Problems  
The top and side margins are incorrect  
Images are skewed  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
518  
518  
519  
519  
520  
521  
521  
521  
522  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Tray1/Optional 550-Sheet Feeder Misfeed Jam  
MPF Misfeed Jam  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Regi Jam (Exit Sensor On JAM)  
Exit Jam (Exit Sensor Off JAM)  
Tray1/Optional 550-Sheet Feeder Multi-feed Jam.  
MPF Multi-feed Jam  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Noise  
Copy Problems  
Fax Problems  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
522  
523  
523  
525  
527  
528  
528  
529  
529  
529  
.
Scanning Problems  
Digital Certificate Problems  
Problems With Installed Optional Accessory  
Wi-Fi Direct Problems  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Scanner Driver/Printer Utility Problems  
Other Problems  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Contacting Service  
Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531  
Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533  
Dell™ Technical Support Policy  
Online Services  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
533  
.
.
.
.
.
.
533  
22  
Contents  
Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007  
Warranty and Return Policy  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
533  
Recycling Information  
.
533  
Contacting Dell  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
533  
534  
535  
New Zealand PTC200 Warnings  
USA/Canada Wi-Fi Warnings  
.
Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007  
Contents  
23  
24  
Contents  
Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007  
Before Beginning  
Notes, Cautions, and Warnings..................................................... 27  
1 Dell™ Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw  
Dell™ Smart Multifunction Printer | S2815dn  
User's Guide................................................................................. 31  
2 Finding Information..................................................................... 33  
3 Product Features......................................................................... 35  
4 About the Printer......................................................................... 39  
25  
 
26  
Notes, Cautions, and Warnings  
NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your printer.  
CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates potential damage to hardware or loss of data if instructions are not followed.  
WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death.  
Information in this document is subject to change without notice.  
© 2015 Dell Inc. All rights reserved.  
Reproduction of these materials in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden.  
Trademarks used in this text: Dell and the DELL logo are trademarks of Dell Inc.; Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, Windows Vista, and  
Active Directory are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries; Apple,  
Bonjour, Macintosh, Mac OS, and OS X are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are  
trademarks of Apple Inc.; Android, Google Chrome, Gmail, Google, Google Cloud Print, Google Drive, and Google Play are either registered  
trademarks or trademarks of Google Inc.; Adobe, PostScript and Photoshop are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems  
Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries; Wi-Fi and Wi-Fi Direct are registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance; Wi-Fi  
Protected Setup, WPA, and WPA2 are trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance; Red Hat and Red Hat Enterprise Linux are registered trademarks of Red  
Hat. Inc. in the U.S. and other countries; SUSE is a registered trademark of Novell, Inc., in the United States and other countries; MIFARE is a  
trademark of NXP Semiconductors; Thinxtream is a trademark of Thinxtream Technologies Pte. Ltd.; QR Code is a registered trademark of  
Denso Wave Incorporated; Dropbox is a trademark or registered trademark of Dropbox Inc.; Box and the Box logo are including without  
limitation, either trademarks, service marks or registered trademarks of Box, Inc.; RSA and BSAFE are either registered trademarks or trademarks  
of EMC Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.; Mopria is a trademark of the Mopria Alliance.  
Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products.  
Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own.  
About License  
XML Paper Specification (XPS): This product may incorporate intellectual property owned by Microsoft Corporation. The terms and conditions  
upon which Microsoft is licensing such intellectual property may be found at http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=52369; DES: This product  
includes software developed by Eric Young ([email protected]); AES: Copyright (c) 2003, Dr Brian Gladman, Worcester, UK. All rights  
reserved. This product uses published AES software provided by Dr Brian Gladman under BSD licensing terms; ICC Profile (Little cms):  
Copyright (c) 1998-2004 Marti Maria.  
As for RSA BSAFE  
®
®
This printer includes RSA BSAFE Cryptographic software from EMC Corporation.  
ICC Profile Header  
Copyright (c) 1994-1996 SunSoft, Inc.  
Rights Reserved  
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"),  
to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish distribute, sublicense,  
and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:  
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.  
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT  
LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. IN  
NO EVENT SHALL SUNSOFT, INC. OR ITS PARENT COMPANY BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,  
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE  
SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.  
Notes, Cautions, and Warnings  
27  
       
Except as contained in this notice, the name of SunSoft, Inc. shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other  
dealings in this Software without written authorization from SunSoft Inc.  
JPEG Library  
Independent JPEG Group's free JPEG software  
-------------------------------------------  
This package contains C software to implement JPEG image encoding, decoding, and transcoding. JPEG is a standardized compression method  
for full-color and gray-scale images.  
The distributed programs provide conversion between JPEG "JFIF" format and image files in PBMPLUS PPM/PGM, GIF, BMP, and Targa file  
formats. The core compression and decompression library can easily be reused in other programs, such as image viewers. The package is highly  
portable C code; we have tested it on many machines ranging from PCs to Crays.  
We are releasing this software for both noncommercial and commercial use. Companies are welcome to use it as the basis for JPEG-related  
products. We do not ask a royalty, although we do ask for an acknowledgement in product literature (see the README file in the distribution for  
details). We hope to make this software industrial-quality --- although, as with anything that's free, we offer no warranty and accept no liability.  
For more information, contact [email protected].  
Contents of this directory  
-------------------------------------------  
jpegsrc.vN.tar.gz contains source code, documentation, and test files for release N in Unix format.  
jpegsrN.zip contains source code, documentation, and test files for release N in Windows format.  
jpegaltui.vN.tar.gz contains source code for an alternate user interface for cjpeg/djpeg in Unix format.  
jpegaltuiN.zip contains source code for an alternate user interface for cjpeg/djpeg in Windows format.  
wallace.ps.gz is a PostScript file of Greg Wallace's introductory article about JPEG. This is an update of the article that appeared in the April 1991  
Communications of the ACM.  
jpeg.documents.gz tells where to obtain the JPEG standard and documents about JPEG-related file formats.  
jfif.ps.gz is a PostScript file of the JFIF (JPEG File Interchange Format) format specification.  
jfif.txt.gz is a plain text transcription of the JFIF specification; it's missing a figure, so use the PostScript version if you can.  
TIFFTechNote2.txt.gz is a draft of the proposed revisions to TIFF 6.0's JPEG support.  
pm.errata.gz is the errata list for the first printing of the textbook "JPEG Still Image Data Compression Standard" by Pennebaker and Mitchell.  
jdosaobj.zip contains pre-assembled object files for JMEMDOSA.ASM. If you want to compile the IJG code for MS-DOS, but don't have an  
assembler, these files may be helpful.  
Math Library  
Copyright (C) 1993 by Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Developed at SunPro, a Sun Microsystems, Inc. business.  
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software is freely granted, provided that this notice is preserved.  
====================================================  
copysignf.c: * Copyright (C) 1993 by Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.  
math_private.h: * Copyright (C) 1993 by Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.  
powf.c: * Copyright (C) 1993 by Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.  
scalbnf.c: * Copyright (C) 1993 by Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.  
libtiff  
Copyright (c) 1988-1997 Sam Leffler  
Copyright (c) 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc.  
28  
Notes, Cautions, and Warnings  
     
Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided  
that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names  
of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written  
permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics.  
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS-IS" AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR OTHERWISE,  
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  
IN NO EVENT SHALL SAM LEFFLER OR SILICON GRAPHICS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT OR  
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR  
PROFITS, WHETHER OR NOT ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF DAMAGE, AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, ARISING OUT  
OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.  
Zlib  
zlib.h -- interface of the 'zlib' general purpose compression library version 1.2.8, April 28th, 2013  
Copyright (C) 1995-2013 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler  
This software is provided 'as-is', without any express or implied warranty. In no event will the authors be held liable for any damages arising from  
the use of this software.  
Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, including commercial applications, and to alter it and redistribute it freely,  
subject to the following restrictions:  
1. The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not claim that you wrote the original software. If you use this software in a  
product, an acknowledgment in the product documentation would be appreciated but is not required.  
2. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be misrepresented as being the original software.  
3. This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution.  
Jean-loup Gailly  
[email protected]  
Mark Adler  
[email protected]  
____________________  
UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS  
This software and documentation are provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS. Use, duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to  
restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 and in  
applicable FAR provisions: Dell Inc., One Dell Way, Round Rock, Texas, 78682, USA.  
October 2015 Rev. A00  
Notes, Cautions, and Warnings  
29  
 
30  
Notes, Cautions, and Warnings  
1
Dell™ Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw  
Dell™ Smart Multifunction Printer | S2815dn  
User's Guide  
Click the links to the left for information on the features, options, and operation of your Dell Cloud Multifunction  
Printer | H815dw and Dell Smart Multifunction Printer | S2815dn. For information on other documentation  
included with your printer, see "Finding Information."  
NOTE: In this manual, Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw and Dell Smart Multifunction Printer | S2815dn are referred to as  
the "printer."  
NOTE: In this manual, the procedures for the computer are explained using Microsoft® Windows® 7 unless stated otherwise.  
Conventions  
The following describe the meaning of the symbols and fonts used in this manual:  
Bold texts  
:
• Names of hardware button on the operator panel.  
• Screen names on the touch panel.  
• Menus, commands, windows, or dialog boxes displayed on the computer screen.  
Texts in Courier Newfont : • Menus and messages displayed on the touch panel.  
• Characters entered from the computer.  
• Directory paths.  
<
"
>
"
:
:
:
• Key on the keyboard of the computer.  
• Indicates a path to a certain item within a procedure on a computer.  
• Cross references in this manual.  
• Characters entered from the operator panel.  
• Messages displayed on the computer screen.  
Dell™ Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw Dell™ Smart Multifunction Printer | S2815dn User's Guide  
31  
     
32  
Dell™ Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw Dell™ Smart Multifunction Printer | S2815dn User's Guide  
2
Finding Information  
NOTE: The images used in this manual are those of the Dell™ Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw unless otherwise mentioned.  
What are you looking for?  
• Drivers for my printer  
• My User's Guide  
Find it here  
Software and Documentation disc  
The Software and Documentation disc contains setup video, documentation,  
and drivers for your printer. You can use the Software and Documentation disc to  
install drivers or access your setup video and documentation.  
Readme files may be included on your Software and Documentation disc to  
provide last-minute updates about technical changes to your printer or advanced  
technical reference material for experienced users or technicians.  
• How to set up my printer  
• How to use my printer  
• Safety information  
Setup Guide  
Important Information  
• Warranty information  
WARNING: Read and follow all safety instructions in the Important  
Information prior to setting up and operating your printer.  
• Express Service Code and Service Tag  
Service Tag  
ABCD123  
Express Service Code  
01234567890  
The Express Service Code and Service Tag are located inside the front cover of  
your printer.  
• Latest drivers for my printer  
• Documentation for my printer  
Go to dell.com/support.  
Finding Information  
33  
     
What are you looking for?  
Find it here  
• Answers to technical service and support  
questions  
dell.com/support provides several online tools, including:  
• Solutions — Troubleshooting hints and tips, articles from technicians, and  
online courses  
• Upgrades — Upgrade information for components, such as the printer drivers  
• Customer Care — Contact information, order status, warranty, and repair  
information  
• Downloads — Drivers  
• Manuals— Printer documentation and product specifications  
Go to dell.com/support. Select your region, and fill in the requested details to  
access help tools and information.  
34  
Finding Information  
3
Product Features  
This chapter describes the product features and indicates their links.  
Dell Document Hub App  
Dell Printer Hub  
(Dell™ Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw only)  
Dell Printer Hub is a program that monitors and informs  
you of the printer status and allows you to customize the  
printer settings. The program also notifies you of the  
firmware/software updates. For convenient use, you can  
access the Dell Document Hub from the Dell Printer Hub.  
The Dell Printer Hub is included on your Software and  
Documentation disc and is installed with the manuals,  
drivers, and software for the printer. For more information,  
Easily access and share documents, images and digital  
content with the Dell Document Hub app. This innovative  
cloud collaboration solution connects your printer and  
devices to popular cloud services, providing a flexible and  
secure way to collaborate from virtually anywhere. Using  
your computer or mobile device, you can search file across  
multiple cloud services simultaneously to print documents  
or you can scan documents directly to the cloud using the  
app. Visit Windows Store, Google Play™ store, and App  
Store to download the apps. For more information about  
using the Dell Document Hub, see the FAQs in  
open the program and click  
window to see the FAQs.  
on the top right of the main  
Dell.com/documenthub.  
Dell Printer Management Tool  
(Dell Smart Multifunction Printer | S2815dn only)  
Converting and storing with Dell Document Hub  
(Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw Only)  
Dell Printer Management Tool is a program that monitors  
and informs you of the printer status and allows you to  
customize the printer settings. The program also notifies  
you of the firmware/software updates. The Dell Printer  
Management Tool is included on your Software and  
Documentation disc and is installed with the manuals,  
drivers, and software for the printer. For more information,  
You can scan hard copy documents and store them directly  
in your preferred cloud storage service with the Dell  
Document Hub. You can also convert hard copy  
documents into editable digital content before sending  
them to the cloud storage.  
open the program and click  
window to see the FAQs.  
on the top right of the main  
Product Features  
35  
   
Printing with Dell Document Hub  
Printing from USB Memory (USB Direct Print)  
(Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw Only)  
The USB Direct Print feature enables you to print files  
directly from a USB memory without requiring you to start  
your computer and an application.  
With the Dell Document Hub, you can easily locate and  
print documents stored in cloud storage. You can also  
search for files across multiple cloud storage services  
simultaneously.  
Printing With Web Services on Devices (WSD)  
Using the ID Copy (ID Copy)  
When the printer is connected to a computer via network  
using Web Services on Devices (WSD), you can print  
documents from the computer using the Web Services on  
Devices (WSD) Print function.  
You can copy both sides of an ID card on one side of a  
single sheet of paper in its original size by tapping ID  
Copyon the touch panel.  
Sending an E-Mail With the Scanned Image (Scan to Email)  
Scanning to a Computer Connected With Web Services on  
Devices (WSD)  
When you want to send scanned data by e-mail, use the  
Scan to Email feature. You can directly send the data  
scanned as an e-mail attachment. You can choose  
destination e-mail addresses from the address book on the  
printer or server. Or, you can enter the address from the  
touch panel on the printer's operator panel.  
When the printer is connected to a computer via network  
using Web Services on Devices (WSD), you can scan and  
send the images to a computer using the Web Services on  
Devices (WSD) Scan function.  
36  
Product Features  
Scanning to a PC or Server via SMB/FTP  
(Scan to Network Folder)  
Scanning to a USB Memory (Scan to USB)  
You can transfer data scanned to a PC or a server via SMB  
or FTP without service software. Although prior  
registration of the destination FTP server or PC on the  
address book is required, it helps save your time.  
With the Scan to USB feature, you don't need a PC to  
connect a USB memory. You can specify the USB memory  
inserted into the printer's port as a data saving location  
when you scan data.  
Making Copies From the Document Glass (Scan From  
Document Glass)  
Making Copies From the DADF (Scan From DADF)  
You can scan the pages of a book or a brochure from the  
document glass. When you scan documents using the  
document glass, place them facing down.  
You can scan pieces of unbound paper using the duplex  
automatic document feeder (DADF). When you scan  
documents using the DADF, load them facing up.  
Remote Authentication Using the LDAP or Kerberos Server  
(Dell Smart Multifunction Printer | S2815dn Only)  
Managing the documents with PaperPort  
(Dell Smart Multifunction Printer | S2815dn Only)  
You can organize, search, and share your scanned  
document using the bundled PaperPort software.  
The user authentication using the LDAP or Kerberos server  
is available to control the user’s login to the printer. Only  
users who can access the specified server are allowed to log  
in to the printer.  
Product Features  
37  
38  
Product Features  
4
About the Printer  
This chapter provides an overview of your printer.  
NOTE: The images used in this manual are those of the Dell™ Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw unless otherwise mentioned.  
Front and Rear Views  
Front View  
8
9
10  
1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
2
3
4
5
Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF)  
Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)  
Tray1  
6
7
8
9
Drum Cartridge  
Front Cover  
Front USB Port  
Operator Panel  
Optional 550-Sheet Feeder (Tray2)  
Toner Cartridge  
10 Output Tray Extension  
NOTE: Extend the output tray extension to prevent the printed paper from falling off the printer.  
NOTE: The operator panel can be flipped up until it clicks to make it easier to take out the printed paper or the drum cartridge.  
About the Printer  
39  
       
Rear View  
12  
1
2
3
11  
10  
9
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
Power Switch  
Ethernet Port  
USB Port  
7
8
9
Power Connector  
Chute  
Duplex Unit  
Phone Connector  
Wall Jack Connector  
"Blue" Plug  
10 Transfer Unit  
11 Fusing Unit  
12 Rear Cover  
40  
About the Printer  
 
Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF)  
6
1
3
2
5
4
1
2
3
DADF Cover  
4
5
6
Document Stopper  
Document Feeder Tray  
DADF Feed Roller  
Document Guides  
Document Glass  
NOTE: Pull out the document stopper to prevent the document from falling off the printer.  
About the Printer  
41  
 
Space Requirements  
Provide enough room to open the printer trays, covers, and optional accessories, and for proper ventilation.  
100 mm/  
3.94 inches  
732 mm/  
28.82 inches  
400 mm/15.75 inches  
400 mm/15.75 inches  
439 mm/17.28 inches  
100 mm/3.94 inches  
438 mm/17.24 inches  
600 mm/23.62 inches  
Operator Panel  
For more information on the operator panel, see "About the Operator Panel."  
42  
About the Printer  
   
Optional Accessory  
The optional 550-sheet feeder is available for the printer.  
To install the optional 550-sheet feeder, refer to the installation instruction that comes with the optional 550-sheet  
feeder.  
Securing the Printer  
To protect your printer from theft, you can use the optional Kensington lock.  
Attach the Kensington lock to the security slot on your printer.  
Security Slot  
Security Slot  
For details, see the operating instructions supplied with the Kensington lock.  
Ordering Supplies  
You can order consumables from Dell online when using a networked printer. Enter the IP address of your printer in  
your web browser, launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, and click the web address under Order Supplies  
at: to order toner or supplies for your printer.  
For details, see "Ordering Supplies."  
About the Printer  
43  
     
44  
About the Printer  
Setting Up the Printer (Printer  
Setup)  
5 Overview of the Printer Setup................................................... 47  
6 Installing Optional Accessory................................................... 49  
7 Connecting and Setting Up Your Printer ................................. 57  
8 Setting the IP Address ............................................................... 79  
9 Loading Paper.............................................................................. 83  
10 Installing Printer Drivers on Windows® Computers............. 87  
11 Installing Printer Drivers on Macintosh Computers............ 101  
12 Installing Printer Drivers on Linux Computers (CUPS) ...........105  
45  
 
46  
5
Overview of the Printer Setup  
The following are the procedures necessary to set up the printer.  
Hardware preparations  
"Installing Optional Accessory"  
"Turning on the Printer"  
Initial settings  
"Configuring Initial Settings on the Operator Panel"  
Connections  
"Connecting to a Computer or a Network"  
"Connecting to the Telephone Line"  
Printer setup  
"Setting Up the Printer Using Dell Printer Easy Install (Windows®  
Only)"  
"Installing Printer Drivers on Windows® Computers"  
"Installing Printer Drivers on Macintosh Computers"  
"Installing Printer Drivers on Linux Computers (CUPS)"  
Overview of the Printer Setup  
47  
 
48  
Overview of the Printer Setup  
6
Installing Optional Accessory  
This chapter describes how to install the optional 550-sheet feeder (tray2).  
NOTE: The images used in this manual are those of the Dell™ Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw unless otherwise mentioned.  
Installing the Optional 550-Sheet Feeder  
WARNING: If you install the optional 550-sheet feeder after setting up the printer, be sure to turn off the printer, unplug the  
power cable, and disconnect all cables from the rear of the printer before starting this task.  
NOTE: The Software and Documentation disc also contains video instructions. In the main menu window of Dell Printer Easy  
Install, click Installation Video.  
1
2
Ensure that the printer is turned off, and then disconnect all cables from the rear of the printer.  
Remove the tape and the bag holding the screws.  
NOTE: Save the screws as you will need them later.  
Place the optional 550-sheet feeder in the same location that the printer is located.  
Gently pull open the MPF cover.  
3
4
5
Grasp both sides of the MPF, and then pull the MPF from the printer.  
Installing Optional Accessory  
49  
       
6
Pull tray1 out of the printer about 200 mm.  
7
Hold tray1 with both hands, and remove it from the printer.  
50  
Installing Optional Accessory  
8
Lift the printer and align the five guide pins of the optional 550-sheet feeder with the holes at the bottom of the  
printer. Gently lower the printer onto the optional 550-sheet feeder.  
WARNING: Two people are required to lift the printer.  
WARNING: Be careful not to pinch your fingers when lowering the printer onto the optional 550-sheet feeder.  
9
Secure the optional 550-sheet feeder to the printer by tightening the two screws provided with the feeder, using a  
coin or similar object.  
Installing Optional Accessory  
51  
10 Insert tray1 into the printer, and push until it stops.  
11 Insert the MPF into the printer, push until it stops, and close the MPF cover.  
12 Re-connect all cables into the rear of the printer, and turn on the printer.  
NOTE: The printer will automatically detect the attached tray but will not detect the paper type.  
13 Print the system settings report to confirm that the optional 550-sheet feeder is installed correctly.  
For details about how to print a system settings report, see "Report / List."  
14 Confirm Tray2 (550 Sheet Feeder) is listed in the system settings report under Printer Options  
.
If the feeder is not listed, turn off the printer, unplug the power cable, and re-install the optional 550-sheet feeder.  
15 After loading paper in the optional 550-sheet feeder, specify the paper type from the printer touch panel.  
a
b
c
d
e
f
Press the  
Tap the Toolstab, and then tap Tray Management  
Tap Tray Settings  
Tap Tray2  
Tap Type  
(Information) button.  
.
.
.
.
Tap  
until the desired paper type appears, and then tap the desired paper type.  
g
Tap OK.  
16 If you installed the optional 550-sheet feeder after installing the printer driver, update your driver by following the  
instructions for each operating system. If the printer is on a network, update the driver for each client.  
52  
Installing Optional Accessory  
Updating Your Driver to Detect 550-Sheet Feeder  
When Using PCL Driver  
Windows® 10/  
1
2
Right-click the Start button, and then click Control Panel  
Devices and Printers  
Right-click the printer icon of the Dell MFP H815dw or Dell MFP S2815dn, and then  
select Printer properties  
Click the Configuration tab, and then select Bi-Directional Setup  
Select Get Information from Printer and then click OK  
Click Apply, and then click OK  
Close the Devices and Printers dialog box.  
Hardware and Sound  
Windows® 10 x64  
.
.
3
4
5
6
.
.
.
®
®
Microsoft Windows 8/  
1
On the Desktop screen, right-click the bottom left corner of the screen, and then click  
®
®
Windows 8 x64/  
Control Panel  
Server 2012 R2)  
Hardware and Sound  
Devices and Printers  
Right-click the printer icon of the Dell MFP H815dw or Dell MFP S2815dn, and then  
select Printer properties  
Click the Configuration tab, and then select Bi-Directional Setup  
Select Get Information from Printer and then click OK  
Click Apply, and then click OK  
Close the Devices and Printers dialog box.  
(
Hardware for Windows Server 2012/Windows  
.
®
®
Windows 8.1/  
®
Windows 8.1 x64/  
2
®
Windows Server 2012/  
Windows Server 2012 R2  
.
®
3
4
5
6
.
.
.
®
Windows 7/  
1
2
Click Start Devices and Printers  
Right-click the printer icon of the Dell MFP H815dw or Dell MFP S2815dn, and then  
select Printer properties  
Click the Configuration tab, and then select Bi-Directional Setup  
.
®
Windows 7 x64/  
®
Windows Server 2008 R2 x64  
.
3
4
5
6
.
Select Get Information from Printer and then click OK  
.
Click Apply, and then click OK  
Close the Devices and Printers dialog box.  
Click Start Control Panel Hardware and Sound  
.
®
Windows Vista /  
Windows Vista x64  
1
2
Printers.  
®
Right-click the printer icon of the Dell MFP H815dw or Dell MFP S2815dn, and then  
select Properties  
Click the Configuration tab, and then select Bi-Directional Setup  
Select Get Information from Printer and then click OK  
Click Apply, and then click OK  
Close the Printers dialog box.  
.
3
4
5
6
.
.
.
®
Windows Server 2008/  
1
2
Click Start Control Panel  
Right-click the printer icon of the Dell MFP H815dw or Dell MFP S2815dn, and then  
select Properties  
Click the Configuration tab, and then select Bi-Directional Setup  
Select Get Information from Printer and then click OK  
Click Apply, and then click OK  
Close the Printers dialog box.  
Click Start Printers and Faxes  
Right-click the printer icon of the Dell MFP H815dw or Dell MFP S2815dn, and then  
select Properties  
Click the Configuration tab, and then select Bi-Directional Setup  
Select Get Information from Printer and then click OK  
Click Apply, and then click OK  
Close the Printers and Faxes dialog box.  
Printers.  
®
Windows Server 2008 x64  
.
3
4
5
6
.
.
.
®
Windows Server 2003/  
1
2
.
®
Windows Server 2003 x64  
.
3
4
5
6
.
.
.
Installing Optional Accessory  
53  
 
If the printer information is not updated automatically after clicking Get Information from Printer, follow these  
steps:  
1
2
3
4
5
Click the Configuration tab, and then select Installable Options.  
Select Paper Tray Configuration in the Items list box.  
Select 2 Trays in the Paper Tray Configuration drop-down menu in Setting for  
Click OK  
Close the Devices and Printers  
.
.
(Printers, or Printers and Faxes) dialog box.  
When Using PS Driver  
Windows® 10/  
1
2
Right-click the Start button, and then click Control Panel  
Devices and Printers  
Right-click the printer icon of the Dell MFP H815dw or Dell MFP S2815dn, and then  
select Printer properties  
Click the Configuration tab, and then select Bi-Directional Setup  
Select Get Information from Printer and then click OK  
Click Apply, and then click OK  
Close the Devices and Printers dialog box.  
Hardware and Sound  
Windows® 10 x64  
.
.
3
4
5
6
.
.
.
®
Windows 8/  
1
On the Desktop screen, right-click the bottom left corner of the screen, and then click  
®
®
Windows 8 x64/  
Control Panel  
Server 2012 R2)  
Hardware and Sound  
(
Hardware for Windows Server 2012/Windows  
®
®
Windows 8.1/  
Devices and Printers.  
®
Windows 8.1 x64/  
2
Right-click the printer icon of the Dell MFP H815dw or Dell MFP S2815dn, and then  
select Printer properties  
Click the Configuration tab, and then select Bi-Directional Setup  
Select Get Information from Printer and then click OK  
Click Apply, and then click OK  
Close the Devices and Printers dialog box.  
®
Windows Server 2012/  
Windows Server 2012 R2  
.
®
3
4
5
6
.
.
.
®
Windows 7/  
1
2
Click Start Devices and Printers  
Right-click the printer icon of the Dell MFP H815dw or Dell MFP S2815dn, and then  
select Printer properties  
Click the Configuration tab, and then select Bi-Directional Setup  
.
®
Windows 7 x64/  
®
Windows Server 2008 R2 x64  
.
3
4
5
6
.
Select Get Information from Printer and then click OK  
.
Click Apply, and then click OK  
Close the Devices and Printers dialog box.  
Click Start Control Panel Hardware and Sound  
.
®
Windows Vista /  
Windows Vista x64  
1
2
Printers.  
®
Right-click the printer icon of the Dell MFP H815dw or Dell MFP S2815dn, and then  
select Properties  
Click the Configuration tab, and then select Bi-Directional Setup  
Select Get Information from Printer and then click OK  
Click Apply, and then click OK  
Close the Printers dialog box.  
.
3
4
5
6
.
.
.
®
Windows Server 2008/  
1
2
Click Start Control Panel  
Right-click the printer icon of the Dell MFP H815dw or Dell MFP S2815dn, and then  
select Properties  
Click the Configuration tab, and then select Bi-Directional Setup  
Select Get Information from Printer and then click OK  
Click Apply, and then click OK  
Close the Printers dialog box.  
Printers.  
®
Windows Server 2008 x64  
.
3
4
5
6
.
.
.
54  
Installing Optional Accessory  
Windows Server® 2003/  
1
2
Click Start  
Right-click the printer icon of the Dell MFP H815dw or Dell MFP S2815dn, and then  
select Properties  
Click the Configuration tab, and then select Bi-Directional Setup  
Select Get Information from Printer and then click OK  
Click Apply, and then click OK  
Close the Printers and Faxes dialog box.  
Printers and Faxes.  
Windows Server® 2003 x64  
.
3
4
5
6
.
.
.
If the printer information is not updated automatically after clicking Get Information from Printer, follow these  
steps:  
1
2
3
4
5
Click the Configuration tab, and then select Installable Options.  
Select Paper Tray Configuration in the Items list box.  
Select 2 Trays in the Paper Tray Configuration drop-down menu in Setting for  
Click OK  
Close the Devices and Printers  
.
.
(Printers, or Printers and Faxes) dialog box.  
OS X 10.9.x/OS X 10.10.x  
1
2
3
Select Printers & Scanners in System Preferences  
Select the printer in the Printers list, and click Options & Supplies  
Select Options, select the options that have been installed on the printers, and then click  
OK  
Select Print & Scan in System Preferences  
Select the printer in the Printers list, and click Options & Supplies  
Select Driver, select the options that have been installed on the printers, and then click OK  
Select Print & Fax in System Preferences  
Select the printer in the Printers list, and click Options & Supplies  
.
.
.
Mac OS X 10.7.x/OS X 10.8.x  
1
2
3
.
.
.
Mac OS X 10.5.x/Mac OS X 10.6.x  
1
2
3
.
.
Select Driver, select the options that have been installed on the printers, and then click OK  
.
When Using XML Paper Specification (XPS) Driver  
NOTE: The XML Paper Specification (XPS) driver does not support Windows Server® 2003 and Windows Server® 2003 x64.  
®
Windows 10/  
1
2
Right-click the Start button, and then click Control Panel  
Devices and Printers  
Right-click the printer icon of the Dell MFP H815dw or Dell MFP S2815dn, and then  
select Printer properties  
Click the Device Setting tab, and then select Available in Tray2 drop-down menu.  
Click Apply, and then click OK  
Hardware and Sound  
®
Windows 10 x64  
.
.
3
4
5
.
Close the Devices and Printers dialog box.  
®
Windows 8/  
1
On the Desktop screen, right-click the bottom left corner of the screen, and then click  
®
®
Windows 8 x64/  
Control Panel  
Server 2012 R2)  
Hardware and Sound  
(
Hardware for Windows Server 2012/Windows  
®
®
Windows 8.1/  
Devices and Printers.  
®
Windows 8.1 x64/  
2
Right-click the printer icon of the Dell MFP H815dw or Dell MFP S2815dn, and then  
select Printer properties  
Click the Device Setting tab, and then select Available in Tray2 drop-down menu.  
Click Apply, and then click OK  
Close the Devices and Printers dialog box.  
®
Windows Server 2012/  
Windows Server 2012 R2  
.
®
3
4
5
.
Installing Optional Accessory  
55  
Windows® 7/  
1
2
Click Start  
Right-click the printer icon of the Dell MFP H815dw or Dell MFP S2815dn, and then  
select Printer properties  
Click the Device Setting tab, and then select Available in Tray2 drop-down menu.  
Click Apply, and then click OK  
Close the Devices and Printers dialog box.  
Click Start Control Panel Hardware and Sound  
Right-click the printer icon of the Dell MFP H815dw or Dell MFP S2815dn, and then  
select Properties  
Click the Device Setting tab, and then select Available in Tray2 drop-down menu.  
Click Apply, and then click OK  
Close the Printers dialog box.  
Click Start Control Panel  
Right-click the printer icon of the Dell MFP H815dw or Dell MFP S2815dn, and then  
select Properties  
Click the Device Setting tab, and then select Available in Tray2 drop-down menu.  
Click Apply, and then click OK  
Close the Printers dialog box.  
Devices and Printers.  
Windows® 7 x64/  
Windows Server® 2008 R2 x64  
.
3
4
5
.
®
Windows Vista /  
Windows Vista x64  
1
2
Printers.  
®
.
3
4
5
.
®
Windows Server 2008/  
Windows Server 2008 x64  
1
2
Printers.  
®
.
3
4
5
.
56  
Installing Optional Accessory  
7
Connecting and Setting Up Your Printer  
To connect your printer to a computer or device, the following specification must be met for each of the connection  
type:  
Connection type  
Wireless  
Connection specifications  
IEEE 802.11b/802.11g/802.11n (Dell™ Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw only)  
Ethernet  
10 Base-T/100 Base-TX/1000 Base-T  
USB  
USB 2.0  
RJ11  
Phone connector  
Wall jack connector  
RJ11  
NOTE: The images used in this manual are those of the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw unless otherwise mentioned.  
1
2
3
4
1
2
Ethernet port  
USB port  
3
4
Phone connector  
Wall jack connector  
Connecting and Setting Up Your Printer  
57  
   
Turning on the Printer  
WARNING: Do not use extension cords or power strips.  
WARNING: The printer should not be connected to an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) system.  
NOTE: The Software and Documentation disc also contains video instructions. In the main menu window of Dell Printer Easy  
Install, click Installation Video.  
1
Connect the power cable to the power connector on the rear of the printer, and then to a power source.  
2
Turn on the printer.  
Configuring Initial Settings on the Operator Panel  
You need to set the printer language, country, clock date, time, and fax settings when you turn on the printer for the  
first time.  
When you turn the printer on, the wizard screen to perform the initial setup appears on the touch panel. Follow the  
steps below to set the initial settings.  
NOTE: If you do not start configuring the initial settings, the printer automatically restarts in 3 minutes, and the Home screen  
appears on the touch panel. After that, you can set the following initial setup by enabling Power on Wizardon the touch  
panel or Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool if needed.  
For more information on operator panel, see "Operator Panel."  
For more information on Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, see "Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool."  
1
The Select Your Language screen appears.  
a
Tap  
until desired language appears, and then tap the desired language.  
English  
Français  
Italiano  
Deutsch  
Español  
58  
Connecting and Setting Up Your Printer  
       
Dansk  
Nederlands  
Norsk  
Svenska  
b
Tap Next  
.
2
The Date & Time screen appears.  
a
b
c
Tap Time Zone.  
Tap  
Tap  
until the desired geographic region appears, and then tap the desired geographic region.  
until the desired time zone appears, and then tap the desired time zone.  
Geographic Region  
Time Zone  
Africa  
(UTC) Accra, Bamako, Dakar, Nouakchott  
(UTC) Casablanca  
(UTC +01:00) Algiers, Douala, Libreville, Luanda  
(UTC +01:00) Tunis  
(UTC +01:00) Windhoek  
(UTC +02:00) Cairo  
(UTC +02:00) Harare, Johannesburg, Kinshasa, Tripoli  
(UTC +03:00) Addis Ababa, Khartoum, Mogadishu, Nairobi  
Connecting and Setting Up Your Printer  
59  
Geographic Region  
Time Zone  
Americas  
(UTC -10:00) Adak  
(UTC -09:00) Alaska  
(UTC -08:00) Pacific Time (US & Canada)  
(UTC -08:00) Tijuana  
(UTC -07:00) Arizona, Dawson Creek, Sonora  
(UTC -07:00) Chihuahua, Mazatlan  
(UTC -07:00) Mountain Time (US & Canada)  
(UTC -06:00) Cancun, Mexico City, Monterrey  
(UTC -06:00) Central America  
(UTC -06:00) Central Time (US & Canada)  
(UTC -06:00) Saskatchewan  
(UTC -05:00) Atikokan, Resolute  
(UTC -05:00) Bogota, Lima, Panama, Quito  
(UTC -05:00) Cayman Islands, Jamaica, Port-au-Prince  
(UTC -05:00) Eastern Time (US & Canada)  
(UTC -05:00) Grand Turk  
(UTC -05:00) Havana  
(UTC -04:30) Caracas  
(UTC -04:00) Asuncion  
(UTC -04:00) Atlantic Time (Canada)  
(UTC -04:00) Blanc-Sablon  
(UTC -04:00) Caribbean Islands  
(UTC -04:00) Cuiaba  
(UTC -04:00) Georgetown, La Paz, Manaus  
(UTC -04:00) Thule  
(UTC -03:30) St. John's  
(UTC -03:00) Brasilia, Cayenne, Paramaribo  
(UTC -03:00) Buenos Aires  
(UTC -03:00) Greenland  
(UTC -03:00) Miquelon  
(UTC -03:00) Montevideo  
(UTC -02:00) Noronha  
Antarctica  
(UTC -04:00) Palmer Archipelago, Santiago  
(UTC -03:00) Rothera  
(UTC +03:00) Syowa  
(UTC +06:00) Mawson, Vostok  
(UTC +07:00) Davis  
(UTC +08:00) Casey  
(UTC +10:00) Dumont d'Urville  
(UTC +12:00) McMurdo  
60  
Connecting and Setting Up Your Printer  
Geographic Region  
Time Zone  
Asia  
(UTC +02:00) Amman  
(UTC +02:00) Beirut  
(UTC +02:00) Damascus  
(UTC +02:00) Jerusalem  
(UTC +02:00) Nicosia  
(UTC +02:00) Palestine  
(UTC +03:00) Aden, Baghdad, Qatar, Riyadh  
(UTC +03:30) Tehran  
(UTC +04:00) Baku  
(UTC +04:00) Dubai, Muscat, Tbilisi  
(UTC +04:00) Yerevan  
(UTC +04:30) Kabul  
(UTC +05:00) Aqtau, Aqtobe, Ashgabat, Samarkand  
(UTC +05:00) Ekaterinburg  
(UTC +05:00) Karachi  
(UTC +05:30) Colombo, Kolkata  
(UTC +05:45) Kathmandu  
(UTC +06:00) Almaty, Bishkek, Dhaka, Thimphu  
(UTC +06:00) Novosibirsk, Omsk  
(UTC +06:30) Yangon (Rangoon)  
(UTC +07:00) Bangkok, Ho Chi Minh, Hovd, Jakarta  
(UTC +07:00) Krasnoyarsk  
(UTC +08:00) Chongqing, Hong Kong, Shanghai  
(UTC +08:00) Irkutsk  
(UTC +08:00) Kuala Lumpur, Makassar, Manila, Singapore  
(UTC +08:00) Taipei  
(UTC +08:00) Ulaan Baatar  
(UTC +09:00) Dili, Jayapura  
(UTC +09:00) Pyongyang  
(UTC +09:00) Seoul  
(UTC +09:00) Tokyo  
(UTC +09:00) Yakutsk  
(UTC +10:00) Sakhalin, Vladivostok  
(UTC +11:00) Magadan  
(UTC +12:00) Anadyr, Kamchatka  
(UTC -04:00) Bermuda  
Atlantic Ocean  
(UTC -04:00) Stanley  
(UTC -02:00) South Georgia Island  
(UTC -01:00) Azores, Scoresbysund  
(UTC -01:00) Cape Verde  
(UTC) Reykjavik  
Connecting and Setting Up Your Printer  
61  
Geographic Region  
Time Zone  
Australia  
(UTC +08:00) Perth  
(UTC +08:45) Eucla  
(UTC +09:30) Adelaide  
(UTC +09:30) Darwin  
(UTC +10:00) Brisbane, Lindeman  
(UTC +10:00) Hobart, Melbourne, Sydney  
(UTC +10:30) Lord Howe Island  
(UTC) Dublin, Edinburgh, Lisbon, London  
(UTC +01:00) Amsterdam, Berlin, Rome, Stockholm, Vienna  
(UTC +01:00) Belgrade, Bratislava, Budapest, Prague  
(UTC +01:00) Brussels, Copenhagen, Madrid, Paris  
(UTC +01:00) Sarajevo, Skopje, Warsaw, Zagreb  
(UTC +02:00) Athens, Bucharest, Istanbul  
(UTC +02:00) Helsinki, Kiev, Riga, Sofia  
(UTC +02:00) Kaliningrad, Minsk  
(UTC +03:00) Moscow  
Europe  
(UTC +04:00) Samara  
Indian Ocean  
(UTC +03:00) Antananarivo, Comoro Islands, Mayotte  
(UTC +04:00) Mahe, Reunion  
(UTC +04:00) Mauritius  
(UTC +05:00) Kerguelen, Maldives  
(UTC +06:00) Chagos  
(UTC +06:30) Cocos Islands  
(UTC +07:00) Christmas Island  
(UTC -11:00) Midway Island, Niue, Samoa  
(UTC -10:00) Cook Islands, Hawaii, Tahiti  
(UTC -09:30) Marquesas Islands  
(UTC -09:00) Gambier Islands  
(UTC -08:00) Pitcairn Islands  
Pacific Ocean  
(UTC -06:00) Easter Island  
(UTC -06:00) Galapagos Islands  
(UTC +09:00) Palau  
(UTC +10:00) Guam, Port Moresby, Saipan  
(UTC +11:00) Efate, Guadalcanal, Kosrae  
(UTC +11:30) Norfolk Island  
(UTC +12:00) Auckland  
(UTC +12:00) Fiji, Marshall Islands  
(UTC +12:45) Chatham  
(UTC +13:00) Tongatapu  
(UTC +14:00) Kiritimati  
62  
Connecting and Setting Up Your Printer  
d
e
f
Tap OK  
Tap Date  
Select a date format from the menu displayed by selecting Format  
.
.
.
YYYY/MM/DD  
DD/MM/YYYY  
MM/DD/YYYY  
g
After tapping the box under Year, tap - or +, or use the number pad to enter the desired value. Repeat this  
step to enter the desired value for Monthand Day  
Tap OK  
Tap Time  
Select the time format from 12 Houror 24 Hour. If you select 12 Hour, select AMor PM  
After tapping the box under Hour, use the number pad to enter the desired value. Repeat this step to enter  
the desired value for Minute  
Tap OK  
Tap Next  
.
h
i
.
.
j
.
k
.
l
.
m
.
3
The Fax (Do you want to setup Fax Now?) screen appears.  
To set Fax settings, select Yes, Setup FAXand follow the procedure below. To end the settings, select No,  
I'll Do It Laterand proceed to Step 4.  
a
b
c
Enter the fax number of the printer using the number pad.  
Tap Country  
Tap until the desired country appears, and then tap the desired country.  
.
The default paper size is automatically set when you select a country.  
Australia  
Austria  
A4  
A4  
Belgium  
Canada  
A4  
Letter  
Colombia  
Denmark  
France  
Letter  
A4  
A4  
Germany  
Greece*  
Iceland*  
Ireland  
A4  
A4  
A4  
A4  
Italy  
A4  
Japan*  
A4  
Luxembourg  
Malaysia  
Mexico  
A4  
A4  
Letter  
A4  
Netherlands  
Connecting and Setting Up Your Printer  
63  
New Zealand  
Norway  
A4  
A4  
Poland*  
A4  
Portugal*  
A4  
Saudi Arabia*  
Singapore  
South Africa  
Spain  
A4  
A4  
A4  
A4  
Sweden  
A4  
Switzerland  
A4  
Thailand  
A4  
Turkey*  
A4  
United Kingdom  
United States  
A4  
Letter  
Letter  
Unknown  
*
Available on the Dell Smart Multifunction Printer | S2815dn only.  
d
Tap Next  
The Setup Complete (Congratulations, setup is complete.) screen appears.  
Tap OK  
.
4
5
.
The printer automatically restarts after tapping OK  
.
64  
Connecting and Setting Up Your Printer  
Connecting to a Computer or a Network  
NOTE: The Software and Documentation disc also contains video instructions. In the main menu window of Dell Printer Easy  
Install, click Installation Video.  
NOTE: Before making connections, be sure to turn off the printer.  
Connecting to a Computer Using the USB Cable (Direct Connection)  
A local printer is a printer which is directly connected to your computer using the USB cable. If your printer is  
connected to a network instead of your computer, skip this section and go to "Connecting to a Network Using the  
Ethernet Cable."  
1
Connect the smaller USB connector into the USB port at the rear of the printer.  
1
1
1
USB port  
NOTE: Ensure that you match the USB symbol on the cable to the USB symbol on the printer.  
2
Connect the other end of the cable into a USB port of the computer.  
CAUTION: Do not connect the printer USB cable to a USB port located on the keyboard.  
Connecting and Setting Up Your Printer  
65  
     
Connecting to a Network Using the Ethernet Cable  
1
Connect the Ethernet cable.  
1
1
1
Ethernet port  
To connect the printer to the network, connect one end of an Ethernet cable into the Ethernet port on the rear of  
the printer, and the other end to a LAN drop or hub.  
Connecting to a Wireless Network  
NOTE: The wireless network connection feature is available on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw only.  
You can connect the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw to a wireless network, using the built-in wireless  
network function.  
For a wireless connection setup, see "Configuring the Wireless Settings."  
NOTE: To use the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw through wireless connection, be sure to disconnect the Ethernet  
cable and the USB cable.  
Connecting to the Telephone Line  
CAUTION: Do not connect your printer directly to a Digital Subscriber Line (DSL). This may damage the printer. To use a DSL,  
you will need to use an appropriate DSL filter. Contact your service provider for the DSL filter.  
NOTE: The Software and Documentation disc also contains video instructions. In the main menu window of Dell Printer Easy  
Install, click Installation Video.  
66  
Connecting and Setting Up Your Printer  
       
1
2
3
Connect one end of a telephone line cord into the wall jack connector and the other end into an active wall jack.  
Wall jack connector  
To the wall jack  
If the "Blue" plug is attached to the phone connector, remove it.  
Phone connector  
"Blue" plug  
To connect a telephone and/or answering machine to your printer, connect the telephone or answering machine  
line cord into the phone connector ( ).  
Phone connector  
To an external telephone or  
answering machine  
If the phone communication is serial in your country (such as Germany, Sweden, Denmark, Austria, Belgium, Italy,  
France and Switzerland), and that you are supplied with a "Yellow" terminator, insert the "Yellow" terminator into  
the phone connector ( ).  
Connecting and Setting Up Your Printer  
67  
Phone connector  
"Yellow" terminator  
Setting Up the Printer Using Dell Printer Easy Install (Windows® Only)  
NOTE: To set up the printer connected with Macintosh computers or Linux computers, see "Installing Printer Drivers on  
Macintosh Computers" or "Installing Printer Drivers on Linux Computers (CUPS)" respectively.  
Basic Setup  
To set up the printer, you can use the Dell Printer Easy Install program on the computer running a Microsoft®  
Windows® operating system.  
The program first searches for the printer and grasps how the printer is connected to the computer. Based on that  
information, the program will automatically try to configure the printer, and install the drivers and software to your  
computer.  
Before starting this basic setup, make sure that the printer is turned off, and ensure the cable connections as follows:  
To set up the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw as a wireless printer  
1
2
Disconnect the Ethernet cable and the USB cable from the printer.  
Ensure the computer you use for printer setup is connected to a known wireless network (2.4 GHz).  
After setup completion, the printer will connect to the same wireless network that your setup computer is  
connected to.  
To set up the printer as a network (wired) printer  
1
Connect the Ethernet cable to the printer.  
To set up the printer as a USB printer  
1
Connect the USB cable to the printer.  
NOTE: Where the wireless network connection is available, you cannot set up the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw as  
a USB printer in the basic setup. In this case, set up the printer following the procedures described in "Setting Up the Printer in  
Another Connection Method."  
NOTE: For Windows Vista®, you cannot set up the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw automatically as a wireless printer  
in the basic setup. In this case, set up the printer manually following the procedures described in "Setting Up the Printer in  
Another Connection Method."  
68  
Connecting and Setting Up Your Printer  
           
1
2
Turn on the printer.  
Insert the Software and Documentation disc provided with the printer into your computer.  
The Dell Printer Easy Install program launches automatically.  
NOTE: If the Dell Printer Easy Install program does not launch automatically, follow the procedure below.  
®
®
For Windows Server 2008 and Windows Server 2008 R2  
Click start  
then click OK  
Run, enter D:\setup.exe(where D is the drive letter of the optical drive) in the Run dialog box, and  
.
®
®
For Windows Vista and Windows  
Click Start All Programs Accessories  
D:\setup.exe(where D is the drive letter of the optical drive) in the Run dialog box, and then click OK  
7
Run, enter  
.
®
®
®
®
For Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows Server 2012, and Windows Server 2012 R2  
Point to the top or bottom right corner of the screen, and then click Search Type Runin the search box, click Apps (for  
Type D:\setup.exe(where D is the drive  
®
®
Windows 8 and Windows Server 2012 only), and then click Run  
letter of the optical drive), and then click OK  
.
®
For Windows 10  
Right-click the Start button, and then click Run  
Type D:\setup.exe(where D is the drive letter of the optical  
drive), and then click OK  
Wait until the screen changes or click Next  
Follow the instructions displayed on the screen.  
.
3
.
4
5
Click Finish to exit the wizard when the Ready to Print! screen appears.  
Eject the Software and Documentation disc.  
If the Main Menu of Dell Printer Easy Install Appears Without Starting or Completing the Basic Setup  
Proceed to step 4 in "Setting Up the Printer in Another Connection Method," and set up the printer manually  
following the on-screen instructions.  
Connecting and Setting Up Your Printer  
69  
Setting Up the Printer in Another Connection Method  
You can set up the printer, specifying the connection method other than the one used in the basic setup.  
Before starting the setup procedure below, make sure that the printer is turned off, and ensure the cable connection  
as described in "Basic Setup."  
1
2
Turn on the printer.  
Insert the Software and Documentation disc provided with the printer into your computer.  
The Dell Printer Easy Install program launches automatically.  
3
Click Main Menu.  
The Main Menu screen appears.  
Click Setup  
4
.
Follow the instructions displayed on the screen.  
5
6
Click Finish to exit the wizard when the Ready to Print! screen appears.  
Eject the Software and Documentation disc.  
70  
Connecting and Setting Up Your Printer  
 
Configuring the Wireless Settings  
NOTE: The wireless network connection feature is available on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw only.  
This section describes how to configure the wireless connection on Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw.  
The specifications of the wireless connection are described below.  
Item  
Specification  
Connectivity Technology  
Compliant Standards  
Bandwidth  
Wireless  
IEEE 802.11b, 802.11g, and 802.11n  
2.4 GHz  
Data Transfer Rate  
IEEE 802.11n: 65 Mbps  
IEEE 802.11g: 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, and 6 Mbps  
IEEE 802.11b: 11, 5.5, 2, and 1 Mbps  
Security  
64 (40-bit key)/128 (104-bit key) WEP,  
WPA- PSK (TKIP, AES), WPA2-PSK (AES), WPA-Enterprise (TKIP, AES)*1  
WPA2-Enterprise (AES)*1  
,
Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS)*2  
Push-Button Configuration (PBC),  
Personal Identification Number (PIN)  
*1 EAP method supports PEAPv0, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS PAP, and EAP-TTLS CHAP.  
*2  
WPS 2.0 compliant. WPS 2.0 works on access points with the following encryption types: Mixed mode PSK,  
WPA-PSK AES, WPA2-PSK AES, WPA-PSK TKIP, Open (No Security)  
Determining the Wireless Network Settings  
You need to know the settings for the wireless network to set up the wireless printer. For details of the settings,  
contact your network administrator.  
Wireless Settings  
SSID  
Specifies the name that identifies the wireless network with up to 32  
alphanumeric characters.  
Network Mode  
Security  
Specifies the network mode from Ad-hoc or Infrastructure.  
Selects the encryption type from No Security, Mixed mode PSK*, WPA-PSK-  
TKIP, WPA2-PSK-AES, and WEP.  
Security Settings  
Transmit Key  
WEP Key  
Specifies the transmit key from the list.  
Specifies the WEP key used through the wireless network only when WEP is  
selected as the encryption type.  
Passphrase  
Specifies the passphrase of alphanumeric characters from 8 to 63 bytes long  
and the hexadecimal characters of 64 bytes long only when Mixed mode  
PSK*, or WPA2-PSK-AES is selected as the encryption type.  
*
Mixed mode PSK automatically selects an available encryption type from WPA-PSK-TKIP, WPA-PSK-AES, or WPA2-PSK-AES.  
Connecting and Setting Up Your Printer  
71  
   
You can select a method to configure the Wireless Connection from the following:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Wizard Setup through Dell Printer Easy Install  
*1*3  
WPS-PBC  
*2*3  
WPS-PIN  
Auto SSID Setup  
Manual SSID Setup  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
*1 WPS-PBC (Wi-Fi Protected Setup-Push Button Configuration) is a method to authenticate and register devices required for wireless  
configuration, by pressing the button provided on the access point via wireless routers, and then performing WPS-PBC setting on the  
operator panel. This setting is available only when the access point supports WPS.  
*2 WPS-PIN (Wi-Fi Protected Setup-Personal Identification Number) is a method to authenticate and register devices required for wire-  
less configuration, by entering PIN assignments in the printer and computer. This setting, performed through access point, is available  
only when the access points of your wireless router supports WPS.  
*3 WPS 2.0 compliant. WPS 2.0 works on access points with the following encryption types: Mixed mode PSK, WPA-PSK AES, WPA2-  
PSK AES, WPA-PSK TKIP, Open (No Security)  
NOTE: If Panel Lock Controlis set to Enable, you need to enter the four-digit password to enter the Admin  
Settingsmenu.  
NOTE: For details about using WPA-Enterprise-AES or WPA2-Enterprise-AES, see "Using Digital Certificates."  
Configuring the Wireless Settings Using Dell Printer Easy Install  
1
Insert the Software and Documentation disc provided with the printer into your computer. The Dell Printer Easy  
Install program launches automatically.  
2
Click Main Menu  
.
72  
Connecting and Setting Up Your Printer  
 
3
4
5
Click Change.  
Select Configure the Wi-Fi settings, and then click Next  
.
Follow the on-screen instructions, and configure the wireless settings of the printer.  
For WPS-PBC, WPS-PIN, Auto SSID Setup, Manual SSID Setup, and Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, see  
the following instructions.  
Connecting and Setting Up Your Printer  
73  
Configuring the Wireless Settings Without Using Dell Printer Easy Install  
WPS-PBC  
NOTE: WPS-PBC (Wi-Fi Protected Setup-Push Button Configuration) is a method to authenticate and register devices required  
for wireless configuration by pressing the button provided on the access point via wireless routers, and then performing WPS-  
PBC setting on the operator panel. This setting is available only when the access point supports WPS.  
NOTE: Before starting WPS-PBC, confirm the position of the WPS button (button name may vary) on the wireless LAN access  
point. For information about WPS operation on the wireless LAN access point, refer to the manual supplied with the wireless  
LAN access point.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Press the  
Tap the Toolstab, and then tap Admin Settings  
Tap Network  
Tap Wi-Fi  
Tap WPS Setup  
Tap Push Button Configuration  
Tap Start Configuration  
(Information) button.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
Ensure that the message Push WPS Button on routeris displayed, and start the WPS-PBC on the wireless  
LAN access point (Registrar) within 2 minutes.  
8
When the WPS operation is successful and the printer is rebooted, wireless LAN connection setting is completed.  
WPS-PIN  
NOTE: WPS-PIN (Wi-Fi Protected Setup-Personal Identification Number) is a method to authenticate and register devices  
required for wireless configuration by entering PIN assignments to a printer and computer. This setting, performed through an  
access point, is available only when the access points of your wireless router support WPS.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Press the  
Tap the Toolstab, and then tap Admin Settings  
Tap Network  
Tap Wi-Fi  
Tap WPS Setup  
Tap PIN Code  
Write down the displayed 8-digit PIN code or tap Print PIN Code. The PIN code is printed.  
Tap Start Configuration  
(Information) button.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
Ensure that the message Operate Wireless Routeris displayed, and enter the PIN code displayed on step  
7 into the wireless LAN access point (Registrar).  
NOTE: For WPS operation on the wireless LAN access point, refer to the manual supplied with the wireless LAN access  
point.  
10 When the WPS operation is successful and the printer is rebooted, wireless LAN connection setting is completed.  
74  
Connecting and Setting Up Your Printer  
 
Auto SSID Setup  
1
2
3
4
5
Press the  
Tap the Toolstab, and then tap Admin Settings  
Tap Network  
Tap Wi-Fi  
Tap Wi-Fi Setup Wizard  
The printer automatically searches the access points on wireless network.  
Tap until the desired access point appears, and then select the access point.  
(Information) button.  
.
.
.
.
6
If the desired access point does not appear, go to "Manual SSID Setup."  
NOTE: Some hidden SSID may not be displayed. If the SSID is not detected turn on SSID broadcast from the router.  
7
8
Tap Next.  
Enter the WEP key or passphrase.  
When the encryption type of the selected access point is WEP in step 6:  
a
b
Tap the WEP Keytext box, and then enter the WEP key.  
Tap OK  
.
When the encryption type of the selected access point is WPA, WPA2 or Mixed in step 6:  
a
b
Tap the Passphrasetext box, and then enter the passphrase.  
Tap OK  
.
9
The Restart System screen appears.  
10 Turn off the printer, and turn it on again to apply the settings.  
Wireless LAN connection setting is complete.  
Manual SSID Setup  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Press the  
Tap the Toolstab, and then tap Admin Settings  
Tap Network  
Tap Wi-Fi  
Tap Wi-Fi Setup Wizard  
Tap the Manual SSID Setupcheck box, and then tap Next  
Enter the SSID, and then tap Next  
Select the network mode from Infrastructureand Ad-hocdepending on your environment, and then tap  
Next  
(Information) button.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
If you select Infrastructure, proceed to step 9.  
If you select Ad-hoc, proceed to step 10.  
Connecting and Setting Up Your Printer  
75  
 
9
Select the encryption type from No Security  
,
Mixed mode PSK, WPA2-PSK-AES, or WEP.  
If you do not set security for your wireless network:  
a
b
Tap  
until No Securityappears, and then tap No Security  
.
Tap OK  
.
To use Mixed mode PSK or WPA2-PSK-AES encryption:  
a
b
c
Tap  
Tap the Passphrasetext box, and then enter the passphrase.  
Tap OK  
until Mixed mode PSK, or WPA2-PSK-AESappears, and then tap the desired encryption type.  
.
To use WEP encryption:  
a
b
c
d
Tap  
until WEPappears, and then tap WEP.  
Tap the WEP Keytext box, and then enter the WEP key.  
Tap Transmit Key, and then select the desired transmit key from Autoor WEP Key 1to WEP Key 4  
.
Tap OK  
.
Proceed to step 11.  
10 Select the encryption type from No Securityor WEP  
If you do not set security for your wireless network:  
.
a
b
Tap  
until No Securityappears, and then tap No Security  
.
Tap OK  
.
To use WEP encryption:  
a
b
c
d
Tap  
Tap the WEP Keytext box, and then enter the WEP key.  
Tap Transmit Key, and then select the desired transmit key from Autoor WEP Key 1to WEP Key 4  
Tap OK  
until WEPappears, and then tap WEP.  
.
.
11 The Restart System screen appears.  
12 Turn off the printer, and turn it on again to apply the settings.  
Wireless LAN connection setting is complete.  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
NOTE: For details about using WPA-Enterprise-AES or WPA2-Enterprise-AES, see "Using Digital Certificates."  
1
2
Ensure that the printer is turned off.  
Connect the printer to the network with an Ethernet cable.  
For details about how to connect the Ethernet cable, see "Connecting to a Computer or a Network."  
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Turn on the printer.  
Launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool by entering the IP address of the printer in your web browser.  
Click Print Server Settings  
Click Print Server Settings tab.  
Click Wi-Fi  
.
.
Enter the SSID in the SSID text box.  
Select Ad-Hoc or Infrastructure in the Network Type drop-down list box.  
76  
Connecting and Setting Up Your Printer  
10 Select the encryption type from No Security WEP, WPA-PSK-AES/WEP2-PSK AES, and Mixed Mode PSK in  
,
the Encryption drop-down list box, and then set each item for the encryption type selected.  
NOTE: For details on each item, see "Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool."  
11 Click Apply New Settings to apply the settings.  
12 Turn off the printer, disconnect the Ethernet cable and turn it on again.  
Wireless LAN connection setting is complete.  
Reconfiguring the Wireless Settings  
To change the wireless settings from your computer, perform the following.  
NOTE: To change the wireless settings through wireless connection, ensure that the wireless connection setting is completed  
in "Configuring the Wireless Settings."  
Reconfiguring the Wireless Settings Using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
NOTE: The following settings are available when the network mode is set to infrastructure in "Configuring the Wireless  
Settings."  
1
Check the IP address of the printer.  
a
b
c
d
Press the  
Tap About This MFP  
Tap the Networktab.  
(Information) button.  
.
Tap  
button until IP(v4) Addressappears, and then check the IP address displayed in the IP(v4)  
Address  
.
2
Launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool by entering the IP address of the printer in your web browser.  
3
4
5
6
Click Print Server Settings  
Click Print Server Settings tab.  
Click Wi-Fi  
Change the wireless settings of the printer.  
.
.
Connecting and Setting Up Your Printer  
77  
 
7
8
Reboot the printer.  
Change the wireless settings on your computer or access point accordingly.  
NOTE: To change the wireless settings on your computer, refer to the manuals provided with the wireless adapter or if  
your computer provides a wireless adapter tool, change the wireless settings using that tool.  
Reconfiguring the Wireless Settings Using Dell Printer Easy Install  
1
Insert the Software and Documentation disc provided with the printer into your computer. The Dell Printer Easy  
Install program launches automatically.  
2
3
Click Main Menu  
.
Click Change  
.
The Configure Printer window appears.  
4
Select Configure the Wi-Fi settings, and then click Next.  
5
Follow the on-screen instructions, and change the wireless settings of the printer.  
Reconfiguring the Wireless Settings Using Configuration Tool  
1
2
Click Start  
For Windows 10: Click the Start button  
For Dell Printer Hub, select the printer from My Printers on the home screen.  
®
All Programs  
Dell Printers  
Dell Printer Hub or Dell Printer Management Tool  
.
Dell Printer Hub or Dell Printer Management Tool  
.
For Dell Printer Management Tool, select the printer displayed by default, or another printer from the drop-down  
list on the upper-right corner of the home screen.  
3
4
5
Click the shortcut to the Configuration Tool on the left of the screen.  
Select Configure the wireless network settings, and click Next  
.
Follow the on-screen instructions, and change the wireless settings of the printer.  
78  
Connecting and Setting Up Your Printer  
8
Setting the IP Address  
NOTE: The images used in this manual are those of the Dell™ Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw unless otherwise mentioned.  
Assigning an IP Address  
An IP address is a unique number that consists of four sections that are delimited by a period and can include up to  
three digits in each section, for example, 111.222.33.44.  
You can select the IP mode from Dual Stack, IPv4, and IPv6. If your network supports both IPv4 and IPv6, select  
Dual Stack.  
Select the IP mode of your environment, and then set IP address, subnet mask (for IPv4 only), and gateway address.  
CAUTION: Assigning an IP address that is already in use can cause network performance issues.  
NOTE: Assigning an IP address is considered as an advanced function and is normally done by a system administrator.  
NOTE: When you assign an IP address manually in IPv6 mode, use the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. To display the Dell  
Printer Configuration Web Tool, use the link-local address. To confirm the link-local address, print a system settings report and  
check the Link-Local Address under Network (Wired) or Network (Wireless).  
For details about how to print a system settings report, see "Report / List."  
NOTE: If Panel Lock Controlis set to Enable, you need to enter the four-digit password to enter the Admin  
Settingsmenu.  
When Using the Dell Printer Easy Install  
1
Insert the Software and Documentation disc provided with the printer into your computer. The Dell Printer Easy  
Install program launches automatically.  
2
Click Main Menu  
.
Setting the IP Address  
79  
       
3
Click Change.  
The Configure Printer window appears.  
4
Select Configure the IP address settings, and then click Next  
.
5
Follow the instructions displayed on the screen.  
When Using the Operator Panel  
For more information on using the operator panel, see  
"
Operator Panel."  
1
2
3
4
Press the  
Tap the Toolstab, and then tap Admin Settings  
Tap Network  
(Information) button.  
.
.
Do either of the following:  
When connecting to network with the Ethernet cable:  
Tap Ethernet  
When connecting to network through wireless connection (Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw only):  
Tap Wi-Fi  
Tap IP Mode  
.
.
5
6
.
Tap IPv4 Mode, and then tap OK  
.
80  
Setting the IP Address  
 
7
8
9
Tap  
Tap Get IP Address  
Tap Panel, and then tap OK  
until TCP / IPappears, and then tap TCP / IP.  
.
.
10 Tap IP Address  
.
The cursor is located at the first octet of the IP address.  
11 Use the number pad to enter the first octet of the IP address, and then tap  
.
The cursor moves to the next digit.  
NOTE: You can only enter one octet at a time and must tap  
12 Enter the rest of the octets, and then tap OK  
13 Tap Subnet Mask  
14 Repeat steps 11 and 12 to set Subnet Mask.  
15 Tap Gateway Address  
after entering each octet.  
.
.
.
16 Repeat steps 11 and 12 to set Gateway Address.  
17 Turn off the printer, and then turn it on again.  
When Using the Tool Box  
1
Click Start  
For Windows 10: Click the Start button  
For Dell Printer Hub, select the printer from My Printers on the home screen.  
®
All Programs  
Dell Printers  
Dell Printer Hub or Dell Printer Management Tool.  
Dell Printer Hub or Dell Printer Management Tool.  
2
For Dell Printer Management Tool, select the printer displayed by default, or another printer from the drop-down  
list on the upper-right corner of the home screen.  
3
Click the shortcut to the Tool Box on the left of the screen.  
The Tool Box opens.  
4
5
Click the Printer Maintenance tab.  
Select TCP/IP Settings from the list at the left side of the page.  
The TCP/IP Settings page appears.  
6
7
Select the mode from IP Address Mode, and then enter the values in IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway  
Address.  
Click Apply New Settings to take effect.  
You can also assign the IP address to the printer when installing the printer drivers with the installer. When you use the  
Wireless or Ethernet Connection feature, and the Get IP Addressis set to AutoIPor DHCPon the printer, you  
can set the IP address from 0.0.0.0 to the desired IP address on the printer selection window.  
Verifying the IP Settings  
You can confirm the settings by using the operator panel, printing the system settings report, or using the ping  
command.  
Verifying the Settings Using Operator Panel  
1
2
Press the  
(Information) button.  
Tap About This MFP  
.
Setting the IP Address  
81  
       
3
4
Tap the Networktab.  
Verify the IP address displayed in IP(v4) Address  
.
Verifying the Settings Using System Settings Report  
1
Print the system settings report.  
For details about how to print a system settings report, see "Report / List."  
2
Verify the correct IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address are listed in the system settings report under  
Network (Wired) or Network (Wireless)  
.
If the IP address shows 0.0.0.0(the factory default), an IP address has not been assigned. To assign one for your  
printer, see "Assigning an IP Address."  
Verifying the Settings Using Ping Command  
Send a ping request to the printer and verify that it responds. For example, at a command prompt on a network  
computer, type "ping" followed by the new IP address (for example, 192.0.2.0):  
ping 192.0.2.0  
If the printer is active on the network, you will receive a reply.  
82  
Setting the IP Address  
   
9
Loading Paper  
NOTE: The images used in this manual are those of the Dell™ Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw unless otherwise mentioned.  
NOTE: To avoid paper jams, do not remove the tray while printing is in progress.  
NOTE: The Software and Documentation disc also contains video instructions. In the main menu window of Dell Printer Easy  
Install, click Installation Video.  
1
Pull the tray out of the printer about 200 mm.  
2
Hold the tray with both hands, and remove it from the printer.  
Loading Paper  
83  
   
3
Adjust the paper guides.  
NOTE: Extend the front side of the tray when you load Legal-size paper.  
4
Before loading the print media, flex the sheets and fan them. Straighten the edges of the stack on a level surface.  
5
6
Load the print media into the tray with the recommended print side facing up.  
NOTE: Do not exceed the maximum fill line in the tray. Overfilling the tray may cause paper jams.  
Align the width guides against the edges of the paper.  
NOTE: When loading user-specified print media, adjust the width guides and slide the extendable part of the tray by  
pinching the length guide and sliding it until it rests lightly against the edge of the paper.  
84  
Loading Paper  
7
After confirming that the guides are securely adjusted, insert the tray into the printer.  
NOTE: If the front side of the tray is extended, the tray protrudes when it is inserted into the printer.  
8
On the touch panel, tap Size.  
NOTE: Set the same paper size and type as the actual paper being loaded. An error may occur if the paper size or type  
setting is different from the loaded paper.  
9
Select  
until the desired paper size appears, and then select the desired paper size.  
until the desired paper type appears, and then select the desired paper type.  
10 Tap Type  
.
11 Select  
12 Select OK.  
Loading Paper  
85  
86  
Loading Paper  
10  
Installing Printer Drivers on Windows® Computers  
NOTE: The images used in this manual are those of the Dell™ Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw unless otherwise mentioned.  
Identifying Printer Driver Pre-install Status  
Before installing the printer driver on your computer, check the IP address of your printer by performing one of the  
procedures in "Verifying the IP Settings."  
Changing the firewall settings before installing your printer  
If you are running one of the following operating systems, you must change the firewall settings before installing the  
Dell™ printer software:  
®
®
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Microsoft Windows Vista  
®
Windows  
Windows  
7
8
®
®
Windows 8.1  
®
Windows Server 2008  
®
Windows Server 2008 R2  
®
Windows Server 2012  
®
Windows Server 2012 R2  
®
Windows 10  
The following procedure uses Windows® 7 as an example.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Insert the Software and Documentation disc into your computer.  
Click Start Control Panel  
Select System and Security  
Click Allow a program through Windows Firewall  
Click Change settings Allow another program  
Check Browse  
Type D:\setup.exe(where D is the drive letter of the optical drive) in the File name text box, and then click  
Open  
Click Add, and then click OK  
.
.
.
.
.
.
8
.
Starting Dell Printer Easy Install  
1
Insert the Software and Documentation disc provided with the printer into your computer. The Dell Printer Easy  
Install program launches automatically.  
NOTE: If the Dell Printer Easy Install program does not launch automatically, follow the procedure below.  
®
®
For Windows Server 2008 and Windows Server 2008 R2  
Click start Run, enter D:\setup.exe (where D is the drive letter of the optical drive) in the Run dialog box, and  
then click OK  
For Windows Vista and Windows  
Click Start All Programs Accessories  
.
®
®
7
Run, enter D:\setup.exe (where D is the drive letter of the optical  
drive) in the Run dialog box, and then click OK  
.
Installing Printer Drivers on Windows® Computers  
87  
           
®
®
®
®
For Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows Server 2012, and Windows Server 2012 R2  
Point to the top or bottom right corner of the screen, and then click Search Type Runin the search box, click Apps (for  
Type D:\setup.exe(where D is the drive  
®
®
Windows 8 and Windows Server 2012 only), and then click Run  
letter of the optical drive), and then click OK  
.
®
For Windows 10  
Right-click the Start button, and then click Run  
Type D:\setup.exe(where D is the drive letter of the optical  
drive), and then click OK  
.
2
Click Main Menu  
.
The main menu window appears.  
USB Cable Connection Setup  
NOTE: If you are connecting the printer to a network, see "Network Connection Setup."  
For installing PCL, PS and Fax printer driver  
1
2
Start the Dell Printer Easy Install program, following the procedures shown in "Starting Dell Printer Easy Install."  
In the main menu window of Dell Printer Easy Install, click Connect  
.
88  
Installing Printer Drivers on Windows® Computers  
 
3
Select USB Cable Connection, and then click Next.  
4
Follow the on-screen instructions to connect the computer and the printer with a USB cable, and then turn the  
printer on.  
The Plug and Play installation starts and the installation software proceeds to the next page automatically.  
5
6
Select either Typical Installation (recommended) or Custom Installation from the installation wizard, and then  
click Next. If you select Custom Installation, you can select the specific software you want to install.  
Click Finish to exit the wizard when the Ready to Print! screen appears.  
If you want to verify installation, click Print Test Page before clicking Finish  
.
For installing XML Paper Specification (XPS) printer driver  
NOTE: XML Paper Specification (XPS) driver is supported on Windows Vista® or later.  
NOTE: If you are using Windows Vista® or Windows Server® 2008, you need to install Service Pack 2 or later, and then the  
Windows® Platform Update (KB971644). The update (KB971644) is available for download from Windows Update.  
Windows Vista® or Windows Vista® 64-bit Edition  
1
Extract the following zip file to your desired location.  
D:\Drivers\XPS\Win_7Vista\XPS-V3_H815dw_S2815dn.zip(where D is the drive letter of the  
optical drive)  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Click Start  
Click Add a printer  
Click Add a local printer  
Control Panel  
Hardware and Sound  
Printers.  
.
.
Select the port connected to this product, and then click Next  
.
Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box.  
Click Browse, and then select the inf file in the folder extracted in step 1.  
Click OK  
Select your printer name and click Next  
.
.
10 To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name box, and then click Next. To use this  
printer as the default printer, select the check box displayed under the Printer name, and then click Next  
.
Installation starts.  
If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click Continue  
.
Installing Printer Drivers on Windows® Computers  
89  
NOTE: If you are an administrator on the computer, click Continue; otherwise, contact your administrator to continue the  
desired action.  
11 As the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to verify installation.  
12 Click Finish  
.
Windows Server® 2008 or Windows Server® 2008 64-bit Edition  
NOTE: You must log in as an administrator.  
1
Extract the following zip file to your desired location.  
D:\Drivers\XPS\Win_7Vista\XPS-V3_H815dw_S2815dn.zip(where D is the drive letter of the  
optical drive)  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Click Start  
Click Add a printer  
Click Add a local printer  
Control Panel  
Hardware and Sound  
Printers.  
.
.
Select the port connected to this product, and then click Next  
.
Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box.  
Click Browse, and then select the inf file in the folder extracted in step 1.  
Click OK  
Select your printer name and click Next  
.
.
10 To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name box, and then click Next  
To use this printer as the default printer, select the Set as the default printer check box, and then click Next  
11 If you do not share your printer, select Do not share this printer. If you share your printer, select Share this printer  
so that others on your network can find and use it  
.
.
.
12 Click Next  
.
Installation starts.  
13 As the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to verify installation.  
14 Click Finish  
Windows® 7, Windows® 7 64-bit Edition, or Windows Server® 2008 R2  
.
1
Extract the following zip file to your desired location.  
D:\Drivers\XPS\Win_7Vista\XPS-V3_H815dw_S2815dn.zip(where D is the drive letter of the  
optical drive)  
2
3
Click Start  
Click Add a printer  
When you use Windows Server 2008 R2, click Add a local or network printer as an administrator  
If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click Yes  
Devices and Printers.  
.
®
.
.
NOTE: If you are an administrator on the computer, click Yes; otherwise, contact your administrator to continue the desired  
action.  
4
5
6
7
8
Click Add a local printer  
.
Select the port connected to this product, and then click Next  
.
Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box.  
Click Browse, and then select the inf file in the folder extracted in step 1.  
Click OK  
.
90  
Installing Printer Drivers on Windows® Computers  
9
Select your printer name and click Next.  
10 To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name box, and then click Next. Installation  
starts.  
11 If you do not share your printer, select Do not share this printer. If you share your printer, select Share this printer  
so that others on your network can find and use it  
.
12 Click Next  
.
13 As the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to verify installation. To use this printer as the default  
printer, select the Set as the default printer check box.  
14 Click Finish  
.
Windows® 8, Windows® 8 64-bit Edition, Windows® 8.1, Windows® 8.1 64-bit Edition, Windows Server® 2012, or  
Windows Server® 2012 R2  
1
Extract the following zip file to your desired location.  
D:\Drivers\XPS\Win_8\XPS-V4_H815dw_S2815dn.zip(where D is the drive letter of the optical  
drive)  
2
3
On the Desktop screen, right-click the bottom left corner of the screen, and then click Control Panel  
.
®
®
Click Hardware and Sound  
Printers Add a printer  
Click The printer that I want isn't listed  
Select Add a local printer or network printer with manual settings, and then click Next  
(
Hardware for Windows Server 2012/Windows Server 2012 R2)  
Devices and  
.
4
5
6
7
8
9
.
.
Select the port connected to your printer, and then click Next  
.
Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box.  
Click Browse, and then select the inf file in the folder extracted in step 1.  
Click OK  
.
10 Select your printer name and click Next  
.
11 To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name box, and then click Next. Installation  
starts.  
12 If you do not share your printer, select Do not share this printer. If you share your printer, select Share this printer  
so that others on your network can find and use it. Click Next  
.
13 As the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to verify installation. To use this printer as the default  
printer, select the Set as the default printer check box.  
14 Click Finish  
.
Windows® 10  
1
Extract the following zip file to your desired location.  
D:\Drivers\XPS\Win_8\XPS-V4_H815dw_S2815dn.zip(where D is the drive letter of the optical  
drive)  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Right-click the Start button, and then click Control Panel  
Click Hardware and Sound Devices and Printers Add a printer  
Click The printer that I want isn't listed  
Select Add a local printer or network printer with manual settings, and then click Next  
.
.
.
.
Select the port connected to this product, and then click Next  
.
Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box.  
Click Browse, and then select the inf file in the folder extracted in step 1.  
Installing Printer Drivers on Windows® Computers  
91  
9
Click OK  
.
10 Select your printer name and click Next  
.
11 To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name box, and then click Next. Installation  
starts.  
12 If you do not share your printer, select Do not share this printer. If you share your printer, select Share this printer  
so that others on your network can find and use it. Click Next  
.
13 As the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to verify installation. To use this printer as the default  
printer, select the Set as the default printer check box.  
14 Click Finish  
.
Network Connection Setup  
NOTE: To use this printer in a Linux environment, you need to install a Linux driver. For more information on how to install and  
use these, see "Installing Printer Drivers on Linux Computers (CUPS)."  
For installing PCL, PS and Fax printer driver  
1
2
Start the Dell Printer Easy Install program, following the procedures shown in "Starting Dell Printer Easy Install."  
In the main menu window of Dell Printer Easy Install, click Connect  
.
3
Select Wireless or Ethernet Connection, and then click Next.  
92  
Installing Printer Drivers on Windows® Computers  
 
4
Select the printer you want to install from the printer list, and then click Next. If the target printer is not displayed  
on the list, click the (Refresh) button to refresh the list or click add printer manually to add a printer to the list  
manually. You may specify the IP address and port name at this point.  
If you have installed this printer on the server computer, select the I am setting up this printer on a server check  
box.  
NOTE: When using AutoIP, 0.0.0.0is displayed in the installer. Before you can continue, you must enter a valid IP  
address.  
NOTE: If Windows Security Alert is displayed in this step, select Unblock or Allow access, and then continue the  
procedure.  
5
Specify the printer settings, and then click Next.  
a
b
c
Enter the printer name.  
If you want to set the printer as the default printer, select the Set this printer as default check box.  
If you want to install the PostScript 3 Compatible printer driver, select the PS Driver check box.  
If you want to install the Fax Driver, select the Fax Driver check box.  
d
If you want other users on the network to access the printer, select Share this printer with other computers on  
the network, and then enter a share name that users can identify.  
6
7
Select the software and documentation you want to install, and then click Install. If you want to change the  
installation destination, click Change Destination Folder and specify a new location.  
Click Finish to exit the wizard when the Ready to Print! screen appears.  
If you want to verify installation, click Print Test Page before clicking Finish  
.
For installing XML Paper Specification (XPS) printer driver  
NOTE: XML Paper Specification (XPS) driver is supported on Windows Vista® or later.  
Windows Vista® or Windows Vista® 64-bit Edition  
1
Extract the following zip file to your desired location.  
D:\Drivers\XPS\Win_7Vista\XPS-V3_H815dw_S2815dn.zip(where D is the drive letter of the  
optical drive)  
2
3
4
5
6
7
Click Start  
Click Add a printer  
Click Add a network  
Select printer and click Next, or click The printer that I want isn't listed  
Select Add a printer using a TCP/IP address or host name, and then click Next  
Select TCP/IP Device from Device type, and enter the IP address for Hostname or IP address, and then click  
Next  
If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click Continue  
Control Panel  
Hardware and Sound  
Printers.  
.
,
wireless or Bluetooth printer  
.
.
.
.
.
NOTE: If you are an administrator on the computer, click Continue; otherwise, contact your administrator to continue the  
desired action.  
8
9
Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box.  
Click Browse, and then select the inf file in the folder extracted in step 1.  
10 Click OK  
.
11 Select your printer name and click Next  
.
Installing Printer Drivers on Windows® Computers  
93  
12 To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name box, and then click Next  
.
To use this printer as the default printer, select the Set as the default printer check box, and then click Next  
Installation starts.  
.
13 As the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to verify installation.  
14 Click Finish  
.
Windows Server® 2008 or Windows Server® 2008 64-bit Edition  
NOTE: You must log in as an administrator.  
1
Extract the following zip file to your desired location.  
D:\Drivers\XPS\Win_7Vista\XPS-V3_H815dw_S2815dn.zip(where D is the drive letter of the  
optical drive)  
2
3
4
5
Click Start  
Click Add a printer  
Click Add a network  
Control Panel  
Hardware and Sound  
Printers.  
.
,
wireless or Bluetooth printer  
.
Select printer and click Next, or click The printer that I want isn't listed  
.
When you select your printer, go to step 8.  
When you click The printer that I want isn't listed, go to step 6.  
6
7
Select Add a printer using a TCP/IP address or host name, and then click Next  
Select TCP/IP Device from Device type, and enter the IP address for Hostname or IP address, and then click  
Next  
If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click Continue  
.
.
.
NOTE: If you are an administrator on the computer, click Continue; otherwise, contact your administrator to continue the  
desired action.  
8
9
Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box.  
Click Browse, and then select the inf file in the folder extracted in step 1.  
10 Click OK  
11 Select your printer name and click Next  
12 To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name box, and then click Next  
To use this printer as the default printer, select the Set as the default printer check box, and then click Next  
13 If you do not share your printer, select Do not share this printer. If you share your printer, select Share this printer  
so that others on your network can find and use it  
.
.
.
.
.
14 Click Next  
.
Installation starts.  
15 As the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to verify installation.  
16 Click Finish  
Windows Server® 2008 R2  
.
1
Extract the following zip file to your desired location.  
D:\Drivers\XPS\Win_7Vista\XPS-V3_H815dw_S2815dn.zip(where D is the drive letter of the  
optical drive)  
2
Click Start  
Devices and Printers.  
94  
Installing Printer Drivers on Windows® Computers  
3
4
5
Click Add a printer  
Click Add a network  
Select printer and click Next, or click The printer that I want isn't listed  
.
,
wireless or Bluetooth printer  
.
.
NOTE: When you click The printer that I want isn't listed, Find a printer by name or TCP/IP address screen appears. Find your  
printer on the screen.  
If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click Continue  
.
NOTE: If you are an administrator on the computer, click Continue; otherwise, contact your administrator to continue the  
desired action.  
6
7
8
9
Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box.  
Click Browse, and then select the inf file in the folder extracted in step 1.  
Click OK  
.
Select your printer name and click Next  
.
10 To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name box, and then click Next  
To use this printer as the default printer, select the Set as the default printer check box, and then click Next  
11 If you do not share your printer, select Do not share this printer. If you share your printer, select Share this printer  
so that others on your network can find and use it  
.
.
.
12 Click Next  
.
Installation starts.  
13 As the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to verify installation.  
14 Click Finish  
Windows® 7 or Windows® 7 64-bit Edition  
.
1
Extract the following zip file to your desired location.  
D:\Drivers\XPS\Win_7Vista\XPS-V3_H815dw_S2815dn.zip(where D is the drive letter of the  
optical drive)  
2
3
4
5
Click Start  
Click Add a printer  
Click Add a network  
Devices and Printers.  
.
,
wireless or Bluetooth printer  
.
Select printer and click Next, or click The printer that I want isn't listed  
.
When you select your printer, go to step 8.  
When you click The printer that I want isn't listed, go to step 6.  
6
7
Select Add a printer using a TCP/IP address or host name, and then click Next  
Select TCP/IP Device from Device type, and enter the IP address for Hostname or IP address, and then click  
Next  
If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click Yes  
.
.
.
NOTE: If you are an administrator on the computer, click Yes; otherwise, contact your administrator to continue the desired  
action.  
8
9
Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box.  
Click Browse, and then select the inf file in the folder extracted in step 1.  
10 Click OK  
.
11 Select your printer name and click Next  
.
Installing Printer Drivers on Windows® Computers  
95  
12 To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name box, and then click Next. Installation  
starts.  
13 If you do not share your printer, select Do not share this printer. If you share your printer, select Share this printer  
so that others on your network can find and use it  
.
14 Click Next  
.
15 As the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to verify installation. To use this printer as the default  
printer, select the Set as the default printer check box.  
16 Click Finish  
.
®
®
®
®
®
Windows 8, Windows 8 64-bit Edition, Windows 8.1, Windows 8.1 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2012, or  
®
Windows Server 2012 R2  
1
Extract the following zip file to your desired location.  
D:\Drivers\XPS\Win_8\XPS-V4_H815dw_S2815dn.zip(where D is the drive letter of the optical  
drive)  
2
3
On the Desktop screen, right-click the bottom left corner of the screen, and then click Control Panel  
.
®
®
Click Hardware and Sound  
Printers Add a printer  
Click The printer that I want isn't listed  
Select Add a printer using a TCP/IP or host name, and then click Next  
Select TCP/IP Device from Device Type, enter the IP address in the Hostname or IP address box, and then click  
Next  
(
Hardware for Windows Server 2012/Windows Server 2012 R2)  
Devices and  
.
4
5
6
.
.
.
7
8
9
Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box.  
Click Browse, and then select the inf file in the folder extracted in step 1.  
Click OK  
.
10 Select your printer name and click Next  
.
11 To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name box, and then click Next. Installation  
starts.  
12 If you do not share your printer, select Do not share this printer. If you share your printer, select Share this printer  
so that others on your network can find and use it. Click Next  
.
13 As the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to verify installation. To use this printer as the default  
printer, select the Set as the default printer check box.  
14 Click Finish  
.
Windows® 10  
1
Extract the following zip file to your desired location.  
D:\Drivers\XPS\Win_8\XPS-V4_H815dw_S2815dn.zip(where D is the drive letter of the optical  
drive)  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Right-click the Start button, and then click Control Panel  
Click Hardware and Sound Devices and Printers Add a printer  
Click The printer that I want isn't listed  
Select Add a local printer or network printer with manual settings, and then click Next  
.
.
.
.
Select the port connected to this product, and then click Next  
.
Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box.  
Click Browse, and then select the inf file in the folder extracted in step 1.  
96  
Installing Printer Drivers on Windows® Computers  
9
Click OK  
.
10 Select your printer name and click Next  
.
11 To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name box, and then click Next. Installation  
starts.  
12 If you do not share your printer, select Do not share this printer. If you share your printer, select Share this printer  
so that others on your network can find and use it. Click Next  
.
13 As the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to verify installation. To use this printer as the default  
printer, select the Set as the default printer check box.  
14 Click Finish  
.
Use the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool to monitor the status of your network printer without leaving your  
desk. You can view and/or change the printer settings, monitor toner level, and acknowledge the timing of ordering  
replacement consumables. You can click the Dell supplies link for ordering supplies.  
NOTE: The Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool is not available when the printer is directly connected to a computer or a print  
server.  
To launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, type the printer's IP address in your web browser. The printer  
configuration appears on the screen.  
You can set up the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool to send you an e-mail when the printer needs supplies or  
intervention.  
To set up e-mail alerts:  
1
2
3
Launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.  
Click E-Mail Server Settings Overview link.  
Under E-Mail Server Settings, enter the Primary SMTP Gateway  
address in the e-mail list box.  
Click Apply New Settings  
,
Reply Address, and your or key operator's e-mail  
4
.
NOTE: Connection pending until printer sends an alert is displayed on the SMTP server until an error occurs.  
Setting Up for Shared Printing  
You can share your USB connected printer with other computers (clients) on the same network.  
To share your USB connected printer, enable shared printing when installing the printer driver. You can also enable  
shared printing by following the procedures below.  
Enabling Shared Printing from the Computer  
Windows Server® 2003 or Windows Server® 2003 x64 Edition  
1
2
3
4
Click Start  
Printers and Faxes.  
Right-click the printer icon and select Properties  
.
On the Sharing tab, select the Share this printer check box, and then type a name in the Share name text box.  
Click Additional Drivers and select the operating systems of all network clients that print to the printer, and then  
click OK  
Click OK  
If you are missing files, you are prompted to insert the server operating system CD.  
.
5
.
Installing Printer Drivers on Windows® Computers  
97  
   
Windows Vista® or Windows Vista® 64-bit Edition  
1
2
3
Click Start  
Right-click the printer icon and select Sharing  
Click Change sharing options  
The message Windows needs your permission to continue appears.  
Click Continue  
Control Panel  
Hardware and Sound  
Printers.  
.
.
4
5
6
.
Select the Share this printer check box, and then type a name in the Share name text box.  
Click Additional Drivers and select the operating systems of all network clients that print to the printer, and then  
click OK  
.
7
Click OK  
.
Windows Server® 2008 or Windows Server® 2008 64-bit Edition  
1
2
3
4
5
Click Start  
Control Panel  
Printers.  
Right-click the printer icon and select Sharing  
.
Click Change Sharing Options if exists.  
Select the Share this printer check box, and then type a name in the Share name text box.  
Click Additional Drivers and select the operating systems of all network clients that print to the printer, and then  
click OK  
.
6
Click OK  
.
Windows® 7, Windows® 7 64-bit Edition, or Windows Server® 2008 R2  
1
2
3
Click Start  
Devices and Printers.  
Right-click the printer icon and select Printer properties  
.
On the Sharing tab, click Change Sharing Options if exists.  
Select the Share this printer check box, and then type a name in the Share name text box.  
4
5
Click Additional Drivers and select the operating systems of all network clients that print to the printer, and then  
click OK  
.
Click Apply, and then click OK  
.
Windows® 8, Windows® 8 64-bit Edition, Windows® 8.1, Windows® 8.1 64-bit Edition, Windows Server® 2012, Windows  
Server® 2012 R2, or Windows® 10  
1
On the Desktop screen, right-click the bottom left corner of the screen, and then click Control Panel  
Hardware  
®
®
and Sound  
(
Hardware for Windows Server 2012/Windows Server 2012 R2)  
Devices and Printers.  
®
For Windows 10:  
Right-click the Start button, and then click Control Panel  
Hardware and Sound  
Devices and Printers.  
2
3
4
5
Right-click the printer icon and select Printer properties  
On the Sharing tab, click Change Sharing Options if exists.  
Select the Share this printer check box, and then type a name in the Share name text box.  
Click Additional Drivers and select the operating systems of all network clients using this printer, and then click  
OK  
Click Apply, and then click OK  
.
.
6
.
98  
Installing Printer Drivers on Windows® Computers  
Checking the Shared Printer  
To confirm that the printer is properly shared:  
•
Ensure that the printer object in the Printers Printers and Faxes, or Devices and Printers folder is shared. The  
shared icon is shown under the printer icon.  
,
•
From a network client, browse Network or My Network Places. Find the host name of the server and the shared  
name you assigned to the printer.  
After you have checked that the printer is shared, use methods such as Windows® Point and Print to use the shared  
printer from a network client.  
NOTE: If the OS bit editions (32/64 bit edition) differ between a print server and a client computer, you need to manually add the  
printer driver for the client computer edition on the server. Otherwise, the printer driver cannot be installed on the client  
computer using methods such as Point and Print. For example, if the print server runs on Windows Vista® 32-bit edition, while  
the client computer runs on Windows® 7 64-bit edition, follow the procedures below to additionally install the printer driver for  
64-bit client on the 32-bit server.  
a
Click Additional Drivers on the screen for sharing printers.  
For details about how to display this screen, see "Enabling Shared Printing from the Computer."  
b
c
d
Select the x64 check box, and then click OK.  
Insert the Software and Documentation disc into your computer.  
Click Browse to specify the folder that contains the 64-bit OS driver, and then click OK  
Installation starts.  
.
Installing Printer Drivers on Windows® Computers  
99  
 
100  
Installing Printer Drivers on Windows® Computers  
11  
Installing Printer Drivers on Macintosh Computers  
Installing the Drivers and Software  
1
Run the Software and Documentation disc on the Macintosh computer.  
2
For Dell™ Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw, double-click the Dell MFP H815dw Installer icon, and then  
click Continue  
For Dell Smart Multifunction Printer | S2815dn, double-click the Dell MFP S2815dn Installer icon, and then  
click Continue  
When the popup dialog box prompts you for confirming the program included in the installation package, click  
Continue  
.
.
3
.
4
5
6
7
8
9
Click Continue on the Important Information screen.  
Select a language for the Software License Agreement screen.  
After reading the Software License Agreement, click Continue  
.
If you agree to the terms of the Software License Agreement, click Agree to continue the installation process.  
Confirm the installation location.  
Click Install to perform the standard installation.  
If you want to select a custom installation, click Customize to select items that you want to install.  
•
•
•
•
Dell MFP H815dw Printer Driver or Dell MFP S2815dn Printer Driver  
Dell MFP H815dw Fax Driver or Dell MFP S2815dn Fax Driver  
Dell MFP H815dw Scan Driver or Dell MFP S2815dn Scan Driver  
Dell Printer Status Monitor  
10 Type the administrator's name and password, and then click Install Software  
.
11 Click Continue Installation to continue the installation.  
12 When the message The installation was successful. appears, click Log Out to complete installation.  
Adding a Printer on Mac OS X 10.5, Mac OS X 10.6, Mac OS X 10.7, OS X 10.8, OS X 10.9, or OS X 10.10  
When Using a USB connection  
1
2
Turn on the printer.  
Connect the USB cable between the printer and the Macintosh computer.  
The printer is automatically added to your Macintosh computer.  
When Using IP Printing  
1
2
Turn on the printer.  
Ensure that Macintosh computer and the printer are connected via network.  
If you use wired connection, connect the LAN cable between the printer and the network.  
If you use wireless connection on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw, ensure that wireless connection  
is configured properly on your Macintosh computer and the printer.  
Installing Printer Drivers on Macintosh Computers  
101  
         
3
4
For Mac OS X 10.5 and Mac OS X 10.6: Open the System Preferences, and click Print & Fax  
For Mac OS X 10.7 and OS X 10.8: Open the System Preferences, and click Print & Scan  
For OS X 10.9 and OS X 10.10: Open the System Preferences, and click Printers & Scanners  
Click the Plus (+) sign, select Add Printer or Scanner Add Other Printer or Scanner for Mac OS X 10.7), and  
select IP  
For Mac OS X 10.5 and Mac OS X 10.6, just click the Plus (+) sign and select IP  
Select Line Printer Daemon - LPD for Protocol  
Type the IP address for the printer in the Address area.  
For Mac OS X 10.5, Mac OS X 10.6, and Mac OS X 10.7: Select Dell MFP H815dw v3012 PS vX.X or Dell MFP  
S2815dn v3012 PS vX.X for Print Using  
For OS X 10.8, OS X 10.9, and OS X 10.10: Select Dell MFP H815dw v3012 PS vX.X or Dell MFP S2815dn  
v3012 PS vX.X for Use  
NOTE: When printing is set up using IP printing, the queue name is displayed as blank. You do not need to specify it.  
.
.
.
(
.
.
5
6
7
.
.
.
8
9
Click Add  
.
Specify the options that have been installed on the printer, and then click Continue  
.
10 For Mac OS X 10.5 and Mac OS X 10.6: Confirm that the printer is displayed in the Print & Fax dialog box.  
For Mac OS X 10.7 and OS X 10.8: Confirm that the printer is displayed in the Print & Scan dialog box.  
For OS X 10.9 and OS X 10.10: Confirm that the printer is displayed in the Printers & Scanners dialog box.  
When Using Bonjour  
1
2
Turn on the printer.  
Ensure that Macintosh computer and the printer are connected via network.  
If you use wired connection, connect the LAN cable between the printer and the network.  
If you use wireless connection on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw, ensure that wireless connection  
is configured properly on your Macintosh computer and the printer.  
3
4
For Mac OS X 10.5 and Mac OS X 10.6: Open the System Preferences, and click Print & Fax  
For Mac OS X 10.7 and OS X 10.8: Open the System Preferences, and click Print & Scan  
For OS X 10.9 and OS X 10.10: Open the System Preferences, and click Printers & Scanners  
Click the Plus (+) sign, select Add Printer or Scanner Add Other Printer or Scanner for Mac OS X 10.7), and  
select Default  
For Mac OS X 10.5 and Mac OS X 10.6, just click the Plus (+) sign and select Default  
.
.
.
(
.
.
5
6
Select the printer connected via Bonjour from the Name (Printer Name for Mac OS X 10.5, Mac OS X 10.6, and  
Mac OS X 10.7) list.  
For Mac OS X 10.5, Mac OS X 10.6, and Mac OS X 10.7: Name and Print Using are automatically entered.  
For OS X 10.8, OS X 10.9, and OS X 10.10: Name and Use are automatically entered.  
NOTE: If AirPrint Printer is automatically selected for Print Using (or Use), select Dell MFP H815dw v3012 PS vX.X or Dell  
MFP S2815dn v3012 PS vX.X manually.  
7
8
Click Add.  
Specify the options that have been installed on the printer, and then click Continue  
.
102  
Installing Printer Drivers on Macintosh Computers  
9
For Mac OS X 10.5 and Mac OS X 10.6: Confirm that the printer is displayed in the Print & Fax dialog box.  
For Mac OS X 10.7 and OS X 10.8: Confirm that the printer is displayed in the Print & Scan dialog box.  
For OS X 10.9 and OS X 10.10: Confirm that the printer is displayed in the Printers & Scanners dialog box.  
Configuring Settings  
Configure the options available for the printer.  
1
For Mac OS X 10.5 and Mac OS X 10.6: Open the System Preferences, and click Print & Fax  
For Mac OS X 10.7 and OS X 10.8: Open the System Preferences, and click Print & Scan  
For OS X 10.9 and OS X 10.10: Open the System Preferences, and click Printers & Scanners  
Select the printer in the Printers list, and click Options & Supplies  
For Mac OS X 10.5, Mac OS X 10.6, Mac OS X 10.7, and OS X 10.8: Select Driver, select the options that can be  
configured for the printer, and then click OK  
For OS X 10.9 and OS X 10.10: Select Options, select the options that can be configured for the printer, and then  
click OK  
.
.
.
2
3
.
.
.
Installing Printer Drivers on Macintosh Computers  
103  
 
104  
Installing Printer Drivers on Macintosh Computers  
12  
Installing Printer Drivers on Linux Computers (CUPS)  
This section provides information for installing or setting up the printer driver with CUPS (Common UNIX Printing  
System) on Red HatEnterprise Linux 6 (32/64bit), SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 11 (32/64bit), or Ubuntu 12.04  
LTS (32/64bit).  
Operation on Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 Desktop  
Setup Overview  
1
2
3
4
Install the printer driver.  
Set up the print queue.  
Specify the default queue.  
Specify the printing options.  
Installing the Printer Driver  
1
2
Select Applications  
System Tools  
Terminal.  
Type the following command in the terminal window.  
For the 32-bit architecture  
su  
(Type the administrator password)  
rpm -ivh (Type the file path)/Dell-MFP-H815dw-  
S2815dn-*.*-*.i686.rpm  
For the 64-bit architecture  
su  
(Type the administrator password)  
rpm -ivh (Type the file path)/Dell-MFP-H815dw-  
S2815dn-*.*-*.x86_64.rpm  
The printer driver is installed.  
Setting Up the Queue  
To execute printing, you must set up the print queue on your workstation.  
1
2
3
4
Open the URL "http://localhost:631" using a web browser.  
Click Administration  
Click Add Printer  
.
.
Type rootas the user name, type the administrator password, and click OK  
.
For network connections:  
a
Select LPD/LPR Host or Printer from the Other Network Printers menu, and click Continue.  
Installing Printer Drivers on Linux Computers (CUPS)  
105  
           
b
Type the IP address of the printer in Connection, and click Continue  
Format: lpd://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx(the IP address of the printer)  
For USB connections:  
Select Dell MFP H815dw or Dell MFP S2815dn from the Local Printers menu, and click Continue  
Type the name of the printer in the Name box in the Add Printer window, and click Continue  
.
a
.
5
.
You can optionally specify the location and description of the printer for further information.  
If you want to share the printer, select the Share This Printer check box.  
6
7
Select Dell from the Make menu, and click Continue  
Select Dell MFP H815dw vXXXX PS or Dell MFP S2815dn vXXXX PS from the Model menu, and click Add  
Printer  
The setup is complete.  
.
.
Printing From the Applications  
When you have finished setting up the queue, you can print jobs from the applications. Start the print job from the  
application, and specify the queue in the print dialog box.  
However, sometimes you can print only from the default queue depending on the application (for example Mozilla).  
In these cases, before you start printing, set queue you want to print to as the default queue. For information on  
specifying the default queue, see "Setting the Default Queue."  
Setting the Default Queue  
1
2
Select Applications  
System Tools  
Terminal.  
Type the following command in the terminal window.  
su  
(Type the administrator password)  
lpadmin -d(Type the queue name)  
Specifying the Printing Options  
You can specify the printing options such as 2-sided printing.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Open the URL "http://localhost:631" using a web browser.  
Click Administration  
Click Manage Printers  
.
.
Click the queue name for which you want to specify the printing options.  
Select Set Default Options from the Administration menu.  
Click the desired setting item, specify the required settings, and click Set Default Options  
.
The message Printer xxx default options have been set successfully. appears.  
The setting is complete.  
Uninstalling the Printer Driver  
1
2
Select Applications  
System Tools  
Terminal.  
Type the following command in the terminal window to delete the print queue.  
106  
Installing Printer Drivers on Linux Computers (CUPS)  
     
su  
(Type the administrator password)  
/usr/sbin/lpadmin -x (Type the print queue name)  
3
4
Repeat the command above for all queues for the same model.  
Type the following command in the terminal window.  
su  
(Type the administrator password)  
rpm -e Dell-MFP-H815dw-S2815dn  
The printer driver is uninstalled.  
Operation on SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 11  
Setup Overview  
1
2
3
4
Install the printer driver.  
Set up the print queue.  
Specify the default queue.  
Specify the printing options.  
Installing the Printer Driver  
1
2
Select Computer  
More Applications... and select GNOME Terminal on the Application Browser.  
Type the following command in the terminal window.  
For the 32-bit architecture  
su  
(Type the administrator password)  
rpm -ivh (Type the file path)/ Dell-MFP-H815dw-  
S2815dn-*.*-*.i686.rpm  
For the 64-bit architecture  
su  
(Type the administrator password)  
rpm -ivh (Type the file path)/ Dell-MFP-H815dw-  
S2815dn-*.*-*.x86_64.rpm  
The printer driver is installed.  
Installing Printer Drivers on Linux Computers (CUPS)  
107  
     
Setting Up the Queue  
To execute printing, you must set up the print queue on your workstation.  
1
2
Select Computer  
More Applications..., and select YaST on the Application Browser.  
Type the administrator password, and click Continue  
.
YaST Control Center is activated.  
3
Select Hardware on YaST Control Center, and select Printer  
.
The Printer Configurations dialog box opens.  
For network connections:  
a
b
Click Add  
The Add New Printer Configuration dialog box opens.  
Click Connection Wizard  
The Connection Wizard dialog box opens.  
Select Line Printer Daemon (LPD) Protocol from Access Network Printer or Printserver Box via  
Type the IP address of the printer in IP Address or Host Name:  
Select Dell in the Select the printer manufacturer: drop-down menu.  
Click OK  
.
.
c
d
e
f
.
.
.
The Add New Printer Configuration dialog box appears.  
g
For Dell™ Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw, select Dell MFP H815dw vXXXX PS [Dell/  
Dell_MFP_H815dw.ppd.gz] from the Assign Driver list.  
For Dell Smart Multifunction Printer | S2815dn, select Dell MFP S2815dn vXXXX PS [Dell/  
Dell_MFP_S2815dn.ppd.gz] from the Assign Driver list.  
NOTE: You can specify the printer name in Set Name:.  
h
Confirm the settings, and click OK  
.
For USB connections:  
a
Click Add.  
The Add New Printer Configuration dialog box opens.  
The printer name is displayed in the Determine Connection list.  
b
For Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw, select Dell MFP H815dw vXXXX PS [Dell/  
Dell_MFP_H815dw.ppd.gz] from the Assign Driver list.  
For Dell Smart Multifunction Printer | S2815dn, select Dell MFP S2815dn vXXXX PS [Dell/  
Dell_MFP_S2815dn.ppd.gz] from the Assign Driver list.  
NOTE: You can specify the printer name in Set Name:.  
c
Confirm the settings, and click OK.  
Printing From the Applications  
When you have finished setting up the queue you can print jobs from the applications. Start the print job from the  
application, and specify the queue in the print dialog box.  
However, sometimes you can print only from the default queue depending on the application (for example Mozilla).  
In these cases, before you start printing, set queue you want to print to as the default queue. For information on  
specifying the default queue, see "Setting the Default Queue."  
108  
Installing Printer Drivers on Linux Computers (CUPS)  
 
Setting the Default Queue  
You can set the default queue when you add the printer.  
1
2
Select Computer  
More Applications..., and select YaST on the Application Browser.  
Type the administrator password, and click Continue  
.
YaST Control Center is activated.  
3
4
Select Hardware on YaST Control Center, and select Printer  
The Printer Configurations dialog box opens.  
Click Edit  
.
.
A dialog box to modify the specified queue opens.  
5
6
7
Confirm that the printer you want to set is selected in the Connection list.  
Select the Default Printer check box.  
Confirm the settings, and click OK  
.
Specifying the Printing Options  
You can specify the printing options such as 2-sided printing.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Open a web browser.  
Type http://localhost:631/admin in Location, and press <Enter>.  
Click Manage Printers  
Click Set Printer Options of the printer for which you want to specify the printing options.  
Specify the required settings, and click Set Printer Options  
Type rootas the user name, type the administrator password, and click OK  
.
.
.
NOTE: Set the password for authority as the printer administrator before setting the printer queue. If you have not set it, go to  
"Setting the Password for Authority as the Printer Administrator."  
The message Printer xxx has been configured successfully. appears.  
The setting is complete. Execute printing from the application.  
Installing Printer Drivers on Linux Computers (CUPS)  
109  
   
Setting the Password for Authority as the Printer Administrator  
You must set the password for authority as the printer administrator to do operations as the printer administrator.  
1
2
Select ComputerMore Applications... and select GNOME Terminal on the Application Browser.  
Type the following command in the terminal window.  
su  
(Type the administrator password)  
lppasswd -g sys -a root  
(Type the password for authority as the printer administrator after  
the Enter password prompt.)  
(Retype the password for authority as the printer administrator after  
the Enter password again prompt.)  
Uninstalling the Printer Driver  
1
2
Select Computer  
More Applications... and select GNOME Terminal on the Application Browser.  
Type the following command in the terminal window to delete the print queue.  
su  
(Type the administrator password)  
/usr/sbin/lpadmin -x (Type the printer queue name)  
3
4
Repeat the command above for all queues for the same model.  
Type the following command in the terminal window.  
su  
(Type the administrator password)  
rpm -e Dell-MFP-H815dw-S2815dn  
The printer driver is uninstalled.  
Operation on Ubuntu 12.04 LTS  
Setup Overview  
1
2
3
4
Install the printer driver.  
Set up the print queue.  
Specify the default queue.  
Specify the printing options.  
Installing the Printer Driver  
1
2
Click Dash Home, and enter terminalin the Search text box.  
Click Terminal in the Applications category of the search results.  
110  
Installing Printer Drivers on Linux Computers (CUPS)  
         
3
Type the following command in the terminal window.  
For the 32-bit architecture  
sudo dpkg –i(Type the file path)/dell-mfp-S2815dn-  
H815dw-*.*-*_i386.deb  
(Type the administrator password)  
For the 64-bit architecture  
sudo dpkg –i (Type the file path)/dell-mfp-S2815dn-  
H815dw-*.*-*_amd64.deb  
(Type the administrator password)  
The printer driver is installed.  
Setting Up the Queue  
To execute printing, you must set up the print queue on your workstation.  
1
2
3
4
5
Open the URL "http://localhost:631" using a web browser.  
Click Administration  
Click Add Printer  
Type the user name and the administrator password, and click OK  
.
.
.
Select either of the following according to the type of your printer connection.  
For network connections:  
a
Select LPD/LPR Host or Printer from the Other Network Printers menu, and click Continue  
Type the IP address of the printer in Connection, and click Continue  
Format: lpd://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx(the IP address of the printer)  
For USB connections:  
Select Dell MFP H815dw or Dell MFP S2815dn from the Local Printers menu, and click Continue  
Type the name of the printer in the Name box in the Add Printer window, and click Continue  
.
b
.
a
.
6
.
You can optionally specify the location and description of the printer for further information.  
If you want to share the printer, select the Share This Printer check box.  
7
8
Select Dell from the Make menu, and click Continue  
Select Dell MFP H815dw vXXXX PS or Dell MFP S2815dn vXXXX PS from the Model menu, and click Add  
Printer  
The setup is complete.  
.
.
Printing From the Applications  
When you have finished setting up the queue, you can print jobs from the applications. Start the print job from the  
application, and specify the queue in the print dialog box.  
Installing Printer Drivers on Linux Computers (CUPS)  
111  
 
However, sometimes you can print only from the default queue depending on the application (for example Mozilla).  
In these cases, before you start printing, set queue you want to print to as the default queue. For information on  
specifying the default queue, see "Setting the Default Queue."  
Setting the Default Queue  
1
2
3
Click Dash Home, and enter terminalin the Search text box.  
Click Terminal in the Applications category of the search results.  
Type the following command in the terminal window.  
sudo lpadmin -d(Type the queue name)  
(Type the administrator password)  
Specifying the Printing Options  
You can specify the printing options such as 2-sided printing.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Open the URL "http://localhost:631" using a web browser.  
Click Administration  
Click Manage Printers  
.
.
Click the queue name for which you want to specify the printing options.  
Select Set Default Options from the Administration menu.  
Click the desired setting item, specify the required settings, and click Set Default Options  
.
The message Printer xxx default options have been set successfully. appears.  
The setting is complete.  
Uninstalling the Printer Driver  
1
2
3
Click Dash Home, and enter terminalin the Search text box.  
Click Terminal in the Applications category of the search results.  
Type the following command in the terminal window to delete the print queue.  
sudo /usr/sbin/lpadmin -x(Type the print queue  
name)  
(Type the administrator password)  
4
5
Repeat the command above for all queues for the same model.  
Type the following command in the terminal window.  
sudo dpkg –r Dell-MFP-H815dw-S2815dn  
(Type the administrator password)  
The printer driver is uninstalled.  
112  
Installing Printer Drivers on Linux Computers (CUPS)  
     
Using Your Printer  
13 Operator Panel .......................................................................... 115  
14 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool................................... 125  
15 Understanding the Printer Menus.......................................... 181  
16 Print Media Guidelines............................................................. 263  
17 Loading Print Media ................................................................. 269  
113  
 
114  
13  
Operator Panel  
About the Operator Panel  
The operator panel has a touch panel, a ready/error LED, control buttons, and a number pad, which allows you to  
control the printer.  
NOTE: The images used in this manual are those of the Dell™ Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw unless otherwise mentioned.  
Dell™ Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
13  
12  
11  
6
10  
9
Dell Smart Multifunction Printer | S2815dn  
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
14  
12  
11  
10  
1
2
(Home) button  
•
•
Moves to the Home screen.  
(
Login/Logout) button  
Allows the user to log out.  
Operator Panel  
115  
           
3
4
Touch Panel  
•
•
Specifies the settings by directly tapping the screen.  
Displays various settings, instructions, and error messages.  
Ready / Error LED  
•
•
Shows a green light when the printer is ready and a blinking green light when data is being received.  
Shows an amber light when an error occurs and a blinking amber light when an unrecoverable print error  
occurs.  
5
6
Number Pad  
•
Enters numbers and characters.  
(Redial / Pause) button  
•
•
Calls up the last called number.  
Inserts a pause into a telephone number.  
7
8
(Copy) button  
•
•
Starts copying the document. Effective only from the Home screen while you are logged in to the printer.  
(Power Saver) button  
Enters or exits the Power Saver mode. When the printer is not used for a while, it enters the Power Saver mode  
to reduce power consumption. When the Power Saver mode is active, the  
(Power Saver) button blinks.  
9
(
NFC) reader  
•
•
Starts communication between the printer and an NFC card or a mobile device with the NFC function when  
the card or the device is tapped to the reader.  
10  
/
(
Speed Dial 1 Speed Dial 2) button  
/
Starts faxing the document to the number registered as "001" and "002" respectively of the FAX Speed Dial.  
Effective only when the Home screen is displayed.  
11  
12  
13  
(Delete) button  
•
•
•
Deletes numbers and characters.  
(Job Status) button  
Moves to the Job Status screen. From this screen, you can check or cancel active jobs.  
(Information) Wi-Fi|WPS button  
Moves to the Information screen. You can access various information and settings menu including Wi-Fi and  
Wi-Fi Direct features, check the name of the connected device via Wi-Fi Direct, check consumable levels and  
network status, and print various types of reports and lists.  
14  
(Information) button  
•
Moves to the Information screen. You can access various information and settings menu, check consumable  
levels and network status, and print various types of reports and lists.  
NOTE: Moving to a different menu or returning to a previous screen cancels the current entry or setting. Be sure to select OKto  
save the current entry or setting.  
116  
Operator Panel  
Basic Operations on the Touch Panel  
You can operate the touch panel as with a smartphone or a tablet.  
To Select the Item on the Screen  
Tap the item.  
Home  
Guest  
To Scroll the Screen or the Listed Items  
Swipe the screen by dragging your finger on the screen.  
Home  
Guest  
To scroll faster, flick the screen.  
Home  
Guest  
NOTE: If you cannot swipe or flick on some screens, operate by tapping the tiles or buttons.  
Operator Panel  
117  
     
About the Home Screen  
This section describes the fields and buttons on the Home screen which is displayed by pressing the  
(Home)  
button while the user is logged in to the printer. As the factory default setting, the Home screen is displayed when  
the printer is turned on.  
NOTE: To display the Home screen, the user must be registered beforehand and log in to the printer. For more information, see  
"User Authentication."  
Envelope Mode Icon  
Lock Icon  
Wi-Fi Direct Connection Status Icon*  
Wireless LAN Connection Status Icon*  
Notification Bar  
Time/Network Information  
Account Name  
Tiles  
Home  
Guest  
Dock Menu  
* Available on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw only  
Dock Menu  
The tiles are grouped according to the functions under the Dock Menu. Tap the button to display the tiles grouped  
under the button.  
(Recent) Button: Displays the tiles of the functions you recently used. Up to 8 tiles can be stored.  
(Copy) Button: Displays the tiles of the copy functions.  
(Print )Button: Displays the tiles of the print functions.  
(Scan) Button: Displays the tiles of the scan functions.  
(Fax) Button: Displays the tile of the fax function.  
(Tools) Button: Displays the Information screen.  
Notification Bar  
Displays the status of the printer when the handle  
is dragged down. To close, drag up the handle.  
You can adjust the screen brightness, see the toner information, or monitor the jobs currently progressing. Warnings  
are displayed in this area, too.  
To adjust the screen brightness, drag the slider in Screen Brightness.  
To see the Toner Information, tap Supplies.  
The information of the toner is displayed.  
118  
Operator Panel  
     
Lock Icon  
Displays when some functions are limited to access by the Functions Controlsettings. While the Lock icon is  
displayed on the upper-right of the tile, you are required to enter the password to enable the function. After the  
function is enabled, the Lock icon is displayed on the left to the account name, and you can access the password-  
locked functions without re-entering the password.  
Envelope Mode Icon  
Appears when the printer is set to the envelope mode.  
Wi-Fi Direct Connection Status Icon  
Displays the Wi-Fi Direct connection status. This icon is displayed only when Wi-Fi Direct is enabled.  
(Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw only)  
Wireless LAN Connection Status Icon  
Displays the intensity of wireless signal when the printer is connected to a wireless network.  
(Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw only)  
Time/Network Information  
Displays the current time or the network information (IPv4 address or host name).  
Account Name  
Displays the name of the user currently logging in to the printer.  
Tiles  
Displays the tiles of the functions you can select from.  
When the tile color is pale and disabled, you cannot select the function.  
When the Lock icon is displayed on the tile, the function is controlled by the Functions Controlsetting and  
you will need to enter the password to enable the function.  
For more information about Functions Control, see "Functions Control."  
Operator Panel  
119  
             
Moving, Adding or Deleting the Tiles  
To Move the Tiles  
Tap and hold the tile you want to move, and drag it to the desired place.  
The short orange bar appears between the tiles to show the nearest drop point when you are dragging the tile.  
You can move the tile between pages as well.  
Home  
Guest  
Home  
Guest  
NOTE: You cannot move the tiles in the Recent group screen of the Dock Menu.  
To Add the Tiles  
Find the Add Apptile in the last page of the Home screen or each group screen, and tap it.  
The Apps List screen appears.  
Tap the tile you want to add to the Home screen.  
To Delete the Tiles  
1
Tap and hold the tile you want to delete.  
appears.  
2
Drag the tile to  
.
Home  
Guest  
The confirmation screen is displayed.  
3
Tap OKto delete the tile.  
NOTE: To delete all tiles in the Recent group screen of the Dock Menu, tap  
OK.  
in the Recent group screen, and then tap  
120  
Operator Panel  
         
Using the Keyboard Displayed on the Touch Panel  
During operations, a keyboard for entering text sometimes appears. The following describes how to enter text.  
Back  
Done  
Back  
Done  
Back  
Done  
QWERTY  
AZERTY  
QWERTZ  
You can enter the following characters: numbers, alphabets, and symbols.  
Item  
Description  
Entering alphabets  
To enter uppercase letters, tap  
. To return to the lowercase letters, tap  
again. To lock to the uppercase letters, double-tap  
.
Entering numbers and symbols  
Entering a space  
Tap  
Tap  
Tap  
.
.
Deleting characters  
to delete one character at a time.  
To Change the Keyboard Layout  
1
2
3
4
5
Press the  
Tap the Toolstab, and then tap Language Settings  
Tap Keyboard Layout  
Tap the desired keyboard layout.  
Tap OK  
(Information) button.  
.
.
.
Operator Panel  
121  
     
Using the Number Pad  
As you perform various tasks, you may need to enter numbers. For example, when you enter fax number directly.  
Number Pad Numbers  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
Changing Numbers  
If you make a mistake while entering a number, press the  
the correct number.  
(Delete) button to delete the last digit. Then enter  
Inserting a Pause  
For some telephone systems, it is necessary to dial an access code and listen for a second dial tone. A pause must be  
entered in order for the access code to function. For example, enter the access code 9 and then press the  
(Redial/Pause) button before entering the telephone number. "-" appears on the display when a pause is entered.  
Printing a Panel Settings Report  
The panel settings report shows current settings for the printer menus. For details about how to print a panel settings  
report, see "Report / List."  
122  
Operator Panel  
         
Changing the Language  
You can change the language used on the touch panel.  
When Using the Operator Panel  
1
2
3
4
5
Press the  
Tap the Toolstab, and then tap Language Settings  
Tap Panel Language  
(Information) button.  
.
.
Tap  
until the desired language appears, and then tap the desired language.  
Tap OK  
.
When Using the Tool Box  
1
Click Start  
For Windows 10: Click the Start button  
For Dell Printer Hub, select the printer from My Printers on the home screen.  
®
All Programs  
Dell Printers  
Dell Printer Hub or Dell Printer Management Tool  
.
Dell Printer Hub or Dell Printer Management Tool  
.
2
For Dell Printer Management Tool, select the printer displayed by default, or another printer from the drop-down  
list on the upper-right corner of the home screen.  
3
Click the shortcut to the Tool Box on the left of the screen.  
The Tool Box opens.  
4
5
Click the Printer Maintenance tab.  
Select Panel Language from the list at the left side of the page.  
The Panel Language page appears.  
6
Select the desired language from Panel Language, and then click Apply New Settings.  
Setting the Power Saver Timer Option  
You can set the power saver timer for the printer. The printer enters the power saver mode when the printer is not  
used for a certain period of time.  
NOTE: If Panel Lock Controlis set to Enable, you need to enter the four-digit password to enter the Admin  
Settingsmenu.  
To set the power saver timer:  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Press the  
Tap the Toolstab, and then tap Admin Settings  
Tap System Settings  
Tap General  
Tap Power Saver Timer  
Tap Sleepor Deep Sleep  
(Information) button.  
.
.
.
.
.
Tap – or +, or use the number pad to enter the desired value.  
You can specify from 1 to 60 minutes for Sleepor 1 to 60 minutes for Deep Sleep  
.
8
Tap OK.  
Operator Panel  
123  
       
About the Concurrent Jobs Feature  
This feature enables you to start a concurrent job while a fax job is running. This is done by temporarily displaying  
the Home screen and switching to a different function that can be run concurrently such as copy or scan.  
1
2
3
While the printer is sending or receiving a fax, press the  
Tap Copy, or tap Scan  
After setting the copy or scan settings, tap OK  
(Home) button.  
.
.
For details about Copyor Scan, see "Copying" or "Scanning."  
124  
Operator Panel  
 
14  
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool  
Overview  
NOTE: This web tool is available only when the printer is connected to a network using an Ethernet cable or the built-in wireless  
network function.  
NOTE: The images used in this manual are those of the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw unless otherwise mentioned.  
One of the features of the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool is E-Mail Alert Setup, which sends e-mail to you or  
the key operator when the printer needs supplies or intervention.  
To fill out printer inventory reports requiring the asset tag number of all the printers in your area, use the Printer  
Information feature in the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. Enter the IP address of each printer on the  
network to display the asset tag number.  
The Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool feature also allows you to change the printer settings and keep track of  
printing trends. If you are a network administrator, you can copy the printer settings to one or all printers on the  
network using your web browser.  
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool  
125  
     
Setting Up the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
Ensure that you activate JavaScript in your browser before using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.  
Follow the procedures below to configure both the environment settings of your web browser and the operator panel  
before using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.  
NOTE: The Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool pages may be displayed unreadable if the pages were configured by the  
language different from the language of your web browser.  
Setting Up From Web Browser  
For Internet Explorer®  
Setting Up the Display Language  
1
2
3
Select Internet Options from Tools on the menu bar.  
Select Languages in the General tab.  
Specify the display language in order of preference in the Language list.  
For example:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Italian (Italy) [it-IT]  
Spanish  
German  
(
Traditional Sort) [es-ES tradnl  
]
(
Germany) [de-DE  
]
French  
English  
Danish  
(
France) [fr-FR  
United States) [en-US  
da-DK]  
Netherlands) [nl-NL  
Norwegian Bokmal) [no  
Swedish sv-SE  
]
(
]
[
Dutch  
(
]
(
]
[
]
Setting the IP Address of the Printer to Non-Proxy  
1
2
3
Select Internet Options from the Tools menu.  
Click LAN Settings under Local Area Network (LAN) Settings in the Connections tab.  
Do either of the following:  
•
•
Clear the Use a proxy server for your LAN check box under Proxy server  
Click Advanced, and then specify the IP address of the printer in the Do not use proxy server for addresses  
beginning with field under Exceptions  
.
.
Setting Up From Operator Panel  
You can launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool only when the operator panel setting is set to Enable.  
Confirm the operator panel setting if you cannot launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. For more  
information, see "Understanding the Printer Menus.  
"
126  
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool  
       
Starting the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
To launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, enter the IP address of your printer in your web browser.  
If you do not know the IP address of your printer, print the system settings report or display the TCP/IP settings  
page, which lists the IP address. For details about how to find your printer's IP address, see "Verifying the IP  
Settings."  
Overview of the Menu Items  
The Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool consists of the following menus:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Printer Status  
Printer Jobs  
Printer Settings  
Print Server Settings  
Copy Printer Settings  
Print Volume  
Address Book  
Printer Information  
Tray Management  
E-Mail Server Settings Overview  
Set Password  
Online Help  
Order Supplies at:  
Contact Dell Support at:  
*1  
Dell Document Hub at:  
*1 This item is available only on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw.  
Printer Status  
Use the Printer Status menu to get immediate feedback on the printer supply status. When the toner cartridge is  
running low, click the order supplies link on the first screen to order a new toner cartridge.  
Printer Jobs  
Use the Printer Jobs menu to contain information on the Job List page and Completed Jobs page.  
These pages show the details of the status regarding each protocol or job.  
Printer Settings  
Use the Printer Settings menu to change the printer settings and to view the settings in the operator panel remotely.  
Print Server Settings  
Use the Print Server Settings menu to change the type of printer interface and the necessary conditions for  
communications.  
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool  
127  
             
Copy Printer Settings  
Use the Copy Printer Settings menu to copy the printer settings to another printer or printers on the network by  
typing the IP address of each printer.  
NOTE: You must log in as an administrator to use this feature.  
Print Volume  
Use the Print Volume menu to check the history of printing, such as paper usage or the types of jobs being printed.  
Address Book  
Use the Address Book menu to view or edit the e-mail address, server address, and fax number entries in the Address  
Book, or to register new entries.  
NOTE: You must log in as an administrator to use this feature.  
Printer Information  
Use the Printer Information menu to get information on service calls, inventory reports, or the status of current  
memory and engine code levels.  
Tray Management  
Use the Tray Management menu to get information about the paper type and size for each tray.  
E-Mail Server Settings Overview  
Use the E-Mail Server Settings Overview menu to configure E-Mail Server settings for Scan to Email, e-mail alert  
and forwarding fax to email features. Job history reports, job statistics reports, and print volume reports can also be  
received by e-mail. To receive alerts or reports, specify your e-mail address or the e-mail address of the key operator in  
the E-Mail Server menu.  
Set Password  
Use the Set Password menu to lock the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool with a password so that other users do  
not inadvertently change the printer settings that you have selected.  
NOTE: You must log in as an administrator to use this feature.  
Online Help  
Click Online Help to visit the Dell Support website.  
Order Supplies at:  
www.dell.com/supplies  
Contact Dell Support at:  
support.dell.com  
Dell Document Hub at:  
www.dell.com/dochub  
128  
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool  
                     
Page Display Format  
The layout of the page is divided into three sections listed below:  
•
•
•
Top Frame  
Left Frame  
Right Frame  
Top Frame  
The top frame is located at the top of all pages. When the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool is activated, the  
current status and specifications of the printer are displayed in the top frame on every page.  
The following items are displayed in the top frame.  
1
2 3 4  
5
6
1
2
Product Name  
IPv4  
Displays the product name of the printer.  
Displays the IP address of the printer.  
IPv6  
3
4
Location  
Displays location of the printer. The location can be changed in the Basic Information section on  
the Print Server Settings page.  
Contact Person  
Displays the name of the printer administrator. The name can be changed in the Basic  
Information section on the Print Server Settings page.  
5
6
Event Panel  
Displays the indicator for the condition of the printer.  
Machine image  
Shows the bitmap image of the printer. The Printer Status menu appears in the right frame when  
you click the image.  
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool  
129  
   
Left Frame  
The left frame is located on the left side of all the pages. The menu titles displayed in the left frame are linked to  
corresponding menus and pages. You can go to the corresponding page by clicking their characters.  
The following menus are displayed in the left frame.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Printer Status  
Links to the Printer Status menu.  
Printer Jobs  
Links to the Printer Jobs menu.  
Printer Settings  
Print Server Settings  
Copy Printer Settings  
Print Volume  
Links to the Printer Settings Report menu.  
Links to the Print Server Reports menu.  
Links to the Copy Printer Settings menu.  
Links to the Print Volume menu.  
Address Book  
Links to the E-Mail Address menu.  
Links to the Printer Status menu.  
Printer Information  
Tray Management  
Links to the Tray Management menu.  
Links to the Print Server Settings menu.  
10 E-Mail Server Settings  
Overview  
11 Set Password  
Links to the Security menu.  
12 Online Help  
Links to the Dell Support website.  
Links to the Dell web page.  
13 Order Supplies at:  
14 Contact Dell Support at:  
15 Dell Document Hub at:*1  
Links to the Dell Support website.  
Links to the Dell Document Hub website.  
*1  
This item is available only on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw.  
Right Frame  
The right frame is located on the right side of all the pages. The contents of the right frame correspond to the menu  
that you select in the left frame. For details on the items displayed in the right frame, see "Details of the Menu  
Items."  
130  
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool  
   
Buttons in the Right Frame  
1
2
3
1
2
Refresh Button  
Receives the current printer configuration and updates the latest information in the right frame.  
Apply New Settings  
Button  
Submits new settings made on the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool to the printer. The new  
settings replace the old settings of the printer.  
3
Restore Settings Button Restores the old settings that existed before any changes were made. New settings will not be  
submitted to the printer.  
Changing the Settings of the Menu Items  
Some menus allow you to change the printer settings through the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. When you  
access these menus, the authentication window appears on the screen. Type a user name and password for the  
printer administrator by following the prompts displayed in the dialog box.  
The default user name is admin, and the default password is left blank (NULL). You can change only the password in  
the Set Password page in the Security menu. The user name cannot be changed. See "Set Password" for more  
information.  
Details of the Menu Items  
"Printer Status"  
"Printer Status"  
"Printer Status"  
"Printer Events"  
"Printer Information"  
"Job List"  
"Printer Jobs"  
"Printer Jobs"  
"Completed Jobs"  
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool  
131  
   
"Printer Settings"  
"Printer Settings Report"  
"Printer Settings"  
"Menu Settings"  
"Reports"  
"System Settings"  
"Network Settings"  
"USB Settings"  
"PCL Settings"  
"PS Settings"  
"PDF Settings"  
"Secure Settings"  
"Copy Defaults"  
"Copy Settings"  
"Fax Defaults"  
"Fax Settings"  
"Scan Defaults"  
"Direct Print Defaults/USB Direct Print Defaults"  
"MIFARE Customized Card"*1  
"Paper Density"  
"Printer Maintenance"  
"Adjust Transfer Unit"  
"Adjust Fusing Unit"  
"Adjust Density"  
"Chart"  
"Clean Developer"  
"Clean Transfer Unit"  
"Reset Defaults"  
"Initialize PrintMeter"  
"Storage"*2  
"Non-Dell Toner"  
"Adjust Altitude"  
"Decrease Electrostatic Memory"  
"Decrease Ghosting"  
"Clock Settings"  
"Web Link Customization"  
132  
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool  
"Print Server Settings"  
"Print Server Reports"  
"Print Server Settings"  
"Print Server Setup Page"  
"E-Mail Server Setup Page"  
"Basic Information"  
"Port Settings"  
"TCP/IP"  
"SMB"  
"E-Mail Server"  
"Bonjour (mDNS)"  
"SNMP"  
"Scan to Network Folder"  
"SNTP"  
"AirPrint"  
"Mopria"  
"Google Cloud Print"  
"Dell Document Hub"*1  
"Proxy Server"  
"Wi-Fi"*1, *3  
"Wi-Fi Direct"*1, *3  
"Reset Print Server"  
"Set Password"  
"Security"  
"Authentication System"  
"Kerberos Server"  
"LDAP Server"  
"LDAP Authentication"  
"LDAP User Mapping"  
"SSL/TLS"  
"IPsec"  
"802.1x"*4  
"IP Filter (IPv4)"  
"SMTP Domain Filtering"  
"Copy Printer Settings"  
"Copy Printer Settings Report"  
"Print Volume"  
"Copy Printer Settings" "Copy Printer Settings"  
"Print Volume"  
"Address Book"  
"Print Volume"  
"Dell AccessControl"  
"E-Mail Address"  
"E-Mail Group"  
"Default Setup"  
"Server Address"  
"FAX Speed Dial"  
"FAX Group"  
"E-Mail Address"  
"Server Address"  
"Phone Book"  
"Tray Management"  
"Tray Management"  
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool  
133  
*1  
*2  
*3  
*4  
This item is available only on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw.  
This item is available only when RAM Disk is enabled.  
This item is available only when the printer is connected using the wireless network.  
This item is available only when the printer is connected using an Ethernet cable.  
Printer Status  
Use the Printer Status menu to check the status of consumables, hardware, and specifications of the printer.  
The following pages are displayed in the Printer Status menu.  
Printer Status  
Purpose:  
To check the status of the consumables, trays, and covers.  
Values:  
Toner Cartridge  
Consumables  
Paper Trays  
OK  
Indicates that there is enough amount of toner for use.  
Indicates that the toner needs to be replaced soon.  
Replace Soon  
Replace Now  
OK  
Indicates that the toner needs to be replaced now.  
Status  
Status  
Indicates that the status of the drum cartridge is OK for use.  
Indicates that the drum cartridge needs to be replaced soon.  
Indicates that the drum cartridge needs to be replaced now.  
Replace Soon  
Replace Now  
OK  
Indicates that there is some paper in the tray but the quantity is  
unknown.  
Add Paper  
Indicates that there is no paper in the tray.  
Displays the maximum capacity of the paper tray.  
Displays the size of paper in the tray.  
Capacity  
Size  
Output Tray  
Cover  
Status  
OK  
Indicates that the tray is available.  
Capacity  
Status  
Displays the maximum capacity of the paper tray.  
Indicates that the cover is closed.  
Closed  
Open  
Indicates that the cover is open.  
Printer Type  
Displays the type of the printer. Laser is displayed normally.  
Displays the printing speed.  
Printing Speed  
134  
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool  
   
Printer Events  
Purpose:  
To check the details of all alerts or indications of faults displayed in the Printer Events page when any faults such as  
Out of Paper or Cover is Open occur.  
Values:  
Location  
Details  
Displays the location where a fault occurred.  
Displays the details of the fault.  
Printer Information  
Purpose:  
To verify the printer details such as the hardware configuration and software version. This page can also be displayed  
by clicking Printer Information in the left frame.  
Values:  
Dell Service Tag Number  
Express Service Code  
Asset Tag Number  
Displays Dell service tag number.  
Displays Dell express service code.  
Displays the asset tag number of the printer.  
Displays the serial number of the printer.  
Displays the memory capacity.  
Printer Serial Number  
Memory Capacity  
Processor Speed  
Displays the processing speed.  
Printer Revision Levels  
Firmware Version  
Displays the revision date (revision level).  
Printer Jobs  
The Printer Jobs menu contains information on the Job List and Completed Jobs pages. These pages show the  
details of the status regarding each protocol or job.  
Job List  
Purpose:  
To confirm the jobs that are being processed. Click the Refresh button to update the screen.  
Values:  
ID  
Displays the job ID.  
Job Name  
Owner  
Displays the file name of the job being processed.  
Displays the name of the job owner.  
Displays the name of the host computer.  
Displays the status of the job being processed.  
Displays the type of the job.  
Host Name  
Job Status  
Job Type  
Host I/F  
Displays the status of the host interface.  
Displays the date when the job was submitted.  
Job Submitted Time  
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool  
135  
       
Completed Jobs  
Purpose:  
To check the completed jobs. Up to the last 20 jobs are displayed. Click the Refresh button to update the screen.  
Values:  
ID  
Displays the job ID.  
Job Name  
Displays the file name of the completed job.  
Displays the name of the job owner.  
Displays the name of the host computer.  
Displays the status of the completed job.  
Displays the type of the job.  
Owner  
Host Name  
Output Result  
Job Type  
Impression Number  
No. of Sheets  
Host I/F  
Displays the total number of pages for the job.  
Displays the total number of sheets for the job.  
Displays the status of the host interface.  
Displays the date when the job was submitted.  
Job Submitted Time  
Printer Settings  
Use the Printer Settings menu to display the Printer Settings Report, Printer Settings, and Printer Maintenance  
tabs and to configure the printer settings.  
The following tabbed pages are displayed at the top of the right frame.  
Printer Settings Report  
The Printer Settings Report tab includes the Menu Settings and Reports pages.  
Menu Settings  
Use the Menu Settings page to display the current settings of the printer menus.  
Reports  
Purpose:  
To print various types of reports and lists.  
Values:  
System Settings  
Panel Settings  
PCL Fonts List  
PCL Macros List  
PS Fonts List  
PDF Fonts List  
Job History  
Click Start to print the System Settings report.  
Click Start to print the Panel Settings report.  
Click Start to print the PCL (Hewlett-Packard Printer Control Language) Fonts List.  
Click Start to print the PCL Macro List.  
Click Start to print the PS Fonts List.  
Click Start to print the PDF Fonts List.  
Click Start to print the Job History report.  
Click Start to print the Error History report.  
Click Start to print the Print Meter report.  
Click Start to print the Demo Page.  
Error History  
Print Meter  
Demo Page  
Protocol Monitor  
Click Start to print the Protocol Monitor report.  
136  
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool  
         
Speed Dial  
Click Start to print the Speed Dial report.  
Click Start to print the Address Book list.  
Click Start to print the Server Address list.  
Click Start to print the Fax Activity report.  
Click Start to print the Fax Pending list.  
Click Start to print the Stored Documents list.  
Address Book  
Server Address  
Fax Activity  
Fax Pending  
Stored Documents*1  
*1  
This item is available only when RAM Disk is enabled.  
Printer Settings  
The Printer Settings tab includes System Settings, Network Settings, USB Settings, PCL Settings, PS Settings,  
PDF Settings, Secure Settings, Copy Defaults, Copy Settings, Fax Defaults, Fax Settings, Scan Defaults, Direct  
Print Defaults/USB Direct Print Defaults*1, and MIFARE Customized Card pages.  
*1  
Direct Print on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw; USB Direct Print on the Dell Smart Multifunction Printer | S2815dn  
System Settings  
Purpose:  
To configure the basic printer settings.  
Values:  
Power Saver Time - Sleep  
Sets the time taken by the printer to enter Sleep mode after it finishes a job.  
Power Saver Time - Deep Sleep  
Sets the time taken by the printer to enter Deep Sleep mode after it has  
entered Sleep mode.  
mm / inch  
Sets the measurement unit to be used on the touch panel as either mm or  
inches.  
Screen Brightness  
Sets the brightness level of the touch panel screen.  
Control Panel Tone  
Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when the operator panel input is  
correct, or disables the tone.  
Invalid Key Tone  
Machine Ready Tone  
Copy Completed Tone  
Job Completed Tone  
Fault Tone  
Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when the operator panel input is  
incorrect, or disables the tone.  
Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when the printer becomes ready,  
or disables the tone.  
Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when a copy job is complete, or  
disables the tone.  
Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when a job other than a copy job  
is complete, or disables the tone.  
Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when a job ends abnormally, or  
disables the tone.  
Alert Tone  
Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when a problem occurs, or  
disables the tone.  
Out of Paper Tone  
Low Toner Alert Tone  
Auto Clear Alert Tone  
Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when the printer runs out of  
paper, or disables the tone.  
Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when the toner is low, or  
disables the tone.  
Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted 5 seconds before the printer  
performs auto clear, or disables the tone.  
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool  
137  
   
NFC Authentication Tone*1  
Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when an NFC card is placed on  
the NFC reader for authentication, or disables the tone.  
All Tones  
Sets the volume of all the alert tones, or disables all the tones.  
Alerts you if the toner is low.  
Low Toner Alert Message  
OffHook Wake Up  
Sets whether to wake up from Sleep or Deep Sleep mode when you pick up  
the handset of the external telephone.  
Auto Log Print  
RAM Disk  
Sets if a job history needs to be printed after every 20 jobs.  
Sets whether to allocate RAM for the file system for the Secure Print, Proof  
Print, Private Mail Box Print, and Public Mail Box Print features.  
Panel Language  
Max E-mail Size  
Used to set the language on the touch panel.  
Sets the maximum size of e-mail that can be sent. The available range is  
from 50 to 16384 (KB) (Default: 2048).  
Auto Reset  
Sets the amount of time before the printer automatically resets its settings  
to the defaults when no additional settings are made.  
Fault Time-out  
Sets the amount of time the printer waits before canceling a job that stops  
abnormally.  
Default Paper Size  
Print ID  
Sets the default print paper size.  
Sets where to print the user ID on the output paper.  
Print Text  
Sets whether the printer outputs PDL data (which is not supported by the  
printer) as text when the printer receives it.  
Banner Sheet Insert Position  
Banner Sheet Specify Tray  
Substitute Tray  
Sets where to insert a banner sheet in the output.  
Sets from which tray a banner sheet is fed.  
Sets whether to use another size paper when the paper that is loaded in the  
specified tray does not match the paper size settings for the current job.  
Letterhead 2 Sided  
A4<>Letter Switch  
Sets whether to print on both sides of letterhead.  
Sets whether to print A4 size jobs on Letter size paper if A4 is not available  
in the paper trays and vice versa (Letter size job on A4 size paper).  
A5<>Statement Switch  
Sets whether to print A5 size jobs on Statement size paper if A5 is not  
available in the paper trays and vice versa (Statement size job on A5 size  
paper).  
Report 2 Sided Print  
Use Another Tray  
Sets whether to print reports on both sides a sheet of paper.  
Sets whether to show a message to select another tray when the specified  
paper is not available in the paper tray.  
Envelope Mode Mismatch  
Sets whether to display the alert window when the print job is started  
without setting to the envelope mode.  
Resume Printing After Jam Recovery  
Tap To Print*1  
Sets whether to reprint or delete the jammed job after jam recovery.  
Sets whether to add the printer to a mobile device such as a tablet or a  
smartphone by tapping the device to  
of the printer.  
*1  
This item is available only on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw.  
Network Settings  
Purpose:  
To Specify the PostScript 3 Compatible communication protocol for this printer.  
Values:  
PS Data Format  
Sets PostScript 3 Compatible communication protocol.  
138  
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool  
 
USB Settings  
Purpose:  
To change USB settings on your printer.  
Values:  
USB Port  
Enables the USB interface on your printer.  
PS Data Format  
Job Time-out  
Sets PostScript 3 Compatible communication protocol.  
Sets the amount of time the printer waits for data to arrive from the computer.  
PCL Settings  
Purpose:  
To change the PCL settings.  
Values:  
Paper Tray  
Sets the paper input tray.  
Paper Size  
Sets the paper size.  
Custom Paper Size - Y  
Sets the length of custom size paper. The available range is from 127 mm (5.0 inch) to 355 mm (14.0  
inch).  
Custom Paper Size - X  
Sets the width of custom size paper. The available range is from 77 mm (3.0 inch) to 215 mm (8.5  
inch).  
Orientation  
2 Sided Print  
Font  
Sets how text and graphics are oriented on the page.  
Sets duplexing as the default for all print jobs.  
Sets the font from the list of registered fonts.  
Sets a symbol set for the specified font.  
Symbol Set  
Font Size  
Sets the font size for scalable typographic fonts.  
Sets the font pitch for scalable mono spaced fonts.  
Sets the number of lines in a page.  
Font Pitch  
Form Line  
Quantity  
Sets the number of copies to print.  
Image Enhance  
Hex Dump  
Sets whether to enable the Image Enhancement feature.  
Sets whether to help isolate the source of a print job problem. With Hex Dump selected, all data  
sent to the printer is printed in hexadecimal and character representation. Control codes are not  
executed.  
Draft Mode  
Sets whether to print in the draft mode.  
Line Termination  
Ignore Form Feed  
A4 Wide  
Sets how to handle line terminations.  
Sets whether to ignore blank pages that only contain Form Feed control codes.  
Sets whether to expand the printable area width.  
Barcode Mode  
Sets whether to enable the barcode mode, which is suitable for barcode printing.  
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool  
139  
   
PS Settings  
Purpose:  
To change printer settings that only affect jobs using the PostScript 3 Compatible emulation printer language.  
Values:  
PS Error Report  
Sets whether the contents of the errors concerning PostScript 3 Compatible page description  
language are printed.  
PS Job Time-out  
Sets the execution time for one PostScript 3 Compatible job.  
Paper Select Mode  
Sets the way to select the tray for the PostScript 3 Compatible mode.  
PDF Settings  
Purpose:  
To change the PDF settings.  
Values:  
Quantity  
Sets the number of copies.  
Sets whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper.  
Sets a print mode.  
2 Sided Print  
Print Mode  
PDF Password  
Re-enter PDF Password  
Collation  
Sets a password.  
Confirms the set password.  
Sets whether to sort the output.  
Sets the output paper size.  
Sets the output layout.  
Output Size  
Layout  
Detect Job Separator  
Sets whether to detect the end of the job in printing PDF files successively from the  
USB memory.  
140  
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool  
   
Secure Settings  
Panel Lock  
Purpose:  
To set a limited access to Admin Settingswith a password, and to set or change the password.  
Values:  
Panel Lock Control*1  
New Password  
Enables/Disables password protection for the Admin Settings.  
Sets a password that is required to access the Admin Settings.  
Confirms the set password.  
Re-enter Password  
*1  
Some setting items in the Secure Settings are displayed only when this setting item is enabled.  
NOTE: You can set the password for the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool from Set Password in Print Server Settings.  
Functions Control  
Purpose:  
To specify whether to lock the Copy, Scan, Fax, and Print functions with a password, and to set or change the  
password.  
Values:  
Copy  
Sets whether to lock the Copy function with a password.  
Sets whether to lock the Scan to Email function with a password.  
Sets whether to lock the Fax function with a password.  
Sets whether to enable or disable the Fax Driver function.  
Scan to E-mail  
Fax  
Fax Driver  
Scan to Network Folder Sets whether to lock the Scan to Network Folder function with a password.  
Scan to Computer  
PC Scan  
Sets whether to lock the Scan to Computer function with a password.  
Sets whether to lock the PC Scan function with a password.  
Scan to USB  
USB Direct Print  
ID Copy  
Sets whether to lock the Scan to USB function with a password.  
Sets whether to lock the USB Direct Print function with a password.  
Sets whether to enable or disable the ID Copy function.  
USB Services - Show  
When Inserted  
Sets whether to show a USB Drive Detected screen when a USB memory is inserted into the printer.  
New Password  
Sets a password that is required to access the Copy, Scan, Fax, and Print functions.  
Confirms the set password.  
Re-enter Password  
NOTE: You can set the password for the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool from Set Password in Print Server Settings.  
Secure Receive  
Purpose:  
Allows you to password protect all the incoming faxes. When the Secure Receive feature is enabled, the printer  
stores incoming faxes and prints them when the correct password is entered on the operator panel.  
Values:  
Secure Receive Set  
New Password  
Enables/Disables password protection for all incoming faxes.  
Sets a password to print incoming faxes.  
Confirms the set password.  
Re-enter Password  
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool  
141  
 
NOTE: You can set the password for the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool from Set Password in Print Server Settings.  
Desktop Login  
NOTE: This Desktop Login feature is available on the Dell Smart Multifunction Printer | S2815dn only.  
Purpose:  
Select the user authentication method from either local authentication or remote authentication. To use the remote  
authentication method, the LDAP server or the Kerberos server is required to authenticate the user.  
Values:  
Desktop Authentication Sets the authentication method.  
Local Authentication* Use the local authentication method.  
Remote Authentication Use the authentication by external server.  
Authentication System Click to display the Authentication System page and to specify the authentication system settings.  
User Login History  
Sets whether to enable the user login history feature.  
Edit E-mail From Fields  
Purpose:  
To set whether to enable editing of the transmission source when you use the Scan to Email function.  
Reconfirm Recipients  
Purpose:  
To set whether to reconfirm before sending fax or scan jobs.  
Software Download  
Purpose:  
To set whether to enable download of firmware updates.  
Display of Network Information  
Purpose:  
To set whether to show network information in the message field of the Home screen.  
Login Error  
Purpose:  
To specify how many times an administrator can attempt to log in to Panel Lock, Functions Control, and Secure  
Receive.  
NFC Authentication  
NOTE: NFC Authentication feature is available on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw only.  
Purpose:  
To set whether to enable the authentication using the NFC authentication card.  
FIPS 140-2 Validation Mode  
NOTE: The FIPS 140-2 Validation Mode feature is available on the Dell Smart Multifunction Printer | S2815dn only.  
Purpose:  
To set whether to use the FIPS 140-2 Level-1 approved encryption algorithms for RSA modules.  
142  
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool  
 
NOTE: Communication using the following protocols will not be encrypted using FIPS 140-2 Level-1 approved encryption  
algorithms even when FIPS 140-2 Validation Mode is enabled. Users are advised to turn them off manually when FIPS 140-2  
Validation Mode is enabled:  
•
•
•
SNMP v3  
SMB  
PDF Direct Print  
NOTE: This feature may not be available for certain models.  
Set Available Time - Copy/Scan/Fax/Print  
Purpose:  
To specify the time to enable the secure setting for the Copy, Scan, Fax, and Print functions.  
Values:  
Set Available Time  
Start Time  
Allows you to set the available time period for the Copy, Scan, Fax, and Print functions.  
Sets the start time of the available time period for the Copy, Scan, Fax, and Print functions.  
Sets the end time of the available time period for the Copy, Scan, Fax, and Print functions.  
Sets the day of the week to repeat the setting.  
End Time  
Recurrence  
Secure Job Expiration  
NOTE: Secure Job Expiration feature is available only when RAM Disk is enabled.  
Purpose:  
To specify the date and time to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk.  
Values:  
Expiration Mode  
Expiration Time  
Recurrence  
Allows you to set the date to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk.  
Sets the time to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk.  
Sets the period to repeat the setting.  
Weekly Settings  
Monthly Settings  
Sets the day of the week to repeat the setting.  
Sets the day of the month to repeat the setting.  
Copy Defaults  
Purpose:  
To create your own default Copy settings.  
Values:  
Select Tray  
Sets the default input tray.  
Collation  
Sets whether to sort a copy job.  
Reduce/Enlarge  
Sets the default reduction/enlargement ratio.  
Custom Reduce/Enlarge Sets the custom reduction/enlargement ratio.  
Original Size  
Original Type  
Darken/Lighten  
Sharpness  
Sets the paper size of the original.  
Sets the type of the original.  
Sets the default copy density.  
Sets the default sharpness level.  
Auto Exposure  
Sets whether to suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the copy.  
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool  
143  
 
Auto Exposure Level  
Sets the background suppression level.  
Copy Settings  
Purpose:  
To configure the Copy settings.  
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.  
Values:  
2 Sided Copying  
Binding of Original  
2-Up  
Sets whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper.  
Sets the binding position for the 2-sided copying.  
Off*  
Does not perform multiple-up printing.  
Auto  
Automatically reduces the original pages to fit onto one sheet of paper.  
Manual  
Prints the original pages onto one sheet of paper in the size specified for  
Reduce/Enlarge.  
Margin Top/Bottom  
Sets the value of the top and bottom margins within the range of 0 mm (0.0 inch) to 50 mm (2.0  
inch).  
Margin Left/Right  
Margin Middle  
Sets the value of the left and right margins within the range of 0 mm (0.0 inch) to 50 mm (2.0 inch).  
Sets the value of the middle margin within the range of 0 mm (0.0 inch) to 50 mm (2.0 inch).  
Fax Defaults  
Purpose:  
To create your own default Fax settings.  
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.  
Values:  
Resolution  
Standard*  
Fine  
Suitable for documents with normal sized characters.  
Suitable for documents containing small characters or thin lines or  
documents printed using a dot-matrix printer.  
Super Fine  
Suitable for documents containing extremely fine detail. The super fine  
mode is enabled only if the remote machine also supports the Super Fine  
resolution.  
Photo  
Suitable for documents containing photographic images.  
2 Sided Scanning  
Binding of Original  
Darken/Lighten  
Delayed Send  
Sets whether to scan both sides of a document.  
Sets the binding position for the 2-sided scanning.  
Sets the default density to fax your documents lighter or darker.  
Sets the fax transmission start time when sending a fax at a specified time.  
Fax Settings  
Purpose:  
To configure the Fax settings.  
NOTE: You cannot set up the items on the Fax Settings page unless you set up the country code under Country.  
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.  
144  
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool  
       
Values:  
Fax Number  
Country  
Allows you to enter the fax number of the printer, which will be printed on the header of faxes.  
Sets the country where the printer is used.  
Fax Header Name  
Line Type  
Allows you to enter a name that will be printed on the header of faxes.  
Sets the default line type; PSTN or PBX.  
Line Monitor  
Sets the volume of the line monitor, which audibly monitors a transmission through the internal  
speaker until a connection is made.  
DRPD Pattern  
Receive Mode  
Sets the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) setting from Pattern1 to Pattern7.  
DRPD is a service provided by some telephone companies.  
Telephone  
Automatic fax reception is turned off. You can receive a fax by picking up the  
handset of the external telephone and then pressing a remote receive code, or by  
tapping Receivein On Hookand then tapping Receive. For details about  
Manual Receive, see "Receiving a Fax Manually in the Telephone Mode."  
Fax*  
Automatically receives faxes.  
Telephone/Fax  
When the printer receives an incoming fax, the external telephone rings for the  
time specified in Auto Receive Tel/Fax, and then the printer automatically  
receives a fax. If an incoming call is not a fax, the printer beeps from the internal  
speaker indicating that the call is a telephone call.  
Ans Machine/Fax The printer can share a telephone line with an answering machine. In this mode,  
the printer will monitor the fax signal and pick up the line if there are fax tones. If  
the telephone communication in your country is serial, this mode is not  
supported.  
DRPD  
Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) option, a distinctive  
ring service must be installed on your telephone line by the telephone company.  
After the telephone company has provided a separate number for faxing with a  
distinctive ring pattern, configure the fax setup to monitor for that specific ring  
pattern.  
Ring Tone Volume  
Sets the volume of the ring tone, which indicates that an incoming call is a telephone call through the  
internal speaker when Receive Mode is set to Telephone/Fax.  
Auto Receive Fax  
Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after answering an incoming call.  
Auto Receive Tel/Fax  
Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the external telephone  
receives an incoming call.  
Auto Receive  
Answer/Fax  
Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the external answering  
machine receives an incoming call.  
Junk Fax Setup  
Sets whether to reject unwanted faxes by accepting only the faxes from the numbers registered in the  
Phone Book  
2 Sided Printing  
Remote Receive  
Remote Receive Tone  
Discard Size  
Sets whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper.  
Sets whether to receive a fax by pressing a remote receive code on the external telephone.  
Sets a 2-digit remote receive code when Remote Receive is On.  
Sets whether to delete text or images at the bottom of a fax page when the entire page does not fit  
onto the output paper. Selecting Auto Reduction automatically reduces the fax page to fit it onto the  
output paper, and does not discard any images or text at the bottom of the page.  
Received Fax Forward  
Forwarding Number  
Sets whether to forward incoming faxes to a specified destination.  
Allows you to enter the fax number of the destination to which incoming faxes will be forwarded.  
Allows you to enter the e-mail address to which incoming faxes are to be forwarded.  
Forwarding E-mail  
Address 1  
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool  
145  
Forwarding E-mail  
Address 2  
Allows you to enter the e-mail address to which incoming faxes are to be forwarded.  
Allows you to enter the e-mail address to which incoming faxes are to be forwarded.  
Allows you to enter the e-mail address to which incoming faxes are to be forwarded.  
Allows you to enter the e-mail address to which incoming faxes are to be forwarded.  
Forwarding E-mail  
Address 3  
Forwarding E-mail  
Address 4  
Forwarding E-mail  
Address 5  
Server Type  
Sets the server type.  
Server Address  
Server Port Number  
Login Name  
Sets the server address registered under the server ID.  
Sets the server port number.  
Sets the login name.  
Login Password  
Re-enter Password  
Share Name  
Sets the login password.  
Enter the password again to confirm it.  
Sets the shared name.  
Server Path  
Sets the server path.  
Redial Attempts  
Sets the number of redial attempts (0–13) to make if the destination fax number is busy. If you enter  
0, the printer will not redial.  
Interval of Redial  
Resend Delay  
Tone/Pulse  
Sets the interval (1–15 minutes) between redial attempts.  
Sets the interval (3–255 seconds) between re-send attempts.  
Sets whether to use tone or pulse dialing.  
Prefix Dial  
Sets whether to set a prefix dial number.  
Prefix Dial Number  
Sets a prefix dial number of up to five digits. This number dials before any auto dial number is started.  
It is useful for accessing the Private Automatic Branch Exchange (PABX).  
Fax Cover Page  
Fax Header*1  
ECM  
Sets whether to attach a cover page to faxes.  
Sets whether to print the information of the sender on the header of faxes.  
Sets whether to enable the Error Correction Mode (ECM). To use the ECM, the remote machines  
must also support the ECM.  
Modem Speed  
Allows you to adjust the fax modem speed when a fax transmission or reception error occurs.  
Display Manual Fax  
Recipients  
Sets whether to show the fax number of the recipient on the Sending Fax screen when manually  
sending a fax.  
Fax Activity  
Sets whether to automatically print a fax activity report after every 50 incoming and outgoing fax  
communications.  
Fax Transmit  
Fax Broadcast  
Sets whether to print a transmission report after every fax transmission or only when an error occurs.  
Sets whether to print a transmission report after every fax transmission to multiple destinations or  
only when an error occurs.  
Fax Protocol  
Sets whether to print the protocol monitor report after every fax transmission or only when an error  
occurs.  
*1  
This item is not available when Country is set to United States.  
146  
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool  
Scan Defaults  
Purpose:  
To create your own default Scan settings.  
Values:  
File Format  
Sets the file format in which scanned documents are to be saved.  
Output Color  
Resolution  
Sets whether to scan in color or in black and white.  
Sets the default scan resolution.  
Original Size  
Sets the paper size of the original.  
2 Sided Scanning  
Binding of Original  
Darken/Lighten  
Sharpness  
Sets whether to scan both sides of a document.  
Sets the binding position for the 2-sided scanning.  
Sets the default scan density.  
Sets the default sharpness level.  
Contrast  
Sets the default contrast level.  
Auto Exposure  
Auto Exposure Level  
Margin Top/Bottom  
Sets whether to suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the scanned data.  
Sets the default background suppression level.  
Sets the value of the top and bottom margins within the range of 0 mm (0.0 inch) to 50 mm (2.0  
inch).  
Margin Left/Right  
Margin Middle  
Sets the value of the left and right margins within the range of 0 mm (0.0 inch) to 50 mm (2.0 inch).  
Sets the value of the middle margin within the range of 0 mm (0.0 inch) to 50 mm (2.0 inch).  
Sets the TIFF file format to TIFF V6 or TTN2.  
TIFF File Format  
Image Compression  
File Naming Mode  
Prefix/Suffix String  
Create Folder  
Sets the image compression level.  
Sets the detailed settings of File Naming Mode to Auto, Add Prefix or Add Suffix.  
Sets the texts that are added when Add Prefix or Add Suffix are selected.  
Sets whether to create a folder when saving scanned documents.  
Direct Print Defaults/USB Direct Print Defaults  
NOTE: Direct Print Defaults feature is available on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw; USB Direct Print Defaults  
feature is available on the Dell Smart Multifunction Printer | S2815dn.  
Purpose:  
To create your own Direct Print Defaults/USB Direct Print Defaults setting.  
Values:  
Select Tray  
2 Sided Printing  
Layout  
Sets the default input tray.  
Sets whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper.  
Sets the default paper layout when Layout is selected.  
Sets the print image quality when printing documents.  
Sets whether to sort the output.  
Image Types  
Collation  
PDF Password  
Sets a password.  
Re-enter PDF Password Confirms the set password.  
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool  
147  
   
MIFARE Customized Card  
NOTE: MIFARE Customized Card feature is available on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw only.  
Purpose:  
To register SSFC formatted NFC ID cards.  
Values:  
User ID Block 1  
User ID Block 2  
User ID Block 3  
Allows you to register the MIFARE Customized Card.  
Allows you to register the MIFARE Customized Card.  
Allows you to register the MIFARE Customized Card.  
Printer Maintenance  
The Printer Maintenance tab includes the Paper Density, Adjust Transfer Unit, Adjust Fusing Unit, Adjust  
Density, Chart, Clean Developer, Clean Transfer Unit, Reset Defaults, Initialize PrintMeter, Storage, Non-Dell  
Toner, Adjust Altitude, Decrease Electrostatic Memory, Decrease Ghosting, Clock Settings, and Web Link  
Customization pages.  
Paper Density  
Purpose:  
To specify the paper density.  
Values:  
Plain  
Sets the density of plain paper to Light (<81g/m2) or Normal.  
Adjust Transfer Unit  
Purpose:  
To specify the optimum voltage settings for printing for the transfer unit. To lower the voltage, set negative values.  
To increase, set positive values.  
The default settings may not give the best output quality on all paper types. If you see mottles on the printed paper,  
try to increase the voltage. If you see white spots on the printed paper, try to decrease the voltage.  
CAUTION: The print quality changes depending on the setting values you select for this item.  
Values:  
Plain(60-80g/m2)  
Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer unit for plain paper within the range of -5 to 10.  
Plain Thick(81-  
105g/m2)  
Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer unit for thick plain paper within the range of -5 to  
10.  
Covers(106-163 g/m2)  
Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer unit for cover paper within the range of -5 to 10.  
Covers Thick  
Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer unit for thick cover paper within the range of -5 to  
10.  
(164-216 g/m2)  
Rough Surface  
Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer unit for rough surface paper within the range of -5 to  
10.  
Label  
Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer unit for labels within the range of -5 to 10.  
Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer unit for envelopes within the range of -5 to 10.  
Envelope  
Japanese Postcard  
Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer unit for Japanese postcards within the range of -5 to  
10.  
148  
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool  
       
Adjust Fusing Unit  
Purpose:  
To specify the optimum temperature settings for printing for the fusing unit. To lower the temperature, set negative  
values. To increase, set positive values.  
The default settings may not give the best output on all paper types. When the printed paper has curled, try to lower  
the temperature. When the toner does not fuse on the paper properly, try to increase the temperature.  
NOTE: The print quality changes depending on the setting values you select for this item.  
Values:  
Plain(60-80g/m2)  
Sets the temperature settings for the fusing unit for plain paper within the range of -3 to 3.  
Sets the temperature settings for the fusing unit for thick plain paper within the range of -3 to 3.  
Plain Thick(81-  
105g/m2)  
Covers(106-163 g/m2)  
Sets the temperature settings for the fusing unit for cover paper within the range of -3 to 3.  
Sets the temperature settings for the fusing unit for thick cover paper within the range of -3 to 3.  
Covers Thick  
(164-216 g/m2)  
Rough Surface  
Label  
Sets the temperature settings for the fusing unit for rough surface paper within the range of -3 to 3.  
Sets the temperature settings for the fusing unit for labels within the range of -3 to 3.  
Sets the temperature settings for the fusing unit for envelopes within the range of -3 to 3.  
Sets the temperature settings for the fusing unit for Japanese postcards within the range of -3 to 3.  
Envelope  
Japanese Postcard  
Adjust Density  
Purpose:  
To adjust the density level.  
Values:  
Darker3  
Darker2  
Darker1  
Normal  
Lighter1  
Lighter2  
Lighter3  
Adjusts the density level darker than the normal setting.  
Works well with standard typed or printed documents.  
Adjusts the density level lighter than the normal setting.  
Chart  
Purpose:  
To print various charts that can be used for diagnosis of the printer.  
Values:  
Pitch Chart  
Print  
Print  
Prints a full halftone page. Also prints a page to check the pitch. A total of two  
pages are printed.  
Full Page Solid  
Prints a chart of the full page solid.  
1-Sided Prints a chart on one side of the paper.  
2-Sided Prints a chart of the full page solid on both sides of the paper.  
Prints a chart to check for proper alignment of the print image on the paper.  
Alignment Chart  
Print  
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool  
149  
     
Clean Developer  
Purpose:  
To stir the developer in the drum cartridge.  
Values:  
Clean Developer  
Toner Refresh  
Start  
Start  
Stirs the developer in the drum cartridge.  
Expels the toner in the drum cartridge, and supplies the fresh toner from the  
toner cartridge.  
Clean Transfer Unit  
Purpose:  
To clean the transfer unit.  
Values:  
Clean Transfer Unit  
Start  
Cleans the transfer unit.  
Reset Defaults  
Purpose:  
To initialize the non-volatile (NV) memory. After executing this function and rebooting the printer, all the menu  
parameters are reset to their default values.  
Values:  
Reset Defaults  
Reset Defaults User Fax Section and Click Start to reset the fax number entries in the Address  
restart printer.  
Book.  
Reset Defaults User Scan Section  
and restart printer.  
Click Start to reset the e-mail and server address entries  
in the Address Book.  
Reset Defaults User Account  
Section and restart printer.*1  
Click Start to reset the user account entries.  
Reset Defaults User App Section  
and restart printer*1  
Click Start to reset the user application entries.  
Reset Defaults System Section and Click Start to reset the system parameters.  
restart printer.  
Power On Wizard  
Power On Wizard  
Click Start to perform the initial setup for the printer.  
*1  
This item is available on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw only.  
Initialize PrintMeter  
Purpose:  
To initialize the print meter of the printer. When the print meter is initialized, the meter count is reset to 0.  
Storage  
NOTE: Storage feature is available only when RAM Disk is enabled.  
Purpose:  
To clear all files stored in the RAM disk.  
150  
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool  
         
Values:  
Clear Storage*1  
All Clear  
Click Start to clear all files stored as Secure Print, Proof Print, Private Mail Box  
Print, and Public Mail Box Print in the RAM disk.  
Secure Document Click Start to clear all files stored as Secure Print, Proof Print, Private Mail Box  
Print, and Public Mail Box Print in the RAM disk.  
Stored Document Click Start to clear all files stored in the RAM disk.  
*1  
This item is available only when RAM Disk is enabled.  
Non-Dell Toner  
Purpose:  
To use toner cartridge of another manufacturer.  
WARNING: Using a non-Dell toner cartridge may severely damage your printer. The warranty does not cover damages caused  
by using non-Dell toner cartridges.  
Adjust Altitude  
Purpose:  
To specify the altitude of the location where the printer is installed.  
The discharge phenomenon for charging the photo conductor varies with barometric pressure. Adjustments are  
performed by specifying the altitude of the location where the printer is being used.  
Decrease Electrostatic Memory  
Purpose:  
To widen the print gap not to leave toner streak on the next page.  
NOTE: When Decrease Electrostatic Memory is set to On, the print speed will be slowed.  
Decrease Ghosting  
Purpose:  
To reduce negative ghost.  
Clock Settings  
Purpose:  
To specify the clock settings.  
Values:  
Date Format  
Time Format  
Time Zone  
Set Date  
Sets the date format; YYYY/MM/DD, MM/DD/YYYY, or DD/MM/YYYY.  
Sets the time format; 24 Hour Clock or 12 Hour Clock.  
Sets the time zone.  
Sets the current date.  
Set Time  
Sets the current time.  
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool  
151  
         
Web Link Customization  
Purpose:  
To specify a link used for ordering consumables, which can be accessed from Order Supplies at: in the left frame.  
Values:  
Select Reorder URL  
Regular  
Sets a URL to be linked to Order Supplies at:  
Displays the regular URL (http://accessories.us.dell.com/sna) that can be linked to Order Supplies  
at:.  
Premier  
Displays the premier URL (http://premier.dell.com) that can be linked to Order Supplies at:.  
Print Server Settings  
Use the Print Server Settings menu to set the type of printer interface and the necessary conditions for  
communication.  
The following tabbed pages are displayed in the top of the right frame.  
Print Server Reports  
The Print Server Reports tab includes the Print Server Setup Page and the E-Mail Server Setup Page.  
Print Server Setup Page  
Displays the current settings of TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol) and printing ports.  
E-Mail Server Setup Page  
Displays the current settings of the e-mail server.  
Print Server Settings  
The Print Server Settings tab includes the Basic Information, Port Settings, TCP/IP, SMB, E-Mail Server, Bonjour  
(mDNS), SNMP, Scan to Network Folder, SNTP, AirPrint, Mopria, Google Cloud Print, Dell Document Hub*1,  
Proxy Server, Wi-Fi*1, Wi-Fi Direct*1, and Reset Print Server pages.  
*1  
This item is available only on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw.  
Basic Information  
Purpose:  
To configure basic information of the printer.  
Values:  
System Settings  
Printer Name  
Location  
Sets the name of the printer.  
Sets the location of the printer.  
Contact Person  
Sets the contact name, number, and other information of the printer  
administrator and service center.  
Administrator E-Mail  
Address  
Sets the contact address of the printer administrator and service center.  
Asset Tag Number  
Auto Refresh  
Enters the asset tag number for the printer.  
Dell Printer  
Configuration Web Tool  
Settings  
Automatically refreshes the contents of the status display pages.  
Auto Refresh Interval  
Sets the time interval for refreshing the contents of the status display pages  
automatically from 15 to 600 seconds.  
152  
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool  
             
NOTE: The Auto Refresh feature is effective for the contents of the top frame, Printer Status page, Job List page, and Completed  
Jobs page.  
Port Settings  
Purpose:  
To enable or disable printing ports and management protocol features.  
Values:  
Ethernet*1  
Ethernet Settings  
Auto  
Detects the Ethernet transmission rate and the  
duplex settings automatically.  
10Base-T Half-Duplex  
10Base-T Full-Duplex  
Selects 10Base-T Half-Duplex as the default  
value.  
Selects 10Base-T Full-Duplex as the default  
value.  
100Base-TX Half-Duplex Selects 100Base-TX Half-Duplex as the default  
value.  
100Base-TX Full-Duplex Selects 100Base-TX Full-Duplex as the default  
value.  
1000Base-T Full-Duplex  
Selects 1000Base-T Full-Duplex as the default  
value.  
Current Ethernet Settings  
MAC Address  
Displays the current settings of the Ethernet.  
Displays the MAC address of the printer.  
Energy Efficient Ethernet  
Sets whether to enable the Energy Efficient  
Ethernet feature.  
Port Status  
LPD  
Sets whether to enable LPD.  
Port9100  
Sets whether to enable Port9100.  
IPP  
Sets whether to enable IPP.  
WSD Print  
WSD Scan  
Network TWAIN  
FTP  
Sets whether to enable Web Services on Devices (WSD) Print.  
Sets whether to enable Web Services on Devices (WSD) Scan.  
Sets whether to enable Network TWAIN  
Sets whether to enable FTP.  
SMB  
Sets whether to enable SMB.  
Bonjour (mDNS)  
E-Mail Alert  
Telnet  
Sets whether to enable Bonjour (mDNS).  
Sets whether to enable E-Mail Alert.  
Sets whether to enable Telnet.  
SNMP  
Sets whether to enable SNMP.  
Update Address Book  
SNTP  
Sets whether to enable Update Address Book.  
Sets whether to enable SNTP.  
Google Cloud Print  
Sets whether to enable Google Cloud Print.  
Print from Widget Apps Sets whether to enable printing from the widget apps.  
Scan to Widget Apps Sets whether to enable scanning to the widget apps.  
*1  
This item is available only when the printer is connected using an Ethernet cable.  
NOTE: The settings in the Port Settings page will be valid only when the printer is rebooted. When you change or configure the  
settings, click the Apply New Settings button to apply the new settings.  
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool  
153  
   
TCP/IP  
Purpose:  
To configure the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address of the printer.  
Values:  
TCP/IP  
Settings  
IP Mode  
Host Name  
IPv4  
Sets the IP mode.  
Sets the host name.  
IP Address Mode  
Manual IP Address  
Sets the method for acquiring the IP address.  
When an IP address is being set manually, the IP is allocated to  
the printer using the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that  
makes up nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 255.  
Manual Subnet Mask When an IP address is being set manually, the subnet mask is  
specified using the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that  
makes up nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 255.  
255.255.255.255 cannot be specified as the subnet mask.  
Manual Gateway  
Address  
When an IP address is being set manually, the gateway address  
is specified using the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet  
that makes up nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to  
255.  
127 and any value in the range of 224 to 254 cannot be  
specified for the first octet of a gateway address.  
IPv6  
Enable Stateless  
Address  
Select the check box to enable the stateless address.  
Select the check box to set the IP address manually.  
Use Manual Address  
Get IP Address from  
DHCP  
Allows you to enable or disable the automatic setting of the IP  
address via DHCP.  
Manual Address  
Sets the IP address. To specify an IPv6 address, enter the  
address followed by a slash (/) and then "64". For details,  
consult your system administrator.  
Manual Gateway  
Address  
Sets the gateway address.  
DNS  
DNS Domain Name Sets the DNS domain name.  
IPv4  
Get DNS Server  
Address from DHCP  
Allows you to enable or disable the automatic setting of the  
DNS server address via DHCP.  
Manual DNS Server  
Address  
Manually sets the DNS server address in xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx  
format when Get DNS Server Address from DHCP is not  
selected.  
IPv6  
Get DNS Server  
Select the check box to get the DNS server address  
Address from DHCPv6- automatically from the DHCPv6-lite server.  
lite  
Manual DNS Server  
Address  
Sets the DNS server address.  
DNS Dynamic  
Update (IPv4)  
Select the check box to enable dynamic updates to DNS.  
DNS Dynamic  
Update (IPv6)  
Select the check box to enable dynamic updates to DNS.  
154  
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool  
 
Auto Generate  
Search List  
Select the check box to automatically generate the search list.  
Search Domain  
Name  
Sets the search domain name. Up to 255 alphanumeric characters, periods, and hyphens  
can be used. If you need to specify more than one domain name, separate them using a  
comma or semicolon.  
Time-out  
Sets the time-out period between 1 and 60 seconds.  
Priority to IPv6 DNS Select the check box to enable the DNS Name Resolution feature.  
Name Resolution  
WINS  
WINS Mode  
Allows you to enable or disable the automatic setting of the primary and secondary  
WINS server addresses via DHCP.  
WINS Primary Server Manually sets the primary WINS server address in xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx format when WINS  
Mode is not selected.  
WINS Secondary  
Server  
Manually sets the secondary (backup) WINS server address in xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx format  
when WINS Mode is not selected.  
LPD  
Connection Time-  
Out  
Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to 3,600 seconds.  
IP Filter (IPv4)  
Port Number  
Click IP Filter (IPv4) to set the IP Filter settings on the IP Filter (IPv4) page.  
Sets the port number from 9000 to 9999.  
Port9100  
Connection Time-  
Out  
Sets the connection time-out period between 1 and 3,600 seconds.  
IP Filter (IPv4)  
Printer URI  
Click IP Filter (IPv4) to set the IP filter settings on the IP Filter (IPv4) page.  
Displays the printer URI.  
IPP  
Connection Time-  
Out  
Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to 1,000 seconds.  
Port Number  
Displays the port number for receiving requests from the client.  
Maximum Sessions Displays the maximum number of connections received simultaneously by the client.  
WSD  
Port Number  
Sets the port number to 80 or from 8000 to 9999.  
Receive  
Sets the receive time-out period from 1 to 65,535 seconds.  
Time-Out  
Notification Time-  
Out  
Sets the notification time-out period from 1 to 60 seconds.  
Maximum Number Sets the maximum number of TTL from 1 to 10.  
of TTL  
Maximum Number Sets the maximum number of notifications from 10 to 20.  
of Notification  
Network  
TWAIN  
Connection Time-  
Out  
Sets the connection time-out period between 1 and 65,535 seconds.  
FTP  
Password  
Sets the password for FTP.  
Re-enter Password  
Enter the password again to confirm it.  
Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to 1,000 seconds.  
Connection Time-  
Out  
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool  
155  
HTTP  
Port Number  
Sets the port number to 80 or from 8000 to 9999.  
Simultaneous  
Connections  
Displays the maximum number of simultaneous connections.  
CSRF Protection  
Select the check box to enable the CSRF Protection.  
Connection Time-  
Out  
Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to 255 seconds.  
Telnet  
Password  
Sets the password for Telnet.  
Re-enter Password  
Confirms the set password.  
Connection Time-  
Out  
Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to 1,000 seconds.  
Update  
Connection Time-  
Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to 65,535 seconds.  
Address Book Out  
SMB  
Purpose:  
To specify the setting of the Server Message Block (SMB) protocol.  
Values:  
Host Name  
Sets the host name of the server computer.  
Sets the workgroup.  
Workgroup  
Maximum Sessions  
Unicode Support  
Sets the maximum number of sessions.  
Sets whether to notify the host name and workgroup name in Unicode characters during  
SMB transmission.  
Auto Master Mode  
Encrypt Password  
Job Time-Out  
Sets whether to enable the Auto Master Mode.  
Sets whether to encrypt the password.  
Sets the job time-out period between 60 and 3,600 seconds.  
Sets the connection time-out period between 60 and 3,600 seconds.  
Connection Time-Out  
E-Mail Server  
Purpose:  
To configure detailed settings of E-Mail Server, E-Mail Alert and E-Mail Report. This page can also be displayed by  
clicking E-Mail Server Settings Overview in the left frame.  
Values:  
E-Mail Server Settings Primary SMTP Gateway Sets the primary SMTP gateway.  
SMTP Port Number  
Sets the SMTP port number. This must be between 1 and 65535.  
Sets the authentication method for outgoing e-mail.  
E-Mail Send  
Authentication  
SMTP Login User  
Sets the SMTP login user. Up to 63 alphanumeric characters, periods,  
hyphens, underscores, and at symbols (@) can be used. If specifying more  
than one address, separate them using commas.  
SMTP Login Password  
Sets the SMTP account password using up to 31 alphanumeric characters.  
Confirms the set SMTP account password.  
Re-enter SMTP Login  
Password  
156  
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool  
     
POP3 Server Address*1  
Sets the POP3 server address in IP address format of "aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd" or  
as a DNS host name using up to 63 characters.  
POP3 Port Number*1  
POP User Name*1  
Sets the POP3 server port number. This must be between 1 and 65535.  
Sets the POP3 account user name. Up to 63 alphanumeric characters,  
periods, hyphens, underscores, and at symbols (@) can be used. If  
specifying more than one address, separate them using commas.  
POP User Password*1  
Sets the POP3 account password using up to 31 alphanumeric characters.  
Confirms the set password.  
Re-enter POP User  
Password*1  
Reply Address  
Designates the reply e-mail address sent with each E-mail Alert.  
Displays the status of the SMTP server connection.  
SMTP Server  
Connection  
E-Mail Alert Settings  
E-Mail List 1  
Sets acceptable e-mail addresses for the E-  
Mail Alert feature using up to 255  
alphanumeric characters.  
Select Alerts for List 1  
Supplies Alerts  
Paper Handling Alerts  
Service Call  
Select the check box to receive an E-Mail  
Alert for consumables.  
Select the check box to receive an E-Mail  
Alert for paper handling.  
Select the check box to receive an E-Mail  
Alert for Service Calls.  
E-Mail List 2  
Sets acceptable e-mail addresses for the E-  
Mail Alert feature using up to 255  
alphanumeric characters.  
Select Alerts for List 2  
Supplies Alerts  
Paper Handling Alerts  
Service Call  
Select the check box to receive an E-Mail  
Alert for consumables.  
Select the check box to receive an E-Mail  
Alert for paper handling.  
Select the check box to receive an E-Mail  
Alert for Service Calls.  
E-Mail Report Settings History Report  
Sets whether to receive the job history report  
by e-mail after every 20 print, copy, scan, and  
fax jobs.  
Statistics Report  
Volume Report  
Sets whether to receive the statistic report by  
e-mail on the use of print, copy, scan, and fax.  
Sets whether to receive the print volume  
report by e-mail.  
Transmission Time  
Recurrence  
Sets what time the reports are sent.  
Sets at what recurrence the reports are sent.  
Sets the day of the week the reports are sent.  
Weekly Settings (for  
Weekly only)  
Monthly Settings (for  
Monthly only)  
Sets the day of the month the reports are sent.  
Destination E-Mail  
Address 1  
Allows you to enter the e-mail address to  
which the reports are sent to.  
Destination E-Mail  
Address 2  
Allows you to enter the e-mail address to  
which the reports are sent to.  
*1  
This item is available only when POP before SMTP (Plain) or POP before SMTP (APOP) for E-Mail Send Authentication is selected.  
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool  
157  
Bonjour (mDNS)  
Purpose:  
To configure the detailed settings of Bonjour.  
Values:  
Host Name  
Sets the host name up to 63 alphanumeric characters and "-" (dash).  
Printer Name  
Wide-Area Bonjour  
Sets the printer name up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbol sets.  
Select the check box to enable the Wide-Area Bonjour protocol.  
SNMP  
Purpose:  
To configure the detailed settings of SNMP.  
Values:  
SNMP Configuration  
Enable SNMP v1/v2c Select the check box to enable the SNMP v1/v2c protocol.  
Protocol  
Edit SNMP v1/v2c  
Properties  
Click to display the SNMP v1/v2c page and to edit the setting of SNMP  
v1/v2c protocol from the page.  
Enable SNMP v3  
Protocol  
Select the check box to enable the SNMP v3 protocol.  
Edit SNMP v3  
Properties  
Click to display the SNMP v3 page and to edit the setting of SNMP v3  
protocol from the page.  
You can click this item only when SSL/TLS communication is enabled.  
SNMP v1/v2c  
Purpose:  
To edit the detailed settings of SNMP v1/v2c protocol.  
To enter this page, click Edit SNMP v1/v2c Properties in the SNMP page.  
Values:  
Community Name  
Community Name  
(Read only)*1  
Sets the community name to access (read only) data using up to 31  
alphanumeric characters.  
The default Read Community is public.  
Re-enter Community  
Name (Read only)*1  
Enters the community name to access (read only) data again to confirm it.  
Community Name  
(Read/Write)*1  
Sets the community name to access (read and write) data using up to 31  
alphanumeric characters.  
The default Read/Write Community is private.  
Re-enter Community  
Name (Read/Write)*1  
Enters the community name to access (read and write) data again to  
confirm it.  
Community Name  
(Trap)*1  
Sets the community name used for trap up to 31 alphanumeric characters.  
The default Trap Community is " " (NULL).  
Re-enter Community  
Name (Trap)*1  
Enters the community name used for trap again to confirm it.  
158  
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool  
   
Trap Notification 1-4  
Trap Address Type  
Trap Address  
Port Number  
Notify  
Select the check boxes to notify trap occurrence. In this case, specify the IP  
address and IP socket in the following format:  
IPv4  
Specify the IP address and IP socket in the nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn:mmmmm  
format. Each section of "nnn" is a variable value between 0 and 255. Note  
that values 127 and 224-254 are not valid for the first three-digits only. IP  
socket mmmmm is a variable value between 0 and 65535.  
Network*2  
IPv6  
Specify the IP address and IP socket in the  
xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:mmmmm format. Each section  
of "xxxx" is a hexadecimal variable value between 0 and ffff. IP socket  
mmmmm is a variable value between 0 and 65535.  
Authenticate Error Trap Select the check box to notify Authenticate Error Trap.  
*1  
The default value can be changed by using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.  
*2  
This item is available only when Wi-Fi Direct is set to Enable.  
SNMP v3  
Purpose:  
To edit the detailed settings of SNMP v3 protocol.  
To enter this page, click Edit SNMP v3 Properties in the SNMP page.  
Values:  
Administrator Account Account Enabled  
User Name  
Select the check box to enable the administrator account.  
Enters the user name of the administrator account.  
Authentication  
Password  
Sets the authentication password of the administrator account using 8 to 32  
alphanumeric characters.  
Re-enter Authentication Confirms the set password.  
Password  
Privacy Password  
Sets the privacy password of the administrator account using 8 to 32  
alphanumeric characters.  
Re-enter Privacy  
Password  
Confirms the set password.  
Print Drivers / Remote Account Enabled  
Select the check box to enable the print drivers and remote client account.  
Client Account  
Reset to default  
Password  
Click to reset the password for the print drivers and remote client account  
to default.  
Scan to Network Folder  
Purpose:  
To specify the client when scanning data.  
Values:  
FTP Client  
SMB Client  
Connection Time-Out Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to 60 seconds.  
FTP Passive Sets whether to enable the FTP Passive mode.  
Connection Time-Out Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to 60 seconds.  
SMB Protocol Sets the SMB protocol.  
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool  
159  
 
SNTP  
Purpose:  
To configure the SNTP server settings in order to perform time synchronization through SNTP.  
Values:  
SNTP  
IP Address / Host Name Sets the IP address or the host name of the SNTP server.  
Connection Time-Out Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to 120 seconds.  
Time Synchronization Sets the interval for performing time synchronization using SNTP.  
Interval  
Last Connection Time Displays the last date and time when your printer was connected to the  
SNTP server.  
Connection Status  
Displays the status of the connections between the SNTP server and your  
printer.  
AirPrint  
Purpose:  
To configure the detailed setting of AirPrint.  
Values:  
AirPrint  
Bonjour  
Enable AirPrint  
Name  
Select the check box to enable the printer for AirPrint.  
Enter the name that is to be displayed as an AirPrint printer.  
Enter the location of the printer.  
Location  
Geo-Location  
Basic Authentication  
User Name  
Enter the physical location of the printer.  
Select the check box to enable the basic authentication scheme.  
Enter the user name.  
IPP Authentication  
Password  
Enter the user password.  
Re-enter Password  
SSL/TLS  
Re-enter the user password for confirmation.  
Click Settings to display the SSL/TLS page.  
Displays the toner level.  
SSL/TLS  
Supply Levels  
Toner Cartridge  
Mopria  
Purpose:  
To enable the printer for Mopria Print Service.  
Values:  
Mopria  
Enable  
Click to enable the printer for Mopria.  
NOTE: When both Bonjour(mDNS) and IPP are enabled, the Enable button is disabled.  
160  
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool  
     
Google Cloud Print  
Purpose:  
To register the printer to Google Cloud Print.  
Values:  
Google Cloud Print*1  
(Registration state)  
Displays the Google Cloud Print registration state.  
Register This Device to Click to register the printer to Google Cloud Print.  
Google Cloud Print  
Cancel Registration  
Click to cancel to register the printer to Google Cloud Print.  
*1  
Google Cloud Print can only be used when the machine is using IPv4.  
Dell Document Hub  
NOTE: Dell Document Hub feature is available on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw only.  
Purpose:  
To configure the connections to the Dell Document Hub server.  
Values:  
Dell Document Hub  
Connection Time-Out Sets the time duration until the connection becomes time-out.  
Polling Interval  
Sets the interval time for polling.  
Proxy Server  
Purpose:  
To configure the Proxy Server settings.  
Values:  
Proxy Server  
Use Proxy Server  
Sets whether to enable the use of a proxy server.  
Address to Bypass Proxy Sets the address to bypass proxy server.  
Server  
Server Name  
Port Number  
Authentication  
Login Name  
Password  
Sets the name of the proxy server.  
Sets the port number from 1 to 65535.  
Sets whether to enable authentication.  
Sets the login name for the proxy server.  
Sets the login password for the proxy server.  
Confirms the set password.  
Re-enter Password  
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool  
161  
       
Wi-Fi  
NOTE: Wi-Fi feature is available only on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw, when the printer is connected using the  
wireless network.  
Purpose:  
To configure the detailed setting for the wireless network.  
To use the printer through wireless connection, be sure to disconnect the Ethernet cable.  
NOTE: Once wireless LAN is activated, wired LAN protocol will be disabled.  
Values:  
Wi-Fi Settings  
Wi-Fi  
SSID  
Sets whether to enable the wireless network connections.  
Sets the name that identifies the wireless network. Up to 32 alphanumeric  
characters can be entered.  
Network Type  
MAC Address  
Link Channel  
Link Quality  
Encryption  
Sets the network type from either Ad-Hoc or Infrastructure.  
Displays the MAC address of the printer.  
Displays the channel number of the wireless connection for the printer.  
Displays the quality of the wireless network connection for the printer.  
Select the encryption type from the list.  
Security Settings  
No Security  
Sets No Security to configure the wireless  
settings without specifying an encryption  
type from WEP, WPA-PSK, and WPA-  
Enterprise.  
WEP  
Sets the WEP to use through the wireless  
network.  
WPA-PSK AES/WPA2-PSK Sets the WPA-PSK AES/WPA2-PSK AES to  
AES*1, 2  
use through the wireless network.  
WPA-Enterprise  
AES/WPA2-Enterprise  
AES*2, 3  
Sets the WPA-Enterprise AES/WPA2-  
Enterprise AES to use through the wireless  
network.  
Mixed Mode PSK*1, 2  
Sets the Mixed Mode PSK to use through the  
wireless network. Mixed Mode PSK  
automatically selects the encryption type  
from either WPA-PSK TKIP, WPA-PSK AES,  
or WPA2-PSK AES.  
Mixed Mode  
Enterprise*2, 3  
Sets the Mixed Mode Enterprise to use  
through the wireless network. Mixed Mode  
Enterprise automatically selects the  
encryption type from either WPA-Enterprise  
TKIP, WPA-Enterprise AES, or WPA2-  
Enterprise AES.  
WEP  
Encryption  
WEP Key 1  
Select the WEP key code from either Hex or Ascii.  
Sets the WEP key set used through the wireless network only when WEP  
128bit or WEP 64bit is selected for Encryption.  
Re-enter WEP Key 1  
WEP Key 2  
Enters the WEP key 1 again to confirm it.  
Sets the WEP key set used through the wireless network only when WEP  
128bit or WEP 64bit is selected for Encryption.  
Re-enter WEP Key 2  
Enters the WEP key 2 again to confirm it.  
162  
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool  
 
WEP Key 3  
Sets the WEP key set used through the wireless network only when WEP  
128bit or WEP 64bit is selected for Encryption.  
Re-enter WEP Key 3  
WEP Key 4  
Enters the WEP key 3 again to confirm it.  
Sets the WEP key set used through the wireless network only when WEP  
128bit or WEP 64bit is selected for Encryption.  
Re-enter WEP Key 4  
Transmit Key*5  
Enters the WEP key 4 again to confirm it.  
Sets the transmit key type from the list.  
Sets the passphrase.  
WPA-PSK  
Passphrase/Key  
Re-enter Passphrase/Key Enters the passphrase again to confirm it.  
EAP-Identity Sets the EAP-Identity for the authentication.  
Authentication Method Shows the authentication method.  
WPA-Enterprise*4  
Login Name  
Password  
Sets the login name for the authentication.  
Sets the password.  
Re-enter Password  
Enters the password again to confirm it.  
*1  
For encryption, AES or TKIP method is used.  
*2  
*3  
*4  
This item is available only when Infrastructure is selected for Network Type.  
For authentication and encryption by digital certificate, AES or TKIP method is used.  
To activate the setting, import a certificate which supports wireless LAN (server/client) on the SSL/TLS pages, and enable the relevant  
certificate in advance.  
*5  
When Auto is selected for Transmit Key, the key set specified for WEP Key 1 is used.  
Wi-Fi Direct  
NOTE: Wi-Fi Direct feature is available on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw only.  
Purpose:  
To configure the detailed setting of the Wi-Fi Direct connection.  
Values:  
Wi-Fi Direct  
Group Owner  
Wi-Fi Direct  
Group Role  
Device Name  
Sets whether to enable the Wi-Fi Direct connection.  
Sets the group role of the printer.  
Specifies the printer name that identifies the Wi-Fi Direct network with up  
to 32 alphanumeric characters. Confirm it when selecting the printer name  
on your Wi-Fi mobile device.  
WPS Setup  
Configures the Wi-Fi Direct network using WPS.  
SSID (Character string Specifies a name to identify the Wi-Fi Direct network. Up to 32  
following "DIRECT-  
**")  
alphanumeric characters can be entered. "DIRECT-**" cannot be changed.  
Passphrase  
Displays the passphrase. Confirm it when entering the passphrase into your  
Wi-Fi mobile device.  
IP Address  
Displays the IP address of the Wi-Fi Direct.  
Displays the subnet mask.  
Subnet Mask  
Paired Device  
Current Role  
Current SSID  
Status  
Displays the mobile name currently connected.  
Displays the current group role of the printer.  
Displays the current SSID. Confirm it selecting the Wi-Fi Direct network  
name on your Wi-Fi mobile device.  
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool  
163  
 
Reset Print Server  
Purpose:  
To initialize NVRAM (non-volatile RAM) for the network feature and reboot the printer. You can also initialize  
NVRAM of the printer from Reset Defaults in the Printer Settings menu.  
Values:  
Initialize NIC NVRAM Memory Click Start to initialize NVRAM, revert network settings to the factory default settings, and  
and restart printer.  
reboot the network capability.  
Restart Printer  
Click Start to reboot the printer.  
Security  
The Security tab includes Set Password, Authentication System, Kerberos Server, LDAP Server, LDAP  
Authentication, LDAP User Mapping, SSL/TLS, IPsec, 802.1x, IP Filter (IPv4), and SMTP Domain Filtering.  
Set Password  
Purpose:  
To set or change the password that is required to access the setup parameters of the printer from the Dell Printer  
Configuration Web Tool. This page can also be displayed by clicking Set Password in the left frame.  
NOTE: To restore the password to the default (NULL), initialize the non-volatile memory (NVM).  
NOTE: You can set the password for access to Admin Settingsfrom Panel Lock in Printer Settings.  
Values:  
Administrator Password  
Sets the password using up to 128 alphanumeric characters.  
Confirms the set password.  
Re-enter Administrator Password  
Access denial by the authentication  
failure of the Administrator  
Sets how many times the failure in administrator authentication is allowed in total.  
Sets the number from 5 to 255. If you set 0, this mode is disabled.  
Authentication System  
Purpose:  
To specify the server authentication type, the server response time-out, or the search time-out.  
Values:  
Authentication Type  
Authentication System Select the authentication system from the list.  
Settings  
Optional Information Server Response Time- Sets the amount of time the printer should wait for response from the  
Out  
server. Sets the time period from 1 to 75 seconds.  
Search Time-Out  
Sets the amount of time the printer should wait for searching for the server.  
Sets the time period from 5 to 120 seconds.  
164  
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool  
         
Kerberos Server  
Purpose:  
To specify the settings for the Kerberos server.  
Values:  
Kerberos Server 1-5  
IP Address / Host Name Sets the IP address or host name, and the port address. The port address  
& Port  
must be between 1 and 65535.  
Domain Name  
Enter the domain name.  
LDAP Server  
Purpose:  
To specify the settings of the LDAP server.  
Values:  
Server Information  
IP Address / Host Name Sets IP address or the host name, and the port address. The port address  
& Port  
must be 389, 636, 3268, 3269, or between 5000 and 65535.  
LDAP Server  
Displays the current software information of the LDAP server.  
Optional Information Search Directory Root Enters the search directory root.  
Login Credentials to  
Access LDAP Server  
Select credential used to access the LDAP server.  
None  
The login credential will be set as anonymous. When  
using this setting, make sure that the LDAP server  
accepts anonymous login.  
Preset  
The preset login credential will be applied to each  
user.  
Prompt User  
Enters the login name.  
The users are prompted to enter their login  
credentials.  
Login Name  
Password  
Enters the login password using 1 to 127 alphanumeric characters. If the  
password is left blank (NULL), you cannot log in to a server.  
Re-enter Password  
Enters the login password again to confirm it.  
Search  
Time-Out  
Select Wait LDAP Server Limit to follow the time specified by the LDAP  
server. Select Wait to specify the time between 5 and 120 seconds.  
Search Name Order  
Server Address Book  
Server Phone Book  
Sets the search order.  
Select the check box to enable the server address book.  
Select the check box to enable the server phone book.  
NOTE: Server Address Book must be set to On before you can use the server address book for the Scan to Email feature.  
NOTE: Server Phone Book must be set to On before you can use the server phone book for the Fax function.  
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool  
165  
       
LDAP Authentication  
Purpose:  
To specify the LDAP server authentication method.  
Values:  
LDAP Authentication  
Authentication Method Shows the authentication method.  
Use Added Text String Select whether to use the added text string from the list.  
Text String Added to  
User Name  
Enter the added text string.  
LDAP User Mapping  
Purpose:  
To specify the settings of the LDAP user mapping.  
Values:  
Common Name  
Surname  
Sets the attribute type of the common name set for the LDAP server.  
Sets the attribute type of the surname set for the LDAP server.  
Sets the attribute type of the given name set for the LDAP server.  
Sets the attribute type of the e-mail address set for the LDAP server.  
Sets the attribute type of the fax phone number set for the LDAP server.  
Given Name  
E-mail Address  
Fax Phone  
SSL/TLS  
Purpose:  
To specify the settings for the SSL/TLS encryption communication to the printer, and set/delete the certificate used  
for IPsec, LDAPS, or Wireless LAN.  
Values:  
SSL/TLS  
HTTP-SSL/TLS  
Select the check box to enable the HTTP-SSL/TLS Communication.  
Communication*1  
HTTP-SSL/TLS  
Communication Port  
Number  
Sets the port number, which is not identical with that of HTTP. This must  
be 443 or between 8000 and 9999.  
LDAP-SSL/TLS  
Select the check box to enable the LDAP, and access is established using  
SSL/TLS communication.  
Communication*1  
SMTP-SSL/TLS  
Communication  
Sets the type of SSL/TLS used to communicate with the SMTP server.  
MD5  
Select the check box to enable the MD5.  
Machine Digital  
Certificate  
Generate Self-Signed  
Click to display the Generate Self-Signed Certificate page and to create a  
security certification from the page. The Generate Self-Signed Certificate  
button is available only when the self-signed certificate is not generated.  
Certificate*2  
Certificate Signing  
Request (CSR)*2  
Click to display the Certificate Signing Request (CSR) page and to create  
a certificate signing request from the page.  
Upload Signed  
Certificate*2  
Click to display the Upload Signed Certificate page and to upload the  
certificate file to the device from the page.  
166  
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool  
           
Certificate  
Click to display the Certificate Management page and to manage a security  
certification from the page.  
Management*2  
Delete All Certificates Click to delete all the certificates.  
Generate Self-Signed  
Certificate  
Public Key Method  
Size of Public Key  
Issuer  
Select the public key method of the self-signed certificate.  
Select the size of public key.  
Enter the issuer of self-signed certificate.  
Enter the valid days from 1 to 9999 days.  
Click to generate the self-signed certificate.  
Validity  
Generate Signed  
Certificate  
Certificate Signing  
Request (CSR)  
Digital Signature  
Algorithm  
Select the digital signature algorithm.  
Public Key Size  
Select the public key size.  
2 Letter Country Code Enter the 2-letter country code.  
(Required)  
State / Province Name Enter the state or province name up to 16 bytes.  
Locality Name  
Enter the locality name up to 32 bytes.  
Organization Name  
(Required)  
Enter the organization name up to 32 bytes.  
Organization Unit  
(Required)  
Enter the organization unit up to 32 bytes.  
Common Name  
E-mail Address  
Password  
Enter the common name.  
Enter the e-mail address.  
Upload Signed  
Certificate*2  
Enter the password to upload the certificate file.  
Enter the password again for confirmation.  
Click Browse to browse the file name to upload to the device.  
Click Import to upload the certificate file to the device.  
Select the device to certificate.  
Re-enter Password  
File Name  
Import  
Certificate  
Category  
Management*2  
Certificate Purpose  
Certificate Order  
Display the List  
Category  
Select the purpose to certificate.  
Select the order to certificate.  
Click to display the Certificate List page.  
Certificate List*2  
Displays the device to certificate selected at the Certificate Management  
page.  
Certificate Purpose  
Displays the connection to certificate selected at the Certificate  
Management page.  
Issued To  
Displays the list of certificate order.  
Validity  
Displays whether certificate is valid or not.  
Certificate Details  
Click to display the Certificate Details page. The SSL/TLS page is  
displayed when no item in the Issued To column is selected.  
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool  
167  
Certificate Details*2  
Category  
Displays the device to certificate selected at the Certificate Management  
page or SSL/TLS page.  
Issued To  
Displays the device to certificate.  
Issuer  
Displays the issuer to certificate.  
Serial Number  
Public Key Method  
Size of Public Key  
Valid From  
Displays the serial number of the device.  
Displays the public key method.  
Displays the size of public key.  
Displays the time the certificate is valid.  
Displays the time the certificate is invalid.  
Displays whether certificate is valid or not.  
Displays the purpose of certificate.  
Displays the type of device certificate you selected.  
Valid Until  
Status  
Certificate Purpose  
Certificate Selection  
Status  
E-mail Address  
Use this certificate  
Delete  
Displayed only when an e-mail address is specified in the certificate.  
Click to apply this certificate to the device.  
Click to delete this certificate.  
Export This Certificate Click to export the certificate to the other device.  
Delete All Certificates Delete  
Click to delete all the certificates.  
*1  
This item is available only when the self-signed certificate has been generated.  
*2  
This item is effective only when connected via SSL/TLS (https). Only the administrator is allowed to display the pages.  
IPsec  
Purpose:  
To specify the Security Architecture settings for Internet Protocol (IPsec) for encrypted communication to the  
printer.  
Values:  
IPsec Settings  
Protocol  
IKE  
Select the check box to enable the protocol.  
"Pre-Shared Key" is displayed for IKE.  
Pre-Shared Key  
Sets a shared key. Up to 255 alphanumeric characters, periods, and  
hyphens can be used.  
Re-enter Pre-Shared Key Enters the shared key again to confirm it.  
IKE SA Lifetime  
IPsec SA Lifetime  
DH Group  
Sets the lifetime for IKE SA from 5 to 28,800 minutes.  
Sets the lifetime for IPsec SA from 5 to 2,880 minutes.  
Sets the DH group.  
PFS  
Select the check box to enable the PFS setting.  
Remote peers IPv4 address Sets the IP address to connect to.  
Remote peers IPv6 address Sets the IP address to connect to.  
Non IPsec communication Allows communication with a device which does not support IPsec.  
policy  
NOTE: If IPsec is enabled with incorrect settings, you must disable it using the IPsec menu on the operator panel.  
168  
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool  
 
802.1x  
Purpose:  
To specify the settings for IEEE 802.1x authentication for encrypted communication to the printer.  
Values:  
Configure 802.1x  
Enable IEEE 802.1x  
Select the check box to enable IEEE 802.1x authentication.  
Authentication Method EAP-MD5  
Selects the authentication method to use for IEEE  
802.1x authentication.  
EAP-MS-  
CHAPv2  
PEAP/MS-  
CHAPv2  
Login Name: (Device  
Name)  
Sets the login name (device name) for IEEE 802.1x authentication using  
up to 128 alphanumeric characters.  
Password  
Sets the login password for IEEE 802.1x authentication using up to 128  
alphanumeric characters.  
Re-enter Password  
Confirms the set login password.  
IP Filter (IPv4)  
Purpose:  
To specify the IP address and subnet mask to be permitted or denied access to the printer.  
Values:  
Access List  
Address  
Sets the IP addresses that are permitted or denied access to the printer. Enter a  
numeric value between 0 and 255 in each field.  
Address Mask  
Active Mode  
Sets the subnet mask that are permitted or denied access to the printer. Enter a  
numeric value between 0 and 255 in each field.  
Reject  
Accept  
Off  
Rejects printing from specified network address.  
Permits printing from specified network address.  
Disables the IP Filter feature for the specified IP address.  
To configure the IP Filter feature, enter an IP address to be filtered in the Address field and the subnet mask in the  
Address Mask field. Enter a numeric value between 0 and 255 in each field. "*" is appended to the current value.  
IP Filter Setup Procedure  
You can set up to a maximum of five items and the first item set takes priority. When setting multiple filters, enter  
the shortest address first followed by a slightly longer address, a longer address and so on.  
Enabling Printing From a Specified User  
The following describes the procedure to enable printing only from the "192.0.2.1" IP address.  
1
2
3
4
Click the first column of the Access List row  
Enter "192.0.2.1" in the Address field and "255.255.255.255" in the Address Mask field.  
Select Accept  
Click Apply New Settings  
1.  
.
.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool  
169  
   
Disabling Printing From a Specified User  
The following describes the procedure to disable printing only from the "192.0.2.1" IP address.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Click the first column of the Access List row  
Enter "192.0.2.1" in the Address field and "255.255.255.255" in the Address Mask field.  
Select Reject  
Click the first column of the Access List row  
Enter "0.0.0.0" in the Address field and "0.0.0.0" in the Address Mask field.  
Select Accept  
Click Apply New Settings  
1.  
.
2.  
.
.
Enabling and Disabling Printing from Network Addresses  
You can enable printing from the "192.0" network address and disable printing from the "192.0.2" network  
address.  
The example below describes how to enable printing from the "192.0.2.1" IP address.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Click the first column of the Access List row  
Enter "192.0.2.1" in the Address field and "255.255.255.255" in the Address Mask field.  
Select Accept  
Click the first column of the Access List row  
Enter "192.0.2.0" in the Address field and "255.255.255.0" in the Address Mask field.  
Select Reject  
Click the first column of the Access List row  
Enter "192.0.0.0" in the Address field and "255.255.0.0" in the Address Mask field.  
Select Accept  
1.  
.
2.  
.
3.  
.
10 Click Apply New Settings  
.
170  
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool  
SMTP Domain Filtering  
Purpose:  
To specify whether to restrict sending e-mails to specific domains only.  
NOTE: This feature does not restrict sending e-mails through the E-Mail Alert feature.  
Values:  
SMTP Domain Filtering  
Domain Filtering  
Allow Domain List  
Select the check box to enable Domain Filtering.  
Allows you to register up to five domains allowed for sending e-mails.  
Copy Printer Settings  
This menu includes the Copy Printer Settings and Copy Printer Settings Report pages.  
Copy Printer Settings  
Purpose:  
To copy the printer settings to one or more printers on the network having the same model number.  
Copying the printer settings to the destination printer  
1
2
In the IP Address and Password field, type the IP address and password of the destination printer.  
Click Copy the settings to the Host in the above list  
NOTE: The copying of printer settings will time-out within 60 seconds if no input is received.  
.
3
4
Restart the destination printer and go to Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.  
Verify if the printer settings are copied as desired.  
NOTE: This feature allows you to copy printer settings to up to 10 destination printers simultaneously. If the destination printer  
has different configuration fields, only the common fields will be copied.  
NOTE: You cannot copy the Address Book when the destination printer has a job and is operated on the Fax/Scan/Address Book  
menu of the operator panel.  
Copy Printer Settings Report  
Purpose:  
To verify if the printer settings were successfully copied to the destination printers.  
NOTE: The report is not accessible once the printer is restarted.  
Print Volume  
The Print Volume menu includes the Print Volume and Dell AccessControl pages.  
Print Volume  
Purpose:  
To verify the number of printed pages. This page can also be displayed by clicking Print Volume in the left frame.  
Values:  
Printer Page Count  
Paper Used  
Displays the total number of pages printed since the printer was shipped from the factory.  
Displays the number of pages printed for each paper size.  
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool  
171  
           
Dell AccessControl  
Purpose:  
To specify which users have access to printing and to limit print volume per user.  
Values:  
AccessControl Mode  
Off  
On  
Enables to print the data with no authentication information.  
Restricts printing based on the print user information registered in the  
internal server.  
Non Registered User  
Sets whether to permit the printing of data with no authentication information. To permit the  
printing for non-account user, select the check box.  
AccessControl Error  
Report  
Sets whether to automatically print error-related information if printing using AccessControl results in  
an error.  
User Registration*1  
Click Edit User Registration to display the Edit Print User Registration page.  
• To register a user, click Create to open the Print User Settings page.  
• To delete a user, click Delete to open the Delete User page.  
Clicking Back returns the screen to the status prior to deleting the user.  
• To confirm or change the registered user, click Confirm / Change to open the Print User Settings  
page.  
Print User Settings  
User Registration No.  
Displays the user registration number. The Delete User button is displayed  
when the user is already registered.  
User Name  
Sets the user name.  
Password  
Sets the user password using 4 to 12 alphanumeric characters.  
Enter the password again to confirm it.  
Re-enter password  
Upper Limit for  
Sets the maximum number of pages allowed for monochrome printing.  
Monochrome Print  
Cumulative  
Monochrome Page  
Count  
Displays the cumulative number of pages printed for monochrome printing.  
*1  
This item is displayed only when AccessControl Mode is On.  
Address Book  
The Address Book menu includes the E-Mail Address, Server Address, and Phone Book pages.  
E-Mail Address  
E-Mail Address  
E-Mail Group  
Default Setup  
Server Address  
FAX Speed Dial  
FAX Group  
Allows you to view, edit, or create e-mail address entries.  
Allows you to view, edit, or create e-mail group entries.  
Allows you to view, edit, or set the default e-mail subject and message.  
Allows you to view, edit, or create server address entries.  
Allows you to view, edit, or create speed dial entries.  
Allows you to view, edit, or create fax group entries.  
Server Address  
Phone Book  
172  
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool  
     
E-Mail Address  
The E-mail Address page includes the following subpages.  
E-Mail Address  
E-Mail Group  
Default Setup  
Allows you to view, edit, or create e-mail address entries.  
Allows you to view, edit, or create e-mail group entries.  
Allows you to view, edit, or set the default e-mail subject and message.  
E-Mail Address  
Purpose:  
To view the e-mail address entries registered on the E-Mail Address page.  
Values:  
Address List to:  
ID  
Selecting each button displays a list of entries for the group of user IDs indicated on the button.  
Displays the user ID.  
Name  
Displays the user name. (Not in Use) is displayed when there is no registration.  
Displays the e-mail address of the user.  
Address  
Delete  
Deletes the entry for the selected user ID.  
Confirm / Change  
Create  
Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry of the selected user ID.  
Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the selected user ID.  
E-Mail Address (Confirm/Change, Create)  
Purpose:  
To view or edit the e-mail address entries on the E-Mail Address page, or create a new entry. The following items are  
in the dialog box that appears when you click Confirm / Change or Create on the E-Mail Address top page.  
Values:  
ID  
Displays the selected user ID.  
Name  
Allows you to view or edit the name of the user registered under the user ID, or enter a name for the  
new entry.  
Address  
Delete*1  
Allows you to view or edit the e-mail address of the user, or enter an e-mail address for the new entry.  
Click this button to delete the selected user.  
Apply New Settings  
Restore Settings  
Click this button to apply the new settings.  
Click this button to restore the previous settings.  
Back  
Click this button to return to the top page.  
*1  
This item is available only when you click Confirm / Change.  
E-Mail Address (Delete)  
Purpose:  
To delete the e-mail address entries registered on the E-Mail Address page. The following items are in the dialog box  
that appears when you click Delete on the E-Mail Address top page.  
Values:  
ID  
Displays the selected user ID.  
Name  
Displays the name of the user registered under the selected user ID.  
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool  
173  
   
Address  
Displays the e-mail address of the user.  
Click this button to apply the new settings.  
Click this button to return to the top page.  
Apply New Settings  
Back  
E-Mail Group  
Purpose:  
To view the e-mail address entries registered on the E-Mail Group page.  
Values:  
GroupID  
Name  
Displays the group ID.  
Displays the assigned group name. (Not in Use) is displayed when there is no registration.  
Deletes the entry for the selected group ID.  
Delete  
Confirm / Change  
Create  
Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry for the selected group ID.  
Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the selected group ID.  
E-Mail Group (Confirm/Change, Create)  
Purpose:  
To view or edit the e-mail address group entries on the E-Mail Group page, or create a new entry. The following  
items are in the dialog box that appears when you click Confirm / Change or Create on the E-Mail Group top page.  
Values:  
E-Mail Group  
E-Mail Address  
ID  
Displays the selected group ID.  
Name  
Allows you to view or edit the name assigned for the group ID, or enter a  
new group name.  
Delete*1  
Click this button to delete the current entry.  
Address List to:  
Selecting each button displays a list of entries for the group of IDs indicated  
on the button.  
ID  
Displays the user ID.  
Select the check box on the left to create the group.  
Name  
Displays the user name. (Not in Use) is displayed when there is no  
registration.  
Address  
Allows you to view or edit the e-mail address of an entry registered under  
the selected user ID, or enter an e-mail address for the new entry.  
Apply New Settings  
Restore Settings  
Back  
Click this button to apply the new settings.  
Click this button to restore the previous settings.  
Click this button to return to the top page.  
*1  
This item is available only when you click Confirm / Change.  
174  
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool  
 
E-Mail Group (Delete)  
Purpose:  
To delete the e-mail group entries registered on the E-Mail Group page. The following items are in the dialog box  
that appears when you click Delete on the E-Mail Group top page.  
Values:  
ID  
Displays the selected group ID.  
Name  
Displays the name assigned for the group ID.  
Click this button to apply the new settings.  
Click this button to return to the top page.  
Apply New Settings  
Back  
Default Setup  
Purpose:  
To set the default e-mail subject and message.  
Values:  
Default Subject  
Body Text  
Allows you to enter the default e-mail subject.  
Allows you to enter the default e-mail message.  
Click this button to apply the new settings.  
Click this button to restore the previous settings.  
Apply New Settings  
Restore Settings  
Server Address  
Server Address  
Purpose:  
To view the server address entries registered on the Server Address page.  
Values:  
Address List to:  
ID  
Selecting each button displays a list of entries for the group of IDs indicated on the button.  
Displays the server ID.  
Name  
Displays the file directory name. (Not in Use) is displayed when there is no registration.  
Displays the address of the file directory.  
Server Address  
Delete  
Deletes the entry for the selected server ID.  
Confirm / Change  
Create  
Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry for the selected server ID.  
Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the selected server ID.  
Server Address (Confirm/Change, Create)  
Purpose:  
To view or edit the server address entries on the Server Address page, or create a new entry. The following items are  
in the dialog box that appears when you click Confirm / Change or Create on the Server Address top page.  
Values:  
ID  
Displays the selected server ID.  
Name  
Allows you to view or change the server name assigned to the server ID, or enter a new server name.  
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool  
175  
     
Server Type  
Allows you to view the server type if you click Confirm / Change. Allows you to edit the server type if  
you click Create.  
FTP*1  
Select this to store scanned documents on a server via the FTP protocol.  
SMB*1  
Select this to store scanned documents on a computer via the Server  
Message Block (SMB) protocol.  
Server Address  
Share Name*2  
Allows you to view or edit the server address registered under the server ID, or enter a new server  
address.  
Allows you to view or edit the assigned shared name, or enter a new shared name, when Server Type is  
set to SMB.  
Server Path  
Allows you to view or edit the assigned server path, or enter a new path.  
Server Port Number  
Allows you to view or edit the assigned server port number, or enter a new port number. If you leave  
the text box blank, the default port number (FTP: 21, SMB: 139) will be used.  
Login Name  
Allows you to view or edit the login name that is required to access the selected protocol, or enter a  
new login name.  
Login Password  
Allows you to view or edit the password that is required to access the selected protocol, or enter a new  
password.  
Re-enter Password  
Delete*3  
Confirms the set password.  
Click this button to delete the current entry.  
Click this button to apply the new settings.  
Click this button to restore the previous settings.  
Click this button to return to the top page.  
Apply New Settings  
Restore Settings  
Back  
*1  
You can edit this item only when you click Create.  
*2  
*3  
This item is available only when Server Type is set to SMB.  
This item is available only when you click Confirm / Change.  
Server Address (Delete)  
Purpose:  
To delete the server address entries registered on the Server Address page. The following items are in the dialog box  
that appears when you click Delete on the Server Address top page.  
Values:  
ID  
Displays the selected server ID.  
Name  
Displays the name assigned for the server ID.  
Displays the server address registered under the server ID.  
Click this button to apply the new settings.  
Click this button to return to the top page.  
Server Address  
Apply New Settings  
Back  
Phone Book  
The Phone Book page includes the following subpages.  
FAX Speed Dial  
FAX Group  
Allows you to view, edit, or create speed dial entries.  
Allows you to view, edit, or create fax group entries.  
176  
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool  
 
FAX Speed Dial  
Purpose:  
To view the fax number entries registered on the FAX Speed Dial page.  
Values:  
Speed Dial List to:  
Selecting each button displays a list of entries for the group of speed dial codes indicated on the  
button.  
Speed Dial  
Name  
Displays the speed dial ID.  
Displays the assigned name for a speed dial ID. (Not in Use) is displayed when there is no  
registration.  
Phone Number  
Delete  
Displays the speed dial code.  
Deletes the entry for the selected speed dial code.  
Confirm / Change  
Create  
Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry for the selected speed dial code.  
Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the selected speed dial code.  
FAX Speed Dial (Confirm/Change, Create)  
Purpose:  
To view or edit the speed dial entries on the FAX Speed Dial page, or create a new entry. The following items are in  
the dialog box that appears when you click Confirm / Change or Create on the FAX Speed Dial top page.  
Values:  
Speed Dial  
Name  
Displays the selected speed dial code.  
Allows you to view or edit the name of an entry registered under the speed dial code, or enter a  
name for the new entry.  
Phone Number  
Delete*1  
Allows you to view or edit the fax number of an entry registered under the speed dial code, or  
enter a fax number for the new entry.  
Click this button to delete the entry for the speed dial code. This button is available only on  
the dialog box for editing an existing entry.  
Apply New Settings  
Restore Settings  
Click this button to apply the new settings.  
Click this button to restore the previous settings.  
Click this button to return to the top page.  
Back  
*1  
This item is available only when you click Confirm / Change.  
FAX Speed Dial (Delete)  
Purpose:  
To delete the speed dial entries registered on the FAX Speed Dial page. The following items are in the dialog box  
that appears when you click Delete on the FAX Speed Dial top page.  
Values:  
Speed Dial  
Name  
Displays the selected speed dial code.  
Displays the name registered under the speed dial code.  
Displays the fax number registered under the speed dial code.  
Click this button to apply the new settings.  
Phone Number  
Apply New Settings  
Back  
Click this button to return to the top page.  
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool  
177  
 
FAX Group  
Purpose:  
To view the fax group entries registered on the FAX Group page.  
Values:  
ID  
Displays a fax group ID.  
Name  
Displays the assigned group name. (Not in Use) is displayed when there is no registration.  
Deletes the entry for the selected group ID.  
Delete  
Confirm / Change  
Create  
Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry for the selected group ID.  
Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the selected group ID.  
FAX Group (Confirm/Change, Create)  
Purpose:  
To view or edit the fax number group entries on the FAX Group page, or create a new entry. The following items are  
in the dialog box that appears when you click Confirm / Change or Create on the FAX Group top page.  
Values:  
FAX Group  
ID  
Displays the selected group ID.  
Name  
Allows you to view or edit the name assigned for the group ID, or enter a  
new group name.  
Delete*1  
Click this button to delete the current entry.  
FAX Speed Dial  
Speed Dial List to:  
Selecting each button displays a list of entries for the group of speed dial  
codes indicated on the button.  
Speed Dial  
Name  
Displays the speed dial code. Select the check box on the left to add the  
speed dial code in the group.  
Displays the name registered for the speed dial code. (Not in Use) is  
displayed when there is no registration.  
Phone Number  
Allows you to view or edit the fax number of an entry registered under the  
selected speed dial code, or enter a fax number for the new entry.  
Apply New Settings  
Restore Settings  
Back  
Click this button to apply the new settings.  
Click this button to restore the previous settings.  
Click this button to return to the top page.  
*1  
This item is available only when you click Confirm / Change.  
FAX Group (Delete)  
Purpose:  
To delete the fax number group entries registered on the FAX Group page. The following items are in the dialog box  
that appears when you click Delete on the FAX Group top page.  
Values:  
ID  
Displays the selected group ID.  
Name  
Displays the name assigned for the group ID.  
Click this button to apply the new settings.  
Click this button to return to the top page.  
Apply New Settings  
Back  
178  
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool  
 
Tray Management  
Use the Tray Management menu to set the paper size and type of paper loaded in tray1 and the optional 550-sheet  
feeder.  
Values:  
MPF Mode  
Sets the MPF Mode.  
MPF Paper Size*1  
MPF Paper Type*1  
Sets the size of paper loaded in the MPF.  
Sets the type of paper loaded in the MPF.  
Sets the length of custom size paper loaded in the MPF.  
MPF Custom Paper  
Size - Y*1  
MPF Custom Paper  
Size - X*1  
Sets the width of custom size paper loaded in the MPF.  
MPF Display Tray  
Prompt*1  
Sets whether to display a popup message that prompts the user to set the paper size and type when  
the paper is loaded in the MPF.  
Tray 1 Paper Size  
Tray 1 Paper Type  
Sets the size of paper loaded in tray1.  
Sets the type of paper loaded in tray1.  
Tray 1 Custom Paper  
Size - Y  
Sets the length of custom size paper loaded in tray1.  
Tray 1 Custom Paper  
Size - X  
Sets the width of custom size paper loaded in tray1.  
Tray 1 Display Tray  
Prompt  
Sets whether to display a popup message that prompts the user to set the paper size and type when  
the paper is loaded in tray1.  
Tray 2 Paper Size*2  
Tray 2 Paper Type*2  
Sets the size of paper loaded in the optional 550-sheet feeder.  
Sets the type of paper loaded in the optional 550-sheet feeder.  
Sets the length of custom size paper loaded in the optional 550-sheet feeder.  
Tray 2 Custom Paper  
Size - Y*2  
Tray 2 Custom Paper  
Size - X*2  
Sets the width of custom size paper loaded in the optional 550-sheet feeder.  
Tray 2 Display Tray  
Prompt*2  
Sets whether to display a popup message that prompts the user to set the paper size and type when  
the paper is loaded in the optional 550-sheet feeder.  
1st Priority  
Sets the paper source to be used as the first priority.  
Sets the paper source to be used as the second priority.  
Sets the paper source to be used as the third priority.  
2nd Priority  
3rd Priority*2  
*1  
This item is available only when Use Panel Settings is selected in MPF Mode.  
*2  
This item is available only when the optional 550-sheet feeder is installed.  
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool  
179  
 
180  
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool  
15  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
When your printer is connected to a network and available to a number of users, the access to the Admin  
Settingscan be limited. This prevents other users from using the operator panel to inadvertently change a user  
default that has been set by the administrator.  
However, you can use your printer driver to override user defaults and select settings for individual print jobs.  
Report / List  
Use the Report/List menu to print various types of reports and lists.  
System Settings  
Purpose:  
To print a list of the current user default values, the installed options, the amount of installed print memory, and the  
status of printer supplies.  
Panel Settings  
Purpose:  
To print a detailed list of all the settings of the printer menus.  
PCL Fonts List  
Purpose:  
To print a sample of the available PCL fonts.  
PCL Macros List  
Purpose:  
To print the information on the downloaded PCL macro.  
PS Fonts List  
Purpose:  
To print a sample of the available PS fonts.  
PDF Fonts List  
Purpose:  
To print a sample of the available PDF fonts.  
Job History  
Purpose:  
To print a detailed list of the print, copy, fax, or scan jobs that have been processed. This list contains the last 20 jobs.  
Error History  
Purpose:  
To print a detailed list of paper jams and fatal errors.  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
181  
                       
Print Meter  
Purpose:  
To print the reports for the total number of pages printed.  
Demo Page  
Purpose:  
To print a Demo page.  
Protocol Monitor  
Purpose:  
To print a detailed list of monitored protocols.  
Speed Dial  
Purpose:  
To print the list of all members stored as speed dial numbers.  
Address Book  
Purpose:  
To print the list of all addresses stored as Address Book information.  
Server Address  
Purpose:  
To print the list of all members stored as Server Address information.  
Fax Activity  
Purpose:  
To print the report of faxes you recently received or sent.  
Fax Pending  
Purpose:  
To print the list of status of pending faxes.  
Stored Documents  
NOTE: Stored Documents feature is available only when RAM Diskunder System Settingsis enabled.  
Purpose:  
To print a list of all files stored for Secure Print, Private Mail Box Print, Public Mail Box Print, and Proof Print in the  
RAM disk.  
182  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
                 
Printing a Report/List Using the Operator Panel  
1
2
3
4
Press the  
Tap Report/List  
Tap until the desired report or list appears, and then select that report or list.  
Tap Print  
The selected report or list is printed.  
(Information) button.  
.
.
Printing a Report/List Using the Tool Box  
1
Click Start  
For Windows 10: Click the Start button  
For Dell Printer Hub, select the printer from My Printers on the home screen.  
®
All Programs  
Dell Printers  
Dell Printer Hub or Dell Printer Management Tool  
.
Dell Printer Hub or Dell Printer Management Tool  
.
2
For Dell Printer Management Tool, select the printer displayed by default, or another printer from the drop-down  
list on the upper-right corner of the home screen.  
3
Click the shortcut to the Tool Box on the left of the screen.  
The Tool Box opens.  
4
5
Ensure that the Printer Setting Reports tab is open.  
Select Reports from the list at the left side of the page.  
The Reports page appears.  
6
Click the button for the desired report or list.  
The report or list is printed  
Wi-Fi | WPS  
NOTE: The Wi-Fi|WPSmenu is available on the Dell™ Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw only.  
Use the Wi-Fi|WPSmenu to confirm or specify wireless network settings or connections.  
Wi-Fi  
Use the Wi-Fimenu to confirm or specify wireless network settings.  
For details, see "Wi-Fi."  
Wi-Fi Direct  
Use the Wi-Fi Directmenu to confirm or specify Wi-Fi Direct network settings.  
For details, see "Wi-Fi Direct."  
WPS (Connect via PBC)  
Use WPS (Connect via PBC)menu to start configurations of the Wi-Fi Direct network with WPS-PBC.  
For details, see "WPS Setup."  
WPS (Connect via PIN)  
Use WPS (Connect via PIN)menu to start configurations of the Wi-Fi Direct network with WPS-PIN.  
For details, see "WPS Setup."  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
183  
             
Paired Device  
NOTE: The Paired Devicemenu is available on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw only.  
Use the Paired Devicemenu to confirm the device name in the Paired Device list, if there is any device  
connected to the printer via Wi-Fi Direct.  
You can disconnect the paired device from this list. For details, see "Disconnecting Wi-Fi Direct Network."  
Admin Settings  
Use the Admin Settingsmenu to configure a variety of printer features.  
Phone Book  
Use the Phone Bookmenu to configure the speed dial and group dial settings.  
Individuals  
Purpose:  
To store up to 200 frequently dialed numbers in speed dial locations.  
Groups  
Purpose:  
To create a group of fax destinations and register it under a two-digit dial code. Up to six group dial codes can be  
registered.  
PCL  
Use the PCLmenu to change printer settings that only affect jobs using the PCL emulation printer language.  
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.  
Paper Tray  
Purpose:  
To specify the default paper tray.  
Values:  
Auto*  
MPF  
Tray1  
Tray2*1  
*1  
This item is available only when the optional 550-sheet  
feeder is installed.  
Paper Size  
Purpose:  
To specify the default paper size.  
184  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
       
Values:  
mm series  
A4  
(210x297mm)*1  
A5  
(148x210mm)  
A6  
(105x148mm)  
B5  
(182x257mm)  
B6  
(128x182mm)  
Letter  
(8.5x11")  
Folio  
(8.5x13")  
Legal  
(8.5x14")  
Statement  
(5.5x8.5")  
Executive  
(7.3x10.5")  
Envelope #10  
(4.1x9.5")  
Monarch Env.  
(3.9x7.5")  
DL Env.  
(110x220mm)  
C5 Env.  
(162x229mm)  
Postcard  
(100x148mm)  
Custom Paper Size  
*1  
Denotes country-specific factory default value.  
inch series  
Letter  
(8.5x11")*1  
Folio  
(8.5x13")  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
185  
Legal  
(8.5x14")  
Statement  
(5.5x8.5")  
A4  
(210x297mm)  
A5  
(148x210mm)  
A6  
(105x148mm)  
B5  
(182x257mm)  
B6  
(128x182mm)  
Executive  
(7.3x10.5")  
Envelope #10  
(4.1x9.5")  
Monarch Env.  
(3.9x7.5")  
DL Env.  
(110x220mm)  
C5 Env.  
(162x229mm)  
Postcard  
(100x148mm)  
Custom Paper Size  
*1  
Denotes country-specific factory default value.  
NOTE: Selecting a custom size for the paper size prompts you to enter a custom length and width.  
Orientation  
Purpose:  
To specify how text and graphics are oriented on the page.  
Values:  
Portrait*  
Prints text and graphics parallel to the short edge of the paper.  
Prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the paper.  
Landscape  
2 Sided Print  
Purpose:  
To specify whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper.  
186  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
 
Values:  
1 Sided*  
2 Sided  
Does not print on both sides of a sheet of paper.  
Flip on Long Edge*  
Flip on Short Edge  
Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper to be bound by long edge.  
Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper to be bound by short edge.  
Font  
Purpose:  
To specify the default font from the fonts registered in the printer.  
Values:  
CG Times  
Albertus Md  
Albertus XBd  
Clarendon Cd  
Coronet  
Palatino Roman  
Palatino It  
CG Times It  
CG Times Bd  
CG Times BdIt  
Univers Md  
Palatino Bd  
Palatino BdIt  
ITCBookman Lt  
ITCBookman LtIt  
ITCBookmanDm  
ITCBookmanDm It  
HelveticaNr  
Marigold  
Univers MdIt  
Univers Bd  
Arial  
Arial It  
Univers BdIt  
Univers MdCd  
Univers MdCdIt  
Univers BdCd  
Univers BdCdIt  
AntiqueOlv  
Arial Bd  
Arial BdIt  
Times New  
Times New It  
Times New Bd  
Times New BdIt  
Symbol  
HelveticaNr Ob  
HelveticaNr Bd  
HelveticaNr BdOb  
N C Schbk Roman  
N C Schbk It  
AntiqueOlv It  
AntiqueOlv Bd  
CG Omega  
Wingdings  
Line Printer  
Times Roman  
Times It  
N C Schbk Bd  
N C Schbk BdIt  
ITC A G Go Bk  
ITC A G Go BkOb  
ITC A G Go Dm  
ITC A G Go DmOb  
ZapfC MdIt  
CG Omega It  
CG Omega Bd  
CG Omega BdIt  
GaramondAntiqua  
Garamond Krsv  
Garamond Hlb  
GaramondKrsvHlb  
Courier*  
Times Bd  
Times BdIt  
Helvetica  
Helvetica Ob  
Helvetica Bd  
Helvetica BdOb  
CourierPS  
ZapfDingbats  
C39 Narrow  
C39 Regular  
Courier It  
C39 Wide  
Courier Bd  
CourierPS Ob  
CourierPS Bd  
CourierPS BdOb  
SymbolPS  
OCR-A  
Courier BdIt  
LetterGothic  
LetterGothic It  
LetterGothic Bd  
OCR-B  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
187  
Symbol Set  
Purpose:  
To specify a symbol set for a specified font.  
Values:  
DESKTOP  
DNGBTSMS  
ISO-11  
ISO-15  
ISO-17  
ISO-21  
ISO-4  
MATH-8  
WIN 3.0  
MC TEXT  
MS PUB  
PC-1004  
PC-775  
WINBALT  
WINGDINGS  
WIN L1  
WIN L2  
PC-8  
WIN L5  
PC-850  
PC CYR  
ISO-6  
PC-852  
PC-866U  
ISO CYR  
WIN CYR  
GREEK-8  
WIN-GRK  
PC-851  
ISO-60  
ISO-69  
ISO L1  
ISO L2  
ISO L5  
ISO L6  
LEGAL  
PC-8 DN  
PC-8 TK  
PI FONT  
PS MATH  
PS TEXT  
ROMAN-8*  
SYMBOL  
PC8-GRK  
ISO-GRK  
Font Size  
Purpose:  
To specify the font size for scalable typographic fonts.  
Values:  
12.00*  
Sets the values in increments of 0.25.  
Available Range: 4.00 – 50.00  
Font size refers to the height of the characters in the font. One point equals approximately 1/72 of an inch  
(0.35 mm).  
NOTE: The Font Sizemenu is only displayed for typographic fonts.  
Font Pitch  
Purpose:  
To specify the font pitch for scalable mono spaced fonts.  
Values:  
10.00*  
Sets the value in increments of 0.01.  
Available Range: 6.00–24.00  
Font pitch refers to the number of fixed-space characters in a horizontal inch of type. For non-scalable mono spaced  
fonts, the pitch is displayed, but cannot be changed.  
NOTE: The Font Pitchmenu is only displayed for fixed or mono spaced fonts.  
188  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
Form Line  
Purpose:  
To set the number of lines in a page.  
Values:  
mm series  
64*1  
Sets the value in increments of 1.  
Available Range: 5–128  
*1  
Denotes country-specific factory default values.  
inch series  
60*1  
Sets the value in increments of 1.  
Available Range: 5–128  
*1  
Denotes country-specific factory default values.  
The printer sets the amount of space between each line (vertical line spacing) based on the Form Lineand  
Orientationmenu items. Select the correct Orientationbefore changing Form Line.  
See also:  
"Orientation"  
Quantity  
Purpose:  
To set the default print quantity. (Set the number of copies required for a specific job from the printer driver. Values  
selected from the printer driver always override values selected from the operator panel.)  
Values:  
1*  
Sets the value in increments of 1.  
Available Range: 1–999  
Image Enhance  
Purpose:  
To specify whether to enable the Image Enhance feature, which makes the boundary line between black and white  
smoother to decrease jagged edges and enhance the visual appearance.  
Values:  
Off  
On*  
Disables the Image Enhance feature.  
Enables the Image Enhance feature.  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
189  
Hex Dump  
Purpose:  
To help isolate the source of a print job problem. With Hex Dump selected, all data sent to the printer is printed in  
hexadecimal and character representation. Control codes are not executed.  
Values:  
Disable*  
Enable  
Disables the Hex Dump feature.  
Enables the Hex Dump feature.  
Draft Mode  
Purpose:  
To save toner by printing in the draft mode. The print quality is reduced when printing in the draft mode.  
Values:  
Disable*  
Enable  
Does not print in the draft mode.  
Prints in the draft mode.  
Line Termination  
Purpose:  
To add the line termination commands.  
Values:  
Off*  
The line termination command is not added.  
CR=CR, LF=LF, FF=FF  
Add-LF  
Add-CR  
CR-XX  
The LF command is added.  
CR=CR-LF, LF=LF, FF=FF  
The CR command is added.  
CR=CR, LF=CR-LF, FF=CR-FF  
The CR and LF commands are added.  
CR=CR-LF, LF=CR-LF, FF=CR-FF  
Ignore Form Feed  
Purpose:  
To specify whether to ignore blank pages that only contain Form Feed control codes.  
Values:  
Off*  
On  
Disables the Ignore Form Feed feature.  
Enables the Ignore Form Feed feature.  
190  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
A4 Wide  
Purpose:  
To expand the printable area width.  
Values:  
Off*  
On  
Disables A4 Wide.  
Enables A4 Wide.  
Barcode Mode  
Purpose:  
To specify whether to enable the barcode mode, which is suitable for barcode printing.  
Values:  
Disable*  
Enable  
Disables the barcode mode.  
Enables the barcode mode.  
NOTE: Be sure to set to Disableafter using the barcode mode.  
PS  
Use the PSmenu to change printer settings that only affect jobs using the PostScript 3 Compatible emulation  
printer language.  
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.  
PS Error Report  
Purpose:  
To specify whether the contents of the errors concerning PostScript 3 Compatible page description language are  
printed.  
The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.  
Values:  
Off  
On*  
Discards the print job without printing an error message.  
Prints an error message before it discards the job.  
NOTE: Instructions from the PS driver override the settings specified on the operator panel.  
PS Job Time-out  
Purpose:  
To specify the execution time for one PostScript 3 Compatible job. The change becomes effective after the printer is  
turned off and then on again.  
Values:  
Off*  
On  
Job time-out does not occur.  
1 minute*  
An error concerning the PostScript 3 Compatible page description  
language occurs if processing is not completed after the specified  
time.  
Available Range: 1-900 minutes  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
191  
 
Paper Select Mode  
Purpose:  
To specify the way to select the tray for PostScript 3 Compatible mode. The change becomes effective after the  
printer is turned off and then on again.  
Values:  
Auto*  
The tray is selected as the same setting as in the PCL mode.  
Select From Tray  
The tray is selected in a method compatible with regular PostScript 3 Compatible printers.  
PDF  
Use the PDFmenu to change printer settings that only affect the PDF jobs.  
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.  
Quantity  
Purpose:  
To specify the number of copies to print.  
Values:  
1*  
Sets the value in increments of 1.  
Available Range: 1–999  
2 Sided Print  
Purpose:  
To specify whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper.  
Values:  
1 Sided*  
2 Sided  
Does not print on both sides of a sheet of paper.  
Flip on Long Edge*  
Flip on Short Edge  
Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper to be bound by long edge.  
Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper to be bound by short edge.  
Print Mode  
Purpose:  
To specify the print mode.  
Values:  
Normal*  
For documents with normal sized characters.  
High Quality  
High Speed  
For documents with small characters or thin lines, or documents printed using a dot-matrix printer.  
Prints with the higher speed than the Normal mode, but the quality is less.  
192  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
   
PDF Password  
Purpose:  
To specify the password to print a PDF file secured with a document open password (password to open the PDF file).  
Values:  
Enter PDF Password  
Enter the document open password to print the secure PDF.  
Collation  
Purpose:  
To specify whether to sort the job.  
Values:  
Collated  
Uncollated*  
Sorts the job.  
Does not sort the job.  
Output Size  
Purpose:  
To specify the output paper size for PDF.  
Values:  
A4*1  
Letter*1  
Auto  
*1  
The default paper size is displayed.  
Layout  
Purpose:  
To specify the output layout.  
Values:  
Auto %*  
100% (No Zoom)  
Booklet  
2 Pages Up  
4 Pages Up  
Detect Job Separator  
Purpose:  
To specify whether to detect the end of the job in printing PDF files successively.  
Values:  
Off  
On*  
Disables the Detect Job Separator feature.  
Enables the Detect Job Separator feature.  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
193  
Network  
Use the Networkmenu to change the printer settings affecting jobs sent to the printer through the wired or  
wireless network.  
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.  
Wi-Fi  
NOTE: The Wi-Fi feature is available on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw only.  
Purpose:  
To confirm or specify wireless network settings.  
Wi-Fi  
Purpose:  
To specify whether to enable the Wi-Fi feature.  
Values:  
Off  
On  
Disables the Wi-Fi feature.  
Enables the Wi-Fi feature.  
Wi-Fi Status  
Purpose:  
To confirm the wireless communication status.  
Values:  
Status  
Good  
Acceptable  
Low  
No Reception  
SSID  
Displays the name that identifies the wireless network.  
Displays the encryption type.  
Encryption Type  
Wi-Fi Setup Wizard  
NOTE: Wi-Fi Setup Wizard is available only when the printer is connected using the wireless network.  
Purpose:  
To configure the wireless network interface.  
Values:  
Select access point  
WEP Key  
Select the access point from the list.  
When you select an access point using WEP as the  
encryption type, enter the WEP key.  
Passphrase  
When you select an access point using WPA, WPA2, or  
Mixed as the encryption type, enter the passphrase.  
Manual SSID Setup  
Enter SSID  
Specifies a name to identify the wireless network. Up to 32  
alphanumeric characters can be entered.  
194  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
   
Infrastructure  
Select when you configure the wireless settings through the  
access point such as a wireless router.  
No Security*  
Specifies No Security to configure the wireless settings  
without specifying an encryption type.  
Mixed mode PSK  
Select to configure the wireless settings with the encryption  
type of Mixed mode PSK. Mixed mode PSK automatically  
selects the encryption type from either WPA-PSK-TKIP,  
WPA-PSK-AES, or WPA2-PSK-AES.  
Passphrase  
Specifies the passphrase of  
alphanumeric characters from 8 to 63.  
WPA2-PSK-AES  
WEP  
Select to configure the wireless settings with the encryption  
type of WPA2-PSK-AES.  
Passphrase  
Specifies the passphrase of  
alphanumeric characters from 8 to 63.  
(hex: 0-9, a-f, A-F, 16 to 64 characters)  
Specifies the WEP key to use through the wireless network.  
For 64bit keys, 10 hexadecimal characters can be entered.  
For 128bit keys, 26 hexadecimal characters can be entered.  
Transmit Key  
Specifies the transmit key from Auto*,  
WEP Key 1, WEP Key 2, WEP Key 3,  
and WEP Key 4.  
Ad-hoc  
Select to configure the wireless settings without the access  
point such as a wireless router.  
No Security*  
WEP  
Select to configure the wireless settings without specifying  
the encryption type from WEP.  
Specifies the WEP key to use through the wireless network.  
For 64bit keys, up to 10 hexadecimal characters can be  
entered. For 128bit keys, up to 26 hexadecimal characters  
can be entered.  
Transmit Key  
Specifies the transmit key from WEP  
Key 1*, WEP Key 2, WEP Key 3, and  
WEP Key 4.  
WPS Setup  
Purpose:  
To configure the wireless network using WPS.  
Values:  
Push Button  
Start Configuration  
Start Configuration  
Print PIN Code  
Configures the wireless settings with WPS-PBC.  
Configuration*  
PIN Code  
Configures the wireless settings using the PIN code assigned automatically  
by the printer.  
Prints the PIN code. Confirm it when entering PIN assigned to the printer  
into your computer.  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
195  
 
IP Mode  
Purpose:  
To configure the IP mode.  
Values:  
Dual Stack*  
IPv4 Mode  
IPv6 Mode  
Uses both IPv4 and IPv6 to set the IP address.  
Uses IPv4 to set the IP address.  
Uses IPv6 to set the IP address.  
TCP/IP  
Purpose:  
To configure TCP/IP settings.  
Values:  
Get IP Address  
AutoIP*  
Sets the IP address automatically. The printer will first try to get the IP  
address from the DHCP server. If the printer cannot get the IP address, then  
the printer uses the link local address. A random value in the range of  
169.254.0.0 to 169.254.255.255 that is not currently in use on the network is  
set as the IP address. The subnet mask is set as 255.255.0.0.  
BOOTP  
RARP  
Sets the IP address using BOOTP.  
Sets the IP address using RARP.  
Sets the IP address using DHCP.  
DHCP  
Panel  
Use this option when you want to set the IP address manually on the  
operator panel.  
IP Address  
When an IP address is being set manually, the IP is allocated to the printer  
using the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that makes up  
nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 255.  
Subnet Mask  
When an IP address is being set manually, the subnet mask is specified using  
the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that makes up nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is  
a value in the range of 0 to 255.  
255.255.255.255 cannot be specified as the subnet mask.  
Gateway Address  
When an IP address is being set manually, the gateway address is specified  
using the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that makes up  
nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 255.  
127 and any value in the range of 224 to 254 cannot be specified for the first  
octet of a gateway address.  
IPsec  
NOTE: IPsec feature is available only when IPsec is enabled on the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.  
Purpose:  
Disables IPsec.  
196  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
Reset Wi-Fi  
Purpose:  
To initialize wireless network settings. After executing this function and rebooting the printer, all wireless network  
settings are reset to their default values.  
Wi-Fi Direct  
NOTE: The Wi-Fi Direct feature is available on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw only.  
Purpose:  
To configure the Wi-Fi Direct network settings.  
Values:  
Wi-Fi Direct  
Group Role  
Disable*  
Enable  
Disables the Wi-Fi Direct network.  
Enables the Wi-Fi Direct network.  
Auto  
Automatically resolves the group role for Wi-Fi Direct.  
Group Owner*  
Sets the printer as the Group Owner when using Wi-Fi Direct. Setting the  
printer to become the group owner makes it possible for devices to discover  
this printer. The SSID of the printer will be then displayed in the list of  
wireless networks on your Wi-Fi mobile device.  
Device Name  
Paired Device  
Specifies the printer name that identifies the Wi-Fi Direct network with up  
to 32 alphanumeric characters. Confirm it when selecting the printer name  
on your Wi-Fi certified device.  
Displays the status of the Wi-Fi Direct connections between the printer and  
up to 3 Wi-Fi mobile devices.  
Disconnect All  
Disconnect now  
Disconnects all the Wi-Fi Direct connections.  
Disconnects all the Wi-Fi Direct connections right now.  
Disconnect and Reset Disconnects the Wi-Fi Direct connections and resets the passphrase.  
Passphrase  
SSID  
Displays the name that identifies the Wi-Fi Direct network. You can also  
specify the name with up to 32 alphanumeric characters ("DIRECT-XY"  
cannot be changed). Confirm it when selecting the Wi-Fi Direct network  
name on the Wi-Fi mobile devices.  
Passphrase  
Displays the passphrase. Confirm it when entering the passphrase into the  
Wi-Fi mobile devices.  
Print Passphrase  
Reset Passphrase  
Prints the passphrase. Confirm it when entering the passphrase into the  
Wi-Fi mobile devices.  
Resets the passphrase.  
WPS Setup  
Configures the Wi-Fi Direct network using WPS.  
Configures the Wi-Fi Direct network with WPS-PBC.  
Push Button  
Configuration*  
PIN Code  
Configures the Wi-Fi Direct network using PIN code assigned automatically  
by the printer.  
Print PIN Code  
Prints the PIN code. Confirm it when entering PIN  
assigned to the printer into your Wi-Fi mobile device.  
Reset Code  
Resets the PIN code.  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
197  
 
Ethernet  
NOTE: When the Ethernet cable is connected, Ethernetis displayed.  
Purpose:  
To confirm or specify wired network settings.  
IP Mode  
Purpose:  
To configure the IP mode.  
Values:  
Dual Stack*  
IPv4 Mode  
IPv6 Mode  
Uses both IPv4 and IPv6 to set the IP address.  
Uses IPv4 to set the IP address.  
Uses IPv6 to set the IP address.  
TCP/IP  
Purpose:  
To configure TCP/IP settings.  
Values:  
Get IP Address  
AutoIP*  
Sets the IP address automatically. The printer will first try to get the IP  
address from the DHCP server. If the printer cannot get the IP address, then  
the printer uses the link local address. A random value in the range of  
169.254.0.0 to 169.254.255.255 that is not currently in use on the network is  
set as the IP address. The subnet mask is set as 255.255.0.0.  
BOOTP  
RARP  
Sets the IP address using BOOTP.  
Sets the IP address using RARP.  
Sets the IP address using DHCP.  
DHCP  
Panel  
Use this option when you want to set the IP address manually on the  
operator panel.  
IP Address  
When an IP address is being set manually, the IP is allocated to the printer  
using the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that makes up  
nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 255.  
Subnet Mask  
When an IP address is being set manually, the subnet mask is specified using  
the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that makes up nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is  
a value in the range of 0 to 255.  
255.255.255.255 cannot be specified as the subnet mask.  
Gateway Address  
When an IP address is being set manually, the gateway address is specified  
using the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that makes up  
nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 255.  
127 and any value in the range of 224 to 254 cannot be specified for the first  
octet of a gateway address.  
IPsec  
NOTE: IPsec feature is available only when IPsec is enabled on the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.  
Purpose:  
Disables IPsec.  
198  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
Connection Speed  
NOTE: Connection Speed feature is available only when the printer is connected using the wired network.  
Purpose:  
To specify the communication speed and the duplex settings of Ethernet. The change becomes effective after the  
printer is turned off and then on again.  
Values:  
Auto*  
Detects the Ethernet settings automatically.  
Uses 10BASE-T Half-duplex.  
10BASE-T Half  
10BASE-T Full  
100BASE-TX Half  
100BASE-TX Full  
1000BASE-T Full  
Uses 10BASE-T Full-duplex.  
Uses 100BASE-TX Half-duplex.  
Uses 100BASE-TX Full-duplex.  
Uses 1000BASE-T Full-duplex.  
Protocols  
Purpose:  
To enable or disable each protocol. The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.  
Values:  
LPD  
Disable  
Enable*  
Disable  
Enable*  
Disable  
Enable*  
Disable  
Enable*  
Disable  
Enable*  
Disable  
Enable*  
Disable  
Enable*  
Disable  
Enable*  
Disable  
Enable*  
Disable  
Enable*  
Disables the Line Printer Daemon (LPD) port.  
Enables the Line Printer Daemon (LPD) port.  
Disables the Port9100 port.  
Port9100  
Enables the Port9100 port.  
FTP  
Disables FTP port.  
Enables FTP port.  
IPP  
Disables IPP port.  
Enables IPP port.  
SMB TCP/IP  
WSD Print  
WSD Scan  
Network TWAIN  
SNMP UDP  
E-mail Alert  
Disables SMB TCP/IP port.  
Enables SMB TCP/IP port.  
Disables Web Services on Devices (WSD) print.  
Enables Web Services on Devices (WSD) print.  
Disables Web Services on Devices (WSD) scan.  
Enables Web Services on Devices (WSD) scan.  
Disables Network TWAIN.  
Enables Network TWAIN.  
Disables the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) UDP port.  
Enables the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) UDP port.  
Disables the E-mail Alert feature.  
Enables the E-mail Alert feature.  
Dell Printer Configuration Disable  
Web Tool  
Disables an access to Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool embedded in the  
printer.  
Enable*  
Enables an access to Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool embedded in the  
printer.  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
199  
 
Bonjour(mDNS)  
Telnet  
Disable  
Enable*  
Disable  
Enable*  
Disable  
Enable*  
Disable*  
Enable  
Disables Bonjour (mDNS).  
Enables Bonjour (mDNS).  
Disables Telnet.  
Enables Telnet.  
Update Address Book  
HTTP-SSL/TLS*1  
Google Cloud Print  
Print from Widget Apps  
Disables Update Address Book.  
Enables Update Address Book.  
Disables HTTP-SSL/TLS.  
Enables HTTP-SSL/TLS.  
Disable  
Enable*  
Disable  
Enable*  
Disable  
Enable*  
Disables Google Cloud Print.  
Enables Google Cloud Print.  
Disables printing from the widget apps.  
Enables printing from the widget apps.  
Disables scanning to the widget apps.  
Enables scanning to the widget apps.  
Scan to Widget Apps  
*1  
This feature is available only when a digital certificate is set from the Dell Printer Configurations Web Tool. This printer supports only  
TLS connections.  
Advanced Settings  
Purpose:  
To specify advanced network settings.  
IP Filter  
NOTE: IP Filter feature is available only for LPD or Port9100  
.
Purpose:  
To block data received from certain IP addresses through the wired or wireless network. You can set up to five IP  
addresses. The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.  
Values:  
n (n is 1-5)  
IP Address  
Subnet Mask  
Mode  
Sets the IP address for Filter n.  
Sets the address mask for Filter n.  
Off*  
Disables the IP Filter feature for Filter n.  
Accepts an access from the specified IP address.  
Rejects an access from the specified IP address.  
Accept  
Reject  
IEEE 802.1x  
NOTE: IEEE 802.1x feature is available only when the printer is connected using Ethernet cable and it is available only when the  
IEEE 802.1x authentication is enabled.  
Purpose:  
To disable IEEE 802.1x authentication. The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on  
again.  
200  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
PS Data Format  
Purpose:  
To specify PostScript 3 Compatible communication protocol, you can configure the PS Data Formatsettings.  
The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.  
Values:  
Auto*  
Used when auto-detecting the PostScript 3 Compatible communication protocol.  
Used when the communication protocol is in ASCII interface.  
Used when the communication protocol is in binary format.  
Standard  
BCP  
TBCP  
Used when the communication protocol supports both ASCII and binary data to switch  
between them according to the specified control code.  
Binary  
Used when no special processing is required for data.  
Reset LAN  
Purpose:  
To initialize wired network data stored in non-volatile memory (NVM). After executing this function and rebooting  
the printer, all wired network settings are reset to their default values.  
Delete All Certificates  
Purpose:  
To delete all certificates of the printer. After executing this function and rebooting the printer, all certificates are  
deleted.  
Fax Settings  
Use the Fax Settingsmenu to configure the basic fax settings.  
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.  
Fax Line Settings  
Purpose:  
To configure basic settings for the fax line.  
Fax Number  
Purpose:  
To set the fax number of the printer, which will be printed on the header of a fax message.  
NOTE: Ensure to specify Fax Numberbefore using Junk Fax Setup  
.
Understanding the Printer Menus  
201  
 
Country  
Purpose:  
To select the country where the printer is used.  
Values:  
Australia  
Austria  
Italy  
Japan*  
Singapore  
South Africa  
Spain  
Belgium  
Canada  
Colombia  
Denmark  
France  
Luxembourg  
Malaysia  
Mexico  
Sweden  
Switzerland  
Netherlands  
New Zealand  
Norway  
Poland*  
Portugal*  
Saudi Arabia*  
Thailand  
Turkey*  
Germany  
Greece*  
Iceland*  
United Kingdom  
United States  
Unknown  
Ireland  
*
Available on the Dell Smart Multifunction Printer | S2815dn only.  
Fax Header Name  
Purpose:  
To set the sender name to be printed on the header on faxes.  
Line Type  
Purpose:  
To select the default line type.  
Values:  
PSTN*  
PBX  
Uses PSTN.  
Uses PBX.  
Line Monitor  
Purpose:  
To set the volume of the line monitor, which audibly monitors a transmission through the internal speaker until a  
connection is made.  
Values:  
Off  
Turns off the volume of the line monitor.  
Sets the volume of the line monitor to Low.  
Sets the volume of the line monitor to Medium.  
Sets the volume of the line monitor to High.  
Low  
Medium*  
High  
202  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
DRPD Pattern  
Purpose:  
To provide a separate number for faxing with a distinctive ring pattern.  
Values:  
Pattern1–7  
DRPD is a service provided by some telephone companies. DRPD Patterns are specified by your  
telephone company. The patterns provided with your printer are shown below:  
Pattern 1  
Pattern 2  
Pattern 3  
Pattern 4*  
Pattern 5  
Pattern 6  
Pattern 7  
Ask your telephone company which pattern you need to select to use this service. For example, Pattern  
7 is the New Zealand FaxAbility distinctive ringing pattern: rings for 400 ms, stops for 800 ms, rings  
for 400 ms and stops for 1400 ms. This pattern is repeated over and over again. This printer only  
responds to Distinctive Alert cadence(s) DA4 in New Zealand.  
Incoming Defaults  
Purpose:  
To configure settings for incoming fax.  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
203  
Receive Mode  
Purpose:  
To select the default fax receiving mode.  
Values:  
Telephone  
Automatic fax reception is turned off. You can receive a fax by picking up the handset of the external  
telephone and then pressing the remote receive code, or by tapping Manual Receivein On  
Hookand then tapping Receive. For details about Manual Receive, see "Receiving a Fax  
Manually in the Telephone Mode."  
Fax*  
Automatically receives faxes.  
Telephone / Fax  
When the printer receives an incoming fax, the external telephone rings for the time specified in  
Auto Receive Tel/Fax, and then the printer automatically receives a fax. If an incoming call  
is not a fax, the printer beeps from the internal speaker indicating that the call is a telephone call.  
Ans Machine/Fax  
DRPD  
The printer can share a telephone line with an answering machine. In this mode, the printer will  
monitor the fax signal and pick up the line if there are fax tones. If the phone communication in your  
country is serial, this mode is not supported.  
Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) option, a distinctive ring service must be  
installed on your telephone line by the telephone company. After the telephone company has provided  
a separate number for faxing with a distinctive ring pattern, configure the fax setup to monitor for  
that specific ring pattern.  
Ring Tone Volume  
Purpose:  
To set the volume of the ring tone, which indicates that an incoming call is a telephone call through the internal  
speaker when Receive Modeis set to Telephone/Fax.  
Values:  
Off  
Turns off the volume of the ring tone.  
Sets the volume of the ring tone to Low.  
Sets the volume of the ring tone to Medium.  
Sets the volume of the ring tone to High.  
Low  
Medium  
High*  
Auto Receive Setup  
Purpose:  
To configure settings for automatic fax reception.  
Values:  
Auto Receive Fax  
0 second*  
Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax  
receive mode after receiving an incoming call. The value is  
set in increments of 1 second.  
Available Range: 0-255 seconds  
6 seconds*  
Auto Receive Tel/Fax  
Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax  
receive mode after the external telephone receives an  
incoming call. The value is set in increments of 1 second.  
Available Range: 0-255 seconds  
204  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
Auto Receive Ans/Fax  
21 seconds*  
Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax  
receive mode after the external answering machine receives  
an incoming call. The value is set in increments of 1  
second.  
Available Range: 0-255 seconds  
Junk Fax Setup  
Purpose:  
To reject unwanted faxes by accepting faxes only from the fax numbers registered in the Phone Book.  
Values:  
Off*  
On  
Does not reject faxes sent from unwanted numbers.  
Rejects faxes sent from unwanted numbers.  
Secure Receive  
NOTE: Secure Receive feature is available only when Panel Lock Controlis set to Enable.  
Purpose:  
Allows you to password protect all the incoming faxes, and to set or change the password.  
When the Secure Receive feature is enabled, the printer stores incoming faxes and prints them when the correct  
password is entered on the operator panel.  
Values:  
Secure Receive Set  
Disable*  
Enable  
Does not require a password to print stored incoming faxes.  
Requires a password to print stored incoming faxes.  
Change Password*1  
0000–9999  
Sets or changes the password required to print stored incoming faxes.  
*1  
This item is available only when Secure Receive Set is set to Enable  
.
Received Fax Forward  
NOTE: Forward to Email feature is available only when E-Mail Serverinformation and Forwarding E-mail  
Addressare registered. For information on e-mail server settings, see "E-Mail Server" and on forwarding e-mail address  
information, see "Fax Settings."  
Purpose:  
To set whether to forward incoming faxes to a specified destination.  
Values:  
Off*  
Does not forward incoming faxes.  
Forward  
Forwards incoming faxes to a specified destination. Prints incoming faxes if  
an error occurs during the transfer.  
Forwarding Number  
Forwarding Number  
Specifies the fax number of the destination to which incoming faxes will be  
forwarded.  
Print and Forward  
Forward to Email  
Prints incoming faxes and also forwards them to a specified destination.  
Specifies the fax number of the destination to which incoming faxes will be  
forwarded.  
Forwards incoming faxes to specified e-mail addresses. Prints incoming  
faxes if an error occurs during the transfer.  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
205  
 
Print and Forward to  
E-mail  
Prints incoming faxes and also forwards them to specified e-mail addresses.  
Forward to Server  
Forwards incoming faxes to a specified server address. Prints incoming  
faxes if an error occurs during the transfer.  
Print and Forward to  
Server  
Prints incoming faxes and also forwards them to a specified server address.  
NOTE: Depending on the e-mail server settings, the printer may not print incoming faxes when forwarding the incoming faxes to  
e-mail addresses is not successful.  
2 Sided Print  
To set the duplex printing for fax.  
Values:  
Off*  
On  
Does not perform duplex printing.  
Performs duplex printing.  
Remote Receive  
Purpose:  
To receive a fax by pressing a remote receive code on the external telephone after picking up the handset of the  
telephone.  
Values:  
Off*  
On  
Does not receive a fax by pressing a remote receive code on the external  
telephone.  
Receives a fax by pressing a remote receive code on the external telephone.  
Specifies the tone in two digits to start Remote Receive.  
Remote Receive Tone  
Discard Size  
Purpose:  
To set the printer to discard images or any text at the bottom of a fax page when the entire page does not fit the  
output paper.  
Values:  
Off*  
Prints excess images or text at the bottom of a fax page without discarding it.  
Discards any excess images or text.  
On  
Auto Reduction  
Automatically reduces a fax page to fit it onto the appropriate paper size.  
Transmission Defaults  
Purpose:  
To configure settings for transmitting fax.  
206  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
Auto Redial Setup  
Purpose:  
To configure settings for automatic redial.  
Values:  
Redial Attempts  
3*  
Sets the number of redial attempts to make when the  
destination fax number is busy. If you enter 0, the printer  
will not redial. The value is set in increments of 1.  
Available Range: 0-13  
1 minute*  
Interval of Redial  
Resend Delay  
Sets the interval between redial attempts. The value is set  
in increments of 1 minute.  
Available Range: 1-15 minutes  
8 seconds*  
Sets the interval between re-send attempts. The value is set  
in increments of 1 second.  
Available Range: 3-255 seconds  
Tone / Pulse  
Purpose:  
To select the dialing type.  
Values:  
Tone*  
Uses tone dialing.  
Pulse(10PPS)  
Pulse(20PPS)  
Sets "DP (10PPS)" (Dial Pulse, 10 Pulse Per Second) as the dial type.  
Sets "DP (20PPS)" (Dial Pulse, 20 Pulse Per Second) as the dial type.  
Prefix Dial  
Purpose:  
To select whether to set a prefix dial number.  
Values:  
Off*  
Does not set a prefix dial number.  
Sets a prefix dial number.  
On  
Prefix Dial Number  
Sets a prefix dial number of up to five digits. This number dials before any  
auto dial number is started. It is useful for accessing the Private Automatic  
Branch Exchange (PABX).  
Fax Cover Page  
Purpose:  
To set whether to attach a cover page to faxes.  
Values:  
Off*  
On  
Does not attach a cover page to faxes.  
Attaches a cover page to faxes.  
NOTE: This setting affects the setting of the direct fax driver, and the default setting of the fax function when the Fax tile is  
added on the Home screen.  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
207  
 
Fax Header  
Purpose:  
To print the information of the sender on the header of the faxes.  
Values:  
Off  
On*  
Does not print the sender  
's information on the header of faxes.  
Prints the sender s information on the header of faxes.  
'
NOTE: If United Statesis selected for the setting of Country, this option does not appear on the menu. The setting is  
fixed to Onand cannot be changed. For information on the country setting, see "Setting Your Country."  
ECM  
Purpose:  
To set whether to enable or disable the Error Correction Mode (ECM). To use the ECM, the remote machines must  
also support the ECM.  
Values:  
Off  
On*  
Disables the ECM.  
Enables the ECM.  
Modem Speed  
Purpose:  
To adjust the fax modem speed when a fax transmission or reception error occurs.  
Values:  
2.4 Kbps  
4.8 Kbps  
9.6 Kbps  
14.4 Kbps  
33.6 Kbps*  
Display Manual Fax Recipients  
Purpose:  
To set whether to display the fax number of the recipient on the Sending Fax screen when manually sending a fax.  
Values:  
Off  
On*  
Does not display the fax number when manually sending a fax.  
Displays the fax number when manually sending a fax.  
Fax Reports  
Purpose:  
To configure settings for fax reports.  
208  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
 
Fax Activity  
Purpose:  
To set whether to automatically print a fax activity report after every 50 incoming and outgoing fax communications.  
Values:  
Auto Print*  
Automatically prints a fax activity report after every 50 incoming and outgoing fax communications.  
No Auto Print  
Does not automatically print a fax activity report after every 50 incoming and outgoing fax  
communications.  
Fax Transmit  
Purpose:  
To set whether to print a transmission result after a fax transmission.  
Values:  
Print Always  
Print On Error*  
Prints a transmission report after every fax transmission.  
Prints a transmission report only when an error occurs.  
Does not print a transmission report after a fax transmission.  
Print Disable  
Fax Broadcast  
Purpose:  
To set whether to print a transmission result after a fax transmission to multiple destinations.  
Values:  
Print Always*  
Print On Error  
Print Disable  
Prints a transmission report after every fax transmission.  
Prints a transmission report only when an error occurs.  
Does not print a transmission report after a fax transmission to multiple destinations.  
Fax Protocol  
Purpose:  
To set whether to print the protocol monitor report, which helps you identify the cause of a communication problem.  
Values:  
Print Always  
Prints a protocol monitor report after every fax transmission.  
Prints the protocol monitor report only when an error occurs.  
Does not print the protocol monitor report.  
Print On Error  
Print Disable*  
System Settings  
Use System Settingsto configure the power saving mode, warning tones, time-out duration, display language,  
and job log auto print settings.  
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.  
General  
Purpose:  
To configure general settings for the printer.  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
209  
 
Power Saver Timer  
Purpose:  
To specify the time for transition to power saver mode.  
Values:  
Sleep  
7 minutes*  
Specifies the time taken by the printer to enter Sleep mode after it  
finishes a job.  
Available Range: 1–60 minutes  
8 minutes*  
Deep Sleep  
Specifies the time taken by the printer to enter Deep Sleep mode after it  
has entered Sleep mode.  
Available Range: 1–60 minutes  
When you specify 1 minute for Sleep, the printer enters power saver mode 1 minute after it finishes a job. This  
uses much less energy, but requires more warm-up time for the printer. Specify 1 minute if your printer shares an  
electrical circuit with room lighting and you notice lights flickering.  
Select a high value if your printer is in constant use. In most circumstances, this keeps the printer ready to operate  
with minimum warm-up time.  
Select a medium value if you want a balance between energy consumption and a shorter warm-up period.  
The printer automatically returns to the standby mode from the power saver mode when it receives data from the  
computer or remote fax machine. You can also change the status of the printer to the standby mode by pressing the  
(Power Saver) button on the operator panel.  
Date & Time  
Purpose:  
To specify the date and time formats.  
Values:  
Time Zone  
Date  
Sets the time zone.  
Sets the date depending on the Formatsettings.  
Sets the date format.  
Format  
Format  
Time  
Sets the time.  
12 Hour  
24 Hour  
Sets the time in 12-hour format.  
Sets the time in 24-hour format.  
mm / inch  
Purpose:  
To specify the default measurement unit displayed after the numeric value on the operator panel.  
Values:  
Millimeters(mm)*  
Inches(")  
Selects millimeter as the default measurement unit.  
Selects inch as the default measurement unit.  
NOTE: The default for mm/inchvaries depending on other settings, such as Countryand Document Size  
.
210  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
Screen Brightness  
Purpose:  
To adjust the screen brightness of the touch panel.  
Values:  
5*  
Sets the brightness in ten levels, with ten being the brightest.  
Available Range: 1-10  
Audio Tone  
Purpose:  
To configure settings for tones emitted by the printer during operation or when a warning message appears.  
Values:  
Control Panel  
Invalid Key  
Off*  
Does not emit a tone when the operator panel input is correct.  
Emits a tone when the operator panel input is correct.  
Soft  
Normal  
Loud  
Off*  
Does not emit a tone when the operator panel input is incorrect.  
Emits a tone when the operator panel input is incorrect.  
Soft  
Normal  
Loud  
Off  
Machine Ready  
Copy Completed  
Job Completed  
Fault Tone  
Does not emit a tone when the printer is ready to process a job.  
Emits a tone when the printer is ready to process a job.  
Soft  
Normal*  
Loud  
Off  
Does not emit a tone when a copy job is complete.  
Emits a tone when a copy job is complete.  
Soft  
Normal*  
Loud  
Off  
Does not emit a tone when a job other than a copy job is complete.  
Emits a tone when a job other than a copy job is complete.  
Soft  
Normal*  
Loud  
Off  
Does not emit a tone when a job ends abnormally.  
Emits a tone when a job ends abnormally.  
Soft  
Normal*  
Loud  
Off  
Alert Tone  
Does not emit a tone when a problem occurs.  
Emits a tone when a problem occurs.  
Soft  
Normal*  
Loud  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
211  
Out of Paper  
Off  
Does not emit a tone when the printer runs out of paper.  
Emits a tone when the printer runs out of paper.  
Soft  
Normal*  
Loud  
Off  
Low Toner Alert  
Auto Clear Alert  
NFC Authentication*1  
Does not emit a tone when the toner is low.  
Emits a tone when the toner is low.  
Soft  
Normal*  
Loud  
Off*  
Does not emit a tone 5 seconds before the printer performs auto clear.  
Emits a tone 5 seconds before the printer performs auto clear.  
Soft  
Normal  
Loud  
Off  
Does not emit a tone when an NFC card is placed on the NFC reader for  
authentication.  
Soft  
Emits a tone when an NFC card is placed on the NFC reader for authentication.  
Normal*  
Loud  
Off  
All Tones  
Disables all the alert tones.  
Soft  
Sets the volume of all the alert tones at once.  
Normal*  
Loud  
*1  
This item is available only on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw.  
Low Toner Alert Message  
Purpose:  
To specify whether to show the alert message when the toner is low.  
Values:  
Off  
On*  
Does not show the alert message when the toner is low.  
Shows the alert message when the toner is low.  
OffHook Wake Up  
Purpose:  
To specify whether to wake up from Sleep or Deep Sleep mode when you pick up the handset of the external  
telephone.  
Values:  
Off*  
On  
Does not wake up from Sleep or Deep Sleep mode when you pick up the handset of the external  
telephone.  
Wakes up from Sleep or Deep Sleep mode when you pick up the handset of the external telephone.  
212  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
Auto Log Print  
Purpose:  
To automatically print a job history report after every 20 jobs.  
Values:  
Off*  
On  
Does not automatically print a job history report  
.
Automatically prints a job history report  
.
Print logs can also be printed using the Report/Listmenu.  
RAM Disk  
Purpose:  
To allocate memory to the RAM disk file system for the Secure Print, Private Mail Box Print, Public Mail Box Print,  
and Proof Print features. The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.  
Values:  
Off  
Does not allocate memory to the RAM disk file system. Secure Print, Private Mail  
Box Print, Public Mail Box Print, and Proof Print jobs will abort and be recorded to  
the job log.  
On*  
260 MB  
Sets the allocation of memory to the RAM disk file system in increments of 20 MB.  
Available Range:  
20-300 MB  
NOTE: Restart your printer when you change the settings for the RAM Diskmenu.  
Fax Server Phone Book  
Purpose:  
To specify whether to search the phone numbers from the phone book for the LDAP server.  
Values:  
Off*  
On  
Does not search the phone numbers from the phone book for the LDAP server.  
Searches the phone numbers from the phone book for the LDAP server.  
NOTE: You can search the phone numbers only from the local Phone Book when Fax Server Phone Bookis set to  
Off.  
E-mail Server Address Book  
Purpose:  
To specify whether to search the e-mail addresses from the address book for the LDAP server.  
Values:  
Off*  
On  
Does not search the e-mail addresses from the address book for the LDAP server.  
Searches the e-mail addresses from the address book for the LDAP server.  
NOTE: You can search the e-mail addresses only from the local Address Book when E-mail Server Address Book  
is set to Off.  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
213  
 
Power On Wizard  
Purpose:  
To perform initial setup for the printer.  
Max E-mail Size  
Purpose:  
To specify the maximum size of e-mail that can be sent.  
Values:  
4096 KB*  
Sets the maximum size of e-mail that can be sent, in increments of 1 KB.  
Available Range:  
50-16384 KB  
Timers  
Purpose:  
To configure timer settings.  
Auto Reset  
Purpose:  
To automatically reset the settings for Copy, Scan, Fax, E-mail, or Print to the default settings and return to the  
standby mode after you do not specify any settings for the specified time.  
Values:  
45sec*  
1min  
2min  
3min  
4min  
Fault Time-out  
Purpose:  
To specify the amount of time the printer waits before canceling a job that stops abnormally. The print job is canceled if the time-  
out time is exceeded.  
Values:  
Off  
Disables the fault time-out.  
On*  
60 seconds*  
Sets the amount of time the printer waits before canceling a job that stops  
abnormally.  
Available Range: 3-300 seconds  
Output Settings  
Purpose:  
To configure settings concerning output from the printer.  
214  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
Default Paper Size  
Purpose:  
To specify the default paper size.  
Values:  
mm series  
A4 (210x297mm)*1  
Letter(8.5x11")  
*1  
Denotes country-specific factory default values.  
inch series  
A4 (210x297mm)  
Letter(8.5x11")*1  
*1  
Denotes country-specific factory default values.  
Print ID  
Purpose:  
To specify a location where the user ID is printed.  
Values:  
Off*  
Does not print the user ID.  
Top Left  
Prints the user ID on the top left of the page.  
Prints the user ID on the top right of the page.  
Prints the user ID on the bottom left of the page.  
Prints the user ID on the bottom right of the page.  
Top Right  
Bottom Left  
Bottom Right  
NOTE: When printing on DL size paper, a part of the user ID may not be printed correctly.  
Print Text  
Purpose:  
To specify whether the printer outputs PDL (Page Description Language) data, which is not supported by the  
printer, as text when the printer receives it. Text data is printed on A4 or Letter size paper.  
Values:  
Off  
On*  
Does not print the received data.  
Prints the received data as text data.  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
215  
Banner Sheet  
Purpose:  
To specify the position of banner sheet, and also specify the tray in which the banner sheet is loaded.  
Values:  
Insert Position  
Off*  
Does not print the banner sheet.  
Front  
Inserted before the first page of every copy.  
Inserted after the last page of every copy.  
Back  
Front & Back  
Inserted before the first page of every copy and after the last page of every  
copy.  
Specify Tray  
MPF  
The banner sheet is loaded in the MPF.  
Tray1*  
Tray2*1  
The banner sheet is loaded in tray1.  
The banner sheet is loaded in the optional 550-sheet feeder.  
*1  
This item is available only when the optional 550-sheet feeder is installed.  
Substitute Tray  
Purpose:  
Specifies whether to use paper of a different size when the paper that is loaded in the specified tray does not match  
the paper size settings for the current job.  
Values:  
Off  
No tray size substitute accepted.  
Larger Size  
Substitutes paper of next largest size. When there is no larger paper size, the printer substitutes paper of  
nearest size.  
Nearest Size*  
Use MPF  
Substitutes paper of nearest size.  
Substitutes paper from the MPF.  
Letterhead 2 Sided  
Purpose:  
To specify whether to print on both sides when using letterhead.  
Values:  
Disable*  
Enable  
Does not print on both sides of letterhead.  
Prints on both sides of letterhead.  
A4<>Letter Switch  
Purpose:  
To print A4 size jobs on Letter size paper if A4 size paper is not available or to print Letter size jobs on A4 size paper  
if Letter size paper is not available.  
Values:  
Off*1  
On*  
Does not print A4 size jobs on Letter size paper or Letter size jobs on A4 paper.  
Prints A4 size jobs on Letter size paper if A4 is not available in the paper trays and vice versa (Letter  
size job on A4 size paper).  
216  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
*1  
Depending on the printer setting, the printer will continue to print on existing media of a different size or prompt the user to select from  
the following:  
• Delete Job  
• Supply with correct media  
A5<>Statement Switch  
Purpose:  
To print A5 size jobs on Statement size paper if A5 size paper is not available or to print Statement size jobs on A5  
size paper if Statement size paper is not available.  
Values:  
Off*1  
On*  
Does not print A5 size jobs on Statement size paper or Statement size jobs on A5 paper.  
Prints A5 size jobs on Statement size paper if A5 is not available in the paper trays and vice versa  
(Statement size job on A5 size paper).  
*1  
Depending on the printer setting, the printer will continue to print on existing media of a different size or prompt the user to select from  
the following:  
• Delete Job  
• Supply with correct media  
Report 2 Sided Print  
Purpose:  
To specify to print reports on both sides a sheet of paper.  
Values:  
1 Sided*  
2 Sided  
Prints reports on one side of a sheet of paper.  
Prints reports on both side of a sheet of paper.  
Use Another Tray  
Purpose:  
To change to another paper tray when a paper size runs out in the specified paper tray.  
NOTE: If you select another paper tray with paper size smaller than the paper size specified in the job, the parts that do not fit  
are not printed (print size is not adjusted automatically).  
Values:  
Off  
On*  
Does not print on other paper sizes in other paper trays if the paper size specified in the job runs out.  
Shows a message to select another tray when the specified paper runs out in the paper tray.  
Envelope Mode Mismatch  
Purpose:  
To specify whether to display the alert window when the print job is started without setting to the envelope mode.  
Values:  
Ignore  
Does not display the alert window and continues the print job on the envelope even if a mismatch is  
detected in the printer's envelope mode settings.  
Show Warning*  
Displays the alert window to confirm whether to hold the print job and change to the envelope mode,  
or to continue the print job anyway without changing to the envelope mode.  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
217  
Resume Printing After Jam Recovery  
Purpose:  
To specify whether to reprint or cancel the jammed job after the printer is recovered from paper jam.  
Values:  
Off  
Cancel the jammed job when the paper jam happens.  
On*  
Reprint the jammed job after the printer is recovered from paper jam.  
NOTE: This setting will not affect the fax jobs.  
Set Available Time  
Purpose:  
Sets the available time for the Copy, Scan, Fax, and Print functions.  
Values:  
Copy, Scan, Fax, Print Set Available Time  
Off*  
On  
Does not set the time when function is available.  
Sets the time when function is available.  
Sets the start time of the available time.  
Sets the end time of the available time.  
Sets the day of the week to repeat the setting.  
Start Time  
End Time  
Recurrence  
NOTE: Set Available Timecan be configured when Print Copy, Scan, or Faxis set to On.  
,
Secure Job Expiration  
NOTE: Secure Job Expiration feature is available only when RAM Diskis set to On  
Purpose:  
.
To specify the date and time to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk.  
Values:  
Expiration Mode  
Off*  
On  
Does not set the date and time to delete the files stored as Secure  
Print in the RAM disk.  
Sets the date and time to delete the files stored as Secure Print in  
the RAM disk.  
Expiration Time  
Recurrence  
Sets the time to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM  
disk.  
Daily  
Sets the recurrence to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the  
RAM disk daily.  
Weekly*  
Monthly  
Sets the recurrence to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the  
RAM disk weekly.  
Sets the recurrence to delete the files stored as Secure Print  
monthly.  
218  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
   
Weekly Setting  
Monday  
Sets the day of the week to delete the files stored as Secure Print.  
Tuesday  
Wednesday  
Thursday  
Friday  
Saturday  
Sunday*  
Monthly Setting  
1 Day*  
Sets the day of the month to delete the files stored as Secure Print  
in the RAM disk.  
Available Range: 1-28 days  
AccessControl Mode  
Purpose:  
To specify who has access to printing.  
Values:  
Off*  
On  
Does not limit access to printing.  
Limits access to printing. Authentication is done using user information registered on the printer.  
Non Registered User  
Purpose:  
To specify whether to permit the printing of data without authentication information.  
Values:  
Off*  
On  
Does not permit non-account user to print the data.  
Permits non-account user to print the data.  
AccessControl Error Report  
Purpose:  
To specify whether to automatically print error-related information if printing with AccessControl results in an error.  
Values:  
Off*  
On  
Does not print the error report when printing with AccessControl results in an error.  
Prints the error report when printing with AccessControl results in an error.  
NFC - Tap to Print  
NOTE: The Tap to Print feature is available on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw only.  
Purpose:  
To specify whether to add the printer to a mobile device such as a tablet or a smartphone by tapping the device to  
printer.  
of the  
Values:  
Disable  
Enable*  
Does not add the printer to a mobile device by tapping the device to the printer.  
Adds the printer to a mobile device by tapping the device to the printer.  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
219  
Maintenance  
Use the Maintenancemenu to fine-tune the printer for optimal print quality, reset the print meter or the life  
counter of the replaced parts, or reset the default settings by initializing the printer's non-volatile memory.  
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.  
Paper Density  
Purpose:  
To specify paper density settings.  
Values:  
Plain  
Light (<81g/m2)  
Normal*  
Adjust Transfer Unit  
NOTE: The print quality changes depending on the setting values you select for this item.  
Purpose:  
To specify the transfer unit voltage adjustment for each paper type.  
Values:  
Plain  
0*  
Sets the transfer unit voltage in increments of 1. The default settings  
may not give the best output on all paper types. If you see mottles on  
the printed paper, try to increase the voltage. If you see white spots on  
the printed paper, try to decrease the voltage.  
(60-80g/m2)  
Available Range: -5 to +10  
0*  
Plain Thick  
(81-105g/m2)  
Available Range: -5 to +10  
Covers  
0*  
(106-163g/m2)  
Available Range: -5 to +10  
Covers Thick  
(164-216g/m2)  
0*  
Available Range: -5 to +10  
Rough Surface  
0*  
Available Range: -5 to +10  
Label  
0*  
Available Range: -5 to +10  
Envelope  
0*  
Available Range: -5 to +10  
0*  
Japanese Postcard  
Available Range: -5 to +10  
220  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
   
Adjust Fusing Unit  
NOTE: The print quality changes depending on the setting values you select for this item.  
Purpose:  
To adjust the temperature setting of the fusing unit for each paper type.  
Values:  
Plain  
0*  
Sets the fusing unit temperature in increments of 1. The default  
settings may not give the best output on all paper types. When the  
printed paper has curled, try to lower the temperature. When the toner  
does not fuse on the paper properly, try to increase the temperature.  
(60-80g/m2)  
Available Range: -3 to +3  
0*  
Plain Thick  
(81-105g/m2)  
Available Range: -3 to +3  
Covers  
0*  
(106-163g/m2)  
Available Range: -3 to +3  
Covers Thick  
(164-216g/m2)  
0*  
Available Range: -3 to +3  
Rough Surface  
0*  
Available Range: -3 to +3  
Label  
0*  
Available Range: -3 to +3  
Envelope  
0*  
Available Range: -3 to +3  
0*  
Japanese Postcard  
Available Range: -3 to +3  
Adjust Density  
Purpose:  
To adjust density level.  
Values:  
Darken  
Normal*  
Lighten  
-3 to -1  
0
Adjusts the density level darker than the normal setting.  
Works well with standard typed or printed documents.  
Adjusts the density level lighter than the normal setting.  
+1 to +3  
Chart  
Purpose:  
To print various charts that can be used for diagnosis of the printer.  
Values:  
Pitch Chart  
Print  
Prints a full halftone page. Also prints a page to check the pitch. A total  
of two pages are printed.  
Full Page Solid  
1-Sided  
2-Sided  
Specifies to print a chart of the full page solid on the paper.  
Specifies to print a chart of the full page solid on both sides of the  
paper.  
Print  
Begins to print a full page solid.  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
221  
Alignment Chart  
Print  
Prints a chart to check for proper alignment of the print image on the  
paper.  
Clean Developer  
Purpose:  
To stir the developer in the drum cartridge.  
Values:  
Start  
Stirs the developer in the drum cartridge.  
Clean Transfer Unit  
Purpose:  
To clean the transfer unit.  
Values:  
Start  
Cleans the transfer unit.  
Toner Refresh  
Purpose:  
To clean the toner in the drum cartridge (and supply new toner from toner cartridge).  
NOTE: Toner Refresh feature uses the toner, and shorten the life of the toner cartridge and the drum cartridge.  
Values:  
Start  
Cleans the toner.  
Reset Defaults  
Purpose:  
To initialize the non-volatile (NV) memory. After executing this function and rebooting the printer, all the menu  
parameters are reset to their default values.  
Values:  
User Fax Section  
User Scan Section  
User Account Section  
User App Section  
System Section  
Initialize Initializes the fax number entries in the Address Book.  
Initialize Initializes the e-mail and server address entries in the Address Book.  
Initialize Initializes the user registration information.  
Initialize Initializes the widget application information.  
Initialize Initializes the system parameters.  
Initialize Print Meter  
Purpose:  
To initialize the print meter of the printer. When the print meter is initialized, the meter count is reset to zero.  
Reset Transfer Belt Unit  
Purpose:  
To initialize the life counter of the transfer belt unit. After replacing the transfer belt unit, be sure to initialize its life  
counter.  
222  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
Reset Fusing Unit  
Purpose:  
To initialize the life counter of the fusing unit. After replacing the fusing unit, be sure to initialize its life counter.  
Clear Stored Jobs  
NOTE: Clear Stored Jobs feature is available only when RAM Diskis set to On  
Purpose:  
.
To clear all files stored as Secure Print, Private Mail Box Print, Public Mail box Print, Proof Print, and Stored Print in  
the RAM disk.  
Values:  
All  
Clear  
Deletes all files stored as Secure Print, Private Mail Box Print, Public Mail Box Print,  
and Proof Print in the RAM disk.  
Secure Document  
Stored Document  
Clear  
Clear  
Deletes all files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk.  
Deletes all files stored as Stored Print in the RAM disk.  
Non-Dell Toner  
Purpose:  
To use toner cartridge of another manufacturer.  
CAUTION: Using a non-Dell™ toner cartridge may severely damage your printer. The warranty does not cover damages  
caused by using non-Dell toner cartridges.  
Values:  
Off*  
Does not use toner cartridge of another manufacturer.  
On  
Uses toner cartridge of another manufacturer.  
Adjust Altitude  
Purpose:  
To specify the altitude of the location where the printer is installed.  
The discharge phenomenon for charging the photo conductor varies with barometric pressure. Adjustments are  
performed by specifying the altitude of the location where the printer is being used.  
NOTE: An incorrect altitude setting leads to poor printing quality, incorrect indication of remaining toner, etc.  
Values:  
0m*  
Sets the altitude of the location where the printer is installed.  
1000m  
2000m  
3000m  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
223  
Decrease Electrostatic Memory  
Purpose:  
To widen the print gap not to leave toner streak on the next page.  
Values:  
Off*  
Does not widen the print gap.  
On  
Widens the print gap.  
NOTE: When Decrease Electrostatic Memory is set to On, the print speed will be slowed.  
Decrease Ghosting  
Purpose:  
To reduce negative ghost.  
Values:  
Off*  
On  
Does not decrease negative ghosting.  
Decreases negative ghosting.  
Clear Job History  
Purpose:  
To clear the job history of all finished jobs.  
Fax Line Test  
NOTE: Fax Line Test feature is not available when the Fax function is disabled.  
Purpose:  
To test if the voltage supply from the fax line is sufficient.  
Secure Settings  
Use the Secure Settingsmenu to set a password to limit access to the menus. This prevents items from being  
changed accidentally.  
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.  
See also:  
"Panel Lock"  
Panel Lock  
Purpose:  
To set a limited access to Admin Settingswith a password, and to set or change the password.  
Values:  
Panel Lock Control  
Disable*  
Enable  
Disables password protection for Admin Settings  
Enables password protection for Admin Settings  
Sets or changes the password required to access Admin Settings.  
.
.
Change Password*1  
0000–9999  
*1  
This item is available only when Panel Lock Controlis set to Enable  
.
224  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
   
Functions Control  
NOTE: Functions Control feature is available only when Panel Lock Controlis set to Enable.  
Purpose:  
To specify whether to enable or disable each of the printer functions, or to require a password to use the functions.  
Values:  
Copy  
On*  
Enables the Copy function.  
On (Password)  
Enables the Copy function, but requires a password to  
use the function.  
Off  
Disables the Copy function.  
Scan to E-mail  
On*  
Enables the Scan to Email function.  
On (Password)  
Enables the Scan to Email function, but requires a  
password.  
Off  
On*  
Disables the Scan to Email function.  
Enables the Fax function.  
Fax  
On (Password)  
Enables the Fax function but requires a password to  
send faxes (does not require a password to receive  
incoming faxes).  
Off  
Disables the Fax function (the printer will not send or  
receive faxes).  
Fax Driver  
Enable*  
Disable  
Enables the Fax Driver function.  
Disables the Fax Driver function (the printer will not  
send faxes).  
Scan to Network Folder  
On*  
Enables the Scan to Network Folder function.  
On (Password)  
Enables the Scan to Network Folder function, but  
requires a password.  
Off  
On*  
Disables the Scan to Network Folder function.  
Enables the Scan to Computer function.  
Scan to Computer  
On (Password)  
Enables the Scan to Computer function, but requires  
a password. When you select On (Password)  
you cannot scan using Web Services on Devices  
(WSD).  
,
Off  
On*  
Disables the Scan to Computer function.  
Enables the PC Scan function.  
PC Scan  
On (Password)  
Enables the PC Scan function, but requires a  
password.  
Off  
Disables the PC Scan function.  
Scan To USB  
USB Direct Print  
On*  
Enables the Scan To USB function.  
On (Password)  
Enables the Scan To USB function, but requires a  
password.  
Off  
On*  
Disables the Scan To USB function.  
Enables the USB Direct Print function.  
On (Password)  
Enables the USB Direct Print function, but requires a  
password.  
Off  
Disables the USB Direct Print function.  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
225  
 
ID Copy  
Enable*  
Disable  
Enables the ID Copy function.  
Disables the ID Copy function.  
USB Service  
Show When  
Inserted  
Enable*  
Disable  
Shows a USB Drive Detected screen when a USB  
memory is inserted into the printer.  
Does not show a USB Drive Detected screen when a  
USB memory is inserted into the printer.  
Change Password*1  
Changes the password that is set under the  
Functions Controlmenu.  
*1  
This item is available only when On(Password)is enabled.  
Desktop Authentication  
NOTE: The Desktop Authentication feature is available on the Dell Smart Multifunction Printer | S2815dn only.  
Purpose:  
To specify the Desktop Authentication method.  
Values:  
Local Authentication*  
Remote Authentication  
Use the local authentication method.  
Use the remote authentication method.  
Edit E-mail From Fields  
Purpose:  
To specify whether to enable editing of the transmission source when you use Scan to Email.  
Values:  
Disable  
Enable*  
Disables editing of the transmission source.  
Enables editing of the transmission source.  
Reconfirm Recipient  
Purpose:  
To specify whether to reconfirm the recipient before sending a fax or scan.  
NOTE: If the Reconfirm Recipientmenu is set to Reconfirm Recipient, recipients can only be selected  
from the phone book or the address book. You cannot directly enter an address or fax number.  
Values:  
No Confirmation*  
Does not display a screen to reconfirm the recipient before the job is actually sent.  
Reconfirm Recipient  
Displays a screen to reconfirm the recipient before the job is actually sent.  
226  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
 
Domain Filtering  
Purpose:  
To specify whether to only send e-mails to specified domains.  
NOTE: Set the domains from SMTP Domain Filtering on the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.  
Values:  
Off*  
Disables Domain Filtering.  
Allow Domains  
Only allows e-mails to be sent to specified domains.  
Software Download  
Purpose:  
To enable or disable download of firmware updates.  
Values:  
Disable  
Enable*  
Disables firmware updates.  
Enables firmware updates.  
Display of Network Information  
Purpose:  
To show or hide network information in the message field of the Home screen.  
Values:  
Show IPv4 Address*  
Shows the IPv4 address of the printer on the Home screen.  
Show Host Name  
Shows the host name of the printer on the Home screen.  
Hide Network Information  
Does not show network information on the Home screen.  
Login Error  
NOTE: Login Error feature is available only when Panel Lock Controlis set to Enable.  
Purpose:  
To specify the number of error entry attempts allowed when you log in as an administrator in the Admin  
Settingsand Report/Listmenu.  
Values:  
Off*  
On  
Does not allow an administrator to log in after one error entry attempt.  
5*  
Sets the number of error entry attempts allowed when an administrator logs in.  
Available Range: 1-10  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
227  
NFC Authentication  
NOTE: The NFC Authentication feature is available on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw only.  
Purpose:  
To specify whether to enable the authentication using the NFC authentication card.  
Values:  
Disable*  
Enable  
Does not permit the authentication using the NFC authentication card.  
Permits the authentication using the NFC authentication card.  
FIPS 140-2 Validation Mode  
NOTE: The FIPS 140-2 Validation Mode feature is available on the Dell Smart Multifunction Printer | S2815dn only.  
Purpose:  
To specify whether to use the FIPS 140-2 Level-1 approved encryption algorithms for RSA modules.  
Values:  
Disable*  
Enable  
Allows the use of FIPS 140-2 Level-1 unapproved algorithms.  
Allows the use of FIPS 140-2 Level-1 approved encryption algorithms.  
NOTE: Communication using the following protocols will not be encrypted using FIPS 140-2 Level-1 approved encryption  
algorithms even when FIPS 140-2 Validation Mode is enabled. Users are advised to turn them off manually when FIPS 140-2  
Validation Mode is enabled:  
•
•
•
SNMP v3  
SMB  
PDF Direct Print  
NOTE: This feature may not be available for certain models.  
USB Settings  
Use the USB Settingsmenu to change printer settings affecting a USB port.  
USB Port  
NOTE: USB Port feature is available only for the USB port on the rear of the printer.  
Purpose:  
To specify whether to enable the USB port. The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on  
again.  
Values:  
Disable  
Enable*  
Disables the USB interface.  
Enables the USB interface.  
PS Data Format  
Purpose:  
To specify PostScript 3 Compatible communication protocol. You can configure the PS Data Format settings. The  
change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.  
228  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
   
Values:  
Auto  
Used when auto-detecting the PostScript 3 Compatible communication protocol.  
Used when the communication protocol is in ASCII interface.  
Used when the communication protocol is in binary format.  
Standard  
BCP  
TBCP*  
Used when the communication protocol supports both ASCII and binary data to switch  
between them according to the specified control code.  
Binary  
Used when no special processing is required for data.  
Job Time-out  
Purpose:  
To specify the amount of time the printer waits for data to arrive from the computer. The print job is canceled if the time-out  
time is exceeded.  
Values:  
Off  
Disables the job time-out.  
On*  
30 seconds*  
Sets the time the printer waits for data to arrive from the computer.  
Available Range: 5–300 seconds  
Default Settings  
Use Default Settingsto modify the Copy, Scan, or Faxmenu defaults.  
Copy Defaults  
Purpose:  
To modify the Copymenu defaults.  
Copy Defaultsallows you to configure the following items in addition to the items under the Copymenu.  
Auto Exposure Level  
Purpose:  
To specify the default background suppression level.  
Values:  
Normal*  
High  
Sets the background suppression level to Normal  
Sets the background suppression level to High.  
Sets the background suppression level to Highest.  
.
Highest  
Fax Defaults  
Purpose:  
To modify the Faxmenu defaults. See "Fax" for more details.  
Scan Defaults  
Purpose:  
To modify the Scanmenu defaults.  
Scan Defaultsallows you to configure the following items in addition to the items under the Scanmenu.  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
229  
       
Auto Exposure Level  
Purpose:  
To specify the default background suppression level.  
Values:  
Normal*  
High  
Sets the background suppression level to Normal.  
Sets the background suppression level to High.  
Sets the background suppression level to Highest.  
Highest  
TIFF File Format  
Purpose:  
To specify the default TIFF file format.  
Values:  
TIFF V6  
TTN2*  
Sets the default TIFF file format to TIFF V6.  
Sets the default TIFF file format to TTN2.  
Image Compression  
Purpose:  
To specify the image compression level.  
Values:  
High  
Sets the image compression level to High.  
Normal*  
Sets the image compression level to Normal.  
Sets the image compression level to Low.  
Low  
Direct Print Defaults (available on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw only)  
USB Direct Print Defaults (available on the Dell Smart Multifunction Printer | S2815dn only)  
Purpose:  
To modify the defaults for the Direct Print Defaultsor USB Direct Print Defaultsmenu. See  
"Print PDF/TIFF" for more details.  
Tray Management  
Use the Tray Settingsmenu to define the print media loaded in tray1 and the optional 550-sheet feeder.  
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.  
Tray Settings  
To configure tray settings.  
MPF  
Purpose:  
To specify the paper loaded in the MPF.  
230  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
     
Values:  
Display Tray Prompt  
Enter a check to display a popup message that  
prompts to set Paper Type and Paper Size when paper  
is loaded in the MPF. The factory default is on  
(check).  
MPF Mode  
Use Panel Settings*  
Use Printer Driver Settings  
Manual  
Uses the paper size and type specified on the operator  
panel.  
Use the paper size and type specified on the printer  
driver.  
When the print job is started, the printer pauses the  
job and shows the screen to prompt the user to load  
the paper of the specified size and type. To continue  
the job, check that the specified paper is loaded, and  
tap Continuein the screen on the touch panel.  
Size*1  
mm series  
A4  
(210x297mm)*2  
A5  
(148x210mm)  
A6  
(105x148mm)  
B5  
(182x257mm)  
B6  
(128x182mm)  
Letter  
(8.5x11")  
Folio  
(8.5x13")  
Legal  
(8.5x14")  
Statement  
(5.5x8.5")  
Executive  
(7.3x10.5")  
Envelope #10  
(4.1x9.5")  
Monarch Env.  
(3.9x7.5")  
DL Env.  
(110x220mm)  
C5 Env.  
(162x229mm)  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
231  
Postcard  
(100x148mm)  
Custom  
inch series  
Letter  
(8.5x11")*2  
Folio  
(8.5x13")  
Legal  
(8.5x14")  
Statement  
(5.5x8.5")  
A4  
(210x297mm)  
A5  
(148x210mm)  
A6  
(105x148mm)  
B5  
(182x257mm)  
B6  
(128x182mm)  
Executive  
(7.3x10.5")  
Envelope #10  
(4.1x9.5")  
Monarch Env.  
(3.9x7.5")  
DL Env.  
(110x220mm)  
C5 Env.  
(162x229mm)  
Postcard  
(100x148mm)  
Custom  
Type*1  
Plain*  
(60-80g/m2)  
Plain Thick  
(81-105g/m2)  
Covers  
(106-163g/m2)  
Covers Thick  
(164-216g/m2)  
232  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
Rough Surface  
Label  
Envelope  
Recycled  
Japanese Postcard  
Letterhead  
Preprinted  
Prepunched  
Color  
*1  
*2  
Available only when MPF Modeis set to Use Panel Settings  
Denotes country-specific factory default value.  
.
Tray1  
Purpose:  
To specify the paper loaded in tray1.  
Values:  
Display Tray Prompt  
Enter a check to display a popup message that  
prompts to set Paper Type and Paper Size when paper  
is loaded in tray1. The factory default is on (check).  
Size  
mm series  
A4  
(210x297mm)*1  
A5  
(148x210mm)  
A6  
(105x148mm)  
B5  
(182x257mm)  
B6  
(128x182mm)  
Letter  
(8.5x11")  
Folio  
(8.5x13")  
Legal  
(8.5x14")  
Statement  
(5.5x8.5")  
Executive  
(7.3x10.5")  
Postcard  
(100x148mm)  
Custom  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
233  
inch series  
Letter  
(8.5x11")*1  
Folio  
(8.5x13")  
Legal  
(8.5x14")  
Statement  
(5.5x8.5")  
A4  
(210x297mm)  
A5  
(148x210mm)  
A6  
(105x148mm)  
B5  
(182x257mm)  
B6  
(128x182mm)  
Executive  
(7.3x10.5")  
Postcard  
(100x148mm)  
Custom  
Type  
Plain  
(60-80g/m2)  
Plain Thick  
(81-105g/m2)  
Covers  
(106-163g/m2)  
Covers Thick  
(164-216g/m2)  
Rough Surface  
Label  
Recycled  
Japanese Postcard  
Letterhead  
Preprinted  
Prepunched  
Color  
*1  
Denotes country-specific factory default value.  
NOTE: For more information on supported paper sizes, see "Supported Paper Sizes."  
234  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
Tray2  
NOTE: Tray2 feature is available only when the optional 550-sheet feeder is installed.  
Purpose:  
To specify the paper loaded in the optional 550-sheet feeder.  
Values:  
Display Tray Prompt  
Enter a check to display a popup message that  
prompts to set Paper Type and Paper Size when paper  
is loaded in the optional 550-sheet feeder. The factory  
default is on (check).  
Size  
mm series  
A4  
(210x297mm)*1  
A5  
(148x210mm)  
B5  
(182x257mm)  
Letter  
(8.5x11")  
Folio  
(8.5x13")  
Legal  
(8.5x14")  
Statement  
(5.5x8.5")  
Executive  
(7.3x10.5")  
Custom  
Letter  
inch series  
(8.5x11")*1  
Folio  
(8.5x13")  
Legal  
(8.5x14")  
Statement  
(5.5x8.5")  
A4  
(210x297mm)  
A5  
(148x210mm)  
B5  
(182x257mm)  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
235  
Executive  
(7.3x10.5")  
Custom  
Type  
Plain  
(60-80g/m2)  
Plain Thick  
(81-105g/m2)  
Covers  
(106-163g/m2)  
Covers Thick  
(164-216g/m2)  
Rough Surface  
Label  
Recycled  
Letterhead  
Preprinted  
Prepunched  
Color  
Tray Priority  
Purpose:  
To set the priority order of the paper trays for automatic tray selection. If paper trays loaded with the same paper size  
and type exists, the paper tray is selected according to this priority order.  
Values:  
First  
MPF*1  
Tray1*  
Tray2  
MPF*  
Tray1*1  
Tray2  
Sets the MPF as the first priority.  
Sets tray1 as the first priority.  
Sets the optional 550-sheet feeder as the first priority.  
Sets the MPF as the second priority.  
Second  
Sets tray1 as the second priority.  
Sets the optional 550-sheet feeder as the second priority.  
Sets the MPF as the third priority.  
Third  
MPF  
Tray1  
Sets tray1 as the third priority.  
Tray2*1  
Sets the optional 550-sheet feeder as the third priority.  
*1  
The factory default when the optional 550-sheet feeder is installed.  
Language Settings  
Use the Language Settingsmenu to configure Panel Language, or Keyboard Layout.  
Panel Language  
Purpose:  
To determine the language of the text on the touch panel.  
236  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
     
Values:  
English*  
Français  
Italiano  
Deutsch  
Español  
Dansk  
Nederlands  
Norsk  
Svenska  
Keyboard Layout  
Purpose:  
To select the keyboard layout on the touch panel.  
Values:  
QWERTY  
AZERTY  
QWERTZ  
Print  
Use the Printmenu to select and print a job stored by the Private Mailbox, Public Mailbox, Proof Print, Secure  
Print, and Secure Fax Receive features.  
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.  
Private Mailbox  
NOTE: Private Mailbox feature is available only when RAM Diskis set to On  
Purpose:  
.
To specify whether and how to print the job stored in the Private Mailbox.  
Values:  
Select User ID  
Enter the password you specified on the printer driver.  
Selects a job to print.  
Select a Job  
Select All  
Quantity  
Selects all the documents stored for this User ID.  
Specifies the quantity of prints in increments of 1.  
1*  
Available Range: 1-999  
Use Driver Settings  
Sets the quantity of prints specified on the printer driver.  
Prints the selected job.  
Print  
Print and Delete*  
Deletes the document after it is printed.  
Deletes the specified document from print memory.  
Delete  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
237  
     
Public Mailbox  
NOTE: Public Mailbox feature is available only when RAM Diskis set to On  
.
Purpose:  
To specify whether and how to print the job stored in the Public Mailbox.  
Values:  
Select User ID  
Select a Job  
Select All  
Quantity  
Selects a job to print.  
Selects all the documents stored for this User ID.  
Specifies the quantity of prints in increments of 1.  
1*  
Available Range: 1-999  
Use Driver Settings  
Sets the quantity of prints specified on the printer driver.  
Prints the selected job.  
Print  
Print and Delete  
Deletes the document after it is printed.  
Deletes the specified document from print memory.  
Delete  
Proof Print  
NOTE: Proof Print feature is available only when RAM Diskis set to On  
Purpose:  
.
To specify whether and how to print the job stored in the Proof Print. When the print job is sent from the printer  
driver on the computer, a single copy is printed for you to check the print result. If you do not have problems with  
the print result, you can choose to print more copies. This prevents a large number of misprinted copies from being  
printed at one time.  
Values:  
Select User ID  
Select a Job  
Select All  
Quantity  
Selects a job to print.  
Selects all the documents stored for this User ID.  
Specifies the quantity of prints in increments of 1.  
1*  
Available Range: 1-999  
Use Driver Settings  
Sets the quantity of prints specified on the printer driver.  
Prints the selected job.  
Print  
Print and Delete  
Deletes the document after it is printed.  
Deletes the specified document from print memory.  
Delete  
Secure Print  
NOTE: Secure Print feature is available only when RAM Diskis set to On  
Purpose:  
.
To print confidential jobs. The printer can hold the job in memory until you arrive at the printer and type the  
password on the operator panel.  
Values:  
Select User ID  
Enter the password you specified on the printer driver.  
Selects a job to print.  
Select a Job  
Select All  
Selects all the documents stored for this User ID.  
238  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
     
Print  
Prints the selected job.  
Print and Delete*  
Deletes the document after it is printed.  
Deletes the specified document from print memory.  
Delete  
Secure Fax Receive  
Purpose:  
To print confidential faxes. The printer can hold the job in memory until you arrive at the printer and type the  
password on the operator panel.  
Values:  
Enter Password  
Enter the password you specified in Secure Receive.  
Tile Settings  
The Tile Settings screen appears when  
is tapped under the Printmenu.  
Use Tile Settings to create and edit custom tiles for Print.  
Copy  
You can configure a variety of copy features under the Copymenu.  
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.  
Quantity  
Purpose:  
To specify the number of copies from 1 to 99.  
Darken / Lighten  
Purpose:  
To make the copy darker or lighter than the original.  
Values:  
Darken 3  
Darken 2  
Darken 1  
Normal*  
Lighten 1  
Lighten 2  
Lighten 3  
Works well with light documents or faint pencil markings.  
Works well with standard typed or printed documents.  
Works well with dark documents.  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
239  
         
Select Tray  
Purpose:  
To specify the input tray.  
Values:  
MPF  
The paper is fed from the MPF. When Use Printer Driver  
Settingsis set in MPFof Tray Settings Anyis displayed for  
,
Sizeand Type. If you start the copy job with Anyas the paper size  
and type, A4or Letteris selected as the paper size and Plain  
(60-80g/m2)is selected as the paper type. If you want to specify the  
size and type of paper in the MPF, select MPFand specify the paper size  
and type.  
Paper Size  
mm series  
A4 (210x297mm)*1  
A5 (148x210mm)  
A6 (105x148mm)  
B5 (182x257mm)  
B6 (128x182mm)  
Letter (8.5x11")  
Folio (8.5x13")  
Legal (8.5x14")  
Statement (5.5x8.5")  
Executive (7.3x10.5")  
Envelope #10 (4.1x9.5")  
Monarch Env. (3.9x7.5")  
DL Env. (110x220mm)  
C5 Env. (162x229mm)  
Postcard (100x148mm)  
Custom Size  
inch series  
Letter (8.5x11")*1  
Folio (8.5x13")  
Legal (8.5x14")  
Statement (5.5x8.5")  
A4 (210x297mm)  
A5 (148x210mm)  
A6 (105x148mm)  
B5 (182x257mm)  
B6 (128x182mm)  
Executive (7.3x10.5")  
Envelope #10 (4.1x9.5")  
Monarch Env. (3.9x7.5")  
DL Env. (110x220mm)  
C5 Env. (162x229mm)  
Postcard (100x148mm)  
240  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
   
Custom Size  
Paper Type  
Plain (60-80g/m2)  
Plain Thick (81-105g/m2)  
Covers (106-163g/m2)  
Covers Thick (164-216g/m2)  
Rough Surface  
Labels  
Envelope  
Recycled  
Japanese Postcard  
Letterhead  
Preprinted  
Prepunched  
Color  
Tray1*1  
Tray2*2  
The paper is fed from tray1.  
The paper is fed from the optional 550-sheet feeder.  
*1  
Denotes country-specific factory default value.  
*2  
This item is available only when the optional 550-sheet feeder is installed.  
2 Sided Copying  
Purpose:  
To specify whether to make duplex copy and select the binding position.  
Values:  
1 1 Sided*  
Prints on one side of a sheet of paper.  
1 2 Sided  
Prints one sided originals on both sides of a sheet of paper.  
Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper to be bound by long edge.  
Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper to be bound by short edge.  
Prints two sided originals on one side of a sheet of paper.  
Scans both sides of a document bound by long edge.  
Scans both sides of a document bound by short edge.  
Prints two sided originals on both sides of a sheet of paper.  
Scans both sides of a document bound by long edge.  
Scans both sides of a document bound by short edge.  
Long Edge Binding*  
Short Edge Binding  
2 1 Sided  
Long Edge Binding*  
Short Edge Binding  
2 2 Sided  
Long Edge Binding*  
Short Edge Binding  
Sharpness  
Purpose:  
To adjust the sharpness to make the copy sharper or softer than the original.  
Values:  
Sharpen  
Normal*  
Makes the copy sharper than the original.  
Does not make the copy sharper or softer than the original.  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
241  
   
Soften  
Makes the copy softer than the original.  
Reduce/Enlarge  
Purpose:  
To reduce or enlarge the size of a copied image.  
Values:  
Custom ratio  
mm series  
100*  
Sets a custom ratio in increments of 1 percent.  
25-400 %  
100%*  
50%  
70%  
A4A5  
81%  
B5A5  
122%  
A5B5  
141%  
A5A4  
200%  
inch series  
100%*  
50%  
64%  
LedgerLetter  
78%  
LegalLetter  
129%  
StatementLetter  
154%  
StatementLegal  
200%  
Original Size  
Purpose:  
To specify the default document size.  
Values:  
Auto*1  
mm series  
A4 (210x297mm)  
A5 (148x210mm)  
B5 (182x257mm)  
Letter (8.5x11")  
242  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
   
Folio (8.5x13")  
Legal (8.5x14")  
Statement (5.5x8.5")  
Executive (7.3x10.5")  
Auto*1  
inch series  
Letter (8.5x11")  
Folio (8.5x13")  
Legal (8.5x14")  
Statement (5.5x8.5")  
A4 (210x297mm)  
A5 (148x210mm)  
B5 (182x257mm)  
Executive (7.3x10.5")  
*1  
Denotes country-specific factory default values.  
NOTE: When Autois selected, the printer assumes that the document size is the size of the print media loaded in tray1 or the  
MPF.  
Original Type  
Purpose:  
To improve the image quality by selecting the type of the original document.  
Values:  
Photo & Text*  
Text  
Used for documents with both text and photos.  
Used for documents with text.  
Photo  
Used for documents with photos.  
Collation  
Purpose:  
To sort the copy job. For example, if you make two copies of three page documents, one complete set of three page  
documents is printed one by one.  
Values:  
Auto*  
Automatically sorts a copy job only when you use the DADF.  
Sorts a copy job.  
Collated  
Uncollated  
Does not sort a copy job.  
2-Up  
Purpose:  
To print two original pages to fit onto one sheet of paper.  
Values:  
Off*  
Does not perform 2-up printing.  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
243  
     
Auto  
Automatically reduces the original pages to fit onto one sheet of paper.  
Prints the original pages onto the one sheet of paper in the size specified in  
Manual  
Reduce/Enlarge  
.
Margin  
Purpose:  
To specify the top, bottom, right, left, and middle margins of the copy.  
Values:  
Top/Bottom  
Left/Right  
Middle  
0.1 inch* (2 mm*)  
Sets the value in increments of 0.1 inch (1 mm).  
Sets the value in increments of 0.1 inch (1 mm).  
Sets the value in increments of 0.1 inch (1 mm).  
Available Range: 0.0–2.0 inches (0–50 mm)  
0.1 inch* (2 mm*)  
Available Range: 0.0–2.0 inches (0–50 mm)  
0.0 inches*(0 mm*)  
Available Range: 0.0–2.0 inches (0–50 mm)  
Auto Exposure  
Purpose:  
To suppress the background of the original to enhance text.  
Values:  
Off  
On*  
Does not suppress the background.  
Suppresses the background to enhance text.  
Save Settings  
The Save Settings screen appears when  
is tapped under the Copymenu.  
Use Save Settings to save a variety of copy features. And also use to create and edit custom tiles for Copy.  
ID Copy  
You can configure a variety of ID copy features under the ID Copymenu.  
Values:  
Quantity  
For details about each menu, see "Copy."  
Darken / Lighten  
Select Tray  
Sharpness  
Auto Exposure  
Reduce/Enlarge  
Save Settings  
The Save Settings screen appears when  
is tapped under the ID Copymenu.  
Use Save Settings to save a variety of ID Copy features. And also use to create and edit custom tiles for ID Copy.  
244  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
         
Scan  
As a default setting, the printer provides the following scan feature tiles on the Home screen: Scan to Email, Scan to  
Network Folder, Scan to USB, and Scan to Computer.  
Scan to Email  
Purpose:  
To use the e-mail to send the scanned image. See "Scan Settings" for more details about the various scan options you  
can set for the scan.  
Values:  
Enter Recipient's  
Address  
Enters the e-mail address of the recipient using the keyboard.  
Address Book  
Individuals  
Selects an e-mail address from the local address book.  
Selects an e-mail group from the local address book.  
Searches an e-mail address from the server address book.  
Enters the e-mail address of the sender using the keyboard.  
Groups  
Network Address Book  
Keyboard  
Sender*1  
Address Book  
Selects an e-mail address of the sender from the local address  
book.  
Network Address Book  
Searches an e-mail address of the sender from the server  
address book.  
*1  
The sender's e-mail address cannot be edited when the remote authentication is used as the user authentication method on the Dell  
Smart Multifunction Printer | S2815dn.  
Scan to Network Folder  
Purpose:  
To store the scanned image on a network server or a computer. See "Scan Settings" for more details about the various  
scan settings you can set for the scan.  
Values:  
Address Book  
Selects a FTP address or Server Message Block (SMB) protocol address from the local address  
book.  
Scan to USB  
Purpose:  
To save the scanned image to a USB memory attached to the printer. See "Scan Settings" for more details about the  
various scan settings you can set for the scan.  
Values:  
Folder Name  
Selects which folder the scanned image is saved to.  
Scan to Computer  
Purpose:  
To save scanned data on a network computer connected using Web Services on Devices (WSD), or on a computer  
connected via a USB cable.  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
245  
             
NOTE: Web Services on Devices (WSD) is supported only on Microsoft® Windows Vista® (SP2 or later), Windows® 7,  
Windows® 8, Windows® 8.1, and Windows® 10.  
Values:  
Computer (via USB)  
Saves scanned data on a computer connected via USB cable.  
Scan to Computer  
Name  
Selects which computer the scanned image is saved to. Up to 20 computers will be  
listed.  
Scan  
Sends the scanned image to the computer according to the chosen event. Which  
application each event is associated with depends on the setting on the computer.  
Scan for Print  
Scan for Email  
Scan for Fax  
Scan for OCR  
Scan Settings  
The Scan Settings screen appears when the  
is tapped on the Scan to Email, Scan to Network Folder, or Scan to  
USB screen, or when Computer (via USB)is tapped on the Scan to Computer screen.  
Use Scan Settings to configure a variety of scan features.  
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.  
Output Color  
Purpose:  
To select color or black and white scanning.  
Values:  
Color*  
Scans in color mode. Works well with texts and photos.  
Scans in black and white mode. Works well with texts.  
Scans in grayscale mode. Works well with texts and photos.  
Black & White  
Gray Scale  
Resolution  
Purpose:  
To specify the resolution of the scanned image.  
Values:  
200 dpi*  
300 dpi  
400 dpi  
600 dpi  
File Format  
Purpose:  
To specify the file format to save the scanned image.  
Values:  
PDF*  
246  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
   
Multi-Page TIFF  
TIFF (1 File per Page)  
JPEG (1 File per Page)  
2 Sided Scanning  
Purpose:  
To specify whether to scan both sides of a document.  
Values:  
1 Sided*  
Scans one side of a document.  
2 Sided  
Long Edge Binding*  
Short Edge Binding  
Scans both sides of a document bound by the long edge.  
Scans both sides of a document bound by the short edge.  
Darken / Lighten  
Purpose:  
To adjust the density to make the scanned image darker or lighter than the original.  
Values:  
Darken 3  
Darken 2  
Darken 1  
Normal*  
Lighten 1  
Lighten 2  
Lighten 3  
Works well with light documents or faint pencil markings.  
Works well with standard typed or printed documents.  
Works well with dark documents.  
Contrast  
Purpose:  
To adjust the amount of colors to make the contrast of colors darker or lighter than the original.  
Values:  
High  
Adjusts the amount of colors to make the contrast of colors darker than the original.  
Medium*  
Does not adjust the amount of colors to make the contrast of colors darker or lighter than the  
original.  
Low  
Adjusts the amount of colors to make the contrast of colors lighter than the original.  
Sharpness  
Purpose:  
To adjust the sharpness to make the scanned image sharper or softer than the original.  
Values:  
Sharpen  
Normal*  
Soften  
Makes the scanned image sharper than the original.  
Does not make the scanned image sharper or softer than the original.  
Makes the scanned image softer than the original.  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
247  
Auto Exposure  
Purpose:  
To suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the copy.  
Values:  
Off  
Does not suppress the background.  
On*  
Suppresses the background to enhance text.  
Original Size  
Purpose:  
To specify the default paper size.  
Values:  
mm series  
A4 (210x297mm) *1  
A5 (148x210mm)  
B5 (182x257mm)  
Letter (8.5x11")  
Folio (8.5x13")  
Legal (8.5x14")  
Statement (5.5x8.5")  
Executive (7.3x10.5")  
*1  
Denotes country-specific factory default values.  
inch series  
Letter (8.5x11") *1  
Folio (8.5x13")  
Legal (8.5x14")  
Statement (5.5x8.5")  
A4 (210x297mm)  
A5 (148x210mm)  
B5 (182x257mm)  
Executive (7.3x10.5")  
*1  
Denotes country-specific factory default values.  
Margin  
Purpose:  
To specify the top, bottom, right, left, and middle margins of the scanned image.  
Values:  
Top/Bottom  
0.1 inch* (2 mm*)  
Sets the value in increments of 0.1 inch (1 mm).  
Available Range: 0.0–2.0 inches (0–50 mm)  
248  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
Left/Right  
Middle  
0.1 inch* (2 mm*)  
Sets the value in increments of 0.1 inch (1 mm).  
Sets the value in increments of 0.1 inch (1 mm).  
Available Range: 0.0–2.0 inches (0–50 mm)  
0.0 inches*(0 mm*)  
Available Range: 0.0–2.0 inches (0–50 mm)  
Create Folder  
NOTE: Create Folder feature is available only for Scan to USB or Scan to Network Folder.  
Purpose:  
To specify whether to create a folder when saving scanned images.  
Values:  
Off*  
On  
Does not create a folder when saving a scanned image.  
Creates a folder when saving a scanned image.  
File Naming Mode  
Purpose:  
To specify the detailed setting of File Naming Mode.  
Values:  
Auto*  
Sets the default file name.  
Add Prefix  
Adds texts in front of the file name.  
Prefix/Suffix String  
Specifies the texts that are added when Add Prefix  
is selected.  
Add Suffix  
Adds texts after the file name.  
Prefix/Suffix String  
Specifies the texts that are added when Add Suffix  
is selected.  
Save Settings  
The Save Settings screen appears when  
is tapped on the Scan Settings screen of the Scan to Email, Scan to  
Network Folder, or Scan to USB feature, and on the Scan to Computer screen.  
Use Save Settings to save a variety of scan features. And also use to create and edit custom tiles for Scan.  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
249  
 
Fax  
Use the Faxmenus to configure a variety of fax features.  
NOTE: The Fax function cannot be used unless you set up a country code under Country. If Countryis not set up, a  
message Set the Country Codeappears on the display.  
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.  
Values:  
Enter Number  
Speed Dial  
Enters the fax number using the keyboard.  
Enters the speed dial number stored in the printer.  
Selects a fax number from the local address book.  
Selects a group dial number from the local address book.  
Searches a fax number from the server address book.  
Sends faxes manually.  
Phone Book  
Individuals  
Groups  
Network Phone Book  
Send*  
On Hook  
Receive  
Receives faxes manually.  
Polling  
Manually retrieves information from a remote machine.  
Fax Settings  
The Fax Settings screen appears when  
is tapped on the Fax screen.  
Use Fax Settings to configure a variety of fax features.  
Darken / Lighten  
Purpose:  
To adjust the density to make the copy darker or lighter than the original.  
Values:  
Darken 3  
Darken 2  
Darken 1  
Normal*  
Lighten 1  
Lighten 2  
Lighten 3  
Works well with light documents or faint pencil markings.  
Works well with standard typed or printed documents.  
Works well with dark documents.  
2 Sided Scanning  
Purpose:  
To specify whether to scan both sides of a document.  
Values:  
1 Sided*  
Scans one side of a document.  
2 Sided  
Long Edge Binding*  
Short Edge Binding  
Scans both sides of a document bound by the long edge.  
Scans both sides of a document bound by the short edge.  
250  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
   
Polling Receive  
Purpose:  
To receive faxes from the remote fax machine when you want to receive it.  
Values:  
Off*  
On  
Does not receive faxes using Polling Receive.  
Receives faxes using Polling Receive.  
Resolution  
Purpose:  
To specify the scan resolution to improve the output quality.  
Values:  
Standard*  
Fine  
Suitable for documents with normal sized characters.  
Suitable for documents containing small characters or thin lines or documents printed using a  
dot-matrix printer.  
Super Fine  
Suitable for documents containing extremely fine detail. The Super Finemode is  
enabled only if the remote machine also supports the Super Finemode. See the notes  
below.  
Photo  
Suitable for documents containing photographic images.  
NOTE: Faxes scanned in the Super Finemode transmit at the highest resolution supported by the receiving device.  
Fax Cover Page  
Purpose:  
To set whether to attach a cover page to faxes.  
Values:  
Off*  
On  
Does not attach a cover page to faxes.  
Attaches a cover page to faxes.  
Delayed Send  
Purpose:  
To send a fax at a later time.  
Values:  
Off*  
On  
Does not send a fax at a later time.  
Sets the fax transmission start time when sending a fax at a specified time.  
NOTE: A maximum of 19 delayed fax jobs can be stored.  
Save Settings  
The Save Settings screen appears when  
icon is tapped on the Fax Settings screen.  
Use Save Settings to save a variety of fax features. And also use to create and edit custom tiles for Fax.  
NOTE: Up to 30 addresses can be stored on the printer. If you have the addresses of more than 31, you cannot save settings of  
fax features. In that case, please reduce to 30.  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
251  
 
Print PDF/TIFF  
NOTE: Print PDF/TIFF function is available only when a USB memory is inserted in the front USB port.  
Purpose:  
To specify the document stored in the root, file, or folder in a USB memory. See "Print Settings" for more details  
about the various print settings you can set for the print.  
Print JPEG  
NOTE: Print JPEG function is available only when a USB memory is inserted in the front USB port.  
Purpose:  
To specify the photos stored in the root, file, or folder in a USB memory. See "Print Settings" for more details about  
the various print settings you can set for the print.  
Print Settings  
The Print Settings screen appears when  
is tapped on the Print PDF/TIFF or Print JPEG screen.  
Use Print Settings to configure a variety of print features.  
Quantity  
Purpose:  
To specify the number of copies from 1 to 99.  
Select Tray  
Purpose:  
To specify the input tray.  
Values:  
MPF  
The paper is fed from the MPF. When Use Driver  
Settings for Print Jobis set in MPFof Tray  
Settings Anyis displayed for Sizeand Type. If you  
,
start the print job with Anyas the paper size and type, A4or  
Letteris selected as the paper size and Plain (60-  
80g/m2)is selected as the paper type. If you want to  
specify the size and type of paper in the MPF, select MPFand  
specify the paper size and type.  
Paper Size  
mm series  
A4 (210x297mm)*1  
A5 (148x210mm)  
B5 (182x257mm)  
Letter (8.5x11")  
Folio (8.5x13")  
Legal (8.5x14")  
Statement (5.5x8.5")  
Letter (8.5x11")*1  
Folio (8.5x13")  
inch series  
Legal (8.5x14")  
Statement (5.5x8.5")  
252  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
           
A4 (210x297mm)  
A5 (148x210mm)  
B5 (182x257mm)  
Plain (60-80g/m2)  
Plain Thick (81-105g/m2)  
Covers (106-163g/m2)  
Covers Thick (164-216g/m2)  
Rough Surface  
Paper Type  
Labels  
Envelope  
Recycled  
Japanese Postcard  
Letterhead  
Preprinted  
Prepunched  
Color  
Tray1*  
The paper is fed from tray1.  
The paper is fed from the optional 550-sheet feeder.  
Tray2  
*1  
Denotes country-specific factory default value.  
2 Sided Printing  
Purpose:  
To print on both sides of a sheet of paper.  
Values:  
1 Sided*  
Does not print on both sides of a sheet of paper.  
2 Sided  
Long Edge Binding*  
Short Edge Binding  
Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper to be bound by the  
long edge.  
Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper to be bound by the  
short edge.  
Layout  
Purpose:  
To specify the output layout.  
Values:  
1-Up*  
Prints one page on one side of a sheet of paper.  
2-Up  
Prints two pages on one side of a sheet of paper.  
Prints four pages on one side of a sheet of paper.  
Prints without scaling.  
4-Up  
Off(No Scaling)  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
253  
Image Types  
Purpose:  
To set the print image quality.  
Values:  
Auto*  
Prints PDF/TIFF files in the Text mode and JPEG files in the Photos (Standard Quality)  
mode.  
Photos (Standard Quality)  
Photos (High Quality)  
Text  
Prints the photographic images at the standard quality.  
Prints the photographic images at the high quality.  
Prints the text document at the standard quality.  
Collation  
Purpose:  
To specify whether to sort the job.  
Values:  
Collated  
Uncollated*  
Sorts a job.  
Does not sort a job.  
PDF Password  
Purpose:  
To enter the password when you print a PDF file secured with a document open password (password to open the  
PDF file).  
Values:  
Enter PDF Password  
Enter the document open password to print the secure PDF job.  
Save Settings  
The Save Settings screen appears when  
is tapped on the Print Settings screen.  
Use Save Settings to save a variety of print features. And also use to create and edit custom tiles for USB Direct  
Print.  
Dell Document Hub  
NOTE: The Dell Document Hub feature is available on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw only.  
Use the Dell Document Hub menus to configure a variety of the Dell Document Hub features.  
Search for Files  
Purpose:  
To search the files saved in the cloud services, and print them from the printer.  
Values:  
Text Box  
Enters the keywords, such as the words including the file name.  
Sorts the searching results by selecting the sorting order.  
254  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
       
Sets the settings of the Print Settings.  
Displays the selected files. The first three pages of each file are displayed in the small previews.  
Browse for Files  
Purpose:  
To browse and print the files saved in the selected cloud services.  
Values:  
Text Box  
Enters the keywords, such as the words including the file name.  
Searches for the files in the current location or the selected cloud services.  
Sets the settings of the Print Settings.  
Displays the selected files. The first three pages of each file are displayed in the small previews.  
Sorts the searching results by selecting the sorting order.  
Saves the settings of the Print Settings as Favorite.  
Scan  
Purpose:  
To scan the document and save the scanned file in the cloud service.  
Values:  
File Name  
File Format  
Tag  
Enters the file name you want to use.  
Selects the file format from the list to save the scanned image.  
Enters the tag you want to use.  
Searches for the location to save the scanned file. You can search for the location across the  
cloud services.  
Sorts the searching results by selecting the sorting order.  
Sets the settings of the Scan Settings.  
Saves the settings of the Scan Settings as Favorite.  
PDF Password  
Purpose:  
To enter the password when you print a PDF file secured with a document open password (password to open the  
PDF file).  
Values:  
Enter PDF Password  
Enters the document open password to print the secure PDF job.  
File Name Option  
Purpose:  
To specify the way to name the scanned document.  
Values:  
Off  
Adds no text in front of the file name or after the file  
name.  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
255  
   
Add Prefix  
Add Suffix  
Adds texts in front of the file name.  
Prefix/Suffix String  
Prefix/Suffix String  
Specifies the texts that are added when Add Prefix is  
selected.  
Adds texts after the file name.  
Specifies the texts that are added when Add Suffix is  
selected.  
For more information on other settings, see "Scan Settings."  
Smart OCR Scan  
Purpose:  
To scan the document using OCR and save it in the cloud service.  
Values:  
File Name  
File Format  
Tag  
Enters the file name you want to use.  
Selects the file format from the list to save the scanned image.  
Enters the tag you want to use.  
Searches for the location to save the scanned file. You can search for the location across the  
cloud services.  
Sorts the searching results by selecting the sorting order.  
Sets the settings of the Scan Settings.  
Saves the settings of the Scan Settings as Favorite.  
File Format  
Purpose:  
To specify the file format to save the scanned image.  
Values:  
PDF(Searchable)  
RTF  
DOC  
DOCX  
XLS  
XLSX  
PPTX  
OCR Language  
Purpose:  
To specify the language for the OCR.  
Values:  
Auto  
English  
Français  
256  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
   
Italiano  
Deutsch  
Español  
Dansk  
Nederlands  
Norsk  
Svenska  
PDF Password  
Purpose:  
To enter the password when you print a PDF file secured with a document open password (password to open the  
PDF file).  
Values:  
Enter PDF Password  
Enters the document open password to print the secure PDF job.  
Remove Blank Page  
Purpose:  
To specify whether to remove the blank pages.  
Values:  
Off*  
On  
Disables the Remove Blank Page feature.  
Enables the Remove Blank Page feature.  
File Name Option  
Purpose:  
To specify the way to name the scanned document.  
Values:  
Off  
Adds no text in front of the file name or after the file  
name.  
Add Prefix  
Adds texts in front of the file name.  
Prefix/Suffix String  
Specifies the texts that are added when Add Prefix is  
selected.  
Add Suffix  
Adds texts after the file name.  
Prefix/Suffix String  
Specifies the texts that are added when Add Suffix is  
selected.  
For more information on other settings, see "Scan Settings."  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
257  
E-mail Me  
Purpose:  
To scan the document and send to you as an attached file of an e-mail.  
Values:  
File Format  
Subject  
Selects the file format from the list to save the scanned image.  
Enters the subject you want to use.  
Sets the settings of the Scan Settings.  
Saves the settings of the Scan Settings as Favorite.  
File Format  
Purpose:  
To specify the file format to save the scanned image.  
Values:  
PDF  
PDF(Searchable)  
RTF  
DOC  
DOCX  
XLS  
XLSX  
PPTX  
Multi-Page TIFF  
TIFF  
JPEG  
OCR Language  
Purpose:  
To specify the language for the OCR.  
Values:  
Auto  
English  
Français  
Italiano  
Deutsch  
Español  
Dansk  
Nederlands  
Norsk  
Svenska  
258  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
   
PDF Password  
Purpose:  
To enter the password when you print a PDF file secured with a document open password (password to open the  
PDF file).  
Values:  
Enter PDF Password  
Enter the document open password to print the secure PDF job.  
Remove Blank Page  
Purpose:  
To specify whether to remove the blank pages.  
Values:  
Off  
On  
Disables the Remove Blank Page feature.  
Enables the Remove Blank Page feature.  
For more information on other settings, see "Scan Settings."  
Business Card Reader  
Purpose:  
To scan the business card and send to you as an attached file (vCard format) of an e-mail.  
Values:  
Subject  
Enters the subject you want to use.  
Sets the settings of the Scan Settings.  
SharePoint  
NOTE: The SharePoint feature is available on the Dell Smart Multifunction Printer | S2815dn only.  
Use the SharePoint menus to configure a variety of the SharePoint® features.  
Print  
Purpose:  
To browse and print the files saved in the selected SharePoint® server.  
Values:  
Searches for the files in the current folder or the server.  
Text Box  
Enter the keywords, such as the words included in the file name.  
Sets the settings of the Print Settings.  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
259  
     
Scan  
Purpose:  
To scan the document and save the scanned data in the selected SharePoint® server.  
Values:  
File name  
Enter the file name you want to use.  
File Format  
Selects the file format from the list to save the scanned data.  
Searches for the folder in the selected SharePoint® server.  
Sets the settings of the Scan Settings.  
File Name Option  
Purpose:  
To specify the way to name the scanned document.  
Values:  
Off  
Adds no text in front of the file name or after the file  
name.  
Add Prefix  
Adds texts in front of the file name.  
Prefix/Suffix String  
Specifies the texts that are added when Add Prefix is  
selected.  
Add Suffix  
Adds texts after the file name.  
Prefix/Suffix String  
Specifies the texts that are added when Add Suffix is  
selected.  
For more information on other settings, see "Scan Settings."  
NOTE: You cannot assign the password to the PDF file when saving the scanned data to the SharePoint® server.  
Add Apps  
Use the Add Appsmenu to add a variety of tiles on the Home screen.  
Panel Lock  
This feature prevents unauthorized personnel from changing the settings made by the administrator.  
NOTE: Disabling the operator panel menus does not prevent access to the Stored Print and Tray Settings menus.  
Enabling the Panel Lock  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Press the  
Tap the Toolstab, and then tap Admin Settings  
Tap until Secure Settingsappears, and then tap Secure Settings  
Tap Panel Lock  
Tap Panel Lock Control  
Tap Enable, and then tap OK  
(Information) button.  
.
.
.
.
.
260  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
           
7
8
Enter the new password, and then tap OK.  
CAUTION: Be sure to remember the password. The procedure described below allows you to reset the password, but  
the settings for Address Book and Phone Book are cleared.  
•
Turn off the printer. Then, while holding the  
and 8.  
(Information) button, turn on the printer. Perform steps 7  
Re-enter the password to confirm the password that you entered, and then tap OK  
.
To change the password while Panel Lockis Enable, perform steps 1 to 4 above, and then tap Change  
Password. Perform steps 7 and 8 above to change the password.  
Disabling the Panel Lock  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Press the  
(Information) button.  
Tap the Toolstab, and then tap Admin Settings  
.
Enter the password.  
Tap  
Tap Panel Lock  
Tap Panel Lock Control  
Tap Disable, and then tap OK  
Enter the current password, and then tap OK  
until Secure Settingsappears, and then tap Secure Settings.  
.
.
.
.
Resetting Defaults  
After executing this function and rebooting the printer, the phone book, address book, or menu parameters are reset  
to their default values.  
The following menu parameters are exceptions and are not reset.  
•
•
•
Network settings  
Panel Lock settings and password  
Functions Control settings (Copy, Scan to E-mail, Fax, Scan to Network Folder, Scan to Computer, PC Scan, Scan  
to USB, USB Direct Print) and passwords  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Secure Receive settings and password  
Login Error settings  
Set Available Time settings  
Secure Job Expiration settings  
USB Port settings  
AccessControl Mode settings  
AccessControl Error Report settings  
Non Registered User settings  
NFC Authentication settings  
Tap to Print settings  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
261  
   
When Using the Operator Panel  
1
2
3
4
5
Press the  
Tap the Toolstab, and then tap Admin Settings  
Tap Maintenance  
Tap until Reset Defaultsappears, and then tap Reset Defaults  
Tap the desired setting, and then tap Initialize  
(Information) button.  
.
.
.
.
User Fax Section  
User Scan Section  
User Account Section  
System Section  
Resets the phone book data.  
Resets the address book data.  
Resets the user registration information.  
Resets the system parameters.  
6
Tap Yes, Reset.  
The printer is restarted automatically.  
262  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
 
16  
Print Media Guidelines  
Print media refers to paper, labels, envelopes, and coated paper among others. Your printer provides high-quality  
printing on a variety of print media. Selecting the appropriate print media for your printer helps avoid printing  
troubles. This section describes selecting and caring for print media.  
NOTE: Use only laser print media. Do not use ink jet paper in your printer.  
Paper  
For the best print quality, use 90 g/m2 (24 lb) xerographic, grain long paper. It is recommended that you try a sample  
first before buying large quantities of any print media.  
When loading paper, identify the recommended print side on the paper package, and load the paper accordingly. See  
"
Loading Print Media in Tray1 and the Optional 550-Sheet Feeder  
"
and "Loading Print Media in the MPF" for  
detailed loading instructions.  
Recommended Paper  
To ensure the best print quality and feed reliability, use 75 g/m2 (20 lb) xerographic paper. Business paper designed  
for general business use also provides acceptable print quality. Only use paper able to withstand high temperatures  
without discoloring, bleeding, or releasing hazardous emissions. The laser printing process heats paper to high  
temperatures. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether the paper you have chosen is  
acceptable for laser printers.  
It is recommended that you try a sample first before buying large quantities of any print media. When choosing any  
print media, you should consider the weight, fiber content, and color.  
Unacceptable Paper  
The following paper types are not recommended for use with the printer:  
•
Chemically treated paper used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless paper, carbonless  
copy paper (CCP), or no carbon required (NCR) paper.  
•
•
•
Preprinted paper with chemicals that may contaminate the printer.  
Preprinted paper that can be affected by the temperature in the fusing unit.  
Preprinted paper that requires a registration (the precise print location on the page) greater than ±0.09 inches,  
such as optical character recognition (OCR) forms.  
In some cases, you can adjust registration with your software program to successfully print on these forms.  
•
•
•
•
•
Coated paper (erasable bond), synthetic paper, and thermal paper.  
Rough-edged, rough or heavily textured surface paper, or curled paper.  
Recycled paper containing more than 25 % post-consumer waste that does not meet DIN 19 309.  
Multiple-part forms or documents.  
Print quality may deteriorate (blank spaces or blotches may appear in the text) when printing on talc or acid paper.  
Print Media Guidelines  
263  
         
Selecting Paper  
Proper paper selection helps prevent jams and ensures trouble-free printing.  
To help avoid jams or poor print quality:  
•
•
Always use new, undamaged paper.  
Before loading the paper, identify the recommended print side of the paper. This information is usually indicated  
on the paper package.  
•
•
•
•
•
Do not use paper that you have cut or trimmed.  
Do not mix print media sizes, weights, or types in the same source. This may result in a paper jam.  
Do not remove the tray while printing is in progress.  
Ensure that the paper is properly loaded in the tray.  
Flex the paper back and forth, and then fan them. Straighten the edges of the stack on a level surface.  
Selecting Pre-Printed Media and Letterheads  
When selecting pre-printed and letterhead paper for the printer:  
•
•
•
•
•
Use grain long paper for best results.  
Use only forms and letterheads printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing process.  
Select paper that absorb ink, but does not bleed.  
Avoid paper with rough or heavily textured surfaces.  
Use paper printed with heat-resistant inks designed for use in xerographic copying machines. The ink must  
withstand temperatures of 225 °C (437 °F) without melting or releasing hazardous emissions.  
•
Use inks that are not affected by the resin in the toner or the silicone in the fusing unit. Inks that are oxidation-set  
or oil-based should meet these requirements; latex inks might not. If you are in doubt, contact your paper supplier.  
Selecting Pre-Punched Paper  
When selecting pre-punched paper for the printer:  
•
•
Test paper from several manufacturers before ordering and using large quantities of pre-punched paper.  
Paper should be punched at the paper manufacturer and not drilled into paper already packaged in a ream. Drilled  
paper can cause jams when multiple sheets feed through the printer. This may result in a paper jam.  
•
•
Pre-punched paper can include more paper dust than standard paper. Your printer may require more frequent  
cleaning and feed reliability may not be as good as standard paper.  
Weight guidelines for pre-punched paper are the same as non-punched paper.  
264  
Print Media Guidelines  
     
Envelopes  
Depending on the envelopes, it is possible to expect variable levels of wrinkling. It is recommended that you try a  
sample first before buying large quantities of any print media. See  
on loading envelopes.  
"Loading Envelopes in the MPF" for instructions  
When printing on envelopes:  
•
•
Use only high-quality envelopes that are designed for use in laser printers.  
Set the print media source to the MPF. Set the paper type to Envelope, and select the correct size of envelope from  
the printer driver.  
2
2
•
Use envelopes made from 75 g/m (20 lb bond) paper. You can use up to 105 g/m (28 lb bond) weight for the  
envelope feeder as long as the cotton content is 25 % or less. Envelopes with 100 % cotton content must not exceed  
90 g/m (24 lb bond) weight.  
2
•
•
Use only freshly unpackaged, undamaged envelopes.  
Use envelopes that can withstand temperatures of 205 °C (401 °F) without sealing, excessive curling, wrinkling, or  
releasing hazardous emissions. If you have any doubts about the envelopes you are considering, check with the  
envelope supplier.  
•
•
Adjust the guide to fit the width of the envelopes.  
To load an envelope into the MPF, insert the envelope with the flaps closed or open and the short-edge of the  
envelope facing into the printer. The print side must be facing up.  
•
•
•
See "Loading Envelopes in the MPF" for instructions on loading envelopes.  
Use one envelope size during a print job.  
Ensure that the humidity is low because high humidity (more than 60 %) and the high printing temperatures may  
seal the envelopes.  
•
For best performance, do not use envelopes that:  
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Have excessive curl or twist  
Are stuck together or damaged in any way  
Contain windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or embossing  
Use metal clasps, string ties, or metal folding bars  
Have an interlocking design  
Have postage stamps attached  
Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position  
Have nicked edges or bent corners  
Have rough, cockle, or laid finishes  
Print Media Guidelines  
265  
 
Labels  
Your printer can print on many labels designed only for use with laser printers.  
When selecting labels:  
•
Label adhesives, face sheet (printable stock), and topcoats must be able to withstand temperatures of 205 °C (401  
°F) and pressure of 25 pounds per square inch (psi).  
•
•
Use labels that can be without sealing, excessive curling, wrinkling, or releasing hazardous emissions.  
Do not use label sheets with a slick backing material.  
CAUTION: Before buying large quantities of any print media, it is recommended that you try a sample first.  
When printing on labels:  
•
Use labels that can withstand temperatures of 205 °C (401 °F) without sealing, excessive curling, wrinkling, or  
releasing hazardous emissions.  
•
•
•
•
•
Set the paper type to Label in the printer driver.  
Load labels in the MPF. Tray1 and the optional 550-sheet feeder do not support labels.  
Do not load labels together with paper in the MPF.  
Do not print within 1 mm (0.04 inches) of the die-cut.  
Do not print within 1 mm (0.04 inches) of the edge of the label, of the perforations, or between die-cuts of the  
label.  
•
•
•
•
•
Do not print a label through the printer more than once.  
Portrait orientation is preferred, especially when printing bar codes.  
Do not use labels that have exposed adhesive.  
Use full label sheets. Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing, resulting in a jam.  
Do not use label sheets that have adhesive to the edge of the sheet. It is recommended that zone coating of the  
adhesive is done at least 1 mm (0.04 inches) away from edges. Adhesive material contaminates your printer and  
could void your warranty.  
WARNING: Otherwise a jam occurs in the printer and contaminate your printer and your cartridge with adhesive. As a result,  
could void your printer and cartridge warranties.  
Storing Print Media  
For proper print media storage, the following guidelines will help to avoid media feeding problems and uneven print  
quality.  
•
Store print media in an environment where the temperature is approximately 21 °C (70 °F) and the relative  
humidity is 40 %.  
•
•
Store cartons of print media on a pallet or shelf, rather than directly on the floor.  
If you store individual packages of print media out of the original carton, ensure that they rest on a flat surface so  
that the edges do not buckle or curl.  
•
Do not place anything on top of the print media packages.  
266  
Print Media Guidelines  
   
Identifying Print Media and Specifications  
The following tables show print media information.  
Supported Paper Sizes  
Paper size  
MPF  
Tray1  
Optional 550-sheet  
feeder  
Duplex unit  
A4 (210 x 297 mm)  
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
Y
A5 (148 x 210 mm)  
A6 (105 x 148 mm)  
B5 (182 x 257 mm)  
B6 (128 x 182 mm)  
Letter (8.5 x 11 in)  
Folio (8.5 x 13 in)  
Legal (8.5 x 14 in)  
Statement (5.5 x 8.5 in)  
Executive (7.25 x 10.5 in)  
Envelope #10 (4.125 x 9.5 in)  
Monarch (3.875 x 7.5 in)  
DL (110 x 220mm)  
C5 (162 x 229mm)  
Postcard JPN  
Custom*1, 2  
*1  
Custom: width: 76.2 mm (3.0 inches) to 215.9 mm (8.5 inches) for the MPF and tray1; 139.7 mm (5.5 inches) to 215.9 mm (8.5 inches) for the  
optional 550-sheet feeder  
length: 127.0 mm (5.0 inches) to 355.6 mm (14.00 inches) for the MPF and tray1; 210 mm (8.27 inches) to 355.6 mm (14.00 inches)  
for the optional 550-sheet feeder  
*2  
XML Paper Specification (XPS) driver does not support custom size paper.  
Print Media Guidelines  
267  
     
Supported Paper Types  
Paper type  
MPF  
Tray1  
Optional 550-sheet  
feeder  
Duplex unit  
Side 1  
Y
Side 2  
N
Side 1  
Y
Side 2  
N
Side 1  
Y
Side 2  
N
Side 1  
Side 2  
N
Plain  
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Plain Thick  
Covers  
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
N
Covers Thick  
Rough surface  
Labels  
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
N
Envelope  
Recycled  
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
N
Japanese Postcard  
Letterhead  
Preprinted  
Prepunched  
Color  
Y
N
Y
N
N
N
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
N
NOTE: For Plain paper, you can set the paper density by selecting the Paper Density (Light or Normal) under Maintenance from  
the operator panel, the Tool Box, or the Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool. Once you set the Paper Density settings, the  
printer uses the settings for Plain paper.  
NOTE: Rough Surface paper can only be fed one by one.  
Paper Type Specifications  
Paper type  
Weight (g/m2)  
Remarks  
Plain  
60–80  
-
-
-
-
Plain Thick  
Covers  
81–105  
106–163  
164–216  
106–163  
106–163  
91–105  
60–105  
190  
Covers Thick  
Rough surface  
Labels  
Inkjet printer paper cannot be used.  
Inkjet printer paper cannot be used.  
Envelope  
Recycled  
-
-
Japanese Postcard  
Letterhead  
Preprinted  
Prepunched  
Color  
Inkjet printer paper cannot be used.  
60–90  
-
-
-
-
60–90  
60–90  
60–90  
268  
Print Media Guidelines  
     
17  
Loading Print Media  
Loading print media properly helps prevent jams and ensures trouble-free printing.  
Before loading any print media, identify the recommended print side of the print media. This information is usually  
indicated on the print media package.  
NOTE: The images used in this manual are those of the Dell™ Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw unless otherwise mentioned.  
Capacity  
Tray1 can hold:  
•
250 sheets of the standard paper.  
The optional 550-sheet feeder (tray2) can hold:  
550 sheets of the standard paper.  
The multipurpose feeder (MPF) can hold:  
50 sheets of the standard paper.  
•
•
Print Media Dimensions  
The maximum dimensions of print media that the MPF and tray1 can handle are:  
•
•
Width — 76.2 mm (3.00 inches) to 215.9 mm (8.5 inches)  
Length — 127 mm (5.00 inches) to 355.6 mm (14.00 inches)  
The maximum dimensions of print media that the optional 550-sheet feeder can handle are:  
•
•
Width — 139.7 mm (5.5 inches) to 215.9 mm (8.5 inches)  
Length — 210 mm (8.27 inches) to 355.6 mm (14.00 inches)  
Loading Print Media  
269  
       
Loading Print Media in Tray1 and the Optional 550-Sheet Feeder  
This section describes how to load letterhead. For details about loading print media other than letterhead, see  
"Loading Paper."  
NOTE: To avoid paper jams, do not remove the tray while printing is in progress.  
NOTE: Use only laser print media. Do not use ink jet paper in the printer.  
Loading Letterhead (Pre-Printed and Pre-Punched Paper)  
The pre-printed paper such as letterhead and pre-punched paper must be inserted bottom edge first with the print  
side facing down as shown below.  
NOTE: To enable printing with letterhead paper, set Paper Type to Letterhead and Letterhead Duplex Mode to Enable from the  
printer driver. Make sure to set Paper Typeto Letterheadfrom the operator panel even when you print on a single  
side of letterhead, pre-printed, or pre-punched paper.  
Print media source  
Print side  
Page orientation  
Tray1 and optional 550-sheet  
feeder  
Face down  
Letterhead enters the printer  
last  
MPF  
Face down  
Letterhead enters the printer  
last  
270  
Loading Print Media  
     
Loading Print Media in the MPF  
1
Gently pull open the MPF cover.  
2
Slide the width guides to the edge of the tray. The width guides should be fully extended.  
3
Insert all media face up and top edge first into the MPF.  
NOTE: Do not force the print media into the MPF.  
Loading Print Media  
271  
   
4
Slide both width guides until they rest lightly against the edge of the print media stack.  
NOTE: Do not force the print media into the MPF.  
5
6
7
8
9
On the touch panel, tap Size.  
Tap  
or  
until the desired paper size appears, and then select the size.  
Tap Type  
.
Tap  
or  
until the desired paper type appears, and then select the type.  
Tap OK  
.
Loading Small Print Media in the MPF  
When loading small print media such as monarch envelope or the user-specified print media whose feed direction  
length is 191.6 mm or less in the MPF, remove the MPF from the printer.  
1
Gently pull open the MPF cover.  
272  
Loading Print Media  
 
2
Grasp both sides of the MPF, and then pull the MPF from the printer.  
3
Slide the width guides to the edge of the tray. The width guides should be fully extended.  
4
Pull up the length guide and slide it toward MPF cover until it stops.  
5
Load the print media into the MPF with the recommended print side facing up so that the top edge of the print  
media enters the printer first.  
Loading Print Media  
273  
6
Align the paper guides against the edges of the print media.  
7
Insert the MPF into the printer.  
8
9
On the touch panel, tap Size.  
Tap  
or  
until the desired paper size appears, and then select the size.  
10 Tap Type  
.
11 Tap  
or  
until the desired paper type appears, and then select the type.  
12 Tap OK  
.
274  
Loading Print Media  
Printing on Envelopes – Envelope Mode  
To print on envelopes with better print quality, set the printer to the envelope mode.  
NOTE: Print jobs can be done on envelopes even when the printer is not set to the envelope mode. To get the better print results,  
set the printer to the envelope mode.  
NOTE: When the printer is in the envelope mode, print jobs cannot be done while the paper type is set to other than envelopes.  
To Set the Printer to the Envelope Mode  
1
Pull the rear cover handle to open the rear cover.  
2
Lift the levers on both sides of the fusing unit.  
3
Slide the envelope switches on both sides of the fusing unit to the  
position.  
WARNING: The fusing unit is hot. Do not touch it, doing so may cause burns.  
Loading Print Media  
275  
       
4
Press down the levers on both sides of the fusing unit.  
5
Close the rear cover.  
To Cancel the Envelope Mode  
1
Pull the rear cover handle to open the rear cover.  
276  
Loading Print Media  
   
2
Lift the levers on both sides of the fusing unit.  
3
Slide the envelope switches on the both sides of the fusing unit to the  
position.  
WARNING: The fusing unit is hot. Do not touch it, doing so may cause burns.  
4
Press down the levers on both sides of the fusing unit.  
Loading Print Media  
277  
5
Close the rear cover.  
Loading Envelopes in the MPF  
Use the following guidelines when loading envelopes in the MPF:  
CAUTION: Never use envelopes with windows, coated linings, or self-stick adhesives. These lead to paper jams and can  
cause damage to the printer.  
NOTE: If you do not load envelopes in the MPF right after they have been removed from the packaging, they may bulge. To avoid  
jams, press firmly across the whole envelopes to flatten them as shown below before loading the envelopes in the MPF.  
NOTE: The maximum height (quantity) of envelopes that can be loaded in the MPF is approximately 15 mm (0.59 inches) (15  
envelopes).  
Envelope #10, DL  
Load the envelopes in the short edge feed orientation with the flaps closed and the print side up. Ensure that the  
flaps come at the right when you face towards the printer.  
278  
Loading Print Media  
     
Monarch  
You need to pull up and slide the length guide. Load the envelopes in the short edge feed orientation with the flaps  
closed and the print side up. Ensure that the flaps come at the right when you face towards the printer.  
C5  
Load the envelopes in the short edge feed orientation with the flaps open or closed and the print side up. Ensure  
that the flaps come at the bottom with the flaps open or at the top with the flaps closed when you face towards the  
printer.  
When you print with the orientation of the 1, position of the envelopes may be distorted on the output tray. In this  
case, set the orientation of the 2.  
1
2
Loading Letterhead in the MPF  
When you use the MPF, letterhead and hole punched paper must be inserted bottom edge first with the print side  
facing down.  
Loading Print Media  
279  
     
Using the MPF  
•
Load only one size and type of print media during a single print job.  
•
To achieve the best possible print quality, use only high-quality print media that is designed for use in laser printer.  
For more guidelines on print media, see "Print Media Guidelines."  
•
•
Do not add or remove print media when there is still print media in the MPF or when the printer is printing from  
the MPF. This may result in a paper jam.  
Print media should be loaded with the recommended print side up and the top of the print media going into the  
MPF first.  
•
•
Do not place objects on the MPF. Also, avoid pressing down or applying excessive force on it.  
The icons on the MPF show how to load the MPF with paper, and how to turn an envelope for printing.  
Linking Trays  
The printer automatically links the trays when you load the same size and type of print media in them. The first tray  
will be utilized until the media runs out, and then the next tray will be used.  
NOTE: The print media should be the same size and type in each tray.  
The MPF cannot be linked to any of the tray sources.  
After loading the selected trays with the same size and type of print media, select the Paper Type setting in the Tray  
Settings component for each source (tray).  
To disable tray linking change the paper type in one of the sources (trays) to a unique value.  
NOTE: If different types of print media of the same size are loaded in each tray, the printer will automatically link them if the  
paper type is not specified in the printer driver properties/preferences.  
280  
Loading Print Media  
   
Printing, Copying, Scanning,  
Faxing, and Dell Document Hub  
18 Printing........................................................................................ 283  
19 Copying ....................................................................................... 305  
20 Scanning..................................................................................... 317  
21 Faxing.......................................................................................... 345  
22 Dell Document Hub................................................................... 371  
23 Printing and Scanning Directly From SharePoint® ............. 381  
281  
 
282  
18  
Printing  
This chapter covers tips for printing, how to print certain information from your printer, and how to cancel a job.  
NOTE: The images used in this manual are those of the Dell™ Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw unless otherwise mentioned.  
Tips for Successful Printing  
Tips on Storing Print Media  
Store your print media properly. For more information, see "Storing Print Media."  
Avoiding Paper Jams  
CAUTION: Before buying large quantities of any print media, it is recommended that you try a sample first.  
By selecting appropriate print media and loading it properly, you can avoid paper jams. See the following instructions  
on loading print media:  
•
•
•
"Loading Paper"  
"Loading Print Media in the MPF"  
"Avoiding Jams"  
If you encounter a paper jam, see "Clearing Jams."  
Sending a Job to Print  
Install the printer driver to use all the features of the printer. When you choose Print from an application, a window  
representing the printer driver opens. Select the appropriate settings for the specific job that you are sending to  
print. Print settings selected from the driver override the default menu settings selected from the operator panel or  
the Tool Box.  
You may need to click Preferences from the initial Print box to see all of the available system settings. If you are not  
familiar with a feature in the printer driver window, open the online Help for more information.  
To print a file from a typical Microsoft® Windows® application:  
1
2
3
4
5
Open the file you want to print.  
From the File menu, select Print  
.
Verify that the correct printer is selected in the dialog box. Change the print settings if needed.  
Click Preferences to adjust system settings that are not available from the first screen, and then click OK  
Click OK or Print to send the job to the selected printer.  
.
NOTE: When you print on small-sized print media such as envelopes, lift the operator panel so that you can easily remove the  
printed media from the output tray.  
Printing  
283  
         
Canceling a Print Job  
There are several methods for canceling a job.  
•
•
"Canceling a Job From the Operator Panel"  
"Canceling a Job From a Computer Running Windows Operating System"  
®
Canceling a Job From the Operator Panel  
To cancel a job after it has started printing:  
1
Tap Stop  
Printing is canceled only for the current job. All the following jobs will continue to print.  
To cancel a job before it has started printing:  
.
1
Press the  
button.  
A list of print jobs appears.  
Tap the desired job to cancel.  
2
3
4
Tap Stop  
.
Tap StopJob  
.
®
Canceling a Job From a Computer Running Windows Operating System  
Canceling a Job From the Taskbar  
When you send a job to print, a small printer icon appears in the bottom right corner of the taskbar.  
1
Double-click the printer icon.  
A list of print jobs appears in the printer window.  
2
3
Select the job you want to cancel.  
Press the <Delete> key.  
Canceling a Job From the Desktop  
1
Click StartDevices and Printers.  
®
For Windows Vista : Click Start  
Control Panel  
Hardware and Sound  
Control Panel Printers  
Devices and Printers  
Printers.  
®
For Windows Server 2008: Click Start  
.
®
For Windows Server 2008 R2: Click Start  
.
®
®
For Windows 8/Windows 8.1: On the Desktop screen, right-click the bottom left corner of the screen, and then  
click Control Panel  
Hardware and Sound  
Devices and Printers.  
®
®
For Windows Server 2012/Windows Server 2012 R2: On the Desktop screen, right-click the bottom left corner  
of the screen, and then click Control Panel  
Hardware  
Devices and Printers  
.
®
For Windows 10: Right-click the Start button, and then click Control Panel  
Hardware and Sound  
Devices  
and Printers  
.
A list of available printers appears.  
2
3
Right-click the printer that you selected when you sent the job for printing, and then select See what's printing  
.
Select the printer driver.  
A list of print jobs appears in the printer window.  
284  
Printing  
     
4
5
Select the job you want to cancel.  
Press the <Delete> key.  
Duplex Printing  
Duplex printing (or two-sided printing) allows you to print on both sides of a sheet of paper. For sizes that are  
acceptable for duplex printing, see  
"
Supported Paper Sizes.  
"
Duplex Printing With Duplex Unit  
1
Click StartDevices and Printers.  
®
For Windows Vista : Click Start  
Control Panel  
Hardware and Sound  
Printers.  
®
For Windows Server 2008: Click Start  
Control Panel  
Printers.  
®
For Windows Server 2008 R2: Click Start  
Devices and Printers.  
®
®
For Windows 8/Windows 8.1: On the Desktop screen, right-click the bottom left corner of the screen, and then  
click Control Panel  
Hardware and Sound  
Devices and Printers.  
®
®
For Windows Server 2012/Windows Server 2012 R2: On the Desktop screen, right-click the bottom left corner  
of the screen, and then click Control Panel  
Hardware  
Devices and Printers  
.
®
For Windows 10: Right-click the Start button, and then click Control Panel  
Hardware and Sound  
Devices  
and Printers  
.
2
3
Right-click the printer and select Printing Preferences.  
The General tab appears.  
From Paper Source, select the paper tray.  
For PCL driver:  
Select from Auto  
For PS driver:  
Select from Automatically Select  
From Duplex, select Flip on Short Edge or Flip on Long Edge  
NOTE: For details on the Flip on Short Edge and Flip on Long Edge options, see "Flip on Short Edge" and "Flip on Long Edge."  
Click OK  
,
Tray1, Tray2, or MPF.  
,
Tray1, Tray2, or MPF.  
4
5
.
.
Using Booklet Print  
To use the booklet print feature, select the Enable check box of the Booklet Printing in the Layout tab.  
NOTE: When the XML Paper Specification (XPS) or PS driver is used, booklet print is not available.  
NOTE: You must select Flip on Long Edge in the Duplex when using the Booklet Print feature.  
Printing  
285  
     
Flip on Long Edge  
Assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait orientation and top edge  
for landscape orientation). The following illustration shows long-edge binding for portrait and  
landscape pages:  
Portrait  
Landscape  
Flip on Short Edge  
Assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait orientation and left  
edge for landscape orientation). The following illustration shows short-edge binding for portrait  
and landscape pages:  
Portrait  
Landscape  
Using the Stored Print Feature  
When you send a job to the printer, you can specify the information such as user ID, password, and job name in the  
printer driver to store the job in the memory. When you are ready to print the job, select the desired job name in the  
memory using the operator panel.  
NOTE: The data in the memory is cleared when the printer is turned off.  
NOTE: Stored Print feature is available when:  
•
•
The RAM disk is enabled in the printer menu.  
RAM Disk is set to Available in the printer driver.  
Overview  
The stored printing feature includes the following job types.  
286  
Printing  
       
Secure Print  
You can temporarily store print jobs secured with a password in the memory. Users with the password can print them  
from the operator panel. This feature can be used to print confidential documents. A stored print job will be deleted  
after you print it or at a designated time.  
Enter the password from  
the operator panel.  
Print data.  
Send confidential data.  
Confidential  
Data is deleted at a  
designated time.  
Private Mail Box Print  
You can store print jobs secured with a password in the memory. Users with the password can print them at a more  
convenient time from the operator panel. This feature can be used to print confidential documents. The stored jobs  
remain in the memory until you delete them from the operator panel.  
Enter the password from  
the operator panel.  
Print data.  
Send confidential  
data.  
Public Mail Box Print  
You can store print jobs without a password in the memory. Any user can print them at a more convenient time from  
the operator panel. The stored jobs remain in the memory until you delete them from the operator panel.  
Print data.  
Send data.  
Printing  
287  
Proof Print  
The collated print job is stored in the memory, but a single copy is printed automatically so you can check the print  
result. If you do not have problems with the print result, you can choose to print more copies. This prevents large  
number of misprinted copies from being printed at one time.  
One set is  
printed.  
Print the rest of sets  
from the operator panel.  
Check if the print result  
is OK.  
Send data.  
The difference between each of the job types are listed below. If you want to set the password for confidentiality,  
store the jobs in the Secure Print or Private Mail Box Print.  
Job types  
Secure Print  
Password  
Differences  
Y
• The stored jobs will be deleted at a designated time.  
• You cannot specify the quantity of copies from the operator panel. The  
quantity of copies depends on the number you specified on the printer  
driver.  
Private Mail Box Print  
Public Mail Box Print  
Proof Print  
Y
N
N
• The stored jobs remain until you delete them from the operator panel.  
• You can specify the quantity of copies from the operator panel.  
• The print job is set to collate.  
• A single copy is printed automatically.  
• The stored jobs remain until you delete them from the operator panel.  
• You can specify the quantity of copies from the operator panel.  
NOTE: If a print job is too large for the memory available, the printer may display an error message.  
Procedures for Printing Stored Print  
NOTE: The stored print feature is available when using the PCL or PS driver.  
When you select a job type in the printer driver, the job will be stored in the memory until you request to print it  
from the operator panel. The following are procedures for storing and printing jobs.  
Storing Print Jobs  
To use the stored print feature, you need to select a job type other than Normal Print in the General tab of the  
printer driver. The job will be stored in the memory until you request to print it from the operator panel.  
NOTE: Secure Print and Private Mail Box Print require specifying a password for confidentiality.  
NOTE: If a document name is not assigned to your print job in the printer driver, the job's name will be identified using the  
printer's time and date of submission to distinguish it from other jobs you have stored under your name.  
Printing the Stored Jobs  
1
2
3
Press the  
Tap  
(Home) button.  
Print  
.
Select a job type such as Secure Print Private Mailbox, Public Mailbox, or Proof Print.  
,
A list of user ID appears.  
288  
Printing  
   
4
5
Tap  
until the desired user ID appears, and then tap that user ID.  
NOTE: Secure Print and Private Mail Box Print require specifying a password for confidentiality. If you select Public Mail  
Box Print or Proof Print, proceed to step 6.  
Enter the password using the number pad, and then tap OK  
.
For details about specifying the password, see "Specifying your password on the operator panel (Secure  
Print/Private Mail Box Print)."  
6
7
8
Tap  
until the desired document appears, and then tap that document.  
NOTE: You can tap Quantityto specify the number of copies. For Secured Print, Quantity is not available.  
Tap Print  
.
NOTE: If you want to keep the data in the memory for the time being, clear the Print and Delete check box.  
Tap OK  
.
The stored job will be printed.  
Specifying your password on the operator panel (Secure Print/Private Mail Box Print)  
When you tap Secure Printor Private Mailboxfrom Print Menu, a screen to enter the password  
appears after selecting your user ID.  
Use the number pad to enter the numeric password you specified in the printer driver. The password you entered will  
appear as asterisks (*******) to ensure confidentiality.  
If you enter an invalid password, the message Incorrect password Try againappears. Wait 3 seconds, or  
tap Closeto return to the screen for entering the password.  
When you enter a valid password, you have access to all print jobs matching the user ID and password you entered.  
The print jobs matching the password you entered appear on the screen. You can then choose to print or delete jobs  
matching the password you entered. (See "Printing the Stored Jobs" for more information.)  
Deleting Stored Jobs  
With Secure Print, a job that has been stored will be deleted after printing or deleted at a designated time entered on  
the operator panel.  
For other jobs, these jobs remain stored until you delete them from the operator panel.  
Printing from USB Memory (USB Direct Print)  
The USB Direct Print feature allows you to print files stored in a USB memory using the operator panel.  
CAUTION: To prevent damage to your printer, do not connect any device other than USB memory to the front USB port of the  
printer.  
CAUTION: Do not remove the USB memory from the front USB port until the printer has finished printing.  
NOTE: If the Functions Control setting for USB Direct Printis set to On(Password), you need to enter the four-  
digit password to use the print function. If the Functions Control setting for USB Direct Printis set to Off, the print  
function is disabled and the menu is also disabled on the screen. For details, see "Functions Control."  
The front USB port of the printer is designed for USB 2.0 devices. You must use only an authorized USB memory  
with an A plug type connector. Use only a metal shielded USB memory.  
A plug type  
Printing  
289  
     
Supported File Formats  
Files in the following file formats can be printed directly from a USB memory.  
•
•
•
PDF  
TIFF  
JPEG  
Inserting and Removing a USB Memory  
You can insert the USB memory before printing or scanning images.  
Before removing the USB memory, ensure that the printer is not accessing the USB memory.  
CAUTION: If you remove the USB memory while the printer is accessing, the data in the USB memory or the USB memory  
device itself may be destroyed.  
Printing a PDF/TIFF File in a USB Memory  
1
2
Press the  
(Home) button.  
Insert a USB memory to the front USB port of the printer.  
For details about inserting a USB memory, see "Inserting and Removing a USB Memory."  
3
4
Tap Print PDF/TIFF.  
Scroll through the page or tap a folder until the desired files appear, and then tap those files.  
NOTE: Only the following characters are displayed on the touch panel:  
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 $ % ’ ‘ - @ {} ~ ! # ( ) & _ ^  
NOTE: Up to 10 files can be selected and printed in display order.  
5
6
Tap  
.
Specify print options such as Select Tray  
and PDF Passwordon the Print Settings screen. For details, see "Print PDF/TIFF."  
,
2 Sided Printing, Layout, Image Types, Collation,  
7
Tap Printto begin printing.  
NOTE: Only PDF/TIFF files created using the scan features of your printer can be printed through Print PDF/TIFF  
.
290  
Printing  
       
Printing a JPEG File in a USB Memory  
1
2
Press  
(Home) button.  
Insert a USB memory to the front USB port of the printer.  
For details about inserting a USB memory, see "Inserting and Removing a USB Memory."  
3
4
Tap Print JPEG  
Scroll through the page or select a folder until the desired files appear, and then tap those files.  
To select all the files, tap  
.
.
NOTE: Only the following characters are displayed on the touch panel:  
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 $ % ’ ‘ - @ {} ~ ! # ( ) & _ ^  
NOTE: Up to 100 files can be selected and printed in display order.  
5
6
Tap  
.
Specify print options such as Select Tray 2 Sided Printing, Layout, Image Types, and  
Collationon the Print Settings screen. For details, see "Print JPEG."  
,
7
Tap Printto begin printing.  
NOTE: Only JPEG files created using the scan features of your printer can be printed through Print JPEG  
.
Printing With Web Services on Devices (WSD)  
This section provides information for network printing with Web Services on Devices (WSD), the protocol of  
Microsoft® for Windows Vista®, Windows® 7, Windows® 8, Windows® 8.1, Windows® 10, Windows Server® 2008,  
Windows Server® 2008 R2, Windows Server® 2012, and Windows Server® 2012 R2.  
Adding Roles of Printer Services  
When you use Windows Server® 2008, Windows Server® 2008 R2, Windows Server® 2012, or Windows Server®  
2012 R2, you need to add the roles of print services to the Windows Server® 2008, Windows Server® 2008 R2,  
Windows Server® 2012, or Windows Server® 2012 R2 client.  
For Windows Server® 2008:  
1
2
3
4
5
Click Start  
Select Add Roles from the Action menu.  
Check the Print Services check box on the Server Roles window in the Add Roles Wizard, and then click Next  
Check the Print Server check box, and then click Next  
Click Install  
Administrative Tools  
Server Manager  
.
.
.
.
For Windows Server® 2008 R2:  
1
2
3
Click Start  
Select Add Roles from the Action menu.  
Check the Print and Document Services check box on the Server Roles window in the Add Roles Wizard, and  
then click Next  
Click Next  
Check the Print Server check box, and then click Next  
Click Install  
Administrative Tools  
Server Manager  
.
.
4
5
6
.
.
.
Printing  
291  
       
For Windows Server® 2012/Windows Server® 2012 R2:  
1
2
3
Click Server Manager of the Start screen.  
Select Add Roles and Features from the Manage menu.  
Click Next on the Before You Begin window  
destination server on the Server Selection window in the Add Roles and Features Wizard  
Check the Print and Document Services check box on the Server Roles window, and then click Next  
Select features on the Features window Confirm installation selections on the Confirmation window.  
Click Install  
Select installation type on the Installation Type window  
Select  
.
4
5
6
.
.
Printer Setup  
You can install your new printer on the network using the Software and Documentation disc that shipped with your  
printer, or using the Add Printer wizard on Microsoft® Windows®.  
Installing a Printer Driver Using the Add Printer Wizard  
®
1
Click Start  
and Windows Server 2008).  
Devices and Printers  
(
Start  
Control Panel  
Hardware and Sound  
Printers for Windows Vista  
®
®
®
®
®
For Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows Server 2012, and Windows Server 2012 R2:  
On the Desktop screen, right-click the bottom left corner of the screen, and then click Control Panel  
Hardware  
®
®
and Sound  
(
Hardware for Windows Server 2012/Windows Server 2012 R2)  
Devices and Printers.  
®
For Windows 10:  
Right-click the Start button, and then click Control Panel  
Click Add a printer to launch the Add Printer wizard.  
Hardware and Sound  
Devices and Printers.  
2
®
®
®
®
®
For Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows 10, Windows Server 2012, and Windows Server 2012 R2:  
Proceed to step 4.  
3
4
Select Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer  
.
In the list of available printers, select the one you want to use, and then click Next  
.
NOTE: In the list of available printers, the Web Services on Devices (WSD) printer is displayed in the form of http://IP  
address/ws/.  
NOTE: If no Web Services on Devices (WSD) printer is displayed in the list, enter the printer's IP address manually to  
create a Web Services on Devices (WSD) printer. To enter the printer's IP address manually, follow the instructions below.  
For Windows Server® 2008 R2, to create a Web Services on Devices (WSD) printer, you must be a member of  
Administrators group.  
1. Click The printer that I want isn't listed.  
2. Select Add a printer using a TCP/IP address or hostname and click Next.  
3. Select Web Services Device from Device type.  
4. Enter the printer's IP address in the Hostname or IP address text box and click Next.  
NOTE: Before installing the driver using the Add Printer wizard on Windows Server® 2008 R2 or Windows® 7, perform one  
of the following:  
•
•
Establish the Internet connection so that Windows Update can scan your computer.  
Add the printer driver to your computer.  
5
6
If prompted, install the printer driver on your computer. If you are prompted for an administrator password or  
confirmation, type the password or provide confirmation.  
Complete the additional steps in the wizard, and then click Finish  
.
292  
Printing  
   
7
Print a test page to verify installation.  
a
Click Start  
Vista and Windows Server 2008).  
Devices and Printers  
(
Start  
Control Panel  
Hardware and Sound  
Printers for Windows  
®
®
®
®
®
®
For Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows Server 2012, and Windows Server 2012 R2:  
On the Desktop screen, right-click the bottom left corner of the screen, and then click Control Panel  
®
®
Hardware and Sound  
Printers  
(
Hardware for Windows Server 2012/Windows Server 2012 R2)  
Devices and  
.
®
For Windows 10: Right-click the Start button, and then click Control Panel  
Devices and Printers  
Hardware and Sound  
.
®
b
c
Right-click the printer you just created, and then click Printer properties  
Windows Server 2008).  
(
Properties for Windows Vista and  
®
On the General tab, click Print Test Page. When a test page prints successfully, installation is complete.  
Printing With Wi-Fi Direct  
NOTE: The Wi-Fi Direct feature is available on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw only.  
This section provides information for Wi-Fi Direct printing. Wi-Fi Direct allows your Wi-Fi mobile devices such as  
computers, smartphones, and tablets, to connect to the printer directly via a Wi-Fi network. With Wi-Fi Direct, you  
can print documents, photos, or e-mail on your Wi-Fi mobile devices directly without a wireless access point.  
NOTE: Wi-Fi Direct is available even if the printer is connected to your wireless network connection.  
NOTE: The maximum number of devices that can be connected via the Wi-Fi Direct network is 3.  
NOTE: You cannot connect your mobile device to the Internet via the printer’s Wi-Fi Direct network.  
NOTE: Depending on the mobile device, the channel used to connect the device to the printer via Wi-Fi Direct may differ from  
the channel used by the printer to connect to a network via Wi-Fi infrastructure mode. In such a case, simultaneous connection  
with Wi-Fi Direct and Wi-Fi infrastructure mode may not work properly.  
NOTE: The printer connected with Wi-Fi Direct supports the following protocols; LPD, Port9100, Web Services on Devices  
(WSD), Bonjour (mDNS), SNMPv1/v2c, Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.  
Setting Up Wi-Fi Direct  
To use Wi-Fi Direct, you need to first set up the Wi-Fi Direct settings from the operator panel of the printer. To  
connect the mobile device to the printer via Wi-Fi Direct, select the SSID of the printer from the list of wireless  
networks on the mobile device and enter the passphrase necessary for connection.  
Setting Up the Printer  
NOTE: Wi-Fi Direct cannot be used in an IPv6 or Ad-hoc environment.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Press the  
Tap the Toolstab, and then tap Admin Settings  
Tap Network  
Tap Wi-Fi Direct  
In the Wi-Fi Directmenu, tap Wi-Fi Direct  
Tap Enable, and then tap OK  
When a popup message about the devices is displayed, tap Close  
Tap Group Role  
(Information) button.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
7
.
Printing  
293  
   
8
9
Tap Group Owner, and then tap OK  
.
The printer must be rebooted after you set Wi-Fi Direct. After the reboot, repeat steps from 1 to 4.  
10 Tap  
until SSIDand Passphraseappears, and tap each menu to check what the SSID and passphrase is.  
NOTE: To confirm the printer's SSID and passphrase, you can also print the list by tapping Print Passphrase  
under the Passphrasemenu.  
Connecting the Mobile Device  
1
Connect the mobile device to the Wi-Fi Direct network.  
®
For Windows 10  
a
b
c
d
Click the Start button, and then click Settings.  
Click the Wi-Fi icon.  
Click the printer's SSID  
Connect.  
Enter the passphrase, and then click Next  
.
The mobile device will connect to the printer.  
®
®
®
®
For Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows RT, and Windows RT 8.1  
a
b
c
d
Tap Settings in the PC settings menu.  
Tap the Wi-Fi icon.  
Tap the printer's SSID, and then tap Connect  
.
Enter the passphrase, and then tap Next  
.
The mobile device will connect to the printer.  
®
For Windows  
7
a
b
c
d
Click the network icon on the taskbar.  
Click the printer's SSID, and then click Connect  
Enter the passphrase, and then click OK  
.
.
Click Cancel to exit the Set Network Location window.  
The mobile device will connect to the printer.  
®
For Windows Vista  
a
b
c
Click Start  
Connect To.  
Click the printer's SSID.  
Enter the passphrase, and then click Connect  
.
The mobile device will connect to the printer.  
For OS X 10.9 and OS X 10.10  
a
b
c
Click the network icon on the Menu Bar.  
Click the printer's SSID.  
Enter the passphrase, and then click Join  
.
The mobile device will connect to the printer.  
294  
Printing  
For iOS  
a
b
c
Tap Settings  
Wi-Fi.  
Tap the printer's SSID.  
Enter the passphrase, and then tap Join  
.
The mobile device will connect to the printer.  
For Android  
The procedure varies depending on your mobile device you are using. Refer to the manual provided with your  
mobile device.  
2
Install the printer on the mobile device.  
®
For Windows 10  
a
b
c
Click the Start button, and then click Settings  
Click Devices Add a device  
Click Dell_xxxxxx  
The printer is ready for use.  
.
.
.
®
®
®
®
For Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows RT, and Windows RT 8.1  
a
b
c
Click Devices in the PC settings menu.  
Click Add a device in the Devices sub-menu.  
Click Dell_xxxxxx  
.
The printer is ready for use.  
®
®
For Windows Vista and Windows  
7
®
You need to install the printer driver on the mobile device. See "Installing Printer Drivers on Windows  
Computers."  
For OS X 10.9 and OS X 10.10  
You need to install the printer driver on the mobile device. See "Installing Printer Drivers on Macintosh  
Computers."  
For iOS  
You need to install the printing application such as the Dell Document Hub app, and then the printer is ready for  
use.  
For Android  
You need to install the printing application such as the Dell Document Hub app, and then the printer is ready for  
use.  
Printing via Wi-Fi Direct  
The printing procedure varies depending on your mobile device you are using. Refer to the manual provided with  
your mobile device to print as you normally do from the device.  
Printing  
295  
 
Disconnecting Wi-Fi Direct Network  
1
2
Press the  
(Information) button.  
Tap Paired Device  
.
NOTE: The Paired Devicemenu is displayed only when the printer is connected via Wi-Fi Direct.  
3
4
5
Tap the device name to disconnect.  
Tap Disconnect Nowor Disconnect and Reset Passphrase  
Tap Yes  
The selected device is successfully disconnected.  
You can also disconnect the device from the following steps.  
.
.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Press the  
Tap the Toolstab, and then tap Admin Settings  
Tap Network  
Tap Wi-Fi Direct  
Tap Paired Device  
Tap the device name to disconnect.  
Tap Disconnect now  
Tap Yes  
(Information) button.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
Resetting the Passphrase  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Press the  
Tap the Toolstab, and then tap Admin Settings  
Tap Network  
Tap Wi-Fi Direct  
Tap until Passphraseappears, and then tap Passphrase  
Tap Reset Passphrase  
Tap Yes  
The Wi-Fi Direct is disconnected and the passphrase is reset.  
(Information) button.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
Resetting the PIN  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Press the  
Tap the Toolstab, and then tap Admin Settings  
Tap Network  
Tap Wi-Fi Direct  
Tap until WPS Setupappears, and then tap WPS Setup  
Tap PIN Code  
Tap Reset Code  
Tap Yes  
(Information) button.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
The Wi-Fi Direct is disconnected and the PIN is reset.  
296  
Printing  
         
Mobile Printing and Scanning  
The printer supports printing from a variety of mobile devices, using the Dell Document Hub app.  
Easy to use and navigate, the Dell Document Hub app allows users to scan to and print from a variety of common  
cloud storage services. It enables direct printing of photos, documents, web content and more, to supported Dell  
printers on a Wi-Fi, Wi-Fi Direct, or Ethernet network.  
Android OS  
Download the Dell Document Hub app for free from Google Play.  
Scan the QR Code for quick access to the relevant application store.  
For Android OS  
Apple iOS  
This printer is compatible with the Dell Document Hub app for free from App Store.  
Scan the QR Code for quick access to the relevant application store.  
For Apple iOS  
This printer is also compatible with AirPrint. For details about AirPrint, see "Printing With AirPrint."  
Printing  
297  
     
Printing With AirPrint  
AirPrint allows you to print through a network with the device running iOS or OS X.  
Be sure to install the latest version of iOS for iOS device. For OS X, be sure to update OS X and the apps  
you have purchased from the App Store using the Software Update.  
Setting Up AirPrint on Your Printer  
1
2
Ensure that the printer is connected to the network.  
Launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool by entering the IP address of the printer in your web browser.  
For more information, see "Setting Up the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool" and "Starting the Dell Printer  
Configuration Web Tool."  
3
When the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool opens, click Print Server Settings in the left frame, and click the  
Print Server Settings tab.  
4
5
6
7
Click AirPrint  
In Enable AirPrint, select the check box to enable the printer for AirPrint.  
Click Apply New Settings  
Click Restart Printer  
.
.
.
Printing via AirPrint  
The following procedure uses the iPhone running iOS8.1 as an example.  
1
2
3
4
5
Open your email, photo, web page, or document you want to print.  
Tap the action icon  
Tap Print  
Select your printer and set printer options.  
Tap Print  
.
.
.
Printing With Google Cloud Print  
By registering the printer to your Google account, you can use the Google Cloud Print service to print from the  
Google Chrome browser without installing the printer drivers to your device. You can also share the printer with the  
specified users over the Internet.  
The printer supports the following version of the Google Cloud Print service:  
•
•
Google Cloud Print version 1.1  
Google Cloud Print version 2.0  
NOTE: Information about Google Cloud Print is based on the information as of October 2015. For the latest information, visit the  
Google Cloud Print web site.  
NOTE: Use the latest version of the Google Chrome browser for Google Cloud Print.  
Preparing to Use the Printer with Google Cloud Print  
To use Google Cloud Print, you need the following preparations in advance:  
•
•
•
•
"Enabling Google Cloud Print on the Printer"  
"Selecting the Version of the Google Cloud Print Service"  
"Registering the Printer to the Google Cloud Print Service"  
"Sharing the Printer Using the Google Cloud Print Service"  
298  
Printing  
         
NOTE: To register the printer to the Google Cloud Print service, the printer needs to be connected to the Internet.  
NOTE: Google Cloud Print supports only IPv4 connection.  
NOTE: If the printer is connected to a network that uses a proxy server, you need to specify the settings in Proxy Server from the  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. For more information, see "Proxy Server."  
NOTE: Acquire a Google account and a Gmail address in advance.  
Enabling Google Cloud Print on the Printer  
When using the operator panel  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Press the  
Tap the Toolstab, and then tap Admin Settings  
Tap Network  
Tap Protocols  
Tap until Google Cloud Printappears, and then tap Google Cloud Print  
Tap Enable  
Tap OK  
Turn off the printer, and turn it on again to apply the settings.  
(Information) button.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
When using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
1
2
Launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool by entering IP address of the printer in your web browser. For  
more information, see "Setting Up the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool" and "Starting the Dell Printer  
Configuration Web Tool."  
When the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool opens, go to the pages in the Print Server Settings tab. Click Port  
Settings. In Port Status, select the On check box for Google Cloud Print  
.
Selecting the Version of the Google Cloud Print Service  
Select the version of the Google Cloud Print service from either version 1.1 or version 2.0.  
Google Cloud Print version 1.1 sends the print data to the printer via Internet. For this version, the printer needs to  
be connected to the Internet.  
Google Cloud Print version 2.0 sends the print data to the printer either via Internet or via local network. This  
version is recommended for the environment where the Internet connection cannot be used.  
Printing  
299  
   
NOTE: Available options for printing may vary according to your device or the version of the Google Cloud Print service.  
NOTE: You cannot use both version 1.1 and version 2.0 of the Google Cloud Print service on a printer.  
Registering the Printer to the Google Cloud Print Service  
Before registering the printer to the Google Cloud Print service, prepare the Google account to which the printer is  
registered.  
NOTE: To register the printer to the Google Cloud Print service, the printer needs to be connected to the Internet.  
NOTE: The Google account which is used in the registration procedure will be registered as the owner.  
For Google Cloud Print Version 1.1  
1
2
3
Launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool by entering IP address of the printer in your web browser. For  
more information, see "Setting Up the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool" and "Starting the Dell Printer  
Configuration Web Tool."  
When the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool opens, go to the pages in the Print Server Settings tab. Click  
Register This Device to Google Cloud Print in Google Cloud Print. A sheet with a URL for the Google Cloud  
Print printer registration web site is printed.  
From the web browser of your computer, visit the Google web site and sign in with your Google account. Visit the  
Google Cloud Print registration web site by entering the URL on the printout into your web browser. You can also  
visit the site by scanning the QR code with your mobile device.  
4
5
On the Google Cloud Print registration web site, click Finish printer registration.  
Click Manage your printers. Your printer will be listed in the Printers list and will be ready for use with the Google  
Cloud Print service.  
NOTE: When the printer does not print a sheet with a URL and shows a message of the status code 016-757, launch the Dell  
Printer Configuration Web Tool, open the Dell AccessControl page in the Print Volume tab, and either turn AccessControl Mode  
to Off or turn Non Registered User to On.  
For Google Cloud Print Version 2.0  
1
Launch the Google Chrome browser. When you are using the Google Chromebook, start and log in to the  
Chromebook.  
2
3
4
Click  
in the top right corner, and select Settings.  
Click Show advanced settings in the bottom of the page.  
Click Manage under the Google Cloud Print menu.  
NOTE: If a message is displayed under New Devices to request you to sign in to Chrome, click sign in and sign in to  
Chrome.  
300  
Printing  
 
5
6
Click Register for the printer you want to register.  
NOTE: If Bonjour (mDNS) is set to off, the new printer will not show in New devices. In this case, launch the Dell Printer  
Configuration Web Tool, open the Port Settings page in the Print Server Settings tab, and turn Bonjour (mDNS) to On.  
When the window to confirm the registration appears, click Register  
.
The window appears to show that the printer is being added.  
7
8
Go to the printer, and follow the instructions displayed on the operator panel.  
When the printer name appears in the My devices list, the registration is completed.  
NOTE: It may take about 5 minutes or more until the printer name appears in the My devices list.  
Sharing the Printer Using the Google Cloud Print Service  
You can share the printer registered for the Google Cloud Print service with other users.  
1
Launch the Google Chrome browser. When you are using the Google Chromebook, start and log in to the  
Chromebook.  
2
3
4
Click  
in the top right corner, and select Settings.  
Click Show advanced settings in the bottom of the page.  
Click Manage under the Google Cloud Print menu.  
NOTE: If a message is displayed to request you to sign in to Chrome, click sign in and sign in to Chrome.  
5
6
7
Click Manage for the printer you want to share.  
In the Google Cloud Print window, click Share  
In the window to specify the printer sharing, enter the Google accounts of the users you want to invite to share the  
printer, and click Share  
.
.
NOTE: When the invited users log in to the Google Cloud Print web page, a message appears to show that the printer owner  
made the sharing settings. Accept the sharing invitation.  
Canceling Registration to Google Cloud Print  
1
Launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, open the Google Cloud Print page in the Print Server Settings  
tab.  
2
3
Click Cancel Registration  
.
Confirm that the button changes to Register This Device to Google Cloud Print  
.
Printing via Google Cloud Print  
The printing procedure varies depending on the application or the device you are using. You can see the application  
list that supports Google Cloud Print service on the Google web site.  
Printing From an Application on a Mobile Device  
The following procedure uses the Google Drive application on an Android mobile device as an example.  
1
Install the Google Drive application on your mobile device.  
NOTE: You can download the application from Google Play.  
Access the Google Drive application from your mobile device and select the document.  
Select Print from the application menu.  
2
3
4
5
Select your printer from the list.  
Select printer options and then tap Print  
.
Printing  
301  
     
Printing From Google Chrome  
The following procedure uses the Google Chrome browser on the computer running a Microsoft® Windows®  
operating system as an example.  
1
2
3
Open the Google Chrome browser.  
Open the web page or e-mail that you want to print.  
Click  
click Print  
or  
.
(varies depending on the version of the Google Chrome browser) in the top right corner and then  
4
5
Click Change in the Destination area.  
Choose your printer from the Google Cloud Print area.  
NOTE: When your printer is registered to Google Cloud Print version 2.0, you can print the document by way of the local  
print with the printer in your local network. In this case, select your printer in Local Destinations.  
6
Click Print.  
Printing From Google Chromebook  
1
2
3
Open the web page or e-mail that you want to print.  
Click in the top right corner and then click Print  
.
Confirm that your printer is specified in the Destination area. If not, click Change and select your printer.  
NOTE: When your printer is registered to Google Cloud Print version 2.0, you can print the document by way of the local  
print with the printer in your local network. In this case, select your printer in Local Destinations.  
4
Click Print.  
Mopria Print Service  
Mopria Print Service allows any Android phone or tablet (Android version 4.4 or later) to connect and print to  
Mopria-certified printers without additional set up.  
Firstly, download and install the Mopria Print Service app from Google Play store to your Android mobile device:  
https://play.google.com/store/apps/  
In order to print, connect your mobile device to the same network as the printer or use the Wi-Fi Direct  
functionality to connect your mobile device to the printer.  
NOTE: Mopria Print Service might be preloaded in your mobile device. If your mobile device does not have the Mopria Print  
Service, you can easily download it from the Google Play store. To learn more about Mopria Print Service, visit  
http://www.mopria.org/.  
NOTE: Make sure that Mopria is set to Enable in advance using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. See "Setting Up Mopria  
Print Service on Your Printer."  
Setting Up Mopria Print Service on Your Printer  
1
2
Make sure that the printer is connected to the network.  
Start the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
See "Starting the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool."  
Click Print Server Settings the Print Server Settings tab  
Click Enable  
.
3
4
Mopria.  
.
The printer is ready for Mopria Print Service.  
302  
Printing  
   
Printing via Mopria Print Service  
1
2
3
4
5
Open your email, photo, web page, or document that you want to print.  
Tap the menu and select Print  
.
Tap All printers in the menu.  
Select the printer, and then set printer options.  
Tap Print  
.
Printing a Report Page  
You can print a variety of settings for your printer including system settings, panel setting, and font list. For details about  
how to print reports or lists, see "Report / List."  
Printer Settings  
You can change most of the print settings from the application you are printing from. If your printer is attached to  
the network, you can also change settings from the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. To launch the Dell  
Printer Configuration Web Tool, type the printer's IP address in your web browser. To find your printer's IP address,  
see "Verifying the IP Settings."  
Settings from the application update the default system settings for the printer. Settings from the printer driver only  
apply to the job that you are currently sending to the printer.  
If you cannot change a setting from the application, use the operator panel, the Tool Box or the Dell Printer  
Configuration Web Tool. Changing a system setting from the operator panel, the Tool Box or from the Dell Printer  
Configuration Web Tool makes that setting the user default.  
You can verify the detailed system settings by printing a system settings report. For details about how to print a  
system settings report, see "Report / List."  
You can reset settings to their default values from the Tool Box or the operator panel.  
Using the Operator Panel to Change the Printer Settings  
You can select menu items and corresponding values from the operator panel.  
When you first browse through the menus from the operator panel, you see some menu items are highlighted.  
These highlighted items are the factory default and original system settings.  
NOTE: Factory defaults may vary for different countries.  
When you select a new setting from the operator panel, the item selected is highlighted to identify it as the current  
user default menu setting.  
These settings are active until new ones are selected or the factory defaults are restored.  
Driver settings may override changes previously made and may require you to change the operator panel defaults.  
Using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool to Change the Printer Settings  
If your printer is connected to the network, you can change the printer settings from your web browser. If you are a  
network administrator, you can clone the system settings of one printer to one or all the printers on the network.  
Type the IP address of your printer in your web browser. Choose Printer Settings from the topics list. From the  
Printer Settings tab, select the System Settings to change the printer settings.  
To change the paper type and size, choose Tray Management from the topics list. To change the AccessControl  
settings, choose Print Volume from the topics list, and then select the Dell AccessControl tab.  
Printing  
303  
         
To copy your system settings to another printer on the network, choose Copy Printer Settings from the topics list,  
and then type the other printer's IP address.  
If you do not know your printer's IP address, see the system settings report or display the TCP/IP settings. For details  
about how to find your printer's IP address, see "Verifying the IP Settings."  
304  
Printing  
19  
Copying  
NOTE: If the Functions Control setting for Copyis set to On(Password), you need to enter the four-digit password to use  
the copy function. If the Functions Control setting for Copyis set to Off, the copy function is disabled and the menu is also  
disabled on the screen. For details, see "Functions Control."  
NOTE: The images used in this manual are those of the Dell™ Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw unless otherwise mentioned.  
Loading Paper for Copying  
The instructions for loading paper in the paper tray are the same whether you are printing, faxing, or copying. For  
details about loading paper, see "Loading Print Media." For details about setting the paper type and size in the tray,  
see "Print Media Guidelines."  
Selecting Paper Tray  
After loading the print media for copy output, select the desired paper tray to be used for the copy job.  
To select the tray:  
1
2
3
4
Press the  
Tap  
Tap Select Tray  
Tap the desired tray, and then tap OK  
You can select MPFTray1, or Tray2*.  
* Tray2is only available when the optional 550-sheet feeder (tray2) is installed.  
(Home) button.  
Copy  
.
.
.
,
Preparing a Document  
You can use the document glass or the duplex automatic document feeder (DADF) to load an original document for  
copying, scanning, and sending a fax. You can load up to 50 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) documents for one job using  
the DADF or one sheet at a time using the document glass.  
WARNING: Avoid loading documents that are smaller than 5.5 inches by 5.5 inches (139.7 mm by 139.7 mm) or larger than 8.5  
inches by 14 inches (215.9 mm by 355.6 mm), different sizes or weights together, or booklets, pamphlets, transparencies, or  
documents having other unusual characteristics in the DADF.  
WARNING: Carbon-paper or carbon-backed paper, coated paper, onion skin or thin paper, wrinkled or creased paper, curled  
or rolled paper, torn paper, photographs, or transparencies cannot be used in the DADF.  
WARNING: Do not use the documents with staples, paper clips or exposed to adhesives or solvent based materials such as  
glue, ink and correcting fluid in the DADF.  
NOTE: To get the best scan quality, especially for color or grayscale images, use the document glass instead of the DADF.  
Copying  
305  
         
Making Copies From the Document Glass  
NOTE: A computer connection is not required for copying.  
NOTE: Remove any documents from the DADF before copying from the document glass.  
NOTE: Contaminants on the document glass may cause black spots on the copy output. For best results, clean the document  
glass before use. For more information, see "Cleaning the Scanner."  
To make a copy from the document glass:  
1
Lift and open the document cover.  
2
Place the document facing down on the document glass and align it with the registration guide on the top left  
corner of the glass.  
3
4
Close the document cover.  
NOTE: Leaving the document cover open while copying may affect the copy quality and increase the toner consumption.  
NOTE: If you are copying a page from a book or magazine, lift the cover until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then  
close the cover. If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm, start copying with the document cover open.  
Press the  
(Home) button.  
To simply make a copy without changing the default copy settings, press the  
(Copy) button.  
306  
Copying  
   
5
Tap  
Copy  
.
To customize the copy settings such as Select Trayand Darken/Lighten, see "Setting Copy Options."  
NOTE: The copy options automatically return to their default status after the auto clear timer is expired.  
Tap – or + to specify the number of copies from 1 to 99 in the Quantitytile.  
Tap Copyto begin copying.  
6
7
NOTE: You can cancel a copy job while scanning a document by tapping Stop  
.
Making Copies From the DADF  
CAUTION: Do not load more than 50 sheets into the DADF or allow more than 50 sheets to be fed to the document output tray.  
The document output tray should be emptied before it exceeds 50 sheets or your original documents may be damaged.  
NOTE: A computer connection is not required for copying.  
NOTE: Before loading the document(s) on the DADF, straighten the edges of the stack of the document(s).  
1
Load the document(s) facing up on the DADF with top edge of the documents in first. Then adjust the document  
guides to the document size.  
NOTE: Ensure that you use the document stopper before copying a legal-size document.  
2
3
Press the  
To simply make a copy without changing the default copy settings, press the  
Tap Copy  
(Home) button.  
(
Copy) button.  
.
To customize the copy settings such as Select Trayand Darken/Lighten, see "Setting Copy Options."  
NOTE: The copy options automatically return to their default status after the auto clear timer is expired.  
Tap – or + to specify the number of copies from 1 to 99 in the Quantitytile.  
Tap Copyto begin copying.  
4
5
NOTE: You can cancel a copy job while scanning a document by tapping Stop  
.
Copying  
307  
   
Setting Copy Options  
Set the following options for the current copy job before tapping Copyto begin copying.  
For details about making copies, see "Making Copies From the Document Glass" and "Making Copies From the  
DADF."  
NOTE: The copy options automatically return to their default status after the auto clear timer is expired.  
Options on each tile are below:  
•
Copy tile  
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Quantity  
Darken / Lighten  
Select Tray  
2 Sided Copying  
Sharpness  
Reduce / Enlarge  
Original Size  
Original Type  
Collation  
2-Up  
Margin  
Auto Exposure  
Quantity  
To specify the number of copies from 1 to 99.  
Tap – or + to specify the number of copies.  
1
Darken / Lighten  
To adjust the contrast to make the copy darker or lighter than the original:  
1
2
Tap Darken/Lighten  
Drag the desired level on the Darken/Lightenbar, and then tap OK  
You can select a contrast level from seven levels between Darkenand Lighten  
.
.
.
Drag the indicator on the left side of the bar makes the document contrast lighter, and selecting a cell on the right  
side of the bar makes the document contrast darker.  
Darken 3  
Works well with light documents or faint pencil markings.  
Darken 2  
Darken 1  
Normal*  
Works well with normal typed or printed documents.  
Works well with dark documents.  
Lighten 1  
Lighten 2  
Lighten 3  
* Denotes the factory default setting.  
308  
Copying  
       
Select Tray  
To select the tray:  
1
2
Tap Select Tray  
.
Tap the desired setting, and then tap OK  
.
MPF  
The paper is fed from the multipurpose feeder.  
The paper is fed from tray1.  
Tray1*  
Tray2  
The paper is fed from the optional 550-sheet feeder.  
* Denotes the factory default setting.  
NOTE: Tray2is only available when the optional 550-sheet feeder is installed.  
NOTE: When Anyis displayed as the paper size and type in the MPF, you can select the paper size and type from this  
menu. For details, see "Select Tray."  
2 Sided Copying  
To make duplex copies with the specified binding position:  
1
2
Swipe the screen until 2 Sided Copyingappears, and then tap 2 Sided Copying  
.
Tap the desired setting, and then tap OK  
.
1 1 Sided*  
Select 1 sided or 2 sided and specify binding position for the 2 sided copy.  
1 2 Sided  
2 1 Sided  
2 2 Sided  
Long Edge Binding  
Short Edge Binding  
* Denotes the factory default setting.  
When you are using the document glass and it is set to  
1
2 Sidedor  
2
2 Sided, the display prompts you  
for another page after tapping Copy  
.
a
b
If you want to place a new document, replace the document with a new document, and then tap Continue  
If you finish copying, tap Print Now  
.
.
NOTE: When you use the DADF to copy both sides of a document, the printed position of the front and back of the document  
may differ if the size in the document size setting and the size of the document do not match. In this case, set Original  
Sizeto the same size as the document.  
Copying  
309  
   
Sharpness  
To adjust the sharpness to make the copy image sharper or softer than the original:  
1
2
Swipe the screen until Sharpnessappears, and then tap Sharpness.  
Tap the desired setting.  
Sharpen  
Makes the copy image sharper than the original.  
Normal*  
The clarity of the image is the same as the original.  
Makes the copy image softer than the original.  
Soften  
* Denotes the factory default setting.  
Reduce / Enlarge  
To reduce or enlarge the size of a copied image from 25 to 400 percent when you copy original documents from the  
document glass or DADF:  
NOTE: When you make a reduced copy, black lines may appear at the bottom of your copy.  
1
2
Swipe the screen until Reduce/Enlargeappears, and then tap Reduce/Enlarge  
Tap the desired setting, and then tap OK  
.
.
(Inch series)  
100%*  
50%  
64% (LedgerLetter)  
78% (LegalLetter)  
129% (StatementLetter)  
154% (StatementLegal)  
200%  
(mm series)  
100%*  
50%  
70% (A4A5)  
81% (B5A5)  
122% (A5B5)  
141% (A5A4)  
200%  
* Denotes the factory default setting.  
NOTE: You can also specify the value in increments of 1 percent from 25 to 400 by tapping – or +.  
310  
Copying  
   
Original Size  
To select the default document size:  
1
2
Swipe the screen until Original Sizeappears, and then tap Original Size.  
Tap the desired setting.  
(Inch series)  
Auto*  
Letter (8.5x11")  
Folio (8.5x13")  
Legal (8.5x14")  
Statement (5.5x8.5")  
A4 (210x297mm)  
A5 (148x210mm)  
B5 (182x257mm)  
Executive (7.3x10.5")  
(mm series)  
Auto*  
A4 (210x297mm)  
A5 (148x210mm)  
B5 (182x257mm)  
Letter (8.5x11")  
Folio (8.5x13")  
Legal (8.5x14")  
Statement (5.5x8.5")  
Executive (7.3x10.5")  
* Denotes the factory default setting.  
Original Type  
To select the copy image quality:  
1
2
Swipe the screen until Original Typeappears, and then tap Original Type.  
Tap the desired setting.  
Photo & Text*  
Used for documents with both photos and text.  
Used for documents with text.  
Text  
Photo  
Used for documents with photos.  
* Denotes the factory default setting.  
Copying  
311  
   
Collation  
To sort the copy output: For example, if you make two copies of three page documents, one complete three page  
document will be printed followed by the second complete document:  
1
2
Swipe the screen until Collationappears, and then tap Collation  
.
Tap the desired setting.  
Auto*  
Only the documents loaded from DADF are copied in collated order.  
Copies in collated order.  
Collated  
Uncollated  
Does not copy in collated order.  
* Denotes the factory default setting.  
When you are using the document glass and it is set to Collated, the display prompts you for another page after  
tapping Copy  
.
a
b
If you want to place a new document, replace the document with a new document, and then tap Continue  
If you finish copying, tap Print Now  
.
.
312  
Copying  
 
2-Up  
To print two original images to fit onto one sheet of paper:  
Auto:  
Manual:  
Reduces the  
pages in the  
custom size  
depending on the  
setting of the  
Reduce / Enlarge  
menu.  
Automatically  
reduces the  
pages to fit in  
one page.  
1
2
Swipe the screen until 2-Upappears, and then tap 2-Up  
Tap the desired setting, and then tap OK  
.
.
Off*  
Does not perform multiple-up printing.  
Auto  
Automatically reduces the original pages to fit onto one sheet of paper.  
Prints the original pages onto the one sheet of paper in the size specified in Reduce / Enlarge.  
Manual  
* Denotes the factory default setting.  
When you are using the document glass and it is set to Autoor Manual, the display prompts you for another  
page after tapping Copy  
.
a
b
If you want to place a new document, replace the document with a new document, and then tap Continue  
If you finish copying, tap Print Now  
.
.
NOTE: When you use the DADF to copy both sides of a document, the printed position of the front and back of the document  
may differ if the size in the document size setting and the size of the document do not match. In this case, set Original  
Sizeto the same size as the document.  
Copying  
313  
 
Margin  
To specify the margins of the copy:  
1
2
Swipe the screen until Marginappears, and then tap Margin  
Tap – or + to enter the desired value, and then tap OK  
.
.
Top / Bottom  
Left / Right  
Middle  
0.2 inch* (4 mm*)  
Specify the value in increments of 0.1 inch (1 mm).  
Specify the value in increments of 0.1 inch (1 mm).  
Specify the value in increments of 0.1 inch (1 mm).  
Available Range: 0.0–2.0 inches (0–50 mm)  
0.2 inch* (4 mm*)  
Available Range: 0.0–2.0 inches (0–50 mm)  
0 inches* (0 mm*)  
Available Range: 0.0–2.0 inches (0–50 mm)  
* Denotes the factory default settings.  
Auto Exposure  
To suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the copy:  
1
2
Swipe the screen until Auto Exposureappears, and then tap Auto Exposure  
.
Tap On  
.
Using the ID Copy  
NOTE: If the Functions Control setting for ID Copyis set to Disable, the ID copy function is disabled and the menu is also  
disabled on the screen. For details, see "Functions Control."  
You can copy both sides of an ID card on one side of a single sheet of paper in its original size by tapping ID Copy  
on the touch panel.  
To make a copy:  
1
Place an ID card facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.  
For details about loading a document, see "Making Copies From the Document Glass."  
2
3
4
Press the  
Tap  
Specify the copy settings below as required.  
(Home) button.  
ID Copy  
.
•
•
•
•
•
Quantity  
Darken / Lighten  
Select Tray  
Sharpness  
Auto Exposure  
For details, see "Setting Copy Options."  
5
Tap Copyto begin copying.  
After the front side of the ID card is scanned, the display prompts you to turn over the card.  
a
b
To scan the back side of the ID card, turn the ID card over and tap Continue  
To finish copying, tap Print Now  
.
.
314  
Copying  
       
Changing the Default Settings  
The default settings of the copy menu options such as Select Trayand Darken/Lightencan be set to the  
most frequently used modes. When you copy a document, the specified default settings are used unless they are  
changed by using the operator panel.  
The settings on Default Settingswill be reflected when you create a new tile. If you change the settings on  
Default Settingsafter creating the new tile, it does not affect the settings of the tile you created earlier. For  
details about creating a new tile, see "Adding a New Tile."  
To create your own default settings:  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Press the  
Tap the Toolstab, and then tap Default Settings  
Tap Copy Defaults  
Tap until the desired menu item appears, and then tap that menu item.  
(Information) button.  
.
.
Tap the desired setting or enter the value, and then tap OK  
.
Repeat steps 4 and 5 as needed.  
Copying  
315  
 
316  
Copying  
20  
Scanning  
NOTE: If the Functions Control setting for a scan function (Scan to Email Scan to Network Folder, Scan  
,
to Computer, or Scan to USB) is set to On(Password), you need to enter the four-digit password to use that  
scan function. If the Functions Control setting for a scan function is set to Off, that scan function is disabled and the menu is  
also disabled on the screen. For details, see "Functions Control."  
NOTE: The images used in this manual are those of the Dell™ Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw unless otherwise mentioned.  
Scanning Overview  
Use the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw and Dell Smart Multifunction Printer | S2815dn to turn  
pictures and text into editable images on your computer.  
Your printer provides several ways to scan your document. There are two main scanning types. One is operated on  
the printer side without using the scanner driver, and the other is operated on the computer side using a software  
and the scanner driver. See the available features below to help you find the information you need.  
•
•
Scanning - With scanner driver  
Scanning - Without scanner driver  
Tips for Easy Network Scanning  
•
Use the Scan to Web Services on Devices (WSD) feature if you are not familiar with the network scanning setup.  
The Scan to Web Services on Devices (WSD) feature does not require the complicated setup of the network  
shared folder.  
•
Before using the Scan to Network Folder feature, configure the network connection details using the Address Book  
Editor if you are not familiar with the setup using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
.
The Address Book Editor helps to register the scanning destination details to the printer.  
Scanning - With scanner driver  
®
®
•
Scan into a graphic software such as Adobe Photoshop using a TWAIN driver  
®
®
(Supporting USB and Network connections for both Microsoft Windows and Apple Macintosh using a graphic  
software)  
See "Scanning Using the TWAIN Driver."  
®
®
•
Scan into a Microsoft’s default program such as Windows Photo Gallery and Microsoft Paint, using a Windows  
Image Acquisition (WIA) driver  
*
®
(Supporting USB and Network (including WSD ) connections on Windows only)  
*
Web Services on Devices  
See "Scanning Using the Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) Driver."  
•
Scan and send the scanned document to computer connected via USB cable  
®
®
(Supporting USB connection for both Microsoft Windows and Apple Macintosh)  
Using the feature of Scan to Computer on the operator panel of your printer, the scanned image is saved in the  
location of your computer you specify.  
See "Scanning to a Computer With a USB Connection."  
Scanning  
317  
         
Scanning - Without scanner driver  
•
•
•
•
Scan and save the scanned document in a USB memory  
See "Scanning to a USB Memory."  
Scan and send the scanned document by e-mail  
See "Sending an E-Mail With the Scanned Image."  
Scan and send the scanned document to computer or server connected to network  
See "Scanning to a PC or Server via SMB/FTP."  
Scan and send the scanned document to a computer connected to a network using Web Services on Devices  
(WSD)  
See "Scanning to a Computer Connected With Web Services on Devices (WSD)."  
The resolution setting to use when you scan an item depends on the item type and how you plan to use the image or  
document after you scan it to your computer. For the best results, use these recommended settings.  
Type  
Resolution  
Documents  
300 dpi black-and-white or 200 dpi grayscale or color  
400 dpi black-and-white or 300 dpi grayscale  
100–200 dpi color or 200 dpi grayscale  
150–300 dpi  
Documents of poor quality or that contain small text  
Photographs and pictures  
Images for an inkjet printer  
Images for a high-resolution printer  
300–600 dpi  
Scanning above these recommended resolutions may exceed the capabilities of the application. If you require a  
resolution above those recommended in the above table, you should reduce the size of the image by previewing (or  
pre-scan) and cropping before scanning the image.  
Scanning to a Computer With a USB Connection  
NOTE: You must connect your computer via USB for selecting this feature. Network connection is not supported.  
NOTE: This feature is supported on both Microsoft® Windows® and OS X.  
1
Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the DADF.  
OR  
Place a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.  
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document."  
2
3
4
5
Press the  
Tap  
Tap Computer (via USB)  
Specify scan settings such as Output Color  
Darken/Lighten Contrast Sharpness  
(Home) button.  
Scan to Computer  
.
.
,
Resolution  
,
File Format  
,
2 Sided Scanning  
,
,
,
,
Auto Exposure  
,
Original Size  
,
Margin, and File  
Naming Mode. For details, see "Scan Settings."  
6
Tap Scanto begin scanning the document.  
318  
Scanning  
   
Changing the Location to Save the Scanned Data  
On Microsoft® Windows®, use the Dell Printer Hub for Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw or Dell Printer  
Management Tool for Dell Smart Multifunction Printer | S2815dn to change the output destination of the obtained  
image files and to select whether to open the image files using the related program. Click Start  
Dell Printers Dell Printer Hub or Dell Printer Management Tool. For details, see the FAQ of the Dell Printer  
Hub or Dell Printer Management Tool.  
All Programs  
On OS X, use ScanButton Manager. Click Finder Applications Dell Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer -  
H815dw or Dell Smart Multifunction Printer - S2815dn, and then double-click ScanButton Manager.  
Scanning to a Computer Connected With Web Services on Devices (WSD)  
If the printer is connected to a computer via network using Web Services on Devices (WSD), you can send scanned  
images to the computer.  
NOTE: You need to setup connection using Web Services on Devices (WSD).  
NOTE: Web Services on Devices (WSD) are supported only on Windows Vista®, Windows® 7, Windows® 8, Windows® 8.1, and  
Windows® 10. Ensure that the scanner driver is installed on your computer. See "Setting Up the Printer Using Dell Printer Easy  
Install (Windows® Only)" for details.  
Preparations for Scanning Using Web Services on Devices (WSD)  
Setup the printer and computer for connection using Web Services on Devices (WSD).  
Checking the Printer Setting  
Make sure that the Web Services on Devices (WSD) is enabled from the operator panel of the printer or on the Dell  
Printer Configuration Web Tool. See "Port Settings" or "Protocols" for details.  
Setting Up the Computer  
NOTE: For Windows® 8, Windows® 8.1, and Windows® 10, the computer automatically connects the printer using Web  
Services on Devices (WSD). There is no need to install the printer manually.  
For Windows® 7:  
1
2
Click Start  
Computer  
Network  
Find the printer you want to use, right-click the icon for the printer, and then click Install. The printer is  
connected using Web Services on Devices (WSD).  
3
Right-click the icon for the printer, and then click Scan profiles. Specify the various settings of the profile,  
including the Source where the documents are loaded.  
For Windows Vista®  
:
1
2
3
Click StartNetwork  
Right-click the icon for the printer, and then click Install  
.
Click Continue. The printer is connected using Web Services on Devices (WSD).  
Scanning and Sending Images to the Computer Using Web Services on Devices (WSD)  
1
Load the document(s) facing up with top edge first into the DADF.  
OR  
Place a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.  
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document."  
Scanning  
319  
           
2
3
Press the  
Tap  
(
Home) button.  
Scan to Computer  
.
NOTE: Whether to scan from the DADF or from the document glass can be specified in the scan profile. Make sure to specify  
the scan profile accordingly if you want to scan the document from the DADF.  
4
Select a computer.  
Swipe the screen until the desired computer you want to send the scan job to appears, and then select that  
computer.  
5
Specify the type of scan. For details, see "Scan to Computer."  
6
Tap Scanto begin sending the scanned file.  
Scanning From a Computer Using Web Services on Devices (WSD)  
If the printer is connected to a computer via network using Web Services on Devices (WSD), you can scan  
documents from the computer.  
NOTE: To scan from the computer using Web Services on Devices (WSD), you need to setup connection using Web Services on  
Devices (WSD).  
NOTE: Web Services on Devices (WSD) are supported only on Windows Vista®, Windows® 7, Windows® 8, Windows® 8.1, and  
Windows® 10.  
Preparations for scanning from the computer  
The same preparations are necessary as in scanning to a computer connected with Web Services on Devices (WSD).  
See "Preparations for Scanning Using Web Services on Devices (WSD)."  
320  
Scanning  
   
Scanning from the computer  
The following procedure uses Windows® 7 as an example.  
1
Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the DADF.  
OR  
Place a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.  
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document."  
2
3
Click Start  
Devices and Printers on the computer.  
Right-click the printer icon of the Dell MFP H815dw or Dell MFP S2815dn, and then select Start scan  
.
Scanning  
321  
 
4
Specify the necessary settings for scanning, and then click Scan.  
NOTE: When you use Windows Vista®, use the drawing software such as Microsoft® Photo Gallery, select the printer  
connected using the Web Services on Devices (WSD), and start scanning.  
NOTE: To open Devices and Printers on Windows® 8, Windows® 8.1, Windows Server® 2012, or Windows Server® 2012 R2,  
right-click the bottom left corner of the screen on the Desktop screen, and then click Control Panel Hardware and Sound  
(Hardware for Windows Server® 2012/Windows Server® 2012 R2) Devices and Printers.  
NOTE: To open Devices and Printers on Windows® 10, right-click the Start button, and then click Control Panel Hardware  
and Sound Devices and Printers.  
Scanning Using the TWAIN Driver  
Your printer supports the TWAIN driver for scanning images that supports Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003,  
Windows Vista®, Windows Server® 2008, Windows Server® 2008 R2, Windows® 7, Windows® 8, Windows® 8.1,  
Windows Server® 2012, Windows Server® 2012 R2, Windows® 10, Apple Mac OS X 10.5, Mac OS X 10.6, Mac OS  
X 10.7, OS X 10.8, OS X 10.9, OS X 10.10, and works with various scanners.  
1
Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the DADF.  
OR  
Place a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.  
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document."  
®
®
2
3
Start the graphic software that supports TWAIN, such as Adobe Photoshop .  
Select the scanner from the TWAIN menu on the graphic software, specify the necessary settings, and then start  
scanning on the window such as shown below.  
For details on operating the graphic software, see the manuals of your software.  
322  
Scanning  
   
For Microsoft ® Windows®  
:
For Apple Macintosh:  
NOTE: The screen image may vary depending on the software or the operating system.  
Scanning  
323  
Scanning Using the Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) Driver  
Your printer also supports the Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) driver for scanning images. Windows Image  
Acquisition (WIA) is one of the standard components incorporated in the recent Microsoft® Windows® operating  
systems and works with digital cameras and scanners. Unlike the TWAIN driver, the Windows Image Acquisition  
(WIA) driver allows you to scan an image and easily manipulate those images without using additional software.  
NOTE: The Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) driver is supported only on Windows®.  
To scan an image from the drawing software:  
1
Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the DADF.  
OR  
Place a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.  
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document."  
®
®
2
Start the drawing software, such as Microsoft Paint for Windows .  
NOTE: When you use Windows Vista® or Windows Server® 2008, use Windows® Photo Gallery instead of Microsoft®  
Paint.  
NOTE: When using applications that utilize Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) 2.0, such as Windows® Fax and Scan on  
Windows Vista®, Windows® 7, Windows® 8, Windows® 8.1, and Windows® 10, the Feeder (Scan both sides) option can be  
selected for duplex (two-sided) scanning.  
®
3
Click Paint button  
Windows Server 2008).  
From scanner or camera  
(
File  
Import from Scanner or Camera for Windows Vista or  
®
The following image uses Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw as an example.  
NOTE: The screen image may vary depending on the operating system.  
4
Select your desired type of picture that you want to scan, and click Adjust the quality of the scanned picture to  
display the Advanced Properties dialog box.  
5
6
7
Select the desired properties including brightness and contrast, and then click OK.  
Click Scan to start scanning.  
Click File  
Save to save your scanned document in your desired location on your computer.  
324  
Scanning  
 
To scan an image from Control Panel:  
NOTE: This feature is supported on Microsoft® Window Server® 2003 only.  
1
Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the DADF.  
OR  
Place a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.  
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document."  
2
3
4
Click StartControl PanelPrinters and Other HardwareScanners and Cameras  
Double-click the scanner icon. The Scanner and Camera Wizard launches.  
Click Next to display the Choose Scanning Preferences page.  
.
NOTE: The screen image may vary depending on the operating system.  
5
6
7
8
Select your desired type of picture, paper source, and paper size, and click Next.  
Enter a picture name, select a file format, and specify the desired location to save the scanned document.  
Click Next to start scanning.  
Follow the on-screen instructions to edit the picture after it is copied to your computer.  
Scanning With Wi-Fi Direct  
NOTE: The Wi-Fi Direct feature is available on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw only.  
This section provides information for Wi-Fi Direct scanning. Wi-Fi Direct allows your Wi-Fi mobile devices such as  
computers, smartphones, and tablets, to connect to the printer directly via a Wi-Fi network. With Wi-Fi Direct, you  
can scan documents or photos from your Wi-Fi mobile devices directly without a wireless access point.  
NOTE: Wi-Fi Direct is available even if the printer is connected to your wireless network.  
NOTE: The maximum number of devices that can be connected via the Wi-Fi Direct network is 3.  
NOTE: You cannot connect your mobile device to the Internet via the printer's Wi-Fi Direct network.  
NOTE: Depending on the mobile device, the channel used to connect the device to the printer via Wi-Fi Direct may differ from  
the channel used by the printer to connect to a network via Wi-Fi infrastructure mode. In such a case, simultaneous connection  
with Wi-Fi Direct and Wi-Fi infrastructure mode may not work properly.  
NOTE: The printer connected with Wi-Fi Direct supports the following protocols; LPD, Port9100, Web Services on Devices  
(WSD), Bonjour (mDNS), SNMPv1/v2c, Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, TWAIN, WIA, ICA.  
Scanning via Wi-Fi Direct  
The scanning procedure varies depending on the mobile device and the application you are using. Refer to the  
manual supplied with your mobile device or application to scan.  
Scanning  
325  
   
Scanning to a PC or Server via SMB/FTP  
NOTE: This feature does not require a network scan driver.  
Overview  
The Scan to Network Folder feature allows you to send the scanned documents to a computer or FTP server.  
Computer  
FTP Server  
Scan  
Using FTP  
Using SMB  
Computer  
Required operating systems:  
For FTP:  
NOTE: For information on how to configure the FTP service, refer to the manual provided with the software.  
NOTE: Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003, Windows Vista®, and Mac OS X 10.5 support IPv4 only.  
®
®
•
•
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Service Pack 1  
®
FTP service of Microsoft Internet Information Services 6.0  
®
®
Microsoft Windows Vista  
®
®
Microsoft Windows Server 2008  
®
FTP service of Microsoft Internet Information Services 7.0  
®
®
•
•
•
•
Microsoft Windows  
7
®
®
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2  
®
FTP service of Microsoft Internet Information Services 7.5  
®
®
Microsoft Windows  
8
®
®
Microsoft Windows Server 2012  
®
FTP service of Microsoft Internet Information Services 8.0  
®
®
Microsoft Windows 8.1  
®
®
Microsoft Windows Server 2012 R2  
®
FTP service of Microsoft Internet Information Services 8.5  
®
®
Microsoft Windows 10  
®
FTP service of Microsoft Internet Information Services 10  
326  
Scanning  
     
•
Mac OS X 10.5/Mac OS X 10.6/Mac OS X 10.7/OS X 10.8/OS X 10.9/OS X 10.10  
FTP service of Mac OS X  
For SMB:  
NOTE: Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003, Mac OS X 10.5 and Mac OS X 10.6 support IPv4 only.  
®
®
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Microsoft Windows Server 2003  
®
®
Microsoft Windows Vista  
®
®
Microsoft Windows Server 2008  
®
®
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2  
®
®
®
®
Microsoft Windows  
7
8
®
Microsoft Windows  
®
Microsoft Windows 8.1  
®
®
Microsoft Windows Server 2012  
®
®
Microsoft Windows Server 2012 R2  
®
®
Microsoft Windows 10  
Mac OS X 10.5/Mac OS X 10.6/OS X 10.9/OS X 10.10  
Procedures  
Follow the procedures below to complete the setup for the Scan to Network Folder feature.  
For FTP:  
1
2
"Adding a Scanning Destination to the Printer's Address Book"  
"Sending the Scanned File on the Network Folder"  
For SMB:  
NOTE: The setup for Scan to Network Folder via SMB can be configured easily with the bundled "Address Book Editor" utility.  
For details about Address Book Editor, see "Adding a Scanning Destination to the Printer's Address Book."  
NOTE: Scan to Network Folder can be also accomplished with the Web Services on Devices (WSD) function. For details about  
scanning using the Web Services on Devices (WSD) function, see "Scanning to a Computer Connected With Web Services on  
Devices (WSD)" and "Scanning From a Computer Using Web Services on Devices (WSD)."  
1
2
3
4
"Setting a Login Name and a Password (SMB Only)"  
"Creating a Shared Folder (SMB Only)"  
"Adding a Scanning Destination to the Printer's Address Book"  
"Sending the Scanned File on the Network Folder"  
Setting a Login Name and a Password (SMB Only)  
The Scan to Network Folder feature requires a user login account with a valid and non-empty password for  
authentication. Confirm a login user name and password.  
Scanning  
327  
   
For Microsoft® Windows®:  
If you do not use a password for your user login, you need to create a password on your User Login Account with the  
following procedure.  
For Windows Vista® and Windows® 7:  
1
2
3
4
Click Start  
Click User Accounts and Family Safety  
Click User Accounts  
Click Create a password for your account and add in a password for your user login account.  
Control Panel.  
.
.
For Windows Server® 2008:  
1
2
3
Click StartControl Panel  
Double-click User Accounts  
Click Create a password for your account and add in a password for your user login account.  
.
.
For Windows Server® 2008 R2:  
1
2
3
4
Click Start  
Select User Accounts  
Click User Accounts  
Click Create a password for your account and add in a password for your user login account.  
Control Panel.  
.
.
For Windows® 8 and Windows Server® 2012:  
1
2
3
4
Point to the top or bottom right corner of the screen, and then click Settings  
Click Change PC settings  
Click Users  
Click Create a Password and add in a password for your user login account.  
.
.
.
For Windows® 8.1 and Windows Server® 2012 R2:  
1
2
3
4
5
Point to the top or bottom right corner of the screen, and then click Settings  
Click Change PC settings  
Click Accounts  
Click Sign-in options  
.
.
.
.
Click Add under Password and add in a password for your user login account.  
328  
Scanning  
For Windows® 10:  
1
2
3
4
Right-click the Start button, and then click Settings  
Click Accounts  
Click Sign-in options  
Click Add under Password and add in a password for your user login account.  
.
.
.
For Mac OS X 10.5 and Mac OS X 10.6:  
1
2
3
4
Click System Preferences  
Select Change Password  
Enter a password for your user login account in New password  
Accounts.  
.
.
.
Re-enter the password in Verify  
.
For OS X 10.9 and OS X 10.10:  
1
2
3
4
Click System Preferences  
Select Change Password  
Enter a password for your user login account in New password  
Re-enter the password in Verify  
Users & Groups  
.
.
.
Creating a Shared Folder (SMB Only)  
Create a shared folder to store the scanned document from your printer.  
For Windows Vista®, Windows Server® 2008, Windows Server® 2008 R2, Windows® 7, Windows® 8, Windows® 8.1,  
Windows Server® 2012, Windows Server® 2012 R2, and Windows® 10:  
1
2
Create a folder in the desired directory on your computer (Example of folder name, MyShare).  
Right-click the folder, and then select Properties  
.
The Properties dialog box appears.  
3
Click the Sharing tab, and then select Advanced Sharing.  
4
Select the Share this folder check box.  
Scanning  
329  
 
5
Enter a shared name in the Share name box.  
NOTE: Write down the shared name as you need to use this name in the next setting procedure.  
6
7
8
Click Permissions to create a write permission for this folder.  
Click Add  
.
Search user login name by clicking Advanced, or enter the user login name in Enter the object names to select box  
and click Check Names to confirm (Example of user login name, Myself).  
9
Click OK.  
10 Click the user login name that you have just entered. Select Full Control check box. This will grant you permission  
to send the document into this folder.  
NOTE: Do not use Everyone as the user login name.  
330  
Scanning  
11 Click OK  
.
NOTE: To add sub-folders, create new folders in the shared folder you have created.  
For example:  
Folder name: MyShare Second-level folder name: MyPic, Third-level folder name: John  
,
You should now see MyShare\MyPic\Johnin your directory.  
For Mac OS X 10.5, Mac OS X 10.6, OS X 10.9, and OS X 10.10:  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Create a folder in the desired directory on your computer (Example of folder name, MyShare).  
Select the created folder, and then select Get Info from the File menu.  
Select the Shared Folder check box.  
Open System Preferences, and then click Sharing  
Select the File Sharing check box, and then click Options  
Select the Share Files and folders using SMB and account name check boxes.  
Click Done  
.
.
.
Adding a Scanning Destination to the Printer's Address Book  
You can register the connection details for SMB and FTP server in the address book using Dell Printer  
Configuration Web Tool or Address Book Editor.  
Before beginning to setup a destination, make sure you have the IP addresses you need such as printer and computer.  
Verifying the IP Address Setting of the Printer  
To setup the server address book through the network, you will first need to locate the IP address of the printer. To  
find your printer's IP address, see "Verifying the IP Settings."  
Locating the IP Address Setting of Your Computer  
You can locate the IP address of your computer by the following operations.  
®
®
1
For Windows Vista /Windows 7:  
Click Start  
All Programs  
Accessories  
Run.  
®
®
®
For Windows Server 2003/Windows Server 2008/Windows Server 2008 R2:  
Click Start  
For Windows 8/Windows 8.1/Windows Server 2012/Windows Server 2012 R2:  
Point to the top or bottom right corner of the screen, and then click Search Type Runin the search box, click  
Run.  
®
®
®
®
®
®
Apps (for Windows 8 and Windows Server 2012 only), and then click Run  
.
®
For Windows 10:  
Right-click the Start button, and then click Run  
Type cmdin the text field and click OK. A command prompt window will open.  
Type ipconfigand press Enter  
Write down the IP Address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.  
.
2
3
4
.
Scanning  
331  
 
Using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
1
2
Open a web browser.  
Type in the IP address of the printer in the address bar, and press the <Enter> key.  
The web page of the printer appears.  
NOTE: For details on how to check the IP address of the printer, see "Verifying the IP Settings."  
3
Click Address Book. If a security login dialog box appears, type in the correct User Name and Password.  
NOTE: The default user name is "admin", and the default password is left blank (NULL).  
4
Click the Server Address tab, and then click Create of an ID.  
332  
Scanning  
Server Address page appears.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
To fill in the fields, enter the information as follows:  
(1) Name  
Enter a friendly name that you want to display on the Server address book.  
(2) Server Type  
Select FTP if you store document on a FTP server.  
Select SMB if you store documents in a shared folder on your computer.  
(3) Server Address  
Enter a FTP server name that you have shared out or a server name or IP address of your computer.  
• For FTP:  
Server name: myhost.example.com  
(myhost: host name, example.com: domain name)  
IP address: 192.0.2.1  
• For SMB:  
Server name: myhost  
IP address: 192.0.2.1  
(4) Share Name  
(5) Server Path  
Enter the name of the shared folder on the recipient computer. For SMB only.  
• For SMB: e.g. Share, Sharefolder  
Enter the subdirectory path where you want the scanned document to be stored. Ensure that the  
subdirectory path is already created in the shared folder or FTP server.  
• For FTP: e.g. pub, pub/share  
• For SMB: e.g. finance, finance\Peter, finance\Peter\Sales  
(6) Server Port  
Number  
Enter the Server Port Number. If you are unsure, you can enter the default value of 21 for FTP or 139 for  
SMB.  
Available ports are:  
FTP: 21, 5000 - 65535  
SMB: 139, 445, 5000 - 65535  
(7) Login Name  
Enter the user account name to allow access to a shared folder on your computer or to a FTP server.  
• For FTP: Contact the system administrator.  
®
• For SMB: Windows login name that you have specified in the procedure 1.  
(8) Login Password Enter the password corresponding to the above login name.  
• For FTP: Contact the system administrator  
• For SMB: Empty password is not valid in the Network (Computer) feature. Ensure that you have a valid  
password for the user login account. (See "Setting a Login Name and a Password (SMB Only)" for details  
on how to add a password in your user login account.)  
Scanning  
333  
(9) Re-enter  
Password  
Re-enter your password.  
Using Address Book Editor  
1
Click Start  
For Windows 10: Click the Start button  
For Dell Printer Hub, select the printer from My Printers on the home screen.  
®
All Programs  
Dell Printers  
Dell Printer Hub or Dell Printer Management Tool  
.
Dell Printer Hub or Dell Printer Management Tool  
.
2
For Dell Printer Management Tool, select the printer displayed by default, or another printer from the drop-down  
list on the upper-right corner of the home screen.  
3
4
Click the shortcut to the Address Book Editor on the left of the screen.  
Click Tool  
New (Device Address Book)Server  
.
For Microsoft ® Windows®  
:
For Apple Macintosh:  
Server Address dialog box appears.  
334  
Scanning  
For Microsoft® Windows®  
:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
For Apple Macintosh:  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
To fill in the fields, enter the information as follows:  
(1) Name  
Enter a friendly name that you want to display on the Server address book.  
(2) Server Type  
Select Computer if you store documents in a shared folder on your computer.  
Select Server if you store documents on a FTP server.  
(3) Server Name/IP Enter a server name or IP address of your computer or the FTP server name that you have shared out.  
Address  
The following are examples:  
•
•
For Computer:  
Server name: myhost  
IP address: 192.0.2.1  
For Server:  
Server name: myhost.example.com  
(myhost: host name, example.com: domain name)  
IP address: 192.0.2.1  
Scanning  
335  
(4) Share Name  
(5) Path  
Enter the name of the shared folder on the recipient computer. For SMB only.  
• For SMB: e.g. Share, Sharefolder  
Enter the subdirectory path where you want the scanned document to be stored. Ensure that the  
subdirectory path is already created in the shared folder or FTP server.  
• For FTP: e.g. pub, pub/share  
• For SMB: e.g. finance, finance\Peter, finance\Peter\Sales  
(6) Login Name  
Enter the user account name to allow access to a shared folder on your computer or to a FTP server.  
®
• For Computer: Windows login name that you have specified in the procedure 1.  
• For Server: Contact the system administrator.  
(7) Login Password Enter the password corresponding to the above login name.  
• For Computer: Empty password is not valid in the Network(Computer)feature. Ensure that you  
have a valid password for the user login account. (See "Setting a Login Name and a Password (SMB Only)"  
for details on how to add a password in your user login account.)  
• For Server: Contact the system administrator.  
(8) Confirm Login Re-enter your password.  
Password  
(9) Port Number  
Enter the Server Port Number. If you are unsure, you can enter the default value of 139 for Computer and  
21 for FTP server.  
Available ports are:  
For Computer: 139, 445, 5000 - 65535  
For Server: 21, 5000 - 65535  
Sending the Scanned File on the Network Folder  
1
Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the DADF.  
OR  
Place a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.  
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document."  
2
3
4
Press the  
Tap  
(Home) button.  
Scan to Network Folder  
.
Tap and select the desired address. When you cannot find the address, tap Address Bookand select the desired  
address.  
5
6
Tap  
Scanning  
and specify scan settings such as Output Color  
,
Resolution  
,
File Format  
,
2 Sided  
Margin,  
,
Darken/Lighten Contrast Sharpness  
,
,
,
Auto Exposure  
,
Original Size  
,
and File Naming Mode. For details, see "Scan Settings."  
Tap Scanto begin scanning and sending the file.  
336  
Scanning  
 
Scanning to a USB Memory  
The Scan to USB feature allows you to store scanned image directly to a USB memory attached to the printer  
without using software.  
Types of a USB Memory  
You can use a USB memory with the following interfaces:  
•
•
USB 1.1  
USB 2.0  
The USB memory must be formatted in FAT file systems (FAT16, FAT32, or VFAT) before inserting the memory  
device into the front USB port of the printer.  
NOTE: If the USB memory is formatted in a file system other than above, the printer may not recognize that the USB memory is  
attached.  
NOTE: A USB memory with authentication feature and some brands of USB memories cannot be used with this printer.  
Procedures  
To store the scanned images to a USB memory:  
NOTE: If you insert a USB memory to the front USB port first, the USB Drive Detected screen may appear. In this case, select  
Scan to USB, and proceed to step 6.  
1
Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the DADF.  
OR  
Place a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.  
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document."  
2
3
Press the  
(Home) button.  
Insert a USB memory into the front USB port of the printer. See "Inserting and Removing a USB Memory" for  
more details.  
4
5
Tap Scan to USB  
Tap and specify scan settings such as Output Color  
Scanning Darken/Lighten Contrast Sharpness  
and File Naming Mode. For details, see "Scan Settings."  
.
,
Resolution  
,
File Format  
,
2 Sided  
Margin,  
,
,
,
,
Auto Exposure  
,
Original Size  
,
You can also specify the folder to save the scanned image. For details, see "Specifying a Folder to Save the Scanned  
Image."  
6
7
Tap Scanto begin scanning the document.  
Remove the USB memory from the printer. See "Inserting and Removing a USB Memory" for more details.  
Specifying a Folder to Save the Scanned Image  
To save the scanned image to a folder in the USB memory, specify the folder before executing the scan job.  
1
2
If a folder has already existed in the USB memory, the folder name appears on the display.  
Select a folder to save the scanned image.  
NOTE: The default saving location is the root directory of the USB memory.  
NOTE: You cannot directly enter a folder path using the numeric keypad.  
NOTE: You can select any folder in the USB memory but cannot create a new folder in this step. You should always create  
a new folder before connecting the memory to the printer.  
Scanning  
337  
         
If the name of the scanned image has already existed in the folder, the printer automatically generate a new file  
name to save the data.  
Sending an E-Mail With the Scanned Image  
You can send the scanned image as an e-mail attachment using the Scan to Email function. To send an e-mail, an  
e-mail account is necessary such as the corporate mail account or the Internet service provider's mail account. Gmail  
account can be used as well.  
The following are the procedures necessary to setup Scan to E-mail function.  
•
•
•
•
"Preparing the Printer to Send the E-Mail"  
"Setting the DNS Server Address"  
"Setting the Information Necessary to Access the Mail Server"  
"Setting the Administrator's E-mail Address"  
Preparing the Printer to Send the E-Mail  
To send an e-mail from your printer, the following information is necessary:  
•
•
E-mail account (user account) information  
E-mail sever information  
NOTE: For information of your e-mail account or the mail server, consult your network administrator or your Internet service  
provider.  
NOTE: When the printer is connected to the network which is using a proxy server, the printer may not be able to send the  
e-mail. In this case, consult your network administrator.  
NOTE: The preparations described below are effective while the e-mail account information is valid. You do not have to repeat  
the settings whenever you send the e-mail.  
Setting the DNS Server Address  
To set the DNS server address to your printer, follow the steps below:  
1
Launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.  
a
b
Open the web browser.  
Enter the IP address of your printer in the web browser.  
See "Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool."  
2
3
4
Click Print Server Settings  
Click TCP/IP  
If you are using DHCP for TCP/IP setting for the printer:  
.
.
Set Get DNS Server Address from DHCP to Enable  
.
If you are setting TCP/IP manually:  
Set Manual DNS Server Address  
.
5
Click Apply New Settings.  
338  
Scanning  
       
Setting the Information Necessary to Access the Mail Server  
To make the printer to send an e-mail, follow the steps below:  
1
Launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.  
a
b
Open the web browser.  
Enter the IP address of your printer in the web browser.  
See "Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool."  
2
3
Click E-Mail Server Settings Overview  
.
Set the mail server information under E-Mail Server  
.
NOTE: In this procedure, the server settings for a Gmail account are used as an example. The server settings will differ for  
each e-mail service.  
NOTE: Information about the Gmail account is based on the information as of October 2013. For the latest information, visit  
the homepage of Gmail.  
a
In the Primary SMTP Gateway text box, set the primary SMTP gateway.  
For example: smtp.gmail.com  
b
c
In the SMTP Port Number text box, enter the SMTP port number. This must be between 1 and 65535.  
In the E-Mail Send Authentication drop-down menu, specify the authentication method for outgoing e-mail.  
For example: SMTP_Auth(Auto)  
d
In the SMTP Login User text box, set the SMTP login user. Up to 63 alphanumeric characters, periods,  
hyphens, underscores, and at symbols (@) can be used. If specifying more than one address, separate them  
using commas.  
For example: [email protected]  
NOTE: It is not advisable to share a personal e-mail account with others for Scan to Email function. Instead, use the  
e-mail account dedicated for Scan to Email function.  
e
f
In the SMTP Login Password text box, set the SMTP account password using up to 31 alphanumeric  
characters.  
In the Re-enter SMTP Login Password text box, enter the login password again to confirm it.  
Scanning  
339  
 
g
In the POP3 Server Address text box, enter the POP3 server address in IP address format of "aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd"  
or as a DNS host name using up to 63 characters.  
*1  
*1  
h
i
In the POP3 Port Number text box, enter the POP3 server port number. This must be between 1 and 65535.  
In the POP User Name text box, set the POP3 account user name. Up to 63 alphanumeric characters, periods,  
hyphens, underscores, and at symbols (@) can be used. If specifying more than one address, separate them  
*1  
using commas.  
j
In the POP User Password text box, enter the POP3 account password using up to 31 alphanumeric  
characters.  
*1  
*1  
k
l
In the Re-enter POP User Password text box, enter the POP user password again to confirm it.  
In the Reply Address text box, enter the reply e-mail address sent with each E-Mail Alert  
.
*1  
Required to enter if you select POP before SMTP (Plain) or POP before SMTP (APOP) for E-Mail  
Send Authentication.  
4
Click Apply New Settings.  
If SMTP authentication is selected for E-Mail Send Authentication and if SSL/TLS encryption is used to  
communicate with the SMTP sever, the SSL/TLS type must be set in SMTP-SSL/TLS Communication of  
SSL/TLS under the Security tab. Proceed to step 5.  
If SSL/TLS is not used or if "Invalid", "POP before SMTP (Plain)", or "POP before SMTP (APOP)" is selected for  
E-Mail Send Authentication, the mail server settings are complete.  
NOTE: To send an e-mail through Gmail, set the SSL/TLS type should be set to STARTTLS in SMTP-SSL/TLS  
Communication of SSL/TLS under the Security tab.  
5
6
7
Click Security tab.  
Select SSL/TLS  
.
Select a SSL/TLS type from the SMTP-SSL/TLS Communication list.  
NOTE: To use a Gmail account, select STARTTLS.  
8
Click Apply New Settings.  
Setting the Administrator's E-mail Address  
To make the printer to set an administrator's e-mail address, follow the steps below:  
1
Launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.  
a
b
Open the web browser.  
Enter the IP address of your printer in the web browser.  
See "Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool."  
2
3
4
Click Print Server Settings  
Click Basic Information  
.
.
Set administrator's e-mail address in the Administrator E-Mail Address text box. Up to 63 alphanumeric  
characters, periods, hyphens, underscores, and at symbols (@) can be used.  
5
Click Apply New Settings.  
340  
Scanning  
 
Adding a New E-Mail Address to the Printer's Address Book  
1
2
From the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, click Address Book, and then click the E-Mail Address tab.  
Click Create  
.
The E-Mail Address page for registering a new e-mail address appears.  
3
4
Enter the following:  
•
•
Name  
Address  
Click Apply New Settings  
.
Sending an E-mail With the Scanned File  
1
2
3
Press the  
Tap  
(Home) button.  
Scan to Email  
.
Specify a recipient from the following:  
Enter Recipient's Address: Enter an e-mail address directly.  
Sender: Select from the following types of selecting sender's e-mail address:  
•
•
•
Keyboard: Select an e-mail address from using keyboard.  
Address Book: Select a group of e-mails registered in the address book.  
Network Address Book: Search an e-mail address from the LDAP server address book.  
NOTE: The sender's e-mail address cannot be edited when the remote authentication is used as the user authentication  
method on the Dell Smart Multifunction Printer | S2815dn.  
Address Book: Select from the following types of address books:  
•
•
•
Individuals: Select an e-mail address registered in the address book.  
Groups: Select a group of e-mails registered in the address book.  
Network Address Book: Search an e-mail address from the LDAP server address book.  
Tap + and the recipient you specified from Enter Recipient's Addressto remove or edit the recipient.  
Tap + and the recipient you specified from Address Bookto remove or see details of the recipient. You can also  
change the e-mail to Bcc.  
NOTE: For more information on address book and server address book, see "Address Book Editor (for Microsoft®  
Windows® and OS X)."  
NOTE: For details about Network Address Book, see "Using the Server Address Book and Server Phone Book."  
Scanning  
341  
   
NOTE: The e-mail addresses needs to be registered before you can select Address Book  
and specify scan settings such as Output Color Resolution File Format  
Scanning Darken/Lighten Contrast Sharpness Auto Exposure Original Size  
and File Naming Mode. For details, see "Scan Settings."  
Tap Sendto begin scanning the document and sending an e-mail with the scanned file.  
.
4
5
Tap  
,
,
,
2 Sided  
Margin,  
,
,
,
,
,
,
Managing the Scanner  
You can select the port connected to the computer or set the password for the scanner from the TWAIN driver.  
Open the application that supports TWAIN, and click Settings in the scanning window.  
Port Settings  
When the printer is connected to the computer directly by a USB cable, select USB.  
When the printer is connected to the network, select Network. Enter the IP address or hostname of the printer in  
the IP Address or Hostname text box, and click OK.  
When the printer is connected to the network  
When you are using DHCP for TCP/IP setting for the printer, the image capturing software may not find the  
scanner occasionally due to the change of the IP address allocated for the printer. In this case, check the IP Address  
of the printer, and then connect the scanner by specifying the IP address.  
On Microsoft® Windows®, you can check the IP address of the printer using the Dell Printer Hub or Dell Printer  
Management Tool. For Dell Printer Hub, select the printer from My Printers, and then click Printer information on  
the left of the screen. For Dell Printer Management Tool, select the printer from the drop-down list on the upper-  
right of the screen, and then click Printer information on the left.  
Searching the scanner  
In the Port Settings tab, you can search the scanners from the network and select the desired one from the detected  
scanners.  
®
•
•
•
•
Search all scanners from the network (Windows only)  
Searches scanners in your network.  
Scanner List  
Displays a list of scanners that are detected.  
Search again  
Searches the scanners in your network.  
®
Search Criteria (Windows only)  
Displays the Search Criteria dialog box for setting the search condition.  
342  
Scanning  
   
®
Search Criteria Dialog Box (Windows only)  
•
Subnet Address  
Enter the subnet address.  
•
•
IPv4: Broadcast Address such as "192.0.2.1"  
IPv6: Multicast Address such as "2001:db8::"  
•
•
Search Time  
Specify a time period for searching a scanner.  
Community Name  
Enter the SNMPv1/v2 community name. The default community name is "public."  
Password Setting  
In the Password for Scanner text box of the Password Setting tab, you can input the password that is set for your  
scanner to access from your computer to the printer.  
For Microsoft® Windows®:  
Scanning  
343  
   
For Apple Macintosh:  
•
Password for Scanner  
Enter the password.  
344  
Scanning  
21  
Faxing  
NOTE: If the Functions Control setting for Faxis set to On(Password), you need to enter the four-digit password to use  
the fax function. If the Functions Control setting for Faxis set to Off, the fax function is disabled and the menu is also disabled  
on the touch panel. For details, see "Functions Control."  
NOTE: If the Panel Lock Controlis set to Enable, you need to enter the four-digit password to enter the Admin  
Settingsmenu.  
NOTE: The images used in this manual are those of the Dell™ Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw unless otherwise mentioned.  
Specifying the Fax Initial Settings Using the Dell Printer Easy Install  
You can specify the country, line type, tone/pulse, receive mode, DRPD pattern, fax header name, and fax number.  
1
Insert the Software and Documentation disc provided with the printer into your computer. The Dell Printer Easy  
Install program launches automatically.  
2
Click Main Menu  
.
3
4
Click Change.  
The Configure Printer window appears.  
Select Configure the Fax settings, and then click Next  
.
Faxing  
345  
     
5
Follow the instructions displayed on the screen.  
Available settings are:  
•
•
•
•
•
Country  
Line Type  
Tone/Pulse  
Receive Mode  
DRPD Pattern  
(This setting is available only when a distinctive ring service is installed on your telephone line by your  
telephone company.)  
•
•
Fax Header Name  
Fax Number  
NOTE: To make initial settings from the printer operator panel, see "Setting Your Country."  
Setting Your Country  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Press the  
Tap the Toolstab, and then tap Admin Settings  
Tap Fax Settings  
Tap Fax Line Settings  
Tap Country  
Select the country where the printer is used, and then tap OK  
(Information) button.  
.
.
.
.
.
The printer must be rebooted after you set the country settings. When a screen prompting you to reboot the  
printer, tap Yes. After the reboot, the Home screen is displayed on the touch panel.  
NOTE: When you configure the country setting, the information, which is registered to the printer, is initialized.  
Setting the Printer ID  
In most countries, you are required by law to indicate your fax number on any fax you send. The printer ID,  
containing your telephone number and name or company name, will be printed at the top of each page sent from  
your printer.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Press the  
Tap the Toolstab, and then tap Admin Settings  
Tap Fax Settings  
Tap Fax Line Settings  
Tap Fax Number  
(Information) button.  
.
.
.
.
Enter your fax number using the number pad, and then tap OK  
.
NOTE: If you make a mistake while entering numbers, press the  
button to delete the last digit.  
7
8
Tap Fax Header Name  
.
Enter your name or company name using the keyboard, and then tap OK  
.
For details on how to use the keyboard to enter alphanumeric characters, see "Using the Keyboard Displayed on the  
Touch Panel."  
346  
Faxing  
     
Setting the Time and Date  
NOTE: It may be necessary to reset the correct time and date if loss of power to the printer occurs.  
To set the time and date:  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Press the  
Tap the Toolstab, and then tap Admin Settings  
Tap System Settings  
Tap General  
Tap Date & Time  
Tap Time Zone  
(Information) button.  
.
.
.
.
.
Tap  
until the desired geographic region appears, and then select that region.  
until the desired time zone appears, and then select that time zone.  
Tap  
Tap OK  
.
10 Tap Date  
.
11 Tap – or + or enter the date using the number pad, and then tap OK  
12 Tap Time  
13 Enter the time using the number pad.  
14 Tap OK  
NOTE: The printer beeps and does not allow you to proceed to the next step if a wrong number is entered.  
.
.
.
Changing the Clock Mode  
You can set the current time using either the 12-hour or the 24-hour format.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Press the  
Tap the Toolstab, and then tap Admin Settings  
Tap System Settings  
Tap General  
Tap Date & Time  
Tap Time  
Tap 12 Houror 24 Hour, and then tap OK  
(Information) button.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
Setting Sounds  
Speaker Volume  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Press the  
Tap the Toolstab, and then tap Admin Settings  
Tap Fax Settings  
Tap Fax Line Settings  
Tap until Line Monitorappears, and then tap Line Monitor  
Select the desired volume, and then tap OK  
Turn off the printer, and turn it on again to apply the settings.  
(Information) button.  
.
.
.
.
.
Faxing  
347  
       
Ringer Volume  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Press the  
Tap the Toolstab, and then tap Admin Settings  
Tap Fax Settings  
Tap Incoming Defaults  
Tap Ring Tone Volume  
Select the desired volume, and then tap OK  
Turn off the printer, and turn it on again to apply the settings.  
(Information) button.  
.
.
.
.
.
Specifying the Fax Settings Options  
Changing the Fax Settings Options  
1
2
3
4
5
Press the  
Tap the Toolstab, and then tap Admin Settings  
Tap Fax Settings  
(Information) button.  
.
.
Select the desired menu.  
Select the desired setting or enter a value.  
To enter a value, tap – or +, or use the number pad or the keyboard.  
Tap OK  
If necessary , repeat steps 4 through 6.  
6
.
Available Fax Settings Options  
You can use the following settings options for configuring the fax system:  
Option  
Description  
Fax Line Settings Fax Number  
Specifies the fax number of the printer, which will be printed on  
the header of faxes. This feature is available when you set Fax  
Headerto On. The number specified in Fax Number is used in  
the printer ID.  
Country  
You can select the country where the printer is used.  
You can change this setting when:  
• No jobs in operation  
• No fax jobs waiting in the memory  
Fax Header Name  
Specifies the sender’s name to be printed on the header of faxes.  
Line Type  
You can select the default line type.  
• PSTN  
• PBX  
Line Monitor  
Sets the volume of the line monitor, which audibly monitors a  
transmission through the internal speaker until a connection is  
made.  
348  
Faxing  
       
Option  
Description  
DRPD Pattern  
Receive Mode  
Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD)  
option, distinctive ring service must be installed on your telephone  
line by the telephone company. After the telephone company has  
provided a separate number for faxing with a distinctive ring  
pattern, configure the fax setup to monitor for that specific ring  
pattern.  
Incoming  
Defaults  
You can select the default fax receiving mode.  
•
Telephone (manual receive mode): Automatic fax reception is  
turned off. You can receive a fax by picking up the handset of the  
external telephone and then pressing the remote receive code, or  
by tapping Manual Receivein On Hookand then  
tapping Receive. For details about Manual Receive  
,
see "Receiving a Fax Manually in the Telephone Mode."  
•
•
Fax: (automatic receive mode)  
Telephone / Fax: When the printer receives an incoming fax, the  
external telephone rings for the time specified in Auto Rec  
Fax/Tel, and then the printer automatically receives a fax. If  
an incoming call is not a fax, the printer beeps from the internal  
speaker indicating that the call is a telephone call.  
•
•
Ans Machine/Fax: The printer can share a telephone line with an  
answering machine. In this mode, the printer will monitor the fax  
signal and pick up the line if there are fax tones. If the phone  
communication is using serial transmission in your country (such  
as Germany, Sweden, Denmark, Austria, Belgium, Italy, France  
and Switzerland), this mode is not supported.  
DRPD: Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection  
(DRPD) option, distinctive ring service must be installed on your  
telephone line by the telephone company. After the telephone  
company has provided a separate number for faxing with a  
distinctive ring pattern, configure the fax setup to monitor for  
that specific ring pattern.  
Ring Tone Volume  
Sets the volume of the ring tone, which indicates that an incoming  
call is a telephone call through the internal speaker when  
Receive Modeis set to Telephone / Fax  
.
Auto Receive  
Setup  
Auto Receive Fax Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive  
mode after receiving an incoming call. The interval can be  
specified within the range of 0 to 255 seconds. The default is 0  
second.  
Auto Receive  
Tel/Fax  
Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive  
mode after the external telephone receives an incoming call. The  
interval can be specified within the range of 0 to 255 seconds. The  
default is 6 seconds.  
Auto Receive  
Ans/Fax  
Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive  
mode after the external answering machine receives an incoming  
call. The interval can be specified within the range of 0 to 255  
seconds. The default is 21 seconds.  
Junk Fax Setup  
You can reject faxes sent from unwanted stations. The system only  
accepts faxes from the remote stations registered in the speed dial.  
This feature is useful for blocking any unwanted faxes.  
Tap Offto turn the feature off. Anybody can send you a fax.  
Tap Onto turn the feature on.  
Faxing  
349  
Option  
Description  
Secure Receive  
You can specify whether to require a four-digit password to print  
the stored incoming faxes, and to set or change the password.  
Received Fax  
Forward  
You can set your printer to forward incoming faxes to another fax  
number, to e-mail addresses, or to a server. When a fax arrives at  
your printer, it is stored in the memory. Then, the printer dials the  
fax number you have specified in Forwarding Numberor  
forwards the fax to e-mail addresses or a server address you have  
specified in the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.  
To forward to a fax number, you need to register a fax number on  
Forwarding Number. To forward to e-mail addresses, you need  
to register information on the e-mail server and the forwarding e-  
mail addresses. To forward to a server address, you need to register  
information on the destination server. For details on setting the e-  
mail server, see "E-Mail Server" and on forwarding number, e-mail  
address, and server address, see "Fax Settings."  
Tap Offnot to forward incoming faxes.  
Tap Forwardto forward incoming faxes without printing. If an  
error occurs during forwarding a received fax, the printer prints the  
fax.  
Tap Print and Forwardto print and forward incoming  
faxes.  
Tap Forward to Emailto forward incoming faxes to e-mail.  
NOTE: Depending on the e-mail server settings, the printer  
may not get an error which occurs during the transfer.  
Tap Print and Forward to E-mailto print and  
forward incoming faxes to e-mail.  
Tap Forward to Serverto forward incoming faxes to  
server.  
Tap Print and Forward to Serverto print and  
forward incoming faxes to server.  
2 Sided Print  
You can set whether to make duplex print when you print faxes.  
Tap Offto print faxes on one side of a sheet of paper.  
Tap Onto print faxes on both sides of a sheet of paper.  
NOTE: Duplex print may not be done depending on the size of  
the received faxes or settings of the trays, etc.  
Remote Receive  
You can receive a fax by pressing the remote receive code on the  
external telephone after picking up the handset of the telephone.  
When you set Remote receiveto On, specify a two digit  
remote receive code in Remote Receive Tone  
.
350  
Faxing  
Option  
Description  
Discard Size  
When receiving a document as long as or longer than the paper  
installed in your printer, you can set the printer to discard any  
excess at the bottom of the page. If the received page is outside  
the margin you set, it will print on two sheets of paper at the  
actual size. When the document is within the margin and  
Discard Sizeis set to Auto Reduction, the printer  
reduces the document to fit it onto the appropriate sized paper  
and discard does not occur. If Discard Sizeis set to other  
than Auto Reduction, the data within the margin will be  
discarded.  
Transmission  
Defaults  
Auto Redial Setup Redial Attempts  
You can specify the number of redial attempts to make when the  
destination fax number is busy, within the range of 0 to 13. If you  
enter 0, the printer will not redial.  
Interval of Redial Your printer can automatically redial a remote fax machine if it  
was busy. Intervals from 1–15 minutes can be entered.  
Resend Delay  
You can specify the interval between transmission attempts within  
the range of 3 to 255 seconds. The default is 8 seconds.  
Tone/Pulse  
Prefix Dial  
You can select the dialing type.  
• Tone  
•
•
Pulse(10PPS)  
Pulse(20PPS)  
You can specify whether or not to set a prefix dial number. When  
you set Prefix Dialto On, the number set in Prefix  
Dial Numberdials before any auto dial number is started. It is  
useful for accessing the Private Automatic Branch Exchange  
(PBX). You can set a prefix dial number of up to five digits.  
Fax Cover Page  
Fax Header  
You can set whether to attach a cover page to faxes when sending  
faxes.  
Prints the sender’s information on the header of faxes.  
Tap Offto turn this feature off.  
Tap Onto turn this feature on.  
Note that if United States is selected for the setting of Country,  
this option does not appear on the menu. The setting is fixed to  
On and cannot be changed.  
For information on the country setting, see "Setting Your  
Country."  
ECM  
You can set whether to enable or disable the ECM (Error  
Correction Mode).  
Modem Speed  
You can set the modem speed.  
Display Manual  
Fax Recipients  
You can set whether to display the fax number of the recipient on  
the Sending Fax screen when manually sending a fax.  
Fax Reports  
Fax Activity  
Fax Transmit  
Fax Broadcast  
You can set whether to automatically print a fax activity report  
after every 50 incoming and outgoing fax communications.  
You can set whether to print a transmission result after a fax  
transmission.  
You can set whether to print a transmission result after a fax  
transmission to multiple locations.  
Faxing  
351  
Option  
Description  
Fax Protocol  
You can set whether to print the protocol monitor report after a fax  
transmission to monitor fax protocol problems.  
NOTE: Prefix Dial supports only the environment where you send a fax to the external line number. To use Prefix Dial, you must  
do the following from the operator panel.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Press the  
Tap the Toolstab, and then tap Admin Settings  
Tap Fax Settings  
Tap Fax Line Settings  
Tap Line Type  
Tap PBX, and then OK  
Tap Transmission Defaults  
Tap Prefix Dial  
Tap On  
(Information) button.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
10 Enter a prefix number using the number pad, and then tap OK. The characters you can use for a prefix number are  
0–9, *, and #. The maximum number of characters for a prefix number is five.  
11 Turn off the printer, and turn it on again to apply the settings.  
Advanced Fax Settings  
NOTE: The advanced fax settings are only meant for advanced users. Incorrect settings may damage the printer.  
If you are experiencing fax send or receive errors, there is an advanced fax settings menu which you can access and  
change the settings accordingly.  
To enter the Diagnostic Menu (Customer Mode), follow the instructions.  
1
2
3
Turn off the printer.  
Disconnect all network, phone line, and USB cables from the printer.  
Turn on the printer while holding down the  
8
and  
2
buttons on the number pad to start in Customer Mode.  
After all the advanced fax settings have been made, you will need to turn off and on the printer for the new settings  
to be effective.  
Fax Data Encoding Method  
Some of the legacy fax devices do not support the Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group (JBIG) data encoding method.  
You may experience fax send or receive errors due to this data encoding method. You can disable the JBIG and select  
the Modified Huffman (MH), Modified Read (MR), or Modified Modified Read (MMR) encoding with the  
following instructions.  
You can change the modem transmission encoding with the following instructions.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Turn on the printer while holding down the  
8
and  
button to tap Fax/Scanner Diag, and then tap OK  
button until Parameterappears, and then tap OK  
2
buttons on the number pad to start in Customer Mode.  
Tap  
Tap  
.
.
Ensure that FAX Parameterappears, and then tap OK  
.
Tap  
Tap  
button until G3M TX Codingappears, and then tap OK  
.
button until the desired encoding appears, and then tap OK  
.
352  
Faxing  
 
You can select MH  
,
MR, or MMR.  
You can change the modem receive encoding with the following instructions.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Turn on the printer while holding down the  
8
and  
button to tap Fax/Scanner Diag, and then tap OK  
button until Parameterappears, and then tap OK  
2
buttons on the number pad to start in Customer Mode.  
Tap  
Tap  
.
.
Ensure that FAX Parameterappears, and then tap OK  
.
Tap  
Tap  
button until G3M RX Codingappears, and then tap OK  
button until the desired encoding appears, and then tap OK  
MR, or MMR  
.
.
You can select MH  
,
.
Diagnosing the Fax Connection  
You can diagnose the Fax connection using the FAX Line Diagnosis feature that can detect the abnormalities of  
telephone line connection.  
1
2
3
4
5
Turn on the printer while holding down the  
8
and  
button to tap Fax/Scanner Diag, and then tap OK  
button until FAX Testappears, and then tap OK  
2
buttons on the number pad to start in Customer Mode.  
Tap  
Tap  
.
.
When the message Check FAX Connectionappears, tap OK  
.
When the message Ready to Startappears, tap OKto start diagnosing the FAX connection.  
One of the following diagnosing result is displayed.  
Diagnosing result  
Description  
The telephone line cord is not connected. Make sure that the  
telephone line cord is securely connected.  
Connection not Detected  
Please Reconnect Telephone Line  
Cable Connected Wrongly  
The telephone line cord is connected to the wrong connector. Make  
sure that the telephone line cord is connected at one end to the wall  
Reconnect Telephone Line from Wall  
Jack to Line Connection  
jack connector  
wall jack. If you use a telephone or answering machine, connect to the  
phone connector  
(
)
of your printer and at the other end to an active  
(
).  
The telephone line cord is properly connected. Check the Tone/Pulse  
setting. For information on Tone/Pulse setting, see "Available Fax  
Settings Options."  
Fax Connection OK  
Please Check Setting of Tone/Pulse  
in Admin Menu after Restart Printer  
Faxing  
353  
 
Sending a Fax  
You can fax data from your printer. You can also directly fax data transferred from the computer running a  
Microsoft® Windows® operating system or OS X.  
Loading an Original Document  
You can use the DADF or the document glass to load an original document for faxing. Using the DADF, you can load  
up to 50 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) paper at a time. Using the document glass, you can load one sheet at a time.  
NOTE: To get the best scan quality, especially for grayscale images, use the document glass instead of the DADF.  
To fax a document using the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF):  
1
Place the document(s) facing up on the DADF with the top edge of the documents in first. Then adjust the  
document guides to the correct document size.  
2
Adjust the document resolution. (For details, see "Adjusting the Document Resolution.")  
To fax a document from the document glass:  
1
Open the document cover.  
354  
Faxing  
     
2
Place the document facing down on the document glass and align it with the registration guide on the top left  
corner of the glass.  
3
4
Adjust the document resolution. (For details, see "Adjusting the Document Resolution.")  
Close the document cover.  
NOTE: Ensure that no document is in the DADF. If any document is detected in the DADF, it takes priority over the  
document on the document glass.  
NOTE: If you are faxing a page from a book or magazine, lift the cover until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then  
close the cover. If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm, start faxing with the cover open.  
Adjusting the Document Resolution  
You can improve the quality of the fax document by adjusting the resolution, especially for documents with low  
image quality or documents containing photographic images.  
1
2
3
4
5
Press the  
Tap  
(Home) button.  
Fax  
.
Tap  
.
Tap Resolution  
.
Tap the desired setting.  
Standard*  
Fine  
Used for documents with normal sized characters.  
Used for documents containing small characters or thin lines or documents printed using a  
dot-matrix printer.  
Super Fine  
Used for documents containing extremely fine detail. The super fine mode is enabled only if  
the remote machine also supports the Super Fine resolution. See the note below.  
Photo  
Used for documents containing photographic images.  
* Denotes the factory default setting.  
NOTE: Faxes scanned in the Super Fine resolution transmit at the highest resolution supported by the receiving device.  
Faxing  
355  
   
Adjusting the Document Contrast  
You can adjust the contrast of the fax document to be lighter or darker than the original.  
1
Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the DADF.  
OR  
Place a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.  
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document."  
2
3
4
5
6
Press the  
Tap  
(Home) button.  
Fax  
.
Tap  
.
Tap Darken/Lighten  
Drag the desired level on the Darken/Lightenbar, and then tap OK  
You can select a contrast level from seven levels between Darkenand Lighten  
.
.
.
Drag the indicator on the left side of the bar makes the document contrast lighter, and selecting a cell on the right  
side of the bar makes the document contrast darker.  
Darken 3  
Works well with light documents or faint pencil markings.  
Darken 2  
Darken 1  
Normal*  
Works well with standard typed or printed documents.  
Works well with dark documents.  
Lighten 1  
Lighten 2  
Lighten 3  
* Denotes the factory default setting.  
Sending a Fax From Memory  
1
Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the DADF.  
OR  
Place a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.  
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document."  
2
3
4
Press the  
Tap  
(Home) button.  
Fax  
.
Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs. (For details, see "Adjusting the Document Resolution." For  
adjusting the contrast, see "Adjusting the Document Contrast.")  
5
To select a fax number, do one of the following:  
•
Tap Phone Book, and then select one of the following:  
Individuals:Select an individual fax number and then tap Done  
.
Groups:Select a group dial number and then tap Done  
.
Network Phone Book:Search and select a fax number from the LDAP server and then tap Search  
.
NOTE: For more information on address book and server address book, see "Address Book Editor (for Microsoft®  
Windows® and OS X)."  
356  
Faxing  
   
NOTE: For details about Network Phone Book, see "Using the Server Address Book and Server Phone Book."  
NOTE: The fax number needs to be registered before you can select Address Book  
Tap Speed Dial  
Enter the speed dial number using the number pad, and then tap Done  
Tap Sendto scan data.  
.
•
.
.
6
When the document is loaded on the document glass, the display prompts you for another page.  
If you want to place a new document, replace the document with a new document, and then tap Continue  
.
When you have finished loading documents, tap Done  
The printer starts dialing the number, and then sends the fax when the remote fax machine is ready.  
NOTE: You can cancel the fax job while sending the fax by tapping Stop  
.
.
Sending a Fax Manually  
1
Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the DADF.  
OR  
Place a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.  
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document."  
2
3
4
Press the  
Tap  
(Home) button.  
Fax  
.
Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs. (For details, see "Adjusting the Document Resolution." For  
adjusting the contrast, see "Adjusting the Document Contrast.")  
5
6
Tap On Hook.  
Enter the fax number of the recipient using the number pad.  
You can also select the recipient by using speed dial number or address book. (For details, see "Automatic  
Redialing.")  
7
Tap Sendto send the fax.  
NOTE: You can cancel the fax job while sending the fax by tapping Stop  
.
Confirming Transmissions  
When the last page of your document has been sent successfully, the printer beeps and returns to the standby mode.  
If something goes wrong while sending your fax, an error message appears on the display.  
If you receive an error message, press Closeto clear the message and try to send the document again.  
You can set your printer to print a confirmation report automatically after each fax transmission. For further details,  
see "Available Fax Settings Options."  
Automatic Redialing  
If the number you have dialed is busy or there is no answer when you send a fax, the printer will automatically redial  
the number every minute based on the number set in the redial settings.  
To change the time interval between redials and the number of redial attempts, see "Available Fax Settings Options."  
NOTE: The printer will not automatically redial a number that was busy when you send the fax manually.  
Faxing  
357  
     
Sending a Delayed Fax  
The Delayed Start mode can be used to save scanned documents for transmission at a specified time to take  
advantage of lower long distance rates.  
1
Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the DADF.  
OR  
Place a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.  
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document."  
2
3
4
Press the  
Tap  
(Home) button.  
Fax  
.
Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs. (For details, see "Adjusting the Document Resolution." For  
adjusting the contrast, see "Adjusting the Document Contrast.")  
5
6
7
8
Tap  
, and then tap Delayed Send.  
Tap On  
.
Enter the start time using – or +, and then tap OK  
.
Tap Back, and then enter the fax number of the recipient using the number pad.  
You can also select the recipient by using speed dial number or address book. (For details, see "Automatic  
Redialing.")  
9
Tap Sendto scan data.  
Once Delayed Start mode is activated, your printer stores all of the documents to be faxed into its memory and  
sends them at the specified time. After faxing in the Delayed Start mode is complete, the data in the memory is  
cleared.  
NOTE: If you turn off and on the printer, the stored documents are sent as soon as the printer is activated.  
NOTE: If the specified start time overlaps with the time periods for the available time or the Fax function, the printer cannot  
send the delayed fax at the specified time. (For details, see "Set Available Time" for the Available time and "Functions  
Control" for the Fax function.)  
Sending a Fax from the Driver (Direct Fax)  
You can send a fax directly from your computer by using the driver.  
NOTE: Only black and white faxes can be sent using Direct Fax.  
NOTE: If the specified start time overlaps with the time periods for the available time or the Fax function, the printer cannot send  
the delayed fax at the specified time. (For details, see "Set Available Time" for the Available time and "Functions Control" for the  
Fax function.)  
Example  
Send data via the  
Dell MFP H815dw Fax or  
Send fax  
Dell MFP S2815dn Fax driver  
Receiving machine (fax  
machine/multifunction  
printer)  
Sending machine  
(your printer)  
358  
Faxing  
     
Procedure  
NOTE: The names of the dialog boxes and the buttons may be different from those given in the following procedure depending  
on the application you are using.  
NOTE: To use this feature, you must install the fax driver. (For details, see "Starting Dell Printer Easy Install" for Windows® or  
"Installing the Drivers and Software" for Macintosh.)  
1
2
Open the file you want to send by fax.  
Open the print dialog box from the application, and then select Dell MFP H815dw Fax or Dell MFP S2815dn  
Fax  
.
®
3
Click Preferences in Windows , or select FAX Setting in Macintosh.  
For Microsoft® Windows®:  
For Apple Macintosh:  
4
When the setting dialog box appears, specify the following settings.  
NOTE: The settings done here are only applied to a single fax job.  
Faxing  
359  
For Microsoft® Windows®:  
For Apple Macintosh:  
a. Transmission image quality  
Purpose:  
To set the output quality.  
Values:  
Standard  
For documents with normal sized characters.  
High Quality*  
For documents containing small characters or thin lines or documents printed using a dot-  
matrix printer.  
Super-high image quality  
For documents containing extremely fine detail. The super fine mode is enabled only if the  
remote machine also supports Super Fine resolution. See the notes below.  
* Denotes the factory default setting.  
NOTE: Faxes printed in the Super-high image quality by Direct Fax driver transmits at the highest resolution supported by the  
receiving device.  
360  
Faxing  
b. Transmission report  
Purpose:  
To specify whether to print a fax transmission result.  
Values:  
Output regularly  
Prints a transmission result after every fax transmission.  
Output for non-transmission* Prints a transmission result only when an error occurs.  
Do not output  
Does not print fax transmission results.  
* Denotes the factory default setting.  
c. Fax Cover Page  
Purpose:  
To specify whether to attach a cover page to your fax.  
Values:  
According to Printer Settings  
Determines whether to attach a cover page to your fax depending on the setting you specify in  
Fax Cover Pageon the operator panel.  
Attach  
Attaches a cover page to your fax.  
None*  
Does not attach a cover page to your fax.  
* Denotes the factory default setting.  
Sender  
Purpose:  
To specify whether to print the sender’s name on the fax cover page.  
Values:  
According to Printer Settings* Determines whether or not to print the sender’s name on the fax cover page based on the  
printer settings.  
Enter a sender name  
Allows you to enter a sender’s name that will be printed on the fax cover page in Sender  
Name.  
* Denotes the factory default setting.  
Sender Name  
Purpose:  
To enter a sender’s name that will be printed on the fax cover page.  
The sender’s name can be up to 30 characters. If it exceeds 30 characters, only the first 30 characters will be printed.  
®
5
For Windows , click OK to close the Printing Preferences dialog box, and then click Print  
.
For Macintosh, click Print  
.
The Set/Check Fax Transmission dialog box appears.  
Faxing  
361  
For Microsoft® Windows®  
:
For Apple Macintosh:  
6
Enter the destination for the recipient. The following procedure is for entering the destination. For details on how  
to enter the destination, please refer to the Help file for the driver.  
a
b
Enter the name and fax number directly.  
Select a fax number from a phone book.  
•
Look Up Phone Book: Displays a list of fax numbers that are saved in the file specified for My Phone  
Book file  
.
•
•
Look Up Device Data: Displays a list of fax numbers that are saved in the Phone Book on your printer.  
®
Import and add file (Windows only): Allows you to select a source file such as a CSV file, WAB file,  
MAPI, or a LDAP server. (For details on LDAP server, see "LDAP Server" and "Fax Server Phone Book.")  
362  
Faxing  
NOTE: Depending on the application (when you are using Mac OS X 10.7 or later), you cannot use Look Up Device Data  
function.  
NOTE: Enter the password in the Password field in the Authorization area before sending a fax if the fax function is locked  
with a password.  
NOTE: If the Functions Control setting for Faxis set to On (Password), you need to enter the four-digit password to  
use the fax function.  
To lock the fax function with a password:  
NOTE: To lock the fax function from Functions Control, you must first set Panel Lockto On. For details, see  
"Panel Lock."  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Press the  
Tap the Toolstab, and then tap Admin Settings  
Tap until Secure Settingsappears, and then tap Secure Settings  
Tap Functions Control  
Tap Fax  
Tap On (Password)  
Enter a four-digit password, and then tap OK  
Turn off the printer, and turn it on again to apply the settings.  
(Information) button.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
To check whether the fax has been sent:  
Print a job history report. For details about how to print a job history report, see "Report / List."  
Receiving a Fax  
About Receiving Modes  
NOTE: To use the Telephone / Faxor Ans Machine/Fax, connect an answering machine to the phone connector  
(
) on the rear of your printer.  
When the memory is full, the fax is received in the Telephonemode.  
Loading Paper for Receiving Faxes  
The instructions for loading paper in the paper tray are the same whether you are printing, faxing, or copying, except  
that faxes can only be printed on Letter-sized, A4-sized, or Legal-sized paper. For details about loading paper, see  
"Loading Print Media." For details about setting the paper type and size in the tray, see "Print Media Guidelines."  
Receiving a Fax Automatically in the Fax Mode  
Your printer is preset to the Faxmode at the factory.  
If you receive a fax, the printer automatically goes into the fax mode after a specified period of time and receives the  
fax.  
To change the interval at which the printer goes into the fax mode after receiving an incoming call, see "Available  
Fax Settings Options."  
Receiving a Fax Manually in the Telephone Mode  
You can receive a fax by picking up the handset of the external telephone and then pressing the remote receive code  
(see "Available Fax Settings Options"). You can also receive a fax by tapping Manual Receivein On Hook.  
To receive a fax by tapping Manual Receive:  
1
When the external telephone rings, pick up the handset and check for the fax tone.  
Faxing  
363  
           
2
3
4
5
6
After you hear the fax tone, press the  
Tap Fax  
(Home) button.  
.
Tap On Hook  
.
Tap Receive  
.
Hang up the hand set of the external telephone.  
The printer begins receiving a fax and returns to the standby mode when the reception is completed.  
Receiving a Fax Automatically in the Telephone / Fax or Ans Machine/Fax  
To use the Telephone / Faxor Ans Machine/Faxmode, you must connect an external telephone to the  
phone connector ( ) on the rear of your printer.  
If the caller leaves a message, the answering machine stores the message as it would normally. If your printer hears a  
fax tone on the line, it automatically starts to receive a fax.  
For details on Telephone / Faxor Ans Machine/Faxmode, see "Available Fax Settings Options."  
NOTE: If you have set your printer to Ans Machine/Faxand your answering machine is switched off, or no answering  
machine is connected to your printer, your printer will automatically go into the Faxmode after a predefined time.  
Receiving a Fax Manually Using an External Telephone (Remote Receive)  
You can manually receive a fax from the external telephone without having to go to the printer.  
To manually receive a fax using the external telephone, you must connect an external telephone to the phone  
connector ( ) on the rear of your printer and also set Remote Receiveto On.  
When you receive a call on the external telephone and hear a fax tone, enter the two-digit code from the external  
telephone.  
The printer receives the document.  
When entering the remote receive code from the external telephone, press the number keys slowly in sequence. If  
you still hear the fax tone from the remote machine, try entering the two-digit code once again.  
The default remote receive code is 00. You can change the two-digit code to whatever you choose. For details on  
changing the code, see "Available Fax Settings Options."  
NOTE: Set the dialing system of your external telephone to DTMF.  
Receiving Faxes Using the DRPD  
The DRPDis a telephone company service which enables a user to use a single telephone line to answer several  
different telephone numbers. The particular number someone uses to call you on is identified by different ringing  
patterns, which consist of various combinations of long and short ringing sounds.  
Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection option, Distinctive Ring service must be installed on your  
telephone line by the telephone company. To set up Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection, you will need another  
telephone line at your location, or someone available to dial your fax number from outside.  
To set up the DRPD:  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Press the  
Tap the Toolstab, and then tap Admin Settings  
Tap Fax Settings  
Tap Fax Line Settings  
Tap until DRPD Patternappears, and then tap DRPD Pattern  
(Information) button.  
.
.
.
.
Tap the desired pattern, and then tap OK  
.
364  
Faxing  
     
7
Turn off the printer, and turn it on again to apply the settings.  
To receive faxes in the DRPD, you need to set the menu to DRPD. For details, see "Available Fax Settings  
Options."  
Your printer provides seven DRPD patterns. If this service is available from your telephone company, ask your  
telephone company which pattern you need to select to use this service.  
Receiving Faxes in the Memory  
Since your printer is a multi-tasking device, it can receive faxes while you are making copies or printing. If you  
receive a fax while you are copying, printing, or run out of paper or toner, your printer stores incoming faxes in the  
memory. Then, as soon as you finish copying, printing, or re-supply the consumables, the printer automatically prints  
the fax.  
Polling Receive  
You can receive faxes from the remote fax machine when you want to receive it.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Press the  
Tap  
(Home) button.  
Fax  
.
Tap On Hook  
.
Tap Polling  
.
Enter the fax number of the remote machine using the number pad.  
Tap Receiveto begin receiving the fax.  
Automatic Dialing  
Speed Dialing  
You can store up to 200 frequently dialed numbers in speed dial locations (001–200).  
When the speed dial job specified in the delayed fax or redial exists, you cannot change the speed dial number from  
the operator panel or Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.  
Setting Speed Dial  
1
2
3
4
5
Press the  
Tap the Toolstab, and then tap Admin Settings  
Tap Phone Book  
Tap Individuals  
Tap until the desired speed dial number between 1 and 200 appears and then select that number.  
(Information) button.  
.
.
.
To jump to a specific speed dial number, enter the desired number and then # using the number pad.  
6
7
8
9
Tap the Enter Nametext box.  
Enter the name, and then tap OK  
.
Tap the Enter Numbertext box.  
Enter the fax number using the number pad, and then tap OK  
.
To insert a pause between numbers, press the  
"-" appears on the display.  
(Redial/Pause) button.  
Faxing  
365  
           
10 Tap OK  
.
To store more fax numbers, repeat steps 5 to 10.  
Sending a Fax Using Speed Dial  
1
Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the DADF.  
OR  
Place a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.  
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document."  
2
3
4
5
6
Press the  
Tap  
(Home) button.  
Fax  
.
Tap Speed Dial  
.
Enter the speed dial number between 1 and 200 using the number pad, and then tap Done  
.
Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs. (For details, see "Adjusting the Document Resolution." For  
adjusting the contrast, see "Adjusting the Document Contrast.")  
7
Tap Sendto scan data.  
When the document is loaded on the document glass, the display prompts you for another page.  
If you want to place a new document, replace the document with a new document, and then tap Continue  
When you have finished loading documents, tap Send Now  
.
.
The fax number stored in the speed dial location is automatically dialed. The document is sent when the remote  
fax machine answers.  
NOTE: Using the asterisk (*) in the first digit, you can send a document to multiple locations. For example, if you enter 00*,  
you can send a document to the locations registered between 001 and 009.  
Group Dialing  
If you frequently send the same document to several destinations, you can create a group of these destinations and  
set them under a one-digit group dial location. This enables you to use a group dial number setting to send the same  
document to all the destinations in the group.  
NOTE: You cannot include one group dial number within another group dial number.  
Setting Group Dial  
1
2
3
4
5
Press the  
Tap the Toolstab, and then tap Admin Settings  
Tap Phone Book  
Tap Groups  
Tap until the desired group dial number between 1 and 6 appears and then select that group dial number.  
(Information) button.  
.
.
.
If a speed dial number is already stored in the location you chose, the display shows the name and the number of  
entries stored in that group dial number.  
6
7
8
Tap the Enter Group Nametext box.  
Enter the name, and then tap OK  
Tap Add from Phone Book  
NOTE: The fax number needs to be registered before you can select Add from Phone Book  
.
.
.
366  
Faxing  
     
9
Tap  
10 Tap OK  
To store more group dial numbers, repeat steps 5 to 10.  
until the desired speed dial number appears and then select that speed dial number.  
.
Editing Group Dial  
You can delete a specific speed dial number from a selected group or add a new number to the selected group.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Press the  
Tap the Toolstab, and then tap Admin Settings  
Tap Phone Book  
Tap Groups  
Tap until the group dial number that you want to edit appears, and then select that group dial number.  
Tap Edit  
(Information) button.  
.
.
.
.
Tap the group name text box.  
Enter a new name, and then tap OK  
.
To delete a speed dial number from the group dial number:  
a
b
Tap  
until the speed dial number that you want to edit appears, and then select that speed dial number.  
Tap Remove  
.
10 To add a new speed dial number to the group dial number:  
a
b
c
Tap Add from Phone Book.  
Tap  
until the desired speed dial number appears and then select that speed dial number.  
Tap OK  
.
11 Tap OK  
.
To delete an existing group dial number, select the group dial number, and then tap Remove  
.
If you want to edit another group dial number, repeat steps 5 to 11.  
Sending a Fax Using Group Dial (Multi-address Transmission)  
You can use group dialing for Broadcasting or Delayed transmissions.  
Follow the procedure of the desired operation. (For Delayed transmission, see "Specifying the Fax Settings  
Options.")  
You can use one or more group numbers in one operation. Then continue the procedure to complete the desired  
operation.  
Your printer automatically scans the document loaded in the DADF or on the document glass into the memory. The  
printer dials each of the numbers included in the group.  
Printing a Speed Dial List  
You can check your automatic dial setting by printing a Speed Dial list.  
For details about how to print a Speed Dial list, see "Report / List."  
Faxing  
367  
     
Phone Book  
You can select or search the registered phone numbers from the phone books.  
1
Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the DADF.  
OR  
Place a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.  
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document."  
2
3
4
Press the  
Tap  
(Home) button.  
Fax  
.
Tap Phone Book, and then select one of the following:  
To select from the local phone book:  
a
b
Tap Individualsor Groups.  
Swipe the screen until the desired speed dial number or the group dial number appears, and then select that  
speed dial number or group dial number.  
c
Tap Done.  
To search from the server phone book:  
a
b
c
Tap Network Phone Book  
Enter a keyword using the keyboard, and then tap Search  
Tap a recipient from the search result, and then tap Done  
.
.
.
NOTE: For more information on address book and server address book, see "Address Book Editor (for Microsoft®  
Windows® and OS X)."  
NOTE: For details about Network Phone Book, see "Using the Server Address Book and Server Phone Book."  
NOTE: A fax number needs to be registered before you can select an address book.  
Tap Sendto send the fax.  
5
Other Ways to Fax  
Using the Secure Receiving Mode  
You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by unauthorized people. You can turn on the secure  
fax mode using the Secure Receiveoption to restrict printing out all of the received faxes when the printer is  
unattended. In the secure fax mode, all incoming faxes will go in memory. When the mode is turned off, all stored  
faxes will be printed.  
NOTE: Before operation, ensure Panel Lock is enabled.  
To turn the secure receiving mode on:  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Press the  
Tap the Toolstab, and then tap Admin Settings  
Tap Fax Settings  
Tap Incoming Defaults  
Tap until Secure Receiveappears, and then tap Secure Receive  
Tap Secure Receive Set  
(Information) button.  
.
.
.
.
.
Tap Enable  
.
368  
Faxing  
         
8
Enter a four-digit password, and then tap OK.  
When a fax is received in the secure receiving mode, your printer stores it into memory and Secure Fax  
Receiveis enabled on the Print screen to let you know that there is a fax stored.  
To print received documents:  
1
2
3
4
Press the  
Tap  
Swipe the screen until Secure Fax Receiveappears, and then tap Secure Fax Receive  
(Home) button.  
Print  
.
.
Enter a four-digit password, and then tap OK  
.
The faxes stored in memory are printed.  
To turn the secure receiving mode off:  
1
2
Follow the same steps from 1 to 6 in "To turn the secure receiving mode on:" and tap Secure Receive Set  
Tap Disable  
.
.
Using an Answering Machine  
To the  
wall jack  
Printer  
Line  
Telephone  
Answering Device  
Phone  
You can connect a telephone answering device (TAD) directly to the rear of your printer as shown above.  
•
•
•
•
Set your printer to the Ans Machine/Faxand set Auto Receive Ans/Faxto specify the time for the  
TAD.  
When the TAD picks up the call, the printer monitors and takes the line if fax tones are received and then starts  
receiving the fax.  
If the answering device is off, the printer automatically goes into the Faxafter the ring tone sounds for a  
predefined time.  
If you answer the call and hear fax tones, the printer will answer the fax call if you  
Set On Hookto On(you can hear voice or fax tones from the remote machine), and then tap Receiveand hang  
up the receiver.  
OR  
Press the two-digit remote receive code and hang up the receiver.  
Faxing  
369  
 
Using a Computer Modem  
To the  
Internet  
Computer  
Printer  
Line  
Telephone  
Answering Device  
Phone  
If you want to use your computer modem for faxing or for a dial-up Internet connection, connect the computer  
modem directly to the rear of your printer with the TAD as shown above.  
•
Set your printer to the Ans Machine/Faxand set Auto Receive Ans/Faxto specify the time for the  
TAD.  
•
•
•
Turn off the computer modem's fax-receive feature.  
Do not use the computer modem if your printer is sending or receiving a fax.  
Follow the instructions provided with your computer modem and fax application to fax via the computer modem.  
Printing a Report  
The following reports may be useful when using fax:  
NOTE: For more information about other reports and how to print a report, see "Report / List."  
Speed Dial  
This list shows all the numbers currently stored in the memory of your printer as speed dial  
numbers.  
Address Book  
Server Address  
This list shows all the addresses currently stored in the printer's memory as Address Book  
information.  
This list shows all of the numbers currently stored in the printer's memory as Server Address  
information.  
Fax Activity  
Fax Pending  
Print Meter  
This report shows information about the faxes you recently received or sent.  
This list shows the status of pending faxes.  
This report shows the total number of pages printed. The report will be titled Print Volume  
Report or AccessControl Report, depending on the AccessControl Modesetting.  
Changing Setting Options  
1
2
3
4
5
Press the  
Tap the Toolstab, and then tap Default Settings  
Tap Fax Defaults  
Select the desired menu.  
(Information) button.  
.
.
Select the desired setting or enter the value using the number pad, and then tap OK  
.
370  
Faxing  
     
22  
Dell Document Hub  
NOTE: The Dell Document Hub feature is available on the Dell™ Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw only.  
The Dell Document Hub is a convenient one-stop gateway to a variety of cloud services to help you manage your  
documents. With the Dell Document Hub, you can convert hard copy documents into editable digital content and  
store them directly in your preferred cloud storage service. You can search for files across multiple clouds  
simultaneously and then share and print content easily.  
Registering the User and Signing In to the Dell Document Hub  
To use the Dell Document Hub, you need a user account registered to the printer, and sign in to the Dell Document  
Hub.  
Registering a New User to the Dell Document Hub  
Prepare the access information required for each of the cloud services you want to use, and make sure that you have  
a user account registered to the printer. For more information on registering an account, see "Creating a New User  
Account."  
1
Access the Dell Document Hub website from your computer.  
Enter the following URL in the web browser:  
www.dell.com/dochub  
2
3
Follow the instructions displayed on the screen.  
An e-mail will be soon sent to the registered e-mail address. Check the e-mail and follow the instructions on the e-  
mail to activate.  
To Register a New User From the Printer  
You can start the user registration alternatively using the printer.  
NOTE: To complete the registration process, you will need to use your computer or mobile device to receive an e-mail and  
access the Dell Document Hub website.  
1
2
3
Log in to the printer as a registered user.  
Tap the Dell Document Hubtile in the Home screen.  
Tap New User  
.
The Welcome to Dell Document Hub screen is displayed. Tap Next  
.
4
Follow the instructions displayed in the touch panel.  
Dell Document Hub  
371  
       
Signing In to the Dell Document Hub  
1
2
Log in to the printer as a registered user.  
Tap the Dell Document Hubtile in the Home screen.  
The Dell Doc Hub Sign In screen is displayed.  
3
Tap the E-mailtext box to enter the e-mail address.  
NOTE: You can also tap  
to select a recently entered e-mail address from a list. The list can contain up to eight  
recently entered e-mail addresses.  
4
5
Tap the Passwordtext box to enter the password, and tap Done.  
If you want to save your e-mail address and password, tap to check the Save E-mail & Passwordcheck box.  
The e-mail and password are stored under the registered user's account and unauthorized user will not be able to  
access them. For security purpose, it is recommended that you set a password for registered user.  
6
Tap Sign in.  
When the Dell Document Hub screen is displayed, signing in is successful.  
NOTE: If all the tiles on the Dell Document Hub screen are pale and disabled when you sign in, you have not completed the  
necessary procedures to activate your account of the Dell Document Hub. Check the e-mail you received from the Dell  
Document Hub, and activate your account.  
When the Favorite List Screen is Displayed When You Tap the Tile on the Dell Document Hub Screen  
This means that your favorite settings for the function have been saved on the printer. Select settings from the list as  
desired.  
Returning to the Home Screen  
Tap Back. The sign-in status is maintained. Next time you tap the Dell Document Hubtile on the Home  
screen, you do not have to sign in while you are logged in to the Home screen.  
You can tap Sign outas well to return to the Home screen, but the sign-in status is not maintained. Next time you  
sign in to the Dell Document Hub, you need to reenter your e-mail address and password.  
Logging Out From the Printer  
Press the  
(Login/Logout) button. You will log out from the Home screen and the portal screen will be  
displayed. In this case, the sign-in status to the Dell Document Hub is maintained as far as the Save E-mail &  
Passwordcheck box option is selected in the step 5 above. Next time you tap the Dell Document Hubtile on  
the Home screen, you can skip the sign in process.  
372  
Dell Document Hub  
       
Searching for and Printing Files  
You can search for the files saved in the cloud services, and print them from the printer. You can search across  
multiple cloud services at once. This method is suitable when you want to search by the keywords, including the file  
name.  
NOTE: To search for files across multiple cloud services, you need to go to www.dell.com/dochub and connect the cloud  
services with the Dell Document Hub.  
1
2
Tap the Search for Filestile in the Dell Document Hub screen.  
Enter the keywords, and tap Search  
.
To enter the accented characters, tap  
to display the keyboard for those characters.  
Files are searched across the cloud services you registered.  
The Search Results screen is displayed.  
3
4
Tap the files you want to print. You can select up to 10 files.  
To sort the results, tap  
Tap to preview the selected files.  
The File Preview screen is displayed. The first three pages of each file are displayed in the small previews.  
and select the sorting order.  
a
To show the page in the large preview, tap the page in the small previews.  
To preview other files, flick the screen side to side.  
b
c
To specify the file as the one to be printed, tap the rectangle beside the small previews to enter a check mark.  
d
To return to the previous screen, tap Back.  
5
6
Tap  
to check or change the print settings.  
The Print Settings screen is displayed.  
a
b
To show the other tiles, flick the screen side to side.  
To return to the previous screen, tap Back  
For more information on the Print Settings, see "Print Settings."  
.
Tap Printto start printing.  
To cancel printing, tap Stop  
.
When all the selected files are printed, the screen returns to the Search Results screen.  
NOTE: You can start printing by tapping Printin any screens of Search Results, File Preview or Print Settings.  
Dell Document Hub  
373  
   
Browsing and Printing Files  
You can browse and print the files saved in the selected cloud services. This method is suitable when you know which  
cloud service the file you want to print is located in.  
1
Tap the Browse for Filestile in the Dell Document Hub screen.  
The Cloud Services screen is displayed.  
To scroll the list, flick the screen up or down.  
The status of the cloud services can be confirmed by an icon on the right side of the names of each cloud service.  
indicates that the cloud service is correctly associated with the Dell Document Hub.  
indicates that the cloud service is not associated, or not linked correctly.  
indicates that the cloud service link with the Dell Document Hub has expired.  
To link the cloud service with the Dell Document Hub, go to www.dell.com/dochub  
.
For more information, tap the status icon.  
2
3
Tap the cloud service you want to browse in.  
The list of the contents stored in the selected cloud service is displayed.  
Tap the location you want to browse in.  
The contents in the selected location are listed.  
4
5
Tap the files you want to print. You can select up to 10 files.  
Tap  
to search the files in the current location.  
Enter the file name or keywords, and tap Search  
The Search Results screen is displayed.  
a
.
You can sort the results by tapping  
and selecting the sorting order.  
b
To return to the previous screen, tap Back.  
6
Tap  
to preview the selected files.  
The File Preview screen is displayed. The first three pages of each file are displayed in the small previews.  
a
b
c
d
To show the page in the large preview, tap the page in the small previews.  
To preview other files, flick the screen side to side.  
To specify the file as the one to be printed, tap the rectangle beside the small previews to enter a check mark.  
To return to the previous screen, tap Back  
.
374  
Dell Document Hub  
 
7
Tap  
to check or change the print settings.  
The Print Settings screen is displayed.  
a
b
To show the other tiles, flick the screen side to side.  
To return to the previous screen, tap Back  
For more information on the Print Settings, see "Print Settings."  
.
NOTE: Tap  
in the Print Settings screen, and you can save your print settings and file path to the cloud service as a  
favorite. Name your favorite in the Save Favorite screen, and tap Save. If you are saving the favorite in the same name  
with the existing favorite, the settings and the file path will be overwritten. You can delete the unnecessary favorite by  
tapping  
.
Once you save your settings as a favorite, you can recall those settings the next time you sign in to the Dell Document Hub  
from any printers of the same model.  
8
Tap Printto start printing.  
To cancel printing, tap Stop  
.
When all the selected files are printed, the screen to show the selected location returns.  
NOTE: You can start printing by tapping Printin any screens of contents list, Search Results, File Preview or Print Settings.  
Searching for the Files in the Selected Cloud Service  
After you select the cloud service in the step 2 above, you can search for the files by tapping  
Enter the file name or keywords, and tap Search.  
.
You can select the files to print in the Search Results screen, sort the results by tapping  
, or preview the files by  
tapping  
.
Scanning  
You can scan the document and save the scanned file in the cloud service.  
1
Tap the Scantile in the Dell Document Hub screen.  
The Cloud Services screen is displayed.  
To scroll the list, flick the screen up or down.  
The status of the cloud services can be confirmed by an icon on the right side of the names of each cloud service.  
For more information, tap the status icon.  
2
3
Tap the destination cloud service you want to save the scanned file to.  
The list of the contents stored in the selected cloud service is displayed.  
Tap the location you want to save the scanned file to.  
The screen to show the selected location is displayed.  
Dell Document Hub  
375  
   
4
Tap Next.  
The screen to specify the file name and the file format is displayed.  
5
6
7
Tap the File Nametext box, and enter the file name.  
Tap the File Formatbox, and specify the file format to save the scanned file.  
Tap  
to check or change the scan settings.  
The Scan Settings screen is displayed.  
a
b
To show the other tiles, flick the screen side to side.  
To return to the previous screen, tap Back  
For more information on the Scan Settings, see "Scan" and "Scan Settings."  
in the Scan Settings screen, and you can save your scan settings and file path to the cloud service as a  
.
NOTE: Tap  
favorite. Name your favorite in the Save Favorite screen, and tap Save. If you are saving the favorite in the same name  
with the existing favorite, the settings and the file path will be overwritten. You can delete the unnecessary favorite by  
tapping  
.
Once you save your settings as a favorite, you can recall those settings the next time you sign in to the Dell Document Hub  
from any printers of the same model.  
8
Tap Scanto start scanning.  
To cancel scanning, tap Stop  
.
When the scanning is completed, the screen to show the selected location returns.  
Searching for the Location Across the Cloud Services  
Before you select the cloud service in the step 2 above, you can search for the location you want to save the scanned  
file across the cloud services by tapping  
.
Enter the keywords, and tap Search.  
You can select the location to save the scanned file in the Search Results screen.  
You can sort the results by tapping  
.
Searching for the Location in the Selected Cloud Service  
Before you select the location in the step 3 above, you can search for the location in the selected cloud service by  
tapping  
.
Enter the keywords, and tap Search.  
You can select the location to save the scanned file in the Search Results screen.  
You can sort the results by tapping  
.
376  
Dell Document Hub  
   
Scanning the Document Using Optical Character Recognition (OCR)  
You can scan the document using OCR, and save it in the cloud service.  
1
Tap the Smart OCR Scantile in the Dell Document Hub screen.  
The Cloud Services screen is displayed.  
To scroll the list, flick the screen up or down.  
The status of the cloud services can be confirmed by an icon on the right side of the names of each cloud service.  
For more information, tap the status icon.  
2
3
4
Tap the destination cloud service you want to save the converted file to.  
The list of the contents stored in the selected cloud service is displayed.  
Tap the location you want to save the converted file to.  
The screen to show the selected location is displayed.  
Tap Next  
.
The screen to specify the file name and the file format is displayed.  
5
6
7
Tap the File Nametext box, and enter the file name.  
Tap the File Formatbox, and specify the file format to save the converted file.  
Tap  
to check or change the OCR scan settings.  
The Scan Settings screen is displayed.  
a
b
To show the other tiles, flick the screen side to side.  
To return to the previous screen, tap Back  
For more information on the Scan Settings, see "Smart OCR Scan" and "Scan Settings."  
in the Scan Settings screen, and you can save your scan settings and file path to the cloud service as a  
.
NOTE: Tap  
favorite. Name your favorite in the Save Favorite screen, and tap Save. If you are saving the favorite in the same name  
with the existing favorite, the settings and the file path will be overwritten. You can delete the unnecessary favorite by  
tapping  
.
Once you save your settings as a favorite, you can recall those settings the next time you sign in to the Dell Document Hub  
from any printers of the same model.  
8
Tap Scanto start scanning using the OCR.  
Dell Document Hub  
377  
   
Receiving the Scanned File as an E-Mail  
The document can be scanned and sent to you as an attached file of an e-mail.  
1
Tap the E-mail Metile in the Dell Document Hub screen.  
The E-mail Me screen is displayed.  
2
3
4
Tap the File Formatbox, and specify the file format to save the scanned file in.  
Tap the Subjecttext box, and enter the subject of the mail sent with the scanned file.  
Tap  
a
to check or change the e-mail settings.  
To show the other tiles, flick the screen side to side.  
b
To return to the previous screen, tap Back  
For more information on the E-mail Settings, see "E-mail Me" and "Scan Settings."  
NOTE: Tap in the E-mail Settings screen, and you can save your e-mail settings as a favorite. Name your favorite in  
the Save Favorite screen, and tap Save. If you are saving the favorite in the same name with the existing favorite, the  
settings will be overwritten. You can delete the unnecessary favorite by tapping  
.
.
Once you save your settings as a favorite, you can recall those settings the next time you sign in to the Dell Document Hub  
from any printers of the same model.  
5
Tap Sendto start scanning and sending the scanned file as an attached file of an e-mail.  
378  
Dell Document Hub  
 
Receiving the Scanned Image of the Business Card as an E-Mail  
The business card can be scanned and converted to the vCard file, and sent to you as an attached file of an e-mail.  
1
Tap the Business Card Readertile in the Dell Document Hub screen.  
The Business Card Reader screen is displayed.  
2
3
Tap the Subjecttext box, and enter the subject of the e-mail sent with the vCard file.  
Tap  
a
to check or change the scan settings.  
Tap the OCR Languagetile to specify the language.  
b
To return to the previous screen, tap Back.  
4
Tap Sendto start scanning and sending the vCard file as an attached file of an e-mail.  
Dell Document Hub  
379  
 
380  
Dell Document Hub  
23  
Printing and Scanning Directly From SharePoint®  
You can connect to the SharePoint® server directly from the printer to print the documents from the server or to save  
the scanned data to the server.  
NOTE: This feature is available on the Dell™ Smart Multifunction Printer | S2815dn only.  
NOTE: Only the PDF and the JPEG files can be browsed, printed, and saved with this feature.  
Registering the SharePoint® Server  
You can register up to 10 servers.  
1
2
Log in to the printer as a registered user using the local authentication.  
In the Home screen, tap SharePoint  
The SharePoint Login screen is displayed.  
.
3
Tap  
.
The Configuration screen is displayed.  
4
5
Tap the Enter Server URLbox.  
Enter the server URL, tap Done, and then tap +.  
®
To register more SharePoint server URLs, repeat steps 4 and 5.  
6
Tap Back.  
Printing and Scanning Directly From SharePoint®  
381  
     
Editing the Server URL List  
In the Configuration screen, you can edit the server URL list.  
Tap the desired server URL, and tap Removeor Edit.  
Signing In to the SharePoint® Server  
1
Log in to the printer as a registered user using the local authentication.  
2
Tap the SharePointtile in the Home screen.  
The SharePoint Login screen is displayed.  
3
Tap the User IDtext box to enter the user ID.  
NOTE: You can also tap  
entered user IDs.  
to select a recently entered user ID from a list. The list can contain up to eight recently  
4
5
6
Tap the Passwordtext box to enter the password.  
®
Tap  
to select the desired SharePoint server from the server list.  
Tap Log in  
.
Returning to the Home Screen  
Tap Exitor press the  
(Home) button.  
NOTE: When you return to the Home screen by tapping Exitor by pressing the  
maintained.  
(Home) button, login status is  
Next time you tap SharePointon the Home screen, you do not have to log in while you are logged in to the Home screen.  
NOTE: You can tap  
Log outor  
(Login/Logout) button as well to return to the Home screen, but the login status  
is not maintained. Next time you tap SharePointon the Home screen, you need to log in to the SharePoint® server again.  
382  
Printing and Scanning Directly From SharePoint®  
     
Browsing and Printing Files  
You can browse and print the files saved in the selected SharePoint® server.  
1
Tap the Printtile in the SharePoint screen.  
The Print from SharePoint screen is displayed.  
2
Select the file you want to print by performing either of the following:  
•
Tap the file you want to print.  
NOTE: If the desired file is not displayed, swipe the screen.  
®
•
Search the files in the selected SharePoint server.  
a
b
c
Tap  
.
Enter the file name or keywords, and then tap Search  
.
Tap the file you want to print.  
NOTE: You can select up to 10 files.  
3
4
Tap  
to check or change the print settings.  
The Print Settings screen is displayed.  
a
b
To show the other tiles, flick the screen side to side.  
To return to the previous screen, tap Back  
.
For more information on the Print Settings, see "Print Settings."  
NOTE: You cannot save your print settings to print documents in the SharePoint® server.  
Tap Printto start printing.  
To cancel printing, tap Stop  
.
When all the selected files are printed, the Print from SharePoint screen returns.  
NOTE: You can start printing by tapping Printin any screens of Print from SharePoint, Search Results, or Print Settings.  
Scanning  
You can scan the document and save the scanned data in the selected SharePoint® server.  
1
Tap the Scantile in the SharePoint screen.  
The following SharePoint screen is displayed.  
Printing and Scanning Directly From SharePoint®  
383  
   
When you want to save the scanned data to this folder, tap Nextand proceed to step 3.  
2
Select the folder you want to save the scanned data to by performing either of the following:  
•
Tap the folder you want to save the scanned data to, and then tap Next.  
NOTE: If the desired folder is not displayed, swipe the screen.  
®
•
Search the folder in the selected SharePoint server.  
a
b
c
Tap  
Enter the folder name or keywords, and then tap Search  
Tap the folder you want to save the scanned data to, and then tap Next  
.
.
.
The Scan to SharePoint screen is displayed.  
3
4
5
Tap the File Nametext box, and enter the file name.  
Tap the File Formatbox, and specify the file format to save the scanned file.  
Tap to check or change the scan settings.  
The Scan Settings screen is displayed.  
a
b
To show the other tiles, flick the screen side to side.  
To return to the previous screen, tap Back  
.
For more information on the Scan Settings, see "Scan" and "Scan Settings."  
NOTE: You cannot save your scan settings to save the scanned data in the SharePoint® server.  
6
Tap Scanto start scanning.  
To cancel scanning, tap Stop  
.
When the document is loaded on the document glass, the screen prompts you for another page.  
•
•
If you want to scan another document, replace the document with a new document, and then tap Continue  
When you have finished loading documents, tap Done  
.
.
When the scanning is completed, the SharePoint screen that is displayed in the step 1 returns.  
384  
Printing and Scanning Directly From SharePoint®  
Know Your Printer  
24 Understanding Your Printer Software ................................... 387  
25 User Authentication.................................................................. 405  
26 Tile Customization ..................................................................... 409  
27 Using the Server Address Book and Server Phone Book ... 411  
28 Using Digital Certificates ......................................................... 415  
29 Understanding Printer Messages .......................................... 425  
30 Specifications............................................................................ 435  
385  
 
386  
24  
Understanding Your Printer Software  
The additional printer software comes with your printer. Installing the software will enhance the function of your  
printer.  
Overview  
Use the Software and Documentation disc to install a combination of software programs. Available software varies  
depending on your operating system.  
The following shows the compatibility between the software programs/utility tools and operating systems.  
Item  
Windows®  
OS X  
Linux  
Dell Printer Hub / Dell Printer Management Tool  
Printer Status Window  
Status Monitor Console  
Status Monitor Widget  
Tool Box  
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Address Book Editor  
ScanButton Manager  
User Setup Disk Creating Tool  
App Manager  
–
–
–
(
: supported, –: not supported)  
Understanding Your Printer Software  
387  
   
Dell Printer Hub/Dell Printer Management Tool (for Microsoft®  
Windows®)  
NOTE: Dell Printer Hub or Dell Printer Management Tool is supported on Microsoft® Windows® 7 or later.  
NOTE: Dell Printer Hub is available on Dell™ Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw.  
NOTE: Dell Printer Management Tool is available on Dell Smart Multifunction Printer | S2815dn.  
This software consolidates your printer management, monitoring tools and cloud connectivity.  
You can conveniently access printer utilities, advanced scan features and printer/consumables details, and receive  
notifications on driver/software updates as well as printer status.  
NOTE: Connecting to cloud and accessing scan features are available on the Dell Printer Hub only.  
You can also use the Dell Printer Hub or Dell Printer Management Tool to order consumables online or by phone  
from Dell.  
See "Using Dell Printer Hub or Dell Printer Management Tool for Windows®."  
To launch the Dell Printer Hub/Dell Printer Management Tool, click Start All Programs Dell Printers Dell  
Printer Hub or Dell Printer Management Tool.  
The following software can be activated from the Dell Printer Hub and Dell Printer Management Tool:  
•
Configuration tool  
Configures the IP address settings, fax settings, and Wi-Fi settings.  
NOTE: Wi-Fi settings are available for Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw.  
•
•
•
•
Tool Box  
®
®
See "Tool Box (for Microsoft Windows )."  
App Manager  
®
®
See "App Manager (for Microsoft Windows )."  
Address Book Editor  
®
®
See "Address Book Editor (for Microsoft Windows and OS X)."  
Printer Embedded Web Server (EWS)  
Displays the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. See "Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool."  
See the FAQ on the Dell Printer Hub or Dell Printer Management Tool.  
Printer Status Window (for OS X and Linux)  
The Printer Status window alerts you when there is a warning or when an error occurs, for example, when a paper  
jam occurs or toner is running low.  
You can also check toner level, quantity of paper remaining or the configuration of options for the printer.  
388  
Understanding Your Printer Software  
     
Status Monitor Widget (for OS X)  
Status Monitor Widget is a printer utility that promotes efficient use of the printer through the exchange of  
information between the Macintosh and the printer.  
Status Monitor Widget Feature  
•
•
•
Monitoring Dell Printers  
Allows you to check the status of Dell printers currently connected to your Macintosh  
Receiving Alerts  
Alerts you to problems, such as paper jams or low toner  
Ordering Supplies  
Allows you to access the web site to order supplies  
Before Installing the Status Monitor Widget  
Operating systems  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Mac OS X 10.5  
Mac OS X 10.6  
Mac OS X 10.7  
OS X 10.8  
OS X 10.9  
OS X 10.10  
Network protocols and interfaces  
•
•
•
•
LPR  
Socket 9100  
Bonjour  
USB 2.0 and 1.1 (When connecting with multiple printers of the same model via USB cables, only the printer  
recognized first can be monitored in the Status Monitor Widget.)  
Understanding Your Printer Software  
389  
       
Installing the Status Monitor Widget  
1
2
Double-click the Dell H815dw Installer icon or Dell S2815dn Installer icon in the Finder window.  
Follow the on-screen instructions.  
When the Install Succeeded screen appears, the installation is complete.  
NOTE: Entering the administrative login name and password are required during the installation process.  
Opening and Closing the Status Monitor Widget  
Opening the Status Monitor Widget  
1
Click the Dashboard icon in the Dock to launch Dashboard.  
2
Click the Plus (+) sign to display the Widget Bar.  
3
Click the icon of Status Monitor in the Widget Bar. The Printer Status window appears.  
NOTE: If the message Select a printer is displayed, select your printer in Preferences. (For more information on  
Preferences, see "Preferences.")  
Closing the Status Monitor Widget  
Click the Close (x) button in the upper-left corner of the Printer Status window.  
1
Printer Status Window  
When the Status Monitor Widget is activated, the Printer Status window appears on Dashboard.  
390  
Understanding Your Printer Software  
     
Printer Status Message Area  
Displays a message of the current printer status.  
NOTE: The Status Monitor Widget automatically obtains the printer information at the updated interval that can be specified in  
Preferences. Also, the printer status is refreshed when Dashboard is launched or Preferences is closed.  
NOTE: If the Status Monitor Widget receives no response from the printer, the message Cannot get printer information is  
displayed.  
NOTE: When the printer is connected via USB cable, you cannot check the status of the printer during a print or scan job.  
Printer Status Image Area  
Displays the image of printer condition.  
•
Estimated Toner Level image  
Displays the estimated toner level if the printer is functioning properly.  
NOTE: If the utility does not receive a response from the printer, the Unknown toner image is displayed.  
Printer error image  
•
Displays an indication image when an error occurs.  
An error has occurred and the printer cannot be used.  
Order Supplies button  
Click this button to display the Order window.  
To hide the Order window, click Order Supplies again.  
Info (i) button  
Click this button to open Preferences.  
NOTE: The info (i) button appears on the lower-right corner of the window when the cursor is over the Printer Status window.  
The info (i) button is a standard used across all widgets.  
Understanding Your Printer Software  
391  
Order Window  
This window provides you with the information for ordering printer supplies by telephone or from the web site.  
To open the Order window:  
1
Click Order Supplies in the Printer Status window.  
The Order window appears.  
NOTE: The Order window appears when low toner is detected.  
Order Online  
•
Visit Dell printer supplies ordering web site hyperlink  
Click the Visit Dell printer supplies ordering web site hyperlink to access the web site for ordering Dell printer  
supplies.  
•
URL list  
Displays a list of available URLs where you can order Dell printer supplies.  
Select a URL address to use when the Visit Dell printer supplies ordering web site hyperlink is clicked.  
Order By Phone  
•
Phone number list  
Displays a list of available phone numbers that you can call to order Dell printer supplies.  
•
Update phone contacts when rebooting check box  
Select this check box to regularly update the phone number list.  
Dell and the Environment  
Click the hyperlink to access the web site about recycling.  
392  
Understanding Your Printer Software  
 
Preferences  
To open Preferences:  
1
Click the info (i) button in the Printer Status window.  
Preferences appears.  
NOTE: The info (i) button appears on the lower-right corner of the window when the cursor is over the Printer Status  
window. The info (i) button is a standard used across all widgets.  
Printer  
Displays a list of available printer names in the pull down menu. The first printer displayed in this list is set as  
default.  
Status Update Interval  
You can specify the update interval of the printer status. By default, it is set to obtain the printer information every  
10 seconds. It can be set from 0 to 600 seconds.  
SNMP Community Name  
You can change the SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) community name if using default community  
name (public). Up to 31 characters can be entered.  
Get Tag button  
Click this button to obtain the service tag.  
NOTE: You cannot retrieve the service tag when the printer is connected via USB cable.  
done button  
Click this button to return to the Printer Status window.  
Understanding Your Printer Software  
393  
 
Status Monitor Console (for Linux)  
Status Monitor Console is a printer utility that promotes efficient use of the printer through the exchange of  
information between the Linux and the printer.  
Status Monitor Console Feature  
•
•
•
Monitoring Dell Printers  
Allows you to check the status of Dell printers currently connected to your Linux.  
Receiving Alerts  
Alerts you to problems, such as paper jams or low toner.  
Ordering Supplies  
Allows you to access the web site to order supplies.  
Before Installing the Status Monitor Console  
NOTE: The Status Monitor Console requires the following modules installed.  
- Python, PyGTK, Net-SNMP, cups-libs, and xdg-open  
Please confirm that these modules are installed before you install the Status Monitor Console  
.
NOTE: The Status Monitor Console is available when the printer is connected to a network (LPR or Socket 9100). USB  
connection is not supported.  
Distributions  
•
•
•
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 Desktop  
SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 11  
Ubuntu 12.04 LTS  
Printing system  
•
CUPS (Common Unix Printing System)  
Installing the Status Monitor Console  
1
2
Activate the terminal, and log in as a super user.  
Type the following rpm command in the terminal window.  
On Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 Desktop or SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 11  
# rpm -ivh (Type the package file name)  
On Ubuntu 12.04 LTS  
# dpkg -i(Type the package file name)  
394  
Understanding Your Printer Software  
         
Starting the Status Monitor Console  
1
Click Dell Printers  
Status Monitor Console  
The Printer Selection window appears.  
For more information on Printer Selection window, see "Printer Selection Window."  
2
Select your printer.  
The Printer Status window appears.  
For more information on Printer Status window, see "Printer Status Window."  
•
You can order supplies from the Dell Supplies Management System window. See "Dell Supplies Management  
System Window."  
Printer Selection Window  
Printers list  
All the printers registered in the CUPS (Common UNIX Printing System) are displayed in a list.  
•
Status icons:  
Ready  
Unknown/Offline/Toner Low/Paper Low  
Door Open/Paper Jam/No Toner/Out Of Paper  
Settings button  
Click this button to open the Settings window.  
Details button  
Click this button to open the Printer Status window. If a non-supported printer is selected, it opens the Dell Printer  
Configuration Web Tool. For details on the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, see "Dell™ Printer Configuration  
Web Tool."  
Refresh button  
Click this button to update the information of printers.  
Close button  
Click this button to close the Printer Selection window  
.
Understanding Your Printer Software  
395  
   
Printer Status Window  
When the printer is specified in the Printer Selection window, the Printer Status window appears.  
Printer Status Message Area  
Displays a message of the current printer status.  
NOTE: The Status Monitor Console automatically obtains the printer information at the updated interval that can be specified in  
the Settings window. Also, the printer status is refreshed when the Refresh is clicked.  
NOTE: If the Status Monitor Console receives no response from the printer, the message Cannot get printer information is  
displayed.  
Printer Status Image Area  
•
Current Toner Status icons  
Displays icons of the current status of the toner.  
The toner level is more than 30%.  
The toner level is less than 29%.  
The toner level is less than 9%.  
The toner level is unknown.  
•
Estimated Toner Level images  
Keeps you informed about the amount of toner that remains.  
Toner Alert  
Displays an alert message when the remaining toner is low, empty, or unknown.  
Order Online  
•
Order Supplies Online button  
Click this button to access the web site for ordering Dell printer supplies. This button appears when the amount  
of toner becomes less than 30%.  
Refresh button  
Click this button to update the status of the printer.  
Close button  
Click this button to close the Printer Status window.  
396  
Understanding Your Printer Software  
 
Dell Supplies Management System Window  
This window provides you with the information for ordering printer supplies by telephone or from the web site.  
To open the Dell Supplies Management System window:  
1
Click Order Supplies Online in the Printer Status window.  
OR  
Click Dell Printers  
Dell Supplies Management System.  
Select Printer Model  
Select your printer model name.  
Order Online  
•
Order Supplies Online button  
•
•
When the Regular URL is selected in the Select Reorder URL:  
Click this button to open the Service Tag window.  
When the Premier URL is selected in the Select Reorder URL  
:
Click this button to open the procurement and support web site.  
•
Select Reorder URL  
Displays a list of available URLs where you can order Dell printer supplies. Select a URL address to use when the  
Order Supplies Online button is clicked.  
•
•
Regular URL: http://Accessories.us.dell.com/sna/PrinterSeg.aspx  
Premier URL: http://premier.dell.com  
Order by Phone  
•
To order Dell printer supplies by phone, call the following  
Select your country with phone number from the list, and call the displayed telephone number to order supplies.  
•
Update phone contacts when rebooting check box  
Select this check box to regularly update the phone number list.  
Understanding Your Printer Software  
397  
 
Dell and the Environment  
Click the hyperlink to access the web site about recycling.  
Close button  
Click this button to close the Dell Supplies Management System window.  
Service Tag Window  
1
Enter the Dell printer service tag.  
NOTE: For information on the service tag, see "Express Service Code and Service Tag."  
Settings Window  
To open the Settings window:  
1
Click Settings in the Printer Selection window.  
The Settings window appears.  
Update of status  
•
Printer Status is regularly updated check box  
Select the check box to enable/disable the printer status to be updated by the specified interval.  
•
Update interval text box  
Specify the update interval of the printer status.  
Port Number Settings  
•
Port Number  
Specify the port number in the Port Number text box to open the setting page of your printer in a web browser.  
398  
Understanding Your Printer Software  
   
Protocol Settings - SNMP  
•
Community Name  
Enter the Community name of SNMP in the Community Name text box.  
Order URL  
Select Reorder URL  
•
The selected URL address is set as default web site for the Select Reorder URL in the Dell Supplies Management  
System window.  
Tool Box (for Microsoft® Windows®)  
The Tool Box allows you to view, specify, and diagnose the system settings.  
To start the Tool Box  
1
Click Start  
For Windows 10: Click the Start button  
For Dell Printer Hub, select the printer from My Printers on the home screen.  
®
All Programs  
Dell Printers  
Dell Printer Hub or Dell Printer Management Tool  
.
Dell Printer Hub or Dell Printer Management Tool  
.
2
For Dell Printer Management Tool, select the printer displayed by default, or another printer from the drop-down  
list on the upper-right corner of the home screen.  
3
Click the shortcut to the Tool Box on the left of the screen.  
For details on using the Tool Box, see the help on the Tool Box  
.
Address Book Editor (for Microsoft® Windows® and OS X)  
There are several address books available for Scan and Fax functions. Address books help you organize contact  
information, such as e-mail addresses, fax numbers and server information, and quickly choose the recipient or  
locate the address. The address book data can be obtained from the printer or a remote LDAP server.  
NOTE: Phone Book is described as one of Address Books in this section.  
NOTE: For information on how to setup the LDAP server, see "LDAP Server" and "LDAP User Mapping." For information on how to  
obtain e-mail addresses and fax numbers from LDAP servers, see "Using the Server Address Book and Server Phone Book."  
Types of Address Books  
•
•
•
•
•
E-mail Address Book (for Scan to Email)  
E-mail addresses registered for sending the scanned document via e-mail  
Email Group (for Scan to Email)  
Groups of e-mail addresses registered for sending the scanned document via e-mail  
LDAP Server Address Book (for Scan to Email)  
E-mail addresses registered in the LDAP server for sending the scanned document via e-mail  
Network Address Book (for Scan to Network Folder)  
Computer and FTP server information registered for sending the scanned document to a computer or ftp server  
Phone Book (for Fax)  
Fax numbers registered for sending documents from your printer  
Understanding Your Printer Software  
399  
           
•
•
•
•
Group Dial (for Fax)  
Groups of fax numbers registered for sending documents from your printer  
LDAP Server Phone Book (for Fax)  
Fax numbers registered in the LDAP server for sending documents from your printer  
PC Fax Address Book (for Direct Fax)  
Fax numbers registered for sending documents from your computer  
PC Fax Address Book for group (for Direct Fax)  
Groups of fax numbers registered for sending documents from your computer  
Adding and Editing Entries to the Address Books Using the Address Book Editor  
NOTE: You can add and edit the entries to the Address Books also from the operator panel of the printer or using the Dell Printer  
Configuration Web Tool.  
See "Setting Speed Dial" for using the operator panel, or "Address Book" for using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.  
Functions  
Features  
Types of Address Books  
Entry Registration  
Operator Panel on Address Book Editor Dell Printer  
the Printer  
Configuration Web  
Tool  
Scan  
E-mail  
Address Book  
Email Group  
-
-
-
-
-
Server Address Book  
(LDAP server)  
Network  
Fax  
Address Book  
Phone Book  
Group Dial  
-
-
-
Fax  
Server Phone Book  
(LDAP server)  
-
Direct Fax  
PC Fax Address Book  
-
-
-
-
PC Fax Address Book - group  
You can use Address Book Editor installed on your computer to add or edit entries. Address Book Editor is  
synchronized with the address books of your printer and updated simultaneously as you save changes to the entries  
in Address Book Editor.  
NOTE: This tool is supported on both Microsoft® Windows® and OS X.  
NOTE: When the printer and your computer is connected via USB, you must install the scanner driver.  
With Address Book Editor, you can:  
•
•
•
•
Automatically retrieves data from the address books of your printer at startup  
Synchronizes with the printer  
Allows you to import the Address Book data from CSV file, WAB file, MAPI, and LDAP server  
Allows you to export the Address Book data into a CSV file  
NOTE: Do not edit the exported CSV file with applications other than the Address Book Editor. Editing the CSV file with other  
applications may corrupt the address data.  
400  
Understanding Your Printer Software  
 
Address Book Panel  
There are two address books you can manage in the Address Book Editor: Device Address Book for Fax, E-mail, and  
Server and PC Fax Address Book for Direct Fax.  
For Microsoft® Windows®:  
For Apple Macintosh:  
•
Device Address Book  
•
Fax  
Links to the printer's Address Book for Fax feature. You can register up to 200 fax numbers and 6 groups with  
200 fax numbers.  
•
E-Mail  
Links to the printer’s Address Book for Scan to Email feature. You can register up to 100 e-mail addresses and  
10 groups with 10 e-mail addresses.  
Understanding Your Printer Software  
401  
•
Server  
Links to the printer’s Address Book for Scan to Network Folder feature. You can register up to 32 server  
information.  
•
PC Fax Address Book  
You can manage the PC Fax Address Book for using Direct Fax feature on your computer. You can register up to  
500 fax numbers and 500 groups with 30 fax numbers.  
Editing an entry:  
1
2
3
4
Select an Address Book that the entry you want to edit is stored.  
Select an entry that you want to edit.  
Click Edit, and enter new information.  
Click Save to save changes.  
NOTE: When the address book entries are updated, it synchronizes with the printer and updates the address books of your  
printer simultaneously.  
ScanButton Manager (for OS X)  
You can change the location to save the scanned data using the ScanButton Manager. See "Changing the Location to  
Save the Scanned Data."  
User Setup Disk Creating Tool (for Microsoft® Windows®)  
The User Setup Disk Creating Tool program located in the MakeDisk folder of the Utilities folder on the Software  
and Documentation disc and the printer drivers located on the Software and Documentation disc are used to create  
driver installation packages that contain custom driver settings. A driver installation package can contain a group of  
saved printer driver settings and other data for things such as:  
•
•
•
Print orientation and Multiple Up (document settings)  
Watermarks  
Font references  
If you want to install the printer driver with the same settings on multiple computers running the same operating  
system, create a setup disk in a media or in a server on the network. Using the setup disk that you have created will  
reduce the amount of work required when installing the printer driver.  
•
•
Install the printer driver in the computer on which the setup disk is to be created.  
The setup disk can only be used on the operating system on which the disk was created or computers running the  
same operating system. Create a separate setup disk for each of the operating systems.  
402  
Understanding Your Printer Software  
   
App Manager (for Microsoft® Windows®)  
The App Manager is a utility that lets you manage the apps on your printer.  
NOTE: The App Manager is supported only on Windows® 7 or later.  
NOTE: The features of the App Manager may not be used when the printer has an error. If the App Manager does not respond,  
check and clear the status of the printer.  
Preparing to use the App Manager  
To use the App Manager, it is recommended that your computer should have more than 25GB of storage space.  
NOTE: Your computer needs to be connected to a network. USB connection is not supported.  
NOTE: .Net Framework 4.0 or later is required.  
Starting the App Manager  
For the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw  
1
2
3
4
Click Start  
Select the printer from My Printers on the home screen of the Dell Printer Hub  
Click App Manager on the left of the screen of the Dell Printer Hub  
All Programs  
Dell Printers  
Dell Printer Hub.  
.
.
Enter the same ID and password that is used for the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, and click OK.  
The Printers screen of the App Manager appears.  
For the Dell Smart Multifunction Printer | S2815dn  
1
2
Click Start  
All Programs  
Dell Printers  
Dell Printer Management Tool.  
Select the printer displayed by default, or another printer from the drop-down list on the upper-right corner of the  
home screen.  
3
4
Click App Manager on the left of the screen of the Dell Printer Management Tool.  
Enter the same ID and password that is used for the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, and click OK.  
The Printers screen of the App Manager appears.  
NOTE: If the printer you are looking for does not appear in the list or cannot be accessed from the App Manager, check that the  
On check box for Port9100 and SNMP is selected in the Port Settings of Print Server Settings tab in the Dell Printer Configuration  
Web Tool.  
Understanding Your Printer Software  
403  
     
404  
Understanding Your Printer Software  
25  
User Authentication  
Using the user authentication function of the printer, it is possible to create and manage up to 18 user accounts  
secured with a password. Each user of the accounts can customize the home screen and save the changes.  
For the Dell™ Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw only, it is also possible to associate NFC (Near Field  
Communication) capable ID Cards to an user account. When the ID card is associated with a user account, you can  
login to that user account by waving the ID card over the NFC reader.  
For the Dell Smart Multifunction Printer | S2815dn only, it is also possible to select the user authentication method  
from either local authentication or remote authentication. To use the remote authentication method, the LDAP or  
Kerberos server is required to authenticate the user. To select the user authentication method, see "Desktop Login"  
or "Desktop Authentication."  
NOTE: The Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw supports the following card types:  
•
•
•
MIFARE Ultralight  
MIFARE Standard (Classic) 1K  
MIFARE Standard (Classic) 4K  
NOTE: The images used in this manual are those of the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw unless otherwise mentioned.  
Creating and Editing the User Accounts  
To use user authentication, you must first create a user account.  
Creating a New User Account  
1
2
Turn on the printer and wait until the portal screen is displayed.  
Tap  
.
NOTE: If the Panel Lock Controlis set to Enable, you need to enter the four-digit password to proceed  
further.  
The dialog box is displayed to confirm to enter the edit mode.  
Tap OK  
The printer enters the edit mode, and the Add Accounttile is displayed in the portal screen.  
3
4
.
NOTE: In the edit mode, each tile except the Add Accounttile has  
.
Enter the account name and select the tile color.  
You can preview the image of your custom tile in Preview  
.
Account Settings 1/2  
Guest  
Account Name  
Preview  
Preview  
Guest  
Print  
Tile Color  
Back  
Next  
User Authentication  
405  
         
5
6
Tap Next.  
The Account Settings 2/2 screen is displayed.  
Enter the account password and NFC ID.  
NOTES:  
•
When there is a check mark in the Initial Logincheck box, the printer always displays the Home screen of the  
account when you turn on the printer. If no account is specified as Initial Login, the portal screen is displayed  
when you turn on the printer.  
•
•
•
•
You can create a new account without setting the account password.  
NFC ID is available only on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw.  
When the NFC Authentication is disabled, NFC ID is not displayed.  
When you use UID as the NFC ID, enter the hexadecimal characters. The characters A to F should be entered in the capital  
letters.  
7
Tap Done. The screen returns to the portal screen.  
Editing the User Account  
1
2
3
Tap  
in the portal screen to enter the edit mode.  
Tap the account tile you want to edit.  
Edit the account name, tile color, password, NFC ID, or Initial Login  
NOTE: When the NFC authentication is disabled, NFC ID is not displayed.  
.
4
Tap Done  
.
The screen returns to the portal screen.  
Deleting the User Account  
1
2
Tap  
in the portal screen to enter the edit mode.  
Tap and hold the account tile you want to edit.  
is displayed.  
3
4
Drag the tile to  
.
Tap OKto delete the tile.  
Logging In to the User Account on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer |  
H815dw  
There are two ways to log in to the account. One is to log in using the touch panel, and the other is to log in using  
the NFC authentication card.  
Logging In Using the Touch Panel  
1
2
Start the printer and wait until the portal screen is displayed.  
Tap the account tile you want to log in to.  
NOTE: When the account you want to log in to does not require a password, skip step 3. The Home screen is displayed.  
3
Enter the account password, and tap Login.  
When the password is correct, the Home screen is displayed.  
406  
User Authentication  
       
Logging In Using the NFC Authentication Card  
To use the NFC authentication card, the following settings are needed:  
•
Enable the NFC authentication function in Secure Settings of the operator panel.  
(See "NFC Authentication")  
•
Register your user account to the printer so that you can log in with your NFC Authentication card.  
(See "Creating a New User Account")  
1
Turn on the printer and wait until the portal screen is displayed.  
NOTE: The NFC authentication is available only when the portal screen is displayed.  
Wave the card over the NFC reader on the printer.  
Yo u r Home screen is displayed.  
2
Logging Out  
When there is an account which is specified as Initial Login, turning on the printer will always display the  
Home screen of that account. To log in to another account, you need to log out first.  
1
Press the  
(Login/Logout) button on the operator panel.  
The screen returns to the portal screen.  
Logging In to the User Account on the Dell Smart Multifunction Printer |  
S2815dn  
You can select the user authentication method from either local authentication or remote authentication. To use the  
remote authentication method, the LDAP or Kerberos server is required to authenticate the user.  
NOTE: The Dell Smart Multifunction Printer | S2815dn requires Kerberos Version 5 and Windows Active Directory on the  
following Microsoft® Windows Server® operating systems:  
®
•
•
•
•
•
Windows Server 2003  
®
Windows Server 2008  
®
Windows Server 2008 R2  
®
Windows Server 2012  
®
Windows Server 2012 R2  
Specifying the User Authentication Method  
Use the operator panel menu or the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. For details about how to specify the user  
authentication method, see "Desktop Login" or "Desktop Authentication."  
Preparations for Remote Authentication  
To use the remote authentication method, the printer needs to be configured so that the printer can access to the  
LDAP or Kerberos server, and the users need to be registered to the Server Address Book. For details, see "Using the  
Server Address Book and Server Phone Book" and "Address Book Editor (for Microsoft® Windows® and OS X)."  
Logging In for Remote Authentication  
The Sign In screen is displayed when the printer is turned on while the printer is specified to use the remote  
authentication method.  
Enter the login name and password registered in the LDAP or Kerberos server to log in to the printer.  
User Authentication  
407  
             
To use the LDAP authentication, you can select one of the following methods to enter the user name and the  
domain name in the Login Nametext box.  
Method 1  
Method 2  
Method 3  
[user name]  
[domain name]\[user name]  
[user name]@[domain1].[domain2]  
The [domain2] in the method 3 can be specified in the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, using the “Use Added  
Text String” feature. In the Login Nametext box on the Sign In screen, enter only the [user name]@[domain1].  
For details, see "LDAP Authentication."  
To use the Kerberos authentication, tap  
to select a domain name of the Kerberos server from a list. You need to  
configure the domain names beforehand in the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. Up to five Kerberos servers  
can be configured. For details, see "Kerberos Server."  
NOTE: To enter the accented characters, tap  
to display the keyboard for those characters.  
NOTE: When you enter the login name, you can also tap  
recently entered login names.  
to select a login name from a list. The list can contain up to eight  
NOTE: When the remote authentication method is used, the same Home screen is displayed for each user.  
NOTE: The Domaintext box is displayed only when the Kerberos server is used for the remote authentication.  
Logging In for Local Authentication  
When the printer is specified to use the local authentication method, you can log in to the account using the touch  
panel.  
1
2
Start the printer and wait until the portal screen is displayed.  
Tap the account tile you want to log in to.  
NOTE: When the account you want to log in to does not require a password, skip step 3. The Home screen is displayed.  
3
Enter the account password, and tap Login  
.
When the password is correct, the Home screen is displayed.  
Logging Out  
When there is an account which is specified as Initial Login, turning on the printer will always display the  
Home screen of that account. To log in to another account, you need to log out first.  
1
Press the  
(Login/Logout) button on the operator panel.  
The screen returns to the portal screen.  
408  
User Authentication  
   
26  
Tile Customization  
The Home screen is like a desktop of your computer and customizable to suit your preference or work style.  
For example, you can gather only the tiles you often use, or rearrange the tiles so that you can easily access the tiles  
you often use.  
Home  
Guest  
Dell  
Document  
Hub  
Copy  
Print  
PDF/TIFF  
Fax  
The tiles on the Home screen can be the shortcuts to the jobs to be done on the printer, like "taking seven copies of  
the handouts for the weekly meeting in 2-Sided copy" or "scanning the document and sending the scanned file to my  
boss by e-mail." If you create a tile for a job with such job settings, the printer will automatically change the settings  
of the printer as you specified just by tapping the tile.  
NOTE: The images used in this manual are those of the Dell™ Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw unless otherwise mentioned.  
Adding a New Tile  
You can select and add the tile from the pre-defined tiles, or you can create a new customized tile which includes  
specific settings for copy, fax, scan or print. Up to 41 tiles can be placed in your Home screen.  
You can also add tiles to each of the Copy, Print, Scan, and Fax group screen that is displayed when tapping the icons  
in the Dock Menu. Up to 8 tiles can be placed in each group screen.  
Selecting From the Pre-defined Tiles  
The printer offers the pre-defined tiles which include the default job settings.  
1
2
On the Home screen or group screen, tap the Add Apptile.  
The Apps List screen is displayed.  
Tap the tile you want to add to your Home screen or group screen.  
indicates that the tile already exists in your Home screen.  
Creating a New Tile Including the Job Settings  
You may often use the same settings to copy a certain document, for example. You can create the tile including those  
job settings and save it in your Home screen.  
Creating Your Custom Tile for Job With Its Job Settings  
The following explanation is an example to create your custom tile for copying.  
To create custom tiles for other jobs such as faxing, scanning, or printing, follow the same procedures on the job  
settings screen of each job.  
Tile Customization  
409  
           
1
Tap the Copytile in your Home screen.  
The Copy Settings screen is displayed.  
2
3
Tap the setting tiles to change the copy options as needed. For more information, see "Setting Copy Options."  
After setting all the necessary copy options, tap  
.
The Save Settings screen is displayed.  
4
5
Tap the text box to name your settings.  
Tap the color tile to select the color of your custom tile.  
You can preview the image of your custom tile in Preview  
Tap Save As  
.
6
.
Your settings are saved as a new tile in your Home screen.  
NOTE: When a tile has the Lock icon, that function is controlled by the Functions Control setting. To enable the function,  
you need to enter the password.  
For more information, see "Functions Control."  
NOTE: When you save the job settings for Faxor Scan to Emailas a custom tile, recipient information is saved together  
with the settings. To prevent from sending faxes or e-mails to wrong recipients, check that the fax number or the e-mail address  
of the recipient shown in the operator panel is correct.  
To prevent others from using customized tiles with personal information, logout from your user account after you finish using the  
printer.  
Editing Your Custom Tile for Job  
You can edit the job settings saved in your custom tile.  
1
2
3
Tap the tile you want to edit in your Home screen or group screen.  
Change the job settings as needed.  
Tap  
.
The Save Settings screen is displayed.  
4
5
6
Tap the text box to name your settings if you want to rename your settings.  
Tap the color tile if you want to change the color of the tile.  
Tap Save  
.
Your settings are overwritten.  
If you have renamed the tile name, the new settings overwrites the old settings, and the tile is renamed with a new  
name.  
NOTE: If you tap Save Asinstead, the new tile will be added in your Home screen.  
Moving or Deleting Your Tiles  
You can move or delete your tiles from your Home screen or group screen.  
For more information, see "Moving, Adding or Deleting the Tiles."  
410  
Tile Customization  
27  
Using the Server Address Book and Server Phone  
Book  
With the E-mail Server Address Book and the Fax Server Phone Book, you can specify an e-mail address or fax  
number of a recipient registered in the external LDAP server when sending a scanned image with e-mail or fax.  
To use the E-mail Server Address Book and the Fax Server Phone Book, the printer needs to be configured in order  
to access the external LDAP server.  
NOTE: To configure the settings of the external LDAP server, consult your system administrator.  
NOTE: The images used in this manual are those of the Dell™ Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw unless otherwise mentioned.  
Preparing the Printer to Access the External LDAP Server  
Set the following items using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.  
•
•
•
Authentication type  
LDAP Server  
LDAP User Mapping  
Starting the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
To launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, enter the IP address of your printer in your web browser.  
If you do not know the IP address of your printer, print the system settings report or display the TCP/IP Settings  
page, which lists the IP address. For details about how to find your printer's IP address, see "Verifying the IP Settings."  
Setting Authentication Type  
1
Select Print Server Settings, click the Security tab, and then select Authentication System.  
2
3
From the Authentication System Settings drop-down menu under Authentication Type, select LDAP as the  
authentication method, and then click Apply New Settings  
.
NOTE: When the server you are accessing uses the Kerberos authentication, select Kerberos as the authentication  
method. To set the information necessary to access the Kerberos server, enter the information in Kerberos Server under  
the Security tab. For more information, see "Kerberos Server."  
Click Restart Printer  
.
Using the Server Address Book and Server Phone Book  
411  
         
Setting LDAP Server  
NOTE: When SSL/TLS communication is required to access the LDAP server, enter a check in the Enable check box for LDAP-  
SSL/TLS Communication in SSL/TLS under the Security tab. For more information, see "SSL/TLS."  
1
Select Print Server Settings, click the Security tab, and then select LDAP Server  
.
2
3
In the IP Address/Host Name & Port text box under Server Information, enter IP address or the host name, and  
the port number. The port number must be 389, 636, 3268, 3269, or between 5000 and 65535.  
NOTE: When LDAPS communication is required, set the port number to 636, and when you use the global catalog, set the  
port number to 3269.  
Under Optional information, set the following items.  
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
For details on configuring each item, consult your network administrator.  
a
b
In the Search Directory Root text box, enter the search directory root.  
In Login Credentials to Access LDAP Server, select credential used to access the LDAP server.  
Select None to use anonymous login. Make sure that the LDAP server accepts anonymous login.  
Select Preset to apply the preset login credentials to each user.  
Select Prompt User to prompt the users to enter their login credentials.  
In the Login Name text box, enter the login name.  
c
412  
Using the Server Address Book and Server Phone Book  
 
d
In the Password text box, enter the login password using 1 to 127 alphanumeric characters. If the password is  
left blank (NULL), you cannot log in to a server.  
e
f
In the Re-enter Password text box, enter the login password again to confirm it.  
In Search Time-Out, select Wait LDAP Server Limit to follow the time specified by the LDAP server. Select  
Wait to specify the time between 5 and 120 seconds.  
g
h
i
From the Search Name Order drop-down menu, specify the search order.  
In Server Address Book, select the check box to enable the server address book.  
In Server Phone Book, select the check box to enable the server phone book.  
4
5
Click Apply New Settings  
.
Click Restart Printer  
.
Setting LDAP User Mapping  
1
Select Print Server Settings, click the Security tab, and then select LDAP User Mapping  
.
2
Specify the attribute names used in the LDAP server. If the attribute names are not customized in the LDAP  
server, leave the settings in this step as they are by default.  
3
4
Click Apply New Settings if you make any changes.  
Click Restart Printer  
.
Using the Server Address Book and Server Phone Book  
413  
 
Sending an E-mail With the Scanned File Using the E-mail Server Address  
Book  
1
2
3
Press the  
Tap  
Tap Address Book  
(
Home) button.  
Scan to Email  
.
.
4
5
6
Tap Network Address Book  
Enter a keyword using the keyboard, and then tap Search  
Tap a recipient from the search result, and then tap Done  
.
.
.
NOTE: The sender's e-mail address cannot be edited when the remote authentication is used as the user authentication  
method on the Dell Smart Multifunction Printer | S2815dn.  
7
Tap Sendto begin scanning the document and sending an e-mail with the scanned file.  
Sending a Fax Using the Fax Server Phone Book  
1
2
3
Press the  
(
Home) button.  
Tap  
Fax  
.
Tap Phone Book  
.
4
5
6
7
Tap Network Address Book  
.
Enter a keyword using the keyboard, and then tap Search  
.
Tap a recipient from the search result, and then tap Done  
.
Tap Sendto send the fax.  
414  
Using the Server Address Book and Server Phone Book  
   
28  
Using Digital Certificates  
The authentication feature using digital certificates upgrades security when sending print data or setting data.  
This chapter describes how to manage digital certificates.  
The printer supports the following formats as the digital certificates.  
•
•
PKCS#12  
HTTPS, IPsec (PKI), Wi-Fi (WPA-Enterprise)  
PKCS#7 (for CSR)  
HTTPS, IPsec (PKI)  
NOTE: For information about digital certificate error, see "Understanding Printer Messages" and "Digital Certificate Problems."  
The following is a typical setup flow for using digital certificates.  
Prepare to manage digital certificates.  
•
Set HTTPS Communication  
Import and set digital certificates.  
•
•
•
Import a Digital Certificate  
Set a Digital Certificate  
Confirm the Settings of a Digital Certificate  
Set various security features using digital certificates.  
Managing Certificates  
This section describes how to manage digital certificates as follows.  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
"Preparing to Manage Certificates"  
"Creating and Downloading a Certificate Signing Request (CSR)"  
"Importing a Digital Certificate"  
"Setting a Digital Certificate"  
"Confirming the Settings of a Digital Certificate"  
"Deleting a Digital Certificate"  
"Exporting a Digital Certificate"  
Preparing to Manage Certificates  
Before managing digital certificates, the following settings must be applied.  
•
•
"Setting HTTPS Communication"  
"Creating and Downloading a Certificate Signing Request (CSR)"  
Using Digital Certificates  
415  
       
Setting HTTPS Communication  
Before managing certificates, set HTTPS communication with a self-signed certificate.  
When Using the Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool  
1
Launch Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.  
a
b
Open the web browser.  
Enter the IP address of your printer in the web browser.  
See "Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool.  
"
2
3
4
5
Select Print Server Settings.  
Click the Security tab.  
Select SSL/TLS  
.
Click Generate Self-Signed Certificate of Machine Digital Certificate. The Generate Self-Signed Certificate  
page is displayed.  
6
7
8
9
Select the public key method from the list of Public Key Method  
Select the size of public key from the list of Size of Public Key  
Specify the issuer of self-signed certificate.  
Click Generate Signed Certificate  
.
.
.
10 The Restart Printer button is displayed after generating the self-signed certificate, and then click Restart Printer  
.
11 Repeat steps 2 to 4 to display the SSL/TLS page after restarting the printer.  
12 Confirm that the HTTP- SSL/TLS Communication column is set to Enable  
.
Creating and Downloading a Certificate Signing Request (CSR)  
NOTE: To download a CSR from the printer, you must set up HTTPS communication. For details, see "Setting HTTPS  
Communication."  
1
Launch Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.  
a
b
Open the web browser.  
Enter the IP address of your printer in the web browser.  
See "Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool.  
"
2
3
4
5
Select Print Server Settings.  
Click the Security tab.  
Select SSL/TLS  
.
Click Certificate Signing Request (CSR)  
.
The Certificate Signing Request (CSR) page is displayed.  
6
7
8
9
Specify each item of certificate signing request.  
Click Apply New Settings  
.
Confirm the settings of certificate signing request, and then click Download  
.
Save a CSR file to your computer.  
Use this CSR to receive a signed certificate from a trusted certificate authority.  
Importing a Digital Certificate  
CAUTION: Before importing a certificate file, back up the certificate file.  
416  
Using Digital Certificates  
     
NOTE: To manage digital certificates, you must set up HTTPS communication. For details, see "Preparing to Manage  
Certificates."  
NOTE: Be sure to import the certificate with Internet Explorer®.  
NOTE: After importing a PKCS#12 format certificate, the secret key is not exported even if you execute exporting.  
1
Launch Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.  
a
b
Open the web browser.  
Enter the IP address of your printer in the web browser.  
See "Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool.  
"
2
3
4
5
Select Print Server Settings.  
Click the Security tab.  
Select SSL/TLS  
.
Click Upload Signed Certificate of Machine Digital Certificate  
.
The Upload Signed Certificate page is displayed.  
6
Enter a password.  
NOTE: The password is not necessary when importing a PKCS#7 format certificate, which is having the filename extension  
of.p7b.  
7
8
9
Re-enter the password again to confirm it.  
Click Browse of File Name, and select the file to be imported.  
Click Import to import the certificate.  
Setting a Digital Certificate  
NOTE: To manage digital certificates, you must set up HTTPS communication. For details, see "Preparing to Manage  
Certificates."  
1
Launch Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.  
a
b
Open the web browser.  
Enter the IP address of your printer in the web browser.  
See "Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool.  
"
2
3
4
5
6
Select Print Server Settings.  
Click the Security tab.  
Select SSL/TLS  
.
Click Certificate Management to display the Certificate Management page.  
When setting a Wireless LAN (Server)* certificate, select Trusted Certificate Authorities within Category  
When setting a certificate of SSL/TLS Server, SSL/TLS Client, IPsec, or Wireless LAN (Client)*, select Local  
Device.  
.
7
8
Select the purpose of use from the Certificate Purpose list.  
Click Display the List to display the Certificate List page.  
NOTE: If the list includes more than 20 certificates, click Next to display the next page.  
9
Select the certificate to associate. At this time, confirm that Validity of the certificate selected is set to Valid.  
10 Click Certificate Details to display the Certificate Details page.  
11 Confirm the content, and click Use This Certificate at the upper-right corner.  
* Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw only  
Using Digital Certificates  
417  
 
Confirming the Settings of a Digital Certificate  
NOTE: To manage digital certificates, you must set up HTTPS communication. For details, see "Preparing to Manage  
Certificates."  
1
Launch Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.  
a
b
Open the web browser.  
Enter the IP address of your printer in the web browser.  
See "Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool.  
"
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Select Print Server Settings.  
Click the Security tab.  
Select SSL/TLS  
.
Click Certificate Management to display the Certificate Management page.  
Select the category from the Category list.  
Select the purpose of use from the Certificate Purpose list.  
Click Display the List to display the Certificate List page.  
NOTE: If the list includes more than 20 certificates, click Next to display the next page.  
9
The certificate displayed with an asterisk as "*Valid" in the Validity column is the certificate associated with the  
use purpose and actually used.  
Deleting a Digital Certificate  
NOTE: To manage digital certificates, you must set up HTTPS communication. For details, see "Preparing to Manage  
Certificates."  
1
Launch Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.  
a
b
Open the web browser.  
Enter the IP address of your printer in the web browser.  
See "Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool.  
"
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Select Print Server Settings.  
Click the Security tab.  
Select SSL/TLS  
.
Click Certificate Management to display the Certificate Management page.  
Select the category from the Category list.  
Select the purpose of use from the Certificate Purpose list.  
Click Display the List to display the Certificate List page.  
NOTE: If the list includes more than 20 certificates, click Next to display the next page.  
9
Select the certificate to be deleted.  
10 Click Certificate Details to display the Certificate Details page.  
11 To delete the selected certificate, click Delete at the upper-right corner.  
NOTE: When a certificate is deleted, the features associated with the deleted certificate are disabled. To delete a  
certificate being used, either set the feature to OFF in advance or switch the association to another certificate, and then  
switch to another operation mode if possible before deleting the certificate.  
•
For an SSL/TLS Server, switch to another certificate such as a self-signed certificate.  
418  
Using Digital Certificates  
   
•
For Wireless LAN*, change the Wireless Security setting to other than WPA-Enterprise before deleting the  
certificate.  
* Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw only  
Exporting a Digital Certificate  
NOTE: To manage digital certificates, you must set up HTTPS communication. For details, see "Preparing to Manage  
Certificates."  
NOTE: Since the secret key is not exported, an imported PKCS#12 format certificate can be exported only as a PKCS#7  
certificate.  
1
Launch Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.  
a
b
Open the web browser.  
Enter the IP address of your printer in the web browser.  
See "Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool.  
"
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Select Print Server Settings.  
Click the Security tab.  
Select SSL/TLS  
.
Click Certificate Management to display the Certificate Management page.  
Select the category from the Category list.  
Select the purpose of use from the Certificate Purpose list.  
Click Display the List to display the Certificate List page.  
NOTE: If the list includes more than 20 certificates, click Next to display the next page.  
9
Select the certificate to be exported.  
10 Click Certificate Details to display the Certificate Details page.  
11 To export the selected certificate, click Export this certificate  
.
Setting the Features  
You can set various security features using digital certificates.  
See the following for details:  
•
•
•
•
"Setting the SSL/TLS-use Server Certificate (HTTP/IPP)"  
"Setting SMTP-SSL/TLS Communication"  
"Setting LDAP-SSL/TLS Communication"  
"Setting for Wireless LAN WPA-Enterprise (EAP-TLS)"  
NOTE: This feature is available on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw only.  
•
"Setting for Wireless LAN WPA-Enterprise (PEAPV0-MS-CHAPV2, EAP-TTLS PAP, EAP-TTLS CHAP)"  
NOTE: This feature is available on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw only.  
Using Digital Certificates  
419  
   
Setting the SSL/TLS-use Server Certificate (HTTP/IPP)  
NOTE: To manage digital certificates, you must set up HTTPS communication. For details, see "Preparing to Manage  
Certificates."  
1
2
3
Import the certificate to be used with the SSL/TLS-use server. For more information, see "Importing a Digital  
Certificate."  
Set the certificate to be used with the SSL/TLS-use server. For more information, see "Setting a Digital  
Certificate."  
Confirm whether the certificate is set correctly. For more information, see "Confirming the Settings of a Digital  
Certificate."  
NOTE: Confirm whether the newly set certificate, not the self-signed certificate, is associated.  
4
After restarting the printer, the certificate set as described above is used as the server certificate when executing  
communication with HTTP/IPP-SSL/TLS.  
Setting SMTP-SSL/TLS Communication  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Select Print Server Settings from the left side of the page.  
Click the Security tab.  
Select SSL/TLS  
Select Enable from the SMTP-SSL/TLS Communication list.  
Click Apply New Settings  
After restarting the printer, SMTP-SSL/TLS Communication is enabled.  
.
.
Setting LDAP-SSL/TLS Communication  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Select Print Server Settings from the left side of the page.  
Click the Security tab.  
Select SSL/TLS  
Select the Enable check box for LDAP-SSL/TLS Communication  
Click Apply New Settings  
After restarting the printer, LDAP-SSL/TLS Communication is enabled.  
.
.
.
Setting for Wireless LAN WPA-Enterprise (EAP-TLS)  
NOTE: This feature is available on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw only.  
NOTE: To manage digital certificates, you must set up HTTPS communication. For details, see "Preparing to Manage  
Certificates."  
NOTE: WPA-Enterprise is available only when infrastructure is selected as the network type.  
NOTE: Be sure to import the certificate with Internet Explorer®.  
NOTE: After importing a PKCS#12 format certificate, the secret key is not exported even if you execute exporting.  
1
2
Import the certificate to be used with Wireless LAN (server or root certificate). For details, see "Importing a Digital  
Certificate."  
Set the digital certificate for wireless LAN (server or root certificate).  
a
b
c
Launch Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.  
Select Print Server Settings  
.
Click the Security tab.  
420  
Using Digital Certificates  
       
d
e
f
Select SSL/TLS  
Click Certificate Management to display the Certificate Management page.  
Select Trusted Certificate Authorities within Category  
.
.
g
h
Select Wireless LAN (Server) from the Certificate Purpose list.  
From Certificate Order, select how the certificates are sorted in Certificate List. This setting is not necessary  
if you do not need to specify the order for the certificates.  
i
Click Display the List to display the Certificate List page.  
j
Select the certificate to associate. At this time, confirm that Validity of the certificate selected is set to Valid  
Click Certificate Details to display the Certificate Details page.  
.
k
l
Confirm the content, and click Use This Certificate at the upper-right corner.  
3
4
Confirm whether the certificate is set correctly. For details, see "Confirming the Settings of a Digital Certificate."  
Import the certificate to be used with Wireless LAN (client or client certificate). For details, see "Importing a  
Digital Certificate."  
5
Set the digital certificate for wireless LAN (client or client certificate).  
a
b
c
d
e
f
Launch Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.  
Select Print Server Settings  
.
Click the Security tab.  
Select SSL/TLS  
Click Certificate Management to display the Certificate Management page.  
Select Local Device within Category  
Select Wireless LAN (Client) from the Certificate Purpose list.  
.
.
g
h
From Certificate Order, select how the certificates are sorted in Certificate List. This setting is not necessary  
if you do not need to specify the order for the certificates.  
i
Click Display the List to display the Certificate List page.  
j
Select the certificate to associate. At this time, confirm that Validity of the certificate selected is set to Valid  
Click Certificate Details to display the Certificate Details page.  
.
k
l
Confirm the content, and click Use This Certificate at the upper-right corner.  
6
7
Confirm whether the certificate is set correctly. For details, see "Confirming the Settings of a Digital Certificate."  
Set WPA-Enterprise for EAP-TLS.  
a
b
c
d
Launch Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.  
Click the Print Server Settings tab.  
Select Wi-Fi  
Select WPA-Enterprise-AES/WPA2-Enterprise-AES or Mixed Mode Enterprise from the Encryption list of  
Security Settings  
.
.
NOTE: WPA-Enterprise-AES/WPA2-Enterprise-AES or Mixed Mode Enterprise becomes available only when the  
following steps are set correctly.  
•
•
•
Importing a Digital Certificate  
Setting a Digital Certificate  
Confirming the Settings of a Digital Certificate  
e
f
Set EAP-Identity of WPA-Enterprise  
.
Select EAP-TLS from the Authentication Method list of WPA-Enterprise  
.
Using Digital Certificates  
421  
g
Click Apply New Settings.  
Setting for Wireless LAN WPA-Enterprise (PEAPV0-MS-CHAPV2, EAP-TTLS PAP, EAP-TTLS CHAP)  
NOTE: This feature is available on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw only.  
NOTE: To manage digital certificates, you must set up HTTPS communication. For details, see "Preparing to Manage  
Certificates."  
NOTE: WPA-Enterprise is available only when infrastructure is selected as the network type.  
NOTE: Be sure to import the certificate with Internet Explorer®.  
NOTE: After importing a PKCS#12 format certificate, the secret key is not exported even if you execute exporting.  
1
2
Import the certificate to be used with Wireless LAN (server or root certificate). For details, see "Importing a Digital  
Certificate."  
Set the digital certificate for wireless LAN (server or root certificate).  
a
b
c
d
e
f
Launch Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.  
Select Print Server Settings  
.
Click the Security tab.  
Select SSL/TLS  
Click Certificate Management to display the Certificate Management page.  
Select Trusted Certificate Authorities within Category  
.
.
g
h
i
Select the purpose of use from the Certificate Purpose list.  
Click Display the List to display the Certificate List page.  
Select the certificate to associate. At this time, confirm that Validity of the certificate selected is set to Valid  
Click Certificate Details to display the Certificate Details page.  
.
j
k
Confirm the content, and click Use This Certificate at the upper-right corner.  
3
Confirm whether the certificate is set correctly.  
a
b
c
d
e
f
Launch Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.  
Select Print Server Settings  
.
Click the Security tab.  
Select SSL/TLS  
.
Click Certificate Management to display the Certificate Management page.  
Select the category from the Category list.  
g
h
Select Wireless LAN (Server) from the Certificate Purpose list.  
From Certificate Order, select how the certificates are sorted in Certificate List. This setting is not necessary  
if you do not need to specify the order for the certificates.  
i
j
Click Display the List to display the Certificate List page.  
The certificate displayed with an asterisk as "*Valid" in the Validity column is the certificate associated with  
the use purpose and actually used.  
4
Set WPA-Enterprise for PEAPV0-MS-CHAPV2, EAP-TTLS PAP, or EAP-TTLS CHAP.  
a
b
c
Launch Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.  
Click the Print Server Settings tab.  
Select Wi-Fi  
.
422  
Using Digital Certificates  
 
d
Select WPA-Enterprise-AES/WPA2-Enterprise-AES or Mixed Mode Enterprise from the Encryption list of  
Security Settings  
.
NOTE: WPA-Enterprise-AES/WPA2-Enterprise-AES or Mixed Mode Enterprise becomes available only when the  
following steps are set correctly.  
•
•
•
Importing a Digital Certificate  
Setting a Digital Certificate  
Confirming the Settings of a Digital Certificate  
e
f
Set EAP-Identity  
,
Login Name, and Password of WPA-Enterprise.  
Select either of the following from the Authentication Method list of WPA-Enterprise  
:
•
•
•
PEAPV0 MS-CHAPV2  
EAP-TTLS PAP  
EAP-TTLS CHAP  
g
Click Apply New Settings.  
Using Digital Certificates  
423  
424  
Using Digital Certificates  
29  
Understanding Printer Messages  
The touch panel displays error messages describing the current state of the printer and indicates possible printer  
problems you must resolve. This chapter provides a list of status codes or error messages, and informs you what you  
can do to clear error messages. When you contact customer support about an error, have the status codes and error  
messages ready.  
CAUTION: When an error occurs, the print data remaining on the printer and the information accumulated in the memory of  
the printer may be corrupted.  
NOTE: An status code is listed in an error message.  
NOTE: For status codes that are not listed in this chapter, refer to instructions in each error messages.  
Status Codes  
Status-Code  
What you can do  
004-310  
Turn off the printer. Make sure that the tray is correctly installed, and turn on the printer. Contact customer  
support if this failure is repeated.  
005-110  
005-112  
005-121  
005-124  
005-301  
005-900  
009-363  
Remove the jammed documents.  
Open the DADF cover and remove the jammed documents.  
Open the DADF cover and remove all documents.  
Close the DADF cover.  
Open the DADF cover and remove the jammed documents.  
Turn off the printer. Make sure that the toner cartridge is correctly installed, and turn on the printer.  
Contact customer support if this failure is repeated. For more information about installing the toner  
cartridge, see "Replacing the Toner Cartridge."  
009-370  
010-317  
Turn off the printer. Make sure that the black toner cartridge is correctly installed, and turn on the printer.  
Contact customer support if this failure is repeated. For more information about installing the toner  
cartridge, see "Replacing the Toner Cartridge."  
Turn off the printer, wait for 40 minutes to let the fusing unit cool, and then make sure that the fusing unit  
is fully installed. For more information about installing the fusing unit, see "Replacing the Fusing Unit, the  
Transfer Unit, and the Retard Roller."  
010-351  
010-377  
Turn off the printer. Remove the used fusing unit, and install a new fusing unit. For more information about  
replacing the fusing unit, see "Replacing the Fusing Unit, the Transfer Unit, and the Retard Roller."  
Turn off the printer. Confirm that the fusing unit is correctly installed, and turn on the printer. Contact  
customer support if this failure is repeated. For more information about installing the fusing unit, see  
"Replacing the Fusing Unit, the Transfer Unit, and the Retard Roller."  
010-421  
010-910  
It is time to replace the fusing unit soon. Replace the fusing unit, following the procedures in "Replacing the  
Fusing Unit, the Transfer Unit, and the Retard Roller."  
Either one of the two envelope switches is not set to the correct position. Open the rear cover, and slide both  
the envelope switches on the fusing unit to the correct position. For more information about setting the  
envelope mode, see "To Set the Printer to the Envelope Mode."  
010-911  
The printer is not set to the envelope mode. To print on envelopes, it is recommended to set the printer to  
the envelope mode. Open the rear cover, and slide both the envelope switches on the fusing unit to the  
position.  
Understanding Printer Messages  
425  
     
Status-Code  
What you can do  
010-912  
The printer is set to the envelope mode. To cancel the envelope mode, open the rear cover, and slide both  
the envelope switches on the fusing unit to the  
position. For more information about canceling the  
envelope mode, see "To Cancel the Envelope Mode."  
010-913  
The printer is set to the envelope mode. To cancel the envelope mode, open the rear cover, and slide both  
the envelope switches to the position. For more information, see "To Cancel the Envelope Mode."  
016-338  
016-404  
Turn off the printer, and turn it on again. Contact customer support if this failure is repeated.  
Contact your system administrator. For more information about digital certificate problems, see "Digital  
Certificate Problems."  
016-405  
016-503  
016-504  
016-505  
016-506  
016-507  
016-520  
Security setting mismatch. Initialize the security setting, and then restart the printer. Contact your system  
administrator for the security resetting.  
Unable to resolve the e-mail SMTP server hostname. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to  
recover. Check if SMTP server and DNS server are set correctly.  
Unable to resolve the e-mail POP3 server hostname. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to  
recover. Check if user name and password for POP3 server and DNS server are set correctly.  
E-mail POP3 server login error. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if user  
name and password used for POP3 server are set correctly.  
SMTP server is not configured. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if  
SMTP server or POP server is set.  
E-mail SMTP server login error. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if user  
name and password used for SMTP server are set correctly.  
IPsec certificate error. (Certificate error of the printer.) The certificate of the printer is invalid. Contact your  
system administrator. Reset the certificate from other connectable clients with Dell™ Printer  
Configuration Web Tool. If no device can be connected, disconnect Ethernet cable, turn off the IPsec, and  
then reset the certificate with Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.  
016-521  
IPsec certificate error. (Remote device certification verification error.) The certificate of the destination  
client is invalid. Contact your system administrator. Confirm the certificate of the destination client and  
reset.  
016-530  
016-541  
Authentication server access error. Turn off the printer, and turn it on again. Check the access settings for  
the authentication server and try again. Contact customer support if this failure is repeated.  
A wireless certificate (server or client) cannot be correctly referenced while using Wireless LAN  
WPA-Enterprise or WPA2-Enterprise. Ask your system administrator to connect the printer with a wired  
network, initialize the wireless settings, import the wireless certificate, and set WPA-Enterprise or  
WPA2-Enterprise again.  
016-542  
016-543  
A server certificate error has occurred when acquiring the certificate with the operation of WPA-Enterprise  
or WPA2-Enterprise. This is a problem in the server certificate, such as the validity period has expired for  
the server certificate being used with the Radius server. Ask your system administrator to confirm the server  
certificate being used with the Radius server.  
A wireless certificate (server or client) corruption error has occurred while using the Wireless LAN  
WPA-Enterprise or WPA2-Enterprise. Ask your system administrator to connect the printer with a wired  
network, initialize the wireless settings, import the wireless certificate, and set WPA-Enterprise or  
WPA2-Enterprise again.  
016-718  
016-720  
Error relating to USB Direct Print problems has occurred. While the USB memory is still inserted, set  
Image Typesto Photos(Standard Quality)in Print Settings under the Print  
PDF/TIFFmenu and try printing again. For more information about this setting, see "Image Types."  
Error relating to PDL emulation problems has occurred. Change the Print Mode setting in the Graphics tab  
of the printer driver. Contact customer support if this failure is repeated.  
016-756  
016-757  
Printing in the prohibited time. Contact your system administrator.  
The account is not registered. Contact your system administrator.  
426  
Understanding Printer Messages  
Status-Code  
016-758  
What you can do  
The function cannot be used. Contact your system administrator.  
Printable page limit is exceeded. Contact your system administrator.  
016-759  
016-764  
An error occurs when the printer connected to the SMTP server. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the  
printer to recover. Check the SMTP server settings or contact the SMTP server administrator.  
016-765  
016-766  
016-767  
016-768  
016-786  
The capacity of the SMTP server is not enough. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to  
recover. Contact the SMTP server administrator.  
The e-mail exceeds the SMTP server size restriction. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to  
recover. Contact the SMTP server administrator.  
The e-mail address of the recipient is incorrect. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover.  
Check e-mail address, and try scanning again.  
The e-mail address of the sender is incorrect. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover.  
Check e-mail address, and try scanning again.  
A timeout error occurs when sending or receiving scanned data. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the  
printer to recover. Check if the Ethernet cable is connected properly. If there is no problem with the  
Ethernet cable, contact server administrator.  
016-790  
016-799  
Network connection error. (IP address is not determined.) Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer  
to recover. Check if the Ethernet cable is connected properly. If there is no problem with the Ethernet cable,  
contact server administrator.  
Tap Closeto clear the message and cancel the current print job. Confirm the configuration of the printer  
on the printer driver.  
016-930  
016-931  
016-985  
016-986  
024-910  
The device is not supported. Remove it from the front USB port.  
The USB hub is not supported. Remove it from the front USB port.  
Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Retry scanning by lowering the resolution  
setting or changing the file format of the scanned image.  
The paper size set is different from the specified size. Load the specified paper in tray1. To load paper in  
tray1, see "Loading Print Media."  
024-911  
024-914  
The paper size set is different from the specified size. Load the specified paper in the optional 550-sheet  
feeder (tray2). To load paper in tray2, see "Loading Print Media."  
The paper size set is different from the specified size. Load the specified paper in the multipurpose feeder  
(MPF). To load paper in the MPF, see "Loading Print Media."  
024-965  
024-966  
024-969  
026-721  
Confirm that the size and type specified in the tray settings matches the size and type of paper loaded in the  
tray.  
Check your USB memory:  
• If the file size or the number of files exceeds the limit of your USB memory.  
• If your USB memory is write-protected.  
027-446  
027-452  
031-521  
Change the IPv6 address to avoid duplication. Turn off the printer, and turn it on again.  
Change the IPv4 address to avoid duplication. Turn off the printer, and turn it on again.  
SMB server login error. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Confirm login-able  
computer with your system administrator.  
031-522  
031-523  
SMB server login error. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if login name  
(domain name and user name) and password are correct.  
Invalid SMB share name. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check the share  
name you specified.  
Understanding Printer Messages  
427  
Status-Code  
What you can do  
031-524  
Exceeded the SMB server user account limit. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover.  
Check the number of users who use the server at the same time is not exceeding the upper limit.  
031-525  
031-526  
031-527  
031-528  
SMB destination client permission error. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover.  
Check if the specified user can read and write file at the storage location.  
Unable to resolve the SMB server hostname. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover.  
Check DNS connection, or check if forwarding destination server is registered with DNS.  
Unable to resolve the SMB server hostname. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover.  
Set DNS address, or set forwarding destination server address as IP address.  
Unable to connect to the SMB server. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if  
the printer can communicate via network with the forwarding destination SMB server. For example, check  
the following:  
• Connection of an Ethernet cable  
• TCP/IP setting  
• Communication with Port 137 (UDP), 138 (UDP), and 139 (TCP).  
For communication beyond the subnet, contact your system administrator.  
031-529  
031-530  
SMB server login error. (Invalid password.) Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover.  
Check if password is correct.  
The SMB share folder was not found on the specified SMB server. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for  
the printer to recover. Check the following:  
• Check if the storage location is correct.  
• Check if the file name you specified can be used when creating a file on the SMB server.  
• Have your system administrator check the DFS setting, and directly specify the SMB server, share name, and  
storage location according to the checked settings.  
031-531  
031-532  
031-533  
Unable to get a file or folder name on the SMB server. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to  
recover. Check access right of the folder you specified.  
SMB scan file or folder name limit exceeded. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover.  
Change file name and forwarding destination folder, or move or delete file in forwarding destination folder.  
Unable to write a file in the SMB server. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check  
the following:  
• If the file name you specified is not used by other users.  
• If file or folder that has the same name as the one you specified already exists.  
031-534  
Unable to create a folder on the SMB server. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover.  
Check the following:  
• If the file name you specified is not used by other users.  
• If file or folder that has the same name as the one you specified already exists.  
031-535  
031-536  
031-537  
031-539  
031-540  
Unable to delete a file on the SMB server. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover.  
Check if other user is not operating file in storage location you specified.  
Unable to delete a folder on the SMB server. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover.  
Check if other user is not operating file in storage location you specified.  
SMB server capacity exceeded. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if  
storage location has free space.  
The specified SMB server is invalid. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if  
server name is correct.  
The specified domain name is invalid. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check  
if domain name is correct.  
428  
Understanding Printer Messages  
Status-Code  
What you can do  
031-541  
Invalid user name specified for SMB server. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover.  
Check if login name (user name) is correct.  
031-542  
031-543  
031-544  
031-545  
031-546  
031-547  
TCP/IP not initialized. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Wait for a while and try  
the same operation again. Contact customer support if this failure is repeated.  
SMB server login error. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check login permitted  
time with your system administrator.  
SMB server login error. (Expired password.) Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover.  
Check the password valid period with your system administrator.  
SMB server login error. (Password change required.) Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to  
recover. Check necessity of password change with your system administrator.  
SMB server login error. (Invalid user is specified.) Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to  
recover. Contact your system administrator for the destination server settings.  
SMB server login error. (The specified user is restricted from accessing the SMB server.) Tap Close, or wait  
for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Contact your system administrator for the destination server  
settings.  
031-548  
031-549  
SMB server login error. (Logon time of SMB destination expired.) Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for  
the printer to recover. Contact your system administrator for the destination server settings.  
SMB server login error. Specified user is restricted, and a null password is prohibited. Tap Close, or wait  
for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. On server security settings, check access permission of null  
password user.  
031-550  
031-551  
Append command not supported by SMB server. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to  
recover. Check if the printer has access rights to append data to the SMB server. Check if server supports  
SMB append command.  
Rename command not supported by SMB server. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to  
recover. Check if the printer has access rights to rename data on the SMB server. Check if server supports  
SMB append command.  
031-552  
031-574  
031-575  
031-576  
Job canceled. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Change the file name that  
already exists on FTP server.  
Unable to resolve the FTP server hostname. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover.  
Check DNS connection, or check if name of forwarding destination server is registered with DNS.  
Unable to resolve the FTP server hostname. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover.  
Set DNS address, or set forwarding destination server address as IP address.  
Unable to connect to the FTP server. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if  
the printer communicates with forwarding destination FTP server. For example, check connection of  
Ethernet cable and if the IP address of the server is correct.  
031-578  
031-579  
031-580  
031-581  
031-582  
FTP server login error. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if login name  
(user name) and password are correct.  
Invalid FTP subdirectory path. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if  
storage location is correct.  
Failed to obtain a file or folder name of the FTP server. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to  
recover. Check server access right.  
FTP scan file or folder name limit exceeded. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover.  
Change file name and forwarding destination folder, or move or delete file in forwarding destination folder.  
Unable to write a scan file to the FTP server location. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to  
recover. Check if the file name you specified can be created in storage location. Check if storage location has  
free space.  
Understanding Printer Messages  
429  
Status-Code  
What you can do  
031-584  
Unable to create a scan folder on the FTP server. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to  
recover. Check if the folder name you specified can be created in storage location. Check if the folder that  
has the same name as the one you specified already exists.  
031-585  
031-587  
031-588  
031-590  
031-594  
031-595  
031-598  
Unable to delete a file on the FTP server. (DEL command failure.) Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for  
the printer to recover. Check server access rights.  
Unable to delete a folder on the FTP server. (RMD command failure.) Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds  
for the printer to recover. Check server access rights.  
Unable to write a file to the FTP server location. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to  
recover. Check if storage location has free space.  
Job canceled. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Change the file name that  
already exists on FTP server.  
FTP transfer type error. (TYPE command failure.) Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to  
recover. Try the same operation again. Contact customer support if this failure is repeated.  
FTP data port error. (PORT command failure.) Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover.  
Try the same operation again. Contact customer support if this failure is repeated.  
FTP append data error. (APPE command failure.) Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to  
recover. Check if the printer has access rights to append data to the FTP server. Check if server supports  
FTP append command.  
031-599  
033-513  
FTP rename file error. (RNFR command failure.) Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to  
recover. Check if the printer has access rights to rename data on the FTP server. Check if server supports  
FTP rename command.  
Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Try the following:  
• Print the received fax, or wait for a while until sending a fax is completed.  
• Print the fax job stored using the Secure Receive feature.  
For more information about the Secure Receive feature, see "Using the Secure Receiving Mode."  
033-527  
033-528  
033-762  
033-776  
033-788  
Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Wait for a while until the printer is not busy,  
and try again.  
Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check the available time period for the FAX,  
and try again.  
Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. The printer rejects faxes sent from unwanted  
numbers. For more information, see "Junk Fax Setup."  
The size of the fax document data is too large and may have exceeded the space available in memory. Lower  
the scan resolution rate and then try scanning again. For details, see "Adjusting the Document Resolution."  
Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Try the following:  
• Remove the received fax, or wait for a while until sending a fax is completed.  
• Print the fax job stored using the Secure Receive feature.  
For more information about the Secure Receive feature, see "Using the Secure Receiving Mode."  
Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Try the following:  
• Try the same operation.  
034-515  
• Check the printer or remote machine if the memory is full.  
430  
Understanding Printer Messages  
Status-Code  
What you can do  
034-791  
Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if the telephone line cord is connected  
properly. If the line connection is correct, check the following:  
• If Tone/Pulse setting is correct.  
For more information about Tone/Pulse setting, see "Tone / Pulse."  
If Tone/Pulse setting is correct, check the following:  
• If the remote machine can receive a fax.  
035-701  
035-708  
035-717  
Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check the following:  
• Status of the remote machine  
• Tone/Pulse setting  
For more information about Tone/Pulse setting, see "Tone / Pulse."  
Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Try the following:  
• Try the same operation.  
• Reduce the modem speed.  
For more information about modem speed, see "Modem Speed."  
Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Reduce the modem speed. For more  
information about modem speed, see "Modem Speed."  
035-718  
035-720  
035-781  
042-700  
050-130  
050-131  
050-132  
Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check the status of the remote machine.  
Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check the features of the remote machine.  
Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if the remote machine is busy.  
Wait for a while until the printer cools down. Contact customer support if this failure is repeated.  
Open the rear cover and remove any jammed paper.  
Pull out MPF, tray1 and tray2, and remove any jammed paper. If the jammed paper cannot be removed,  
open the rear cover to remove it.  
050-133  
050-134  
050-142  
077-300  
077-302  
091-411  
091-479  
Pull out MPF, tray1, and tray2. Remove any jammed paper, return paper trays, and then tap OK  
Pull out MPF and tray1, remove any jammed paper, and then tap OK  
.
.
Pull out MPF and tray1. Open rear cover and remove any jammed paper.  
Close the front cover.  
Close the rear cover.  
The time to replace the drum cartridge is coming soon. Prepare the new drum cartridge.  
Open the front cover. Remove the used drum cartridge, and install a new drum cartridge. For more  
information about replacing the drum cartridge, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridge."  
091-914  
091-921  
091-931  
091-942  
091-963  
093-426  
Reinstall the drum cartridge. If the message remains, replace the cartridge. For more information about  
replacing the drum cartridge, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridge."  
Make sure that the drum cartridge is fully installed. For more information about installing the drum  
cartridge, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridge."  
Remove the used drum cartridge, and install a new cartridge. For more information about replacing the  
drum cartridge, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridge."  
Reinstall the drum cartridge. If the message remains, replace the cartridge. For more information about  
replacing the drum cartridge, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridge."  
Remove the unsupported drum cartridge, and install a supported drum cartridge. For more information  
about installing the drum cartridge, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridge."  
The time to replace the toner cartridge is coming soon. Prepare the new toner cartridge.  
Understanding Printer Messages  
431  
Status-Code  
What you can do  
093-922  
Open the front cover, and pull out the toner cartridge. Shake it five or six times, and reinstall it. For more  
information about replacing the toner cartridge, see "Replacing the Toner Cartridge."  
093-933  
093-963  
093-973  
116-722  
Remove the used toner cartridge, and install a new cartridge. For more information about replacing the  
toner cartridge, see "Replacing the Toner Cartridge."  
Remove the unsupported toner cartridge, and install a supported toner cartridge. For more information  
about installing the toner cartridge, see "Replacing the Toner Cartridge."  
Make sure that the toner cartridge is fully installed. For more information about installing the toner  
cartridge, see "Replacing the Toner Cartridge."  
Tap Closefor the printer to recover. Check the Web Services on Devices (WSD) scan address and the  
destination computer, and then try scanning again. Contact your system administrator.  
142-700  
193-700  
Do not start another print job until the warning message disappears.  
When the genuine toner cartridge is installed, change the Non-Dell Toner setting to disable using the Dell  
Printer Configuration Web Tool or the Tool Box.  
Error Messages  
Message  
Cause  
Action  
Cannot access the LDAP address  
book. Consult your network  
administrator if this error persists.  
The printer fails to authenticate against an Check the server settings. If the error  
authentication server.  
persists, consult your network administrator.  
If the error persists, consult your network  
An SSL/TLS authentication error on  
connection to the LDAP server; an SSL/TLS administrator.  
authentication internal error occurs.  
Cannot access the LDAP address  
book. The LDAPS server certificate connection to the LDAP server; the server  
An SSL/TLS authentication error on  
Check the root certificate of the LDAP  
server SSL/TLS certificate on the printer.  
is not correct.  
certificate data is incorrect.  
Cannot access the LDAP address  
book. The LDAPS SSL/TLS client  
certificate is not set.  
An SSL/TLS authentication error on  
connection to the LDAP server; the LDAP correctly imported into the printer.  
server cannot acquire an SSL/TLS client  
certificate.  
Check that an SSL/TLS client certificate is  
Cannot access the LDAP address  
book. The server names of LDAPS  
An SSL/TLS authentication error on  
connection to the LDAP server; the server  
Change to a valid LDAP server SSL/TLS  
certificate.  
and the SSL/TLS certificate do not certificate for the LDAP server is not yet  
match.  
valid or has expired.  
An SSL/TLS authentication error on  
Set the LDAP server address on the printer  
connection to the LDAP server; the LDAP to match the address on the LDAP server  
server name does not match the certificate. SSL/TLS certificate.  
Cannot access the LDAP address  
book. The time settings of the  
printer and the Kerberos server do  
not match.  
The printer and the Kerberos server clocks Check that the printer and the Kerberos  
have a time difference that exceeds the  
Kerberos server clock skew value.  
server clocks have the correct time.  
Cannot connect to server. Check the The specified server settings such as IP  
Make sure that the correct IP address/host  
name, port number, realm/domain name,  
and search directory root are specified in IP  
Address / Host Name & Port, Domain  
Name, and Search Directory Root on the  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. (See  
"Kerberos Server" and "LDAP Server.")  
server settings.  
address and realm/domain name are  
incorrect.  
432  
Understanding Printer Messages  
 
Message  
Cause  
Action  
The LDAP or Kerberos version on the server Consult your network administrator.  
is not compatible with the printer.  
The server is down.  
Check that the server is functioning  
normally.  
Change the server settings and  
confirm the server connection.  
The printer cannot search for destinations Increase the time setting for Search Time-  
within the specified time.  
Out on the Dell Printer Configuration Web  
Tool. (See "Authentication System" and  
"LDAP Server.")  
Check that the printer and the server are  
properly connected with an Ethernet cable.  
If there are not any problems with the  
connection and the error persists, the server  
settings may have been changed. Consult  
your network administrator.  
Check the authentication settings. The login name and password for access to Make sure that the correct login name and  
an authentication server are incorrect.  
password are specified in Login Name and  
Password on the Dell Printer Configuration  
Web Tool. (See "Kerberos Server" and  
"LDAP Server.")  
Invalid search characters or LDAP  
The LDAP search filter fails to work properly Remove special characters, and then search  
User Mapping incorrectly configured as special characters are used in your search again. (See "LDAP User Mapping.")  
for Configuration Web Tool.  
condition or on the LDAP User Mapping  
page on the Dell Printer Configuration  
Web Tool.  
Network connection is not ready. Try You have started searching for destinations Wait for a while, and then search again.  
again later.  
before the IP address is set for the printer.  
No attribute or invalid name.  
Confirm address info. on server.  
The address information on the server  
contain incorrect data or are insufficient to the server or consult your network  
get your search request.  
Check the address information registered on  
administrator.  
No Entries.  
The printer cannot find any destinations  
that meet your search condition.  
Tap OKto return to the Search Network  
Address Book screen, and then specify a  
new condition to search again.  
Search Directory Root incorrectly  
configured for Configuration Web  
Tool.  
The directories that do not exist in the  
LDAP server are specified or an invalid DN Search Directory Root on the Dell Printer  
syntax is specified.  
Make sure that valid values are specified in  
Configuration Web Tool. (See "LDAP  
Server.") Specify the origin of the search  
with the correct DN syntax, as shown in the  
following example:  
dc=w2008ad,dc=addressbook,dc=net  
Too many search results. Only a  
maximum of 50 search scan be  
displayed. Please refine your search if display.  
needed.  
The number of search results has exceeded Tap Closeto display the search results. If  
the limits (50 search results) the printer can you cannot find your desired destination on  
the result list, specify a new condition to  
search again.  
Authentication server access Error  
016-530  
Some other error occurs regarding the LDAP Turn off the printer, and turn it on again. If  
server address book.  
the error persists, consult your network  
administrator.  
Restart the printer.  
Understanding Printer Messages  
433  
434  
Understanding Printer Messages  
30  
Specifications  
NOTE: The images used in this manual are those of the Dell™ Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw unless otherwise mentioned.  
Operating System Compatibility  
Your Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw and Dell Smart Multifunction Printer | S2815dn are compatible  
with Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003, Windows Server® 2003 x64 Edition, Windows Server® 2008, Windows  
Server® 2008 64-bit Edition, Windows Server® 2008 R2, Windows Vista®, Windows Vista® 64-bit Edition,  
Windows® 7, Windows® 7 64-bit Edition, Windows® 8, Windows® 8 64-bit Edition, Windows Server® 2012,  
Windows® 8.1, Windows® 8.1 64-bit Edition, Windows Server® 2012 R2, Windows® RT, Windows® RT 8.1,  
Windows® 10, Windows® 10 64-bit Edition, Mac OS X 10.5, Mac OS X 10.6, Mac OS X 10.7, OS X 10.8, OS X 10.9,  
OS X 10.10, Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 Desktop (32/64bit), SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 11 (32/64bit), and  
Ubuntu 12.04 LTS (32/64bit).  
Power Supply  
Rated voltage  
Frequency  
220 VAC - 240 VAC  
50/60 Hz  
110 VAC - 127 VAC  
50/60 Hz  
Current  
6 A or less  
11 A or less  
52.0 W  
Power consumption  
Ready  
52.0 W  
Sleep  
14.0 W  
14.0 W  
Deep Sleep  
2.8 W* (H815dw)  
1.7 W* (S2815dn)  
0 W  
1.7 W  
Offline  
0 W  
TEC value  
2.7 kWh  
2.8 kWh  
*
This condition is equivalent to Network standby mode, the power consumption in this condition is that all wired  
network ports are connected and all wireless network ports are activated.  
Dimensions  
Height: 492 mm (19.37 inches) Width: 439 mm (17.28 inches) Depth: 438 mm (17.24 inches)  
Weight (including toner cartridge and drum cartridge): 19.0 kg (41.90 lb)  
Memory  
Memory  
Speed  
1 GB  
DDR3-1066MHz  
Specifications  
435  
           
Page Description Language (PDL)/Emulation, Operating System, and  
Interface  
PDL/Emulations  
PCL 6, PCL5e, PostScript 3 Compatible, HBPL, XML Paper Specification (Host Based/PCL 6)  
Operating systems  
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003, Windows Server® 2003 x64 Edition, Windows Server® 2008,  
Windows Server® 2008 64-bit Edition, Windows Server® 2008 R2, Windows Vista®, Windows  
Vista® 64-bit Edition, Windows® 7, Windows® 7 64-bit Edition, Windows® 8, Windows® 8 64-bit  
Edition, Windows Server® 2012, Windows® 8.1, Windows® 8.1 64-bit Edition, Windows Server®  
2012 R2, Windows® 10, Windows® 10 64-bit Edition, Mac OS X 10.5, Mac OS X 10.6, Mac OS X  
10.7, OS X 10.8, OS X 10.9, OS X 10.10, Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 Desktop (32/64bit), SUSE  
Linux Enterprise Desktop 11 (32/64bit), and Ubuntu 12.04 LTS (32/64bit).  
Interfaces  
Standard local:  
USB 2.0  
Standard wireless network (Dell Cloud  
Multifunction Printer | H815dw only):  
IEEE 802.11b/802.11g/802.11n  
Standard wired network:  
10Base-T/100Base-TX/  
1000Base-T Ethernet  
MIB Compatibility  
Management Information Base (MIB) is a database containing information about network devices (such as adapters,  
bridges, routers, or computers). This information helps network administrators manage the network (analyze  
performance, traffic, errors, and so on). Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw and Dell Smart Multifunction  
Printer | S2815dn comply with standard industry MIB specifications, allowing the printer to be recognized and  
managed by various printer and network management software systems.  
Environment  
Operation  
Temperature  
10 °C - 32 °C  
Relative humidity  
10 % - 85 % RH (no condensation)  
Print Quality Guarantee  
Temperature  
15 °C - 28 °C  
Relative humidity  
20 % - 70 % RH (no condensation)  
Storage  
Temperature range  
-20 °C to 40 °C (0 °F to 104 °F)  
5 % - 85 % RH (no condensation)  
Storage humidity range  
Altitude  
Operating  
Storage  
Up to 3,100 m (10,170 feet)  
Up to 3,100 m (10,170 feet)  
436  
Specifications  
             
Cables  
Your interconnection cable must meet the following requirements:  
Connection type  
Ethernet  
Connection specifications and symbols  
1
2
10Base-T/100Base-TX/  
1000Base-T  
USB  
USB 2.0  
3
4
Phone connector  
Wall jack connector  
1
2
3
4
Print Specifications  
Item  
Description  
Print resolution  
Print speed  
600 dpi x 600 dpi  
Simplex: 38 ppm (A4), 40 ppm (Letter)  
Duplex: 22 ppm (A4), 24 ppm (Letter)  
Paper size  
A4, B5, A5, B6, A6, Letter, Executive, Folio (8.5" x 13"), Legal, Statement,  
Envelope #10, Monarch, DL, C5, Japanese Postcard  
Specifications  
437  
   
Copy Specifications  
Item  
Description  
Copy resolution  
Copy speed  
Optical: 600 dpi x 600 dpi  
38 cpm (A4)/40 cpm (Letter) or more (When using the document glass to make  
sequential copies of a document with pages scanned one by one.)  
Simplex: 22 cpm (A4)/24 cpm (Letter) or more  
Duplex: 7 cpm (A4/Letter) or more  
(When using the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) to make  
sequential copies of multiple documents.)  
Paper size  
A4, B5, A5, B6, A6, Letter, Executive, Folio (8.5" x 13"), Legal, Statement,  
Envelope #10, Monarch, DL, C5, Japanese Postcard  
Zoom rate  
Document glass: 25 % - 400 %, DADF: 25 % - 400 %  
1 - 99  
Multiple copies  
Copy mode (=Original type)  
Scanning method  
Text, Text & Photo, Photo  
Document glass: Document-fixed flatbed scanning  
DADF: Carriage-fixed, document-feeding scanning (2- side scanning)  
Scanner Specifications  
Item  
Description  
Compatibility  
TWAIN, TWAIN-Net, Windows Image Acquisition (WIA)*1  
,
Scan Service for Web Services on Devices (WSD)*2  
Scan resolution  
Optical: 600 dpi x 300 dpi (Color only), 600 dpi x 400 dpi, 600 dpi x 600 dpi, 1,200  
dpi x 1,200 dpi  
Enhanced (Pull Scan):  
• TWAIN – 50 x 50 to 9,600 x 9,600 dots/25.4 mm  
• Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) – 75/100/150/200/300/400/600 dots/25.4 mm  
Enhanced (Push Scan):  
200(Default)/300/400/600 dots/25.4 mm  
24 bit  
Color bit depth  
Mono bit depth  
1 bit for Line art. 8 bit for Gray scale  
Document glass: 297 mm. DADF: 355.6 mm  
215.9 mm  
Effective scanning length  
Effective scanning width  
Scan speed (Text mode)  
Monochrome: 665 μs/line (600 dpi), 1330 μs/line (1200 dpi)  
Color: 1330 μs/line (600 dpi), 2660 μs/line (1200 dpi)  
*1 : Windows® OS only  
*2 : Only on Windows Vista®/Windows® 7/Windows® 8/Windows® 8.1/Windows® 10  
438  
Specifications  
   
Facsimile Specifications  
Item  
Description  
Compatibility  
Applicable line  
ITU-T Super G3, ITU-T G3 ECM, ITU-T G3  
Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN), Private Branch Exchange (PBX), or  
Leased line (3.4 KHz/2-wire)  
Data coding  
1bit/JBIG/MMR/MR/MH  
33.6 Kbps  
Max modem speed  
Transmission speed  
Approx. 3 seconds/page *Transmission time applies to memory transmission of  
text data scanned in Standard resolution with ECM using only ITU-T No.1 Chart.  
Scanning speed  
Document glass: approx. 3 seconds/A4 (at standard fax resolution mode) DADF:  
approx. 5 seconds/Letter (at standard fax resolution mode), 7.5 seconds/Letter (at  
fine fax resolution mode)  
Maximum document length  
Paper size  
Document glass: 297 mm DADF: 355.6 mm  
Letter, A4 (depending on a country)  
Resolution  
Standard: R8 x 3.85 l/mm, Fine: R8 x 7.7 l/mm, Super Fine: 400 dpi x 400 dpi,  
Photo: R8 x 7.7 1/mm  
User memory  
Halftone  
4 MB  
256 levels  
Wireless Connection Specifications  
NOTE: The wireless network connection feature is available on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw only.  
Item  
Description  
Connectivity technology  
Compliant standards  
Bandwidth  
Wireless  
IEEE 802.11b, 802.11g, and 802.11n  
2.4 GHz  
Data transfer rate  
IEEE 802.11n: 65 Mbps  
IEEE 802.11g: 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, and 6 Mbps  
IEEE 802.11b: 11, 5.5, 2, and 1 Mbps  
Security  
64 (40-bit key)/128 (104-bit key) WEP,  
WPA- PSK (TKIP, AES), WPA2-PSK (AES), WPA-Enterprise (TKIP, AES)*1  
WPA2-Enterprise (AES)*1  
,
Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS)*2  
Wireless mode  
Push-Button Configuration (PBC),  
Personal Identification Number (PIN)  
Infrastructure, Ad-hoc, Wi-Fi Direct  
*1 EAP method supports PEAPv0, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS PAP, and EAP-TTLS CHAP.  
*2 WPS 2.0 compliant.  
Specifications  
439  
   
440  
Specifications  
Maintaining Your Printer  
31 Maintaining Your Printer.......................................................... 443  
32 Clearing Jams............................................................................ 469  
441  
 
442  
31  
Maintaining Your Printer  
You need to complete certain tasks to maintain optimum print quality.  
NOTE: The images used in this manual are those of the Dell™ Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw unless otherwise mentioned.  
Determining the Status of Supplies  
If your printer is connected to the network, the Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool can provide instant feedback  
on remaining toner level. Type the printer's IP address in your web browser to view this information. To use the E-  
Mail Alert Setup feature that notifies you when the printer requires new supplies, type the desired e-mail address in  
the e-mail list box.  
On the touch panel screen, you can also confirm the following:  
•
Any supply or maintenance items that require attention replacing (However, the printer can only display  
information about one item at a time).  
•
Amount of toner remaining in the toner cartridge.  
Conserving Supplies  
You can change several settings in your printer driver to conserve toner cartridge and paper.  
Supply  
Setting  
Function  
Toner cartridge Toner Saver in the Others tab  
This check box allows the users to select a print mode that uses less  
toner. The image quality will be lower when this feature is used.  
Print media  
Print media  
Multiple Up in the Layout tab  
The printer prints two or more pages on one side of a sheet.  
The printer prints on both sides of a sheet of paper.  
Duplex in the General tab  
Ordering Supplies  
You can order consumables (toner cartridge and drum cartridge) from Dell online or by phone.  
Using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
1
Start the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.  
See "Starting the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool."  
2
Click the Order Supplies at:.  
®
Using Dell Printer Hub or Dell Printer Management Tool for Windows  
1
Click Start  
For Windows 10, click the Start button  
For the Dell Printer Hub, select the printer from My Printers  
®
All Programs  
Dell Printers  
Dell Printer Hub or Dell Printer Management Tool  
.
Dell Printer Hub or Dell Printer Management Tool  
.
2
.
For the Dell Printer Management Tool, select the printer displayed by default, or another printer from the drop-  
down list on the upper-right corner of the screen.  
3
4
Click Supplies.  
Order consumables either from the web or phone.  
If you are ordering from the web:  
Maintaining Your Printer  
443  
               
a
b
Select your printer type and printer name.  
Click Next  
.
If you are ordering by phone:  
Call the number that appears on the top-left corner of the window, or click Contact Us. To ensure that you get the  
best service, have your Dell printer's Service Tag ready. See "Express Service Code and Service Tag."  
For OS X  
You can order consumables from the Status Monitor Widget. See "Status Monitor Widget (for OS X)."  
For Linux  
You can order consumables from the Status Monitor Console. See "Status Monitor Console (for Linux)."  
Storing Print Media  
To avoid potential paper feeding problems and uneven print quality, there are several things you can do:  
•
To achieve the best possible print quality, store print media in an environment where the temperature is  
approximately 21 °C (70 °F) and the relative humidity is 40 %.  
•
•
Store cartons of print media on a pallet or shelf, rather than directly on the floor.  
If you store individual packages of print media out of the original carton, ensure that they rest on a flat surface so  
the edges do not buckle or curl.  
•
Do not place anything on top of the print media packages.  
Storing Consumables  
Store consumables in their original packaging until you need to use them. Do not store consumables in:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Temperatures greater than 40 °C (104 °F).  
An environment with extreme changes in humidity or temperature.  
Direct sunlight.  
Dusty places.  
A car for a long period of time.  
An environment where corrosive gases are present.  
A humid environment.  
444  
Maintaining Your Printer  
         
Replacing the Toner Cartridge  
WARNING: Before performing any of the following procedures, read and follow the safety instructions in the Important  
Information.  
Dell toner cartridge is available only through Dell. You can order cartridge online at http://www.dell.com/supplies or  
by phone. To order by phone, see "Contacting Dell."  
It is recommended to use Dell toner cartridge for your printer. Dell does not provide warranty coverage for problems  
caused by using accessories, parts, or components not supplied by Dell.  
WARNING: Never throw used toner cartridge into fire. The residual toner could explode resulting in burns and injuries.  
WARNING: Do not shake the used toner cartridge. This may cause toner spills.  
Removing the Toner Cartridge  
NOTE: Ensure that you remove all the paper from the MPF and close the MPF cover before removing the toner cartridge.  
1
After flipping up the operator panel until it clicks, grasp the grips on both sides of the front cover, and then pull it  
down to open.  
2
Grasp the toner cartridge lock lever, and then raise it upward to unlock.  
Maintaining Your Printer  
445  
     
3
Grasp the handle on the toner cartridge, and then pull it out.  
WARNING: Do not shake the toner cartridge. This may cause toner spills.  
Installing a Toner Cartridge  
1
2
Unpack a new toner cartridge.  
Shake the new toner cartridge five or six times to distribute the toner evenly.  
3
Make sure that the two tabs of the toner cartridge align with the grooves on the printer, and then insert it into the  
printer until it clicks into place.  
446  
Maintaining Your Printer  
   
4
Grasp the toner cartridge lock lever, and then pull it down until it stops.  
5
Close the front cover, and put back the operator panel to the original position.  
Maintaining Your Printer  
447  
Replacing the Drum Cartridge  
WARNING: Before performing any of the following procedures, read and follow the safety instructions in the Important  
Information.  
CAUTION: Protect the drum cartridge against bright light. If the front side cover remains open for more than 3 minutes, print  
quality may deteriorate.  
Removing the Drum Cartridge  
1
After flipping up the operator panel until it clicks, grasp the grips on both sides of the front cover, and then pull it  
down to open.  
2
Grasp the handle on the front of the drum cartridge, and then pull it out halfway with one hand.  
3
Hold both sides of the drum cartridge with your hands, and then pull it out completely.  
448  
Maintaining Your Printer  
       
Installing a Drum Cartridge  
1
Unpack a new drum cartridge.  
CAUTION: The protective cover of the drum comes off while inserting the drum cartridge into the cartridge slot. You do  
not need to remove it in advance.  
2
Hold both sides of the drum cartridge with your hands, insert the drum cartridge into the cartridge slot, and then  
push it in halfway.  
3
Grasp the handle on the front of the drum cartridge, and then push and install the drum cartridge until it stops.  
4
To remove the toner cartridge from the old drum cartridge, grasp the toner cartridge lock lever, and then raise it  
upward to unlock.  
Maintaining Your Printer  
449  
   
5
Grasp the handle on the toner cartridge, and then pull it out of the old drum cartridge.  
WARNING: Do not shake the toner cartridge. This may cause toner spills.  
WARNING: Keep the removed toner cartridge on a level surface.  
6
Install the removed toner cartridge to the new drum cartridge in the printer. Make sure that the two tabs of the  
toner cartridge align with the grooves on the printer, and then insert it into the printer until it clicks into place.  
7
Grasp the toner cartridge lock lever, and then pull it down until it stops.  
450  
Maintaining Your Printer  
8
Close the front cover, and put back the operator panel to the original position.  
Maintaining Your Printer  
451  
Replacing the Fusing Unit, the Transfer Unit, and the Retard Roller  
You need to replace all three parts (the fusing unit, transfer unit, and retard roller) at a time. Both the transfer unit  
and the retard roller for replacement come with a new fusing unit.  
WARNING: Before performing any of the following procedures, read and follow the safety instructions in the Important  
Information.  
Removing the Fusing Unit  
1
2
Turn off the printer, and wait for 40 minutes.  
Pull the rear cover handle to open the rear cover.  
3
Raise the two gray levers on the both sides of the fusing unit to unlock.  
4
Grasp the grips on both sides of the fusing unit, and then pull out the unit.  
452  
Maintaining Your Printer  
     
Installing a Fusing Unit  
1
2
3
Unpack a new fusing unit.  
Remove the packing material from the fusing unit.  
Insert the fusing unit into the printer until it clicks into place.  
NOTE: Hold both sides of the fusing unit with your hands.  
NOTE: Make sure that the fusing unit is firmly set in the slots and cannot be moved easily.  
4
Lower the two gray levers to lock the fusing unit.  
NOTE: After replacing the fusing unit, be sure to initialize its life counter by following the instructions in the accompanying  
manual.  
Maintaining Your Printer  
453  
 
Removing the Transfer Unit  
1
Push the tabs on both sides of the transfer unit inward, and then lift it out of the printer.  
Installing a Transfer Unit  
1
2
Unpack a new transfer unit.  
Hold the transfer unit by both its ends.  
3
Put the receptacles (white) on both ends of the transfer unit to the short bars near the arrow marks of the duplexer.  
And tilt the transfer unit toward the rear cover.  
454  
Maintaining Your Printer  
   
4
Make sure that the arrow marks on the transfer unit and the printer face each other, and then press the two tabs on  
transfer unit inward to lock.  
5
Close the rear cover.  
Removing the Retard Roller in Tray1  
1
Pull tray1 out of the printer about 200 mm.  
Maintaining Your Printer  
455  
 
2
Hold tray1 with both hands, and remove it from the printer.  
NOTE: Be sure to remove all the paper from tray1 before removing the retard roller.  
3
Slightly pressing down the lock lever on tray1 to the right with one hand, raise the retard roller with the other hand.  
4
Slide the retard roller to the left to remove it from tray1.  
Installing a Retard Roller in Tray1  
1
Unpack a new retard roller.  
456  
Maintaining Your Printer  
 
2
Hold the both ends of the new retard roller, and attach it by sliding the two axles of the retard roller into the holes  
on tray1.  
NOTE: Be careful not to touch the rubber rollers.  
3
While pressing the lock lever on tray1 slightly to the right, press down the retard roller until it clicks, and then  
release the lock lever.  
4
Load paper in tray1, and then insert the tray into the printer and push until it stops.  
Maintaining Your Printer  
457  
Cleaning the Scanner  
Keeping the scanner clean helps ensure the best possible copies. It is recommended to clean the scanner at the start  
of each day and during the day, as needed.  
1
2
Slightly dampen a soft lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.  
Open the document cover.  
3
Wipe the surface of the document glass and DADF glass until it is clean and dry.  
1
2
4
3
1
White Sheet  
NOTE: Handle with care.  
White Document Cover  
Document Glass  
DADF Glass  
2
3
4
4
5
Wipe the underside of the white document cover and white sheet until it is clean and dry.  
Close the document cover.  
458  
Maintaining Your Printer  
   
Cleaning the DADF Feed Roller  
Keeping the DADF feed roller clean helps ensure the best possible copies. It is recommended to clean the DADF feed  
roller at regular intervals.  
1
Open the DADF cover.  
2
Wipe the DADF feed roller with a dry soft lint-free cloth or paper towel until it is clean.  
If the DADF feed roller gets soiled with ink stains, paper from the DADF may also be soiled. In this case, slightly  
dampen a soft lint-free cloth or paper towel with a neutral detergent or water, and then remove the contamination  
from the DADF feed roller until it is clean and dry.  
Cleaning Inside the Printer  
Clean the feed roller inside the printer if print media does not feed correctly.  
1
Turn off the printer and disconnect the power cable.  
NOTE: The data in the memory are cleared when the printer is turned off.  
Maintaining Your Printer  
459  
   
2
Gently pull open the MPF cover.  
3
Grasp both sides of the MPF, and then pull the MPF from the printer.  
4
Pull tray1 out of the printer about 200 mm.  
460  
Maintaining Your Printer  
5
Hold tray1 with both hands, and remove it from the printer.  
6
Wipe the feed roller inside the printer with a cloth moistened with water.  
MPF Feed Roller  
Tray1 Feed Roller  
7
Insert tray1 into the printer, and push until it stops.  
NOTE: Do not use excessive force on the tray. Doing so could damage the tray or the inside of the printer.  
Maintaining Your Printer  
461  
8
Insert the MPF into the printer, push until it stops, and close the cover.  
Moving the Printer  
This section describes how to move the printer.  
WARNING: Two people are required to move the printer.  
WARNING: To prevent you from dropping the printer and getting backache or injuries, lift the printer by firmly gripping the  
recessed areas on both sides of the printer. Never lift the printer by gripping any other areas.  
NOTE: If the optional 550-sheet feeder has been installed, uninstall the optional 550-sheet feeder before moving the printer. If  
the optional 550-sheet feeder is not fixed securely to the printer, it may fall to the ground and cause injuries. For details on how to  
uninstall the optional 550-sheet feeder, see "Removing the Optional 550-Sheet Feeder."  
1
2
Turn off the printer and disconnect the power cable, interface cable, and any other cables.  
NOTE: The data in the memory are cleared when the printer is turned off.  
Remove any paper in the document output tray and slide the document stopper inside the DADF.  
462  
Maintaining Your Printer  
 
3
Remove any paper in the output tray and retract the output tray extension.  
4
Lift the printer and move it gently.  
NOTE: If you move the printer over a long distance, remove the toner cartridge from the printer to prevent toner from  
spilling, and pack the printer inside a box.  
Maintaining Your Printer  
463  
Removing the Optional 550-Sheet Feeder  
WARNING: When you remove the optional 550-sheet feeder (Tray2), be sure to turn off the printer, unplug the power cable, and  
disconnect all cables from the rear of the printer before starting these tasks.  
1
2
Ensure that the printer is turned off, and then disconnect all cables from the rear of the printer.  
Gently pull open the MPF cover.  
3
Grasp both sides of the MPF, and then pull the MPF from the printer.  
4
Pull tray1 out of the printer about 200 mm.  
464  
Maintaining Your Printer  
   
5
Hold tray1 with both hands, and remove it from the printer.  
6
Remove the two screws joining the printer and the optional 550-sheet feeder by unscrewing them with a coin or  
similar object.  
Maintaining Your Printer  
465  
7
Gently lift the printer off the optional 550-sheet feeder, and place it on a level surface.  
WARNING: Two people are required to lift the printer.  
8
Insert tray1 into the printer, and push until it stops.  
CAUTION: Do not use excessive force on the tray. Doing so could damage the tray or the inside of the printer.  
466  
Maintaining Your Printer  
9
Insert the MPF into the printer, push until it stops, and close the MPF.  
10 Re-connect all cables into the rear of the printer and turn on the printer.  
Maintaining Your Printer  
467  
468  
Maintaining Your Printer  
32  
Clearing Jams  
Careful selection of appropriate print media and proper loading allow you to avoid paper jams. See  
"
Print Media  
Guidelines  
"
for more information.  
NOTE: Before buying large quantities of any print media, it is recommended to try a sample first.  
NOTE: The images used in this manual are those of the Dell™ Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw unless otherwise mentioned.  
Avoiding Jams  
•
Use only recommended print media. See "Print Media Guidelines" for more information.  
•
See "Loading Print Media in Tray1 and the Optional 550-Sheet Feeder" and "Loading Print Media in the MPF" to  
load print media properly.  
•
Do not overload the print media sources. Ensure that the print media stack height does not exceed the maximum  
height indicated by the load-line labels in the tray.  
•
•
Do not load wrinkled, creased, damp, or curled print media.  
Flex, fan, and straighten print media before you load it. If a jam occurs with print media, try feeding one sheet at a  
time through the multipurpose feeder (MPF).  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Do not use print media that you have cut or trimmed yourself.  
Do not mix print media sizes, weights, or types in the same print media source.  
Ensure that the recommended print side is face up when you insert the print media.  
Keep print media stored in an acceptable environment. For more information, see  
Do not remove the feeding tray during a print job.  
"Storing Print Media."  
Push tray1 or the optional 550-sheet feeder (tray2) in firmly after loading.  
Ensure that all cables that connect to the printer are correctly attached.  
Overtightening the guides may cause jams.  
Wipe the retard rollers in the tray or MPF with a cloth that is slightly dampened with water if jams caused by  
misfeeding paper occur frequently.  
Clearing Jams  
469  
       
Identifying the Location of Paper Jams  
WARNING: Do not attempt to clear any jams using tools or instruments. This may permanently damage the printer.  
The following illustration shows where paper jams may occur along the print media path.  
1
2
7
3
4
6
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF)  
Fusing Unit  
Regi Roll  
Duplexer  
Tray1  
Optional 550-Sheet Feeder  
Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)  
470  
Clearing Jams  
 
Clearing Paper Jams From the DADF  
When a document jams while it passes through the DADF, remove the jam according to the following procedure.  
NOTE: To prevent document jams, use the document glass for thick, thin, or mixed documents.  
If status code: 005-112, 005-121, or 005-900 appears:  
1
Remove the remaining documents from the DADF.  
If the document is jammed in the paper feed area:  
a
Open the DADF cover.  
b
Lift the release lever 90 degrees and remove the jammed document by carefully pulling it to the right.  
If you find it difficult to pull the document:  
Clearing Jams  
471  
   
c
Remove the DADF feed roller assembly and remove the document by gently pulling it straight up.  
d
Insert the DADF feed roller assembly and press down the release lever.  
If the document is jammed in the paper exit area:  
e
Remove the jammed document from the document output tray.  
472  
Clearing Jams  
f
Close the DADF cover, and then load the documents back into the DADF.  
NOTE: Ensure that you adjust the document guides before printing a Legal-size document.  
2
If you cannot see the jammed document or the jammed document do not move when you pulled, open the  
document cover.  
3
4
5
Remove the document from the white sheet by carefully pulling it to the right.  
Close the document cover, and then load the documents back into the DADF.  
Tap Start  
.
If status code: 005-110 appears:  
1
Remove the jammed and the remaining documents from the DADF.  
You do not have to open the DADF cover.  
2
3
Load the documents back into the DADF.  
Tap Start  
.
Clearing Paper Jams From the MPF  
NOTE: To resolve the error displayed on the touch panel, you must clear all print media from the print media path.  
1
Remove any paper loaded on the MPF  
Clearing Jams  
473  
   
2
Grasp both sides of the MPF, and then pull it out of the printer.  
3
Pull tray1 out of the printer about 200 mm.  
4
Hold tray1 with both hands, and remove it from the printer.  
474  
Clearing Jams  
5
Pull the rear cover handle to open the rear cover.  
6
Remove the jammed paper.  
7
Insert tray1 into the printer, and push until it stops.  
Clearing Jams  
475  
8
Insert the MPF into the printer.  
9
Close the rear cover.  
476  
Clearing Jams  
Clearing Paper Jams From Tray1  
NOTE: To resolve the error displayed on the touch panel, you must clear all print media from the print media path.  
1
Gently pull open the MPF cover.  
2
Grasp both sides of the MPF, and then pull the MPF from the printer.  
3
Pull tray1 out of the printer about 200 mm.  
Clearing Jams  
477  
 
4
Hold tray1 with both hands, and remove it from the printer.  
5
Pull the rear cover handle to open the rear cover.  
6
Remove the jammed paper.  
478  
Clearing Jams  
7
Insert tray1 into the printer, and push until it stops.  
8
Insert the MPF into the printer, push until it stops, and close the MPF.  
9
Close the rear cover.  
10 Tap Start  
.
Clearing Jams  
479  
Clearing Paper Jams From the Fusing Unit  
NOTE: To resolve the error displayed on the touch panel, you must clear all print media from the print media path.  
If status code: 050-130 appears:  
1
Pull the rear cover handle to open the rear cover.  
2
Lift the levers on both sides of the fusing unit.  
WARNING: The fusing unit is hot. Do not touch it, doing so may cause burns.  
3
If the document is jammed under the fusing unit, remove the jammed document from under the fusing unit.  
480  
Clearing Jams  
   
4
If the document is jammed above the fusing unit, raise the tab of the inner part, and turn it to open.  
5
Remove the jammed document from above the fusing unit.  
6
Replace the inner part.  
Clearing Jams  
481  
7
Press down the levers on both sides of the fusing unit.  
8
Close the rear cover.  
482  
Clearing Jams  
Clearing Paper Jams From the Duplexer  
CAUTION: Ensure that nothing touches or scratches the surface (the roll made with sponge) of the transfer unit. Scratches,  
dirt, or oil from your hands on the roll of the transfer unit may reduce print quality.  
CAUTION: Protect the drum of the drum cartridge against bright light. If the rear cover remains open for more than 3 minutes,  
print quality may deteriorate.  
NOTE: To resolve the error displayed on the touch panel, you must clear all print media from the print media path.  
If status code: 050-131 appears:  
1
Pull the rear cover handle to open the rear cover.  
2
Remove the jammed paper from the duplexer.  
3
Close the rear cover.  
Clearing Jams  
483  
   
Clearing Paper Jams From the Regi Roll  
CAUTION: Ensure that nothing touches or scratches the surface (the roll made with sponge) of the transfer unit. Scratches,  
dirt, or oil from your hands on the roll of the transfer unit may reduce print quality.  
CAUTION: Protect the drum of the drum cartridge against bright light. If the rear cover remains open for more than 3 minutes,  
print quality may deteriorate.  
NOTE: To resolve the error displayed on the touch panel, you must clear all print media from the print media path.  
If status code: 050-142 appears:  
1
Open the MPF, or remove the remaining documents from the MPF.  
2
Grasp both sides of the MPF, and then pull the MPF from the printer.  
484  
Clearing Jams  
   
3
Pull tray1 from the printer about 200 mm.  
4
Hold tray1 with both hands, and remove it from the printer.  
5
Pull the rear cover handle to open the rear cover.  
Clearing Jams  
485  
6
Remove the jammed paper from the regi roll.  
7
Insert tray1 into the printer, and push until it stops.  
NOTE: Do not use excessive force on the tray. Doing so could damage the tray or the inside of the printer.  
8
Insert the MPF into the printer, push until it stops, and close the MPF.  
486  
Clearing Jams  
9
Close the rear cover.  
If status code: 050-132 appears:  
1
Open the MPF, or remove the remaining documents from the MPF.  
2
Grasp both sides of the MPF, and then pull the MPF from the printer.  
Clearing Jams  
487  
 
3
Pull tray1 from the printer about 200 mm.  
4
Hold tray1 with both hands, and remove it from the printer.  
5
Pull the optional 550-sheet feeder from the printer about 200 mm.  
488  
Clearing Jams  
6
Hold the optional 550-sheet feeder with both hands, and remove it from the printer.  
7
Pull the rear cover handle to open the rear cover.  
8
Remove the jammed paper.  
Clearing Jams  
489  
9
Insert the optional 550-sheet feeder into the printer, and push until it stops.  
10 Insert tray1 into the printer, and push until it stops.  
11 Insert the MPF into the printer, push until it stops, and close the MPF.  
490  
Clearing Jams  
12 Close the rear cover.  
Clearing Paper Jams From the Optional 550-Sheet Feeder  
NOTE: To resolve the error displayed on the touch panel, you must clear all print media from the print media path.  
1
Pull the optional 550-sheet feeder out of the printer about 200 mm.  
Clearing Jams  
491  
 
2
Hold the optional 550-sheet feeder with both hands, and remove it from the printer.  
3
Pull the rear cover handle to open the rear cover.  
4
Remove the jammed paper.  
492  
Clearing Jams  
5
Insert the optional 550-sheet feeder into the printer, and push until it stops.  
6
Close the rear cover.  
Clearing Jams  
493  
Clearing Paper Jams From the Trays  
If status code 050-134 appears:  
1
Open the MPF, or remove the remaining documents from the MPF.  
2
Grasp both sides of the MPF, and then pull the MPF from the printer.  
3
Pull tray1 from the printer about 200 mm.  
494  
Clearing Jams  
   
4
Hold tray1 with both hands, and remove it from the printer.  
5
6
Remove the jammed paper.  
Insert tray1 into the printer, and push until it stops.  
NOTE: Do not use excessive force on the tray. Doing so could damage the tray or the inside of the printer.  
7
Insert the MPF into the printer, push until it stops, and close the MPF.  
8
Tap OKon the touch panel.  
Clearing Jams  
495  
If status code 050-133 appears:  
1
Open the MPF, or remove the remaining documents from the MPF.  
2
Grasp both sides of the MPF, and then pull the MPF from the printer.  
3
Pull tray1 from the printer about 200 mm.  
496  
Clearing Jams  
 
4
Hold tray1 with both hands, and remove it from the printer.  
5
Pull the optional 550-sheet feeder from the printer about 200 mm.  
6
Hold the optional 550-sheet feeder with both hands, and remove it from the printer.  
Clearing Jams  
497  
7
8
Remove the jammed paper.  
Insert the optional 550-sheet feeder into the printer, and push until it stops.  
9
Insert tray1 into the printer, and push until it stops.  
10 Insert the MPF into the printer, push until it stops, and close the MPF.  
11 Tap OKon the touch panel.  
498  
Clearing Jams  
Troubleshooting  
33 Troubleshooting Guide ............................................................. 501  
499  
 
500  
33  
Troubleshooting Guide  
Basic Printer Problems  
Some printer problems can be easily resolved. If a problem occurs with your printer, check each of the following:  
•
•
•
•
•
The power cable is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.  
The printer is turned on.  
The electrical outlet is not turned off at any switch or breaker.  
Other electrical equipment plugged into the outlet is working.  
All options are properly installed.  
If you have checked all of the above and still have a problem, turn off the printer, wait for 10 seconds, and then turn  
on the printer. This often fixes the problem.  
NOTE: If error messages are displayed on the touch panel or on your computer screen, follow the on-screen instructions to  
resolve the printer problems. For details about error messages and status codes, see "Understanding Printer Messages."  
Display Problems  
Problem  
Action  
Menu settings changed from the operator  
panel have no effect.  
Settings in the software program, the printer driver, or the printer utilities are  
overriding the settings made on the operator panel.  
Printing Problems  
NOTE: If Panel Lock Controlis set to Enable, you need to enter the four-digit password to enter the Admin  
Settingsmenu.  
Problem  
Action  
Job did not print or incorrect characters  
printed.  
Ensure that the top menu appears on the touch panel before you send a job to  
print. Press the  
(Home) button to return to the top menu.  
Ensure that the print media is loaded in the printer. Press the  
button to return to the top menu.  
(Home)  
Verify that the printer is using the correct Page Description Language (PDL).  
Verify that you are using the correct printer driver.  
Ensure that the correct USB or Ethernet cable is securely connected to the printer.  
Verify that the correct print media size is selected.  
If you are using a print spooler, verify that the spooler has not stalled.  
Print a Demo Page from the Report/List  
.
Ensure that the printer is correctly working.  
Check the printer's interface from the Admin Settings  
.
Determine the host interface you are using. Print a panel settings report to verify  
that the current interface settings are correct.  
Troubleshooting Guide  
501  
       
Problem  
Action  
Check if the  
icon is shown on the touch panel. If  
is shown, cancel the  
envelope mode. For details on canceling the envelope mode, see "To Cancel the  
Envelope Mode."  
Print media misfeeds or multiple feeds  
occur.  
Ensure that the print media you are using meets the specifications for your printer.  
See "Supported Paper Types" for more information.  
Fan the print media before loading it.  
Ensure that the print media is loaded correctly.  
Ensure that the width and length guides of the print media sources are adjusted  
correctly.  
Ensure that tray1, the optional 550-sheet feeder (tray2), or the multi-purpose  
feeder (MPF) unit is securely inserted.  
Do not overload tray1, the optional 550-sheet feeder, or the MPF.  
Do not force print media into the MPF when you load it; otherwise, it may skew or  
buckle.  
Ensure that the print media is not curled.  
Face the recommended print side up. See "Loading Print Media in Tray1 and the  
Optional 550-Sheet Feeder" for more information.  
Turn the print media over or around and try printing again to see if feeding  
improves.  
Do not mix print media types.  
Do not mix reams of print media.  
Remove the top and bottom curled sheets of a ream before loading the print  
media.  
Load print media only when tray1, the optional 550-sheet feeder, or the MPF is  
empty.  
Wipe the retard rollers in tray1, the optional 550-sheet feeder, or the MPF with a  
cloth moistened with water.  
The envelope is creased after printed.  
Page breaks in unexpected places.  
Make sure that the envelope is loaded in the MPF as instructed in "Loading  
Envelopes in the MPF."  
Increase the value for Time-Out using the operator panel, the Tool Box, or Dell™  
Printer Configuration Web Tool.  
Print media does not stack neatly in the  
output tray.  
Turn the print media stack over in tray1 or the MPF.  
Printing takes time when printing from the Set Print Modeto High Speedin the printer menu. See "Print Mode" for  
Dell Document Hub.  
more information.  
Cannot print from tray1 or the optional 550- Load the print media into the MPF.  
sheet feeder because the print media in  
tray1 or the optional 550-sheet feeder is  
curled.  
Print Quality Problems  
NOTE: Some of the following procedures that use the Tool Box can also be performed using the operator panel or Dell Printer  
Configuration Web Tool. For information on how to use the operator panel and Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, see  
"Understanding the Printer Menus" and "Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool."  
NOTE: In some of the following procedures you may need to use the Tool Box, which can be opened from the Dell Printer Hub or  
Dell Printer Management Tool. To start the Tool Box, see "Tool Box (for Microsoft® Windows®)."  
502  
Troubleshooting Guide  
 
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The output is too light  
Toner smears or print comes off  
Random spots/Blurred images  
The entire output is blank  
Streaks appear on the output  
Pitched dots  
Vertical blanks  
Mottle  
Ghosting  
Light-induced fatigue  
Fog  
Bead-Carry-Out (BCO)  
Jagged characters  
Banding  
Auger mark  
Wrinkled/Stained paper  
Damage on the leading edge of paper  
The output is too light  
Action  
Yes  
No  
1
The toner cartridge may be low or need to be replaced. Confirm the  
amount of toner left in the toner cartridge.  
The task is complete.  
Go to action 2.  
a
b
Check the toner level on the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
Replace the toner cartridge as necessary.  
.
Does this solve your problem?  
2
If you are using a non-Dell brand toner cartridge, enable the Non-Dell The task is complete.  
Toner option.  
Go to action 3.  
a
Start the Tool Box from the Dell Printer Hub or Dell Printer  
Management Tool, and click Service Tools on the Printer  
Maintenance tab.  
b
Ensure that the On check box under Non-Dell Toner is selected.  
Does this solve your problem?  
Troubleshooting Guide  
503  
 
Action  
Yes  
No  
3
Disable the Toner Saver in the printer driver.  
The task is complete.  
Go to action 4.  
a
On the Others tab, ensure that Off is selected in the Toner Saver  
drop-down menu.  
Does this solve your problem?  
4
The print media surface may be uneven. Try changing the Paper Type The task is complete.  
setting in the printer driver. For example, change the plain paper to  
thick.  
Go to action 5.  
Go to action 6.  
a
On the General tab, change the Paper Type setting.  
Does this solve your problem?  
5
Verify that the correct print media is being used. See "Supported Paper The task is complete.  
Types." If not, use the print media recommended for the printer.  
Does this solve your problem?  
6
7
Ensure the transfer unit is correctly installed.  
Does this solve your problem?  
The task is complete.  
The task is complete.  
Go to action 7.  
Go to action 8.  
Stir the developer in the drum cartridge.  
a
Press the  
Admin Settings  
Developer  
After you stir the developer in the drum cartridge, print a Demo Page  
from Report/List  
(Information) button and tap the Toolstab  
tap  
Maintenance Clean  
.
b
.
Does this solve your problem?  
8
Clean the toner in the drum cartridge.  
The task is complete.  
Go to action 9.  
a
Press the  
Admin Settings  
Refresh  
(Information) button and tap the Toolstab  
tap  
Maintenance Toner  
.
NOTE: Toner Refresh feature uses the toner, and shorten the  
life of the toner cartridge and the drum cartridge.  
b
After you refresh the toner in the drum cartridge, print a Demo Page  
from Report/List  
.
Does this solve your problem?  
9
Replace the drum cartridge.  
The task is complete.  
Contact Dell.  
a
b
Replace the drum cartridge. See "Replacing the Drum Cartridge."  
After you replace the drum cartridge, click Reports on the Printer  
Setting Reports tab.  
c
Click Demo Page.  
Does this solve your problem?  
504  
Troubleshooting Guide  
Toner smears or print comes off  
Action  
Yes  
No  
1
The print media surface may be uneven. Try changing the Paper Type The task is complete.  
setting in the printer driver. For example, change the plain paper to  
thick.  
Go to action 2.  
a
On the General tab, change the Paper Type setting.  
Does this solve your problem?  
2
3
Verify that the correct print media is being used. See "Supported Paper The task is complete.  
Types." If not, use the print media recommended for the printer.  
Go to action 3.  
Go to action 4.  
Does this solve your problem?  
Replace the drum cartridge.  
The task is complete.  
a
b
Replace the drum cartridge. See "Replacing the Drum Cartridge."  
After you replace the drum cartridge, test print your document again.  
Does this solve your problem?  
Clean the transfer unit.  
4
The task is complete.  
Go to action 5.  
a
Press the  
Admin Settings  
Transfer Unit  
After you clean the transfer unit, press the  
button and tap Report/List  
Tap Demo Page  
(Information) button and tap the Toolstab  
tap  
Maintenance Clean  
.
b
c
(Information)  
.
.
The demo page is printed.  
Does this solve your problem?  
Replace the fusing unit, the transfer unit, and the retard roller.  
5
The task is complete.  
Contact Dell.  
a
Replace the fusing unit, the transfer unit, and the retard roller. See  
"Replacing the Fusing Unit, the Transfer Unit, and the Retard Roller."  
b
After you replace the fusing unit, the transfer unit, and the retard  
roller, press the  
Report/List  
(Information) button and tap  
.
c
Tap Demo Page  
The demo page is printed.  
Does this solve your problem?  
.
Troubleshooting Guide  
505  
 
Random spots/Blurred images  
Action  
Yes  
No  
1
2
3
Ensure that the toner cartridge is installed correctly. See "Installing a  
Toner Cartridge."  
The task is complete.  
Go to action 2.  
Does this solve your problem?  
Ensure that the drum cartridge is installed correctly. See "Installing a  
Drum Cartridge."  
The task is complete.  
The task is complete.  
Go to action 3.  
Contact Dell.  
Does this solve your problem?  
Replace the drum cartridge.  
a
Replace the drum cartridge. See "Replacing the Drum Cartridge."  
After you replace the drum cartridge, press the (Information)  
button and tap Report/List  
Tap Demo Page  
The demo page is printed.  
Does this solve your problem?  
b
.
c
.
The entire output is blank  
Action  
Yes  
No  
1
Print a Demo Page from Report/List. Ensure that the demo page Go to action 2.  
is correctly printed.  
Go to action 3.  
Does this solve your problem?  
2
If you are printing a document, try to print another data from the  
computer.  
The task is complete.  
Go to action 8.  
Does this solve your problem?  
506  
Troubleshooting Guide  
   
Action  
Yes  
No  
3
The toner cartridge may be low or need to be replaced. Confirm the  
amount of toner left in the toner cartridge.  
The task is complete.  
Go to action 4.  
a
b
Check the toner level on the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
Replace the toner cartridge as necessary.  
.
Does this solve your problem?  
4
If you are using a non-Dell brand toner cartridge, enable the Non-Dell The task is complete.  
Toner option.  
Go to action 5.  
a
Start the Tool Box from the Dell Printer Hub or Dell Printer  
Management Tool, and click Service Tools on the Printer  
Maintenance tab.  
b
Ensure that the On check box under Non-Dell Toner is selected.  
Does this solve your problem?  
5
6
Disable the Toner Saver in the printer driver.  
The task is complete.  
Go to action 6.  
Go to action 7.  
a
On the Others tab, ensure that Off is selected in the Toner Saver  
drop-down menu.  
Does this solve your problem?  
The print media surface may be uneven. Try changing the Paper Type The task is complete.  
setting in the printer driver. For example, change the plain paper to  
thick.  
a
On the General tab, change the Paper Type setting.  
Does this solve your problem?  
7
8
Verify that the correct print media is being used. See "Supported Paper The task is complete.  
Types." If not, use the print media recommended for the printer.  
Go to action 8.  
Contact Dell.  
Does this solve your problem?  
Replace the drum cartridge.  
The task is complete.  
a
b
Replace the drum cartridge. See "Replacing the Drum Cartridge."  
After you replace the drum cartridge, click Reports on the Printer  
Setting Reports tab.  
c
Click Demo Page  
The demo page is printed.  
Does this solve your problem?  
.
Troubleshooting Guide  
507  
Streaks appear on the output  
Action  
Yes  
No  
1
The toner cartridge may be low or need to be replaced. Confirm the  
amount of toner left in the toner cartridge.  
The task is complete.  
Go to action 2.  
a
Check the toner level on the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.  
b
Replace the toner cartridge as necessary.  
Does this solve your problem?  
2
If you are using a non-Dell brand toner cartridge, enable the Non-Dell The task is complete.  
Toner option.  
Go to action 3.  
a
Start the Tool Box from the Dell Printer Hub or Dell Printer  
Management Tool, and click Service Tools on the Printer  
Maintenance tab.  
b
Ensure that the On check box under Non-Dell Toner is selected.  
Does this solve your problem?  
Replace the drum cartridge.  
3
The task is complete.  
Contact Dell.  
a
b
Replace the drum cartridge. See "Replacing the Drum Cartridge."  
After you replace the drum cartridge, click Reports on the Printer  
Setting Reports tab.  
c
Click Demo Page  
.
The demo page is printed.  
Does this solve your problem?  
508  
Troubleshooting Guide  
 
Pitched dots  
Action  
Yes  
No  
1
Locate the cause of the problem using the Pitch Configuration Chart. Proceed to the action  
Contact Dell.  
corresponding to the  
location of the  
problem:  
a
Start the Tool Box from the Dell Printer Hub or Dell Printer  
Management Tool, and click Chart Print on the Diagnosis tab.  
b
Click Pitch Configuration Chart  
.
• Drum cartridge - 2  
• Fusing unit - 3  
The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed.  
Compare the pitch of the spots on your output with that on the Pitch  
Configuration Chart, and locate the cause of the problem.  
c
Is the cause of the problem located?  
Replace the drum cartridge.  
2
3
The task is complete.  
Contact Dell.  
Contact Dell.  
a
b
Replace the drum cartridge. See "Replacing the Drum Cartridge."  
After you replace the drum cartridge, click Chart Print on the  
Diagnosis tab of the Tool Box  
Click Pitch Configuration Chart  
The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed.  
.
c
.
Does this solve your problem?  
Replace the fusing unit, the transfer unit, and the retard roller.  
The task is complete.  
a
b
c
Replace the fusing unit, the transfer unit, and the retard roller. See  
"Replacing the Fusing Unit, the Transfer Unit, and the Retard Roller."  
After you replace the fusing unit, the transfer unit, and the retard  
roller, click Chart Print on the Diagnosis tab of the Tool Box  
.
Click Pitch Configuration Chart  
The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed.  
Does this solve your problem?  
.
Troubleshooting Guide  
509  
 
Vertical blanks  
Action  
Yes  
No  
1
Ensure the light path is not covered.  
The task is complete.  
Go to action 2.  
a
b
Remove the drum cartridge, and keep it in the dark place.  
Clean the rear side of the drum cartridge with a dry cloth.  
NOTE: Be careful not to touch or damage the drum.  
c
d
e
Re-install the drum cartridge.  
Press the  
Tap Demo Page  
The demo page is printed.  
(Information) button and tap Report/List.  
.
Does this solve your problem?  
2
Replace the drum cartridge.  
The task is complete.  
Contact Dell.  
a
b
Replace the drum cartridge. See "Replacing the Drum Cartridge."  
After you replace the drum cartridge, press the (Information)  
button and tap Report/List  
Tap Demo Page  
The demo page is printed.  
.
c
.
Does this solve your problem?  
510  
Troubleshooting Guide  
 
Mottle  
ABC  
DEF  
Action  
Yes  
No  
1
Verify that the correct print media is being used. See "Supported Paper The task is complete.  
Types." If not, use the print media recommended for the printer.  
Go to action 2.  
Does this solve your problem?  
2
Raise the transfer unit voltage.  
The task is complete.  
The task is complete.  
Go to action 3.  
Contact Dell.  
a
Press the  
Admin Settings  
Transfer Unit  
Increase the voltage. See "Adjust Transfer Unit."  
(Information) button and tap the Toolstab  
tap  
Maintenance Adjust  
.
b
3
Replace the drum cartridge.  
a
Replace the drum cartridge. See "Replacing the Drum Cartridge."  
After you replace the drum cartridge, press the (Information)  
button and tap Report/List  
Tap Demo Page  
The demo page is printed.  
Does this solve your problem?  
b
.
c
.
Troubleshooting Guide  
511  
 
Ghosting  
Action  
Yes  
No  
1
Identify the type of ghosting.  
Proceed to the action  
corresponding to the  
type of ghosting.  
Contact Dell.  
a
Positive ghost  
b
Negative ghost  
Positive ghost - 2a  
Negative ghost - 2c  
ABC  
ABC  
Is the type of the problem identified?  
2a Specify Decrease Ghosting to On  
.
The task is complete.  
Go to action 2b.  
a
Press the  
Admin Settings  
Ghosting  
(Information) button and tap the Toolstab  
tap  
Maintenance Decrease  
.
b
c
Tap On  
Tap OK  
.
.
Does this solve your problem?  
2b Lower the transfer unit voltage.  
The task is complete.  
The task is complete.  
Go to action 3.  
Go to action 3.  
Go to action 4.  
a
Press the  
Admin Settings  
Transfer Unit  
Decrease the voltage. See "Adjust Transfer Unit."  
(Information) button and tap the Toolstab  
tap  
tap  
Maintenance Adjust  
.
b
Does this solve your problem?  
2c Increase the transfer unit voltage.  
a
Press the  
Admin Settings  
Transfer Unit  
Increase the voltage. See "Adjust Transfer Unit."  
(Information) button and tap the Toolstab  
Maintenance Adjust  
.
b
Does this solve your problem?  
3
Verify that the correct print media is being used. See "Supported Paper The task is complete.  
Types." If not, use the print media recommended for the printer.  
Does this solve your problem?  
512  
Troubleshooting Guide  
 
Action  
Replace the drum cartridge.  
Yes  
No  
4
The task is complete.  
Contact Dell  
a
Replace the drum cartridge. See "Replacing the Drum Cartridge."  
b
After you replace the drum cartridge, start the Tool Box from the Dell  
Printer Hub or Dell Printer Management Tool, and click Chart Print  
on the Diagnosis tab.  
c
Click Pitch Configuration Chart  
The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed.  
Does this solve your problem?  
.
Light-induced fatigue  
Action  
Yes  
No  
1
Check the light fatigue pattern using the Pitch Configuration Chart.  
Go to action 2.  
Contact Dell.  
a
Start the Tool Box from the Dell Printer Hub or Dell Printer  
Management Tool, and click Chart Print on the Diagnosis tab.  
b
Click Pitch Configuration Chart  
.
The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed.  
Does the pattern on the output match with that on the Pitch  
Configuration Chart?  
2
If the cause of the trouble is identified as the drum cartridge, replace the The task is complete.  
drum cartridge. See "Replacing the Drum Cartridge."  
Contact Dell.  
Does this solve your problem?  
Fog  
Action  
Check if you are using a non-Dell brand toner cartridge.  
Yes  
No  
1
Go to action 2a.  
Go to action 3.  
Troubleshooting Guide  
513  
   
Action  
Yes  
No  
2a Enable the Non-Dell Toner option.  
The task is complete.  
Go to action 2b.  
a
Start the Tool Box from the Dell Printer Hub or Dell Printer  
Management Tool, and click Service Tools on the Printer  
Maintenance tab.  
b
Ensure that the On check box under Non-Dell Toner is selected.  
Does this solve your problem?  
2b Replace the drum cartridge and the toner cartridge.  
The task is complete.  
Contact Dell.  
a
b
c
Remove the drum cartridge. See "Removing the Drum Cartridge."  
Install a drum cartridge and a toner cartridge using a Dell toner.  
After you replace the drum cartridge and the toner cartridge, click  
Reports on the Printer Setting Reports tab of the Tool Box  
Click Demo Page  
The demo page is printed.  
.
d
.
Does this solve your problem?  
Replace the drum cartridge.  
3
The task is complete.  
Contact Dell.  
a
Replace the drum cartridge. See "Replacing the Drum Cartridge."  
b
After you replace the drum cartridge, click Reports on the Printer  
Setting Reports tab of the Tool Box  
Click Demo Page  
The demo page is printed.  
Does this solve your problem?  
.
c
.
Bead-Carry-Out (BCO)  
Action  
Yes  
No  
1
If the printer is installed in a high altitude location, set the altitude of  
the location.  
The task is complete.  
Go to action 2.  
a
Start the Tool Box from the Dell Printer Hub or Dell Printer  
Management Tool, and click Service Tools on the Printer  
Maintenance tab.  
b
Under Adjust Altitude, select the value close to the altitude of the  
location where the printer is installed.  
c
d
Click Reports on the Printer Setting Reports tab.  
Click Demo Page  
.
The demo page is printed.  
Does this solve your problem?  
514  
Troubleshooting Guide  
 
Action  
Replace the drum cartridge.  
Yes  
No  
2
The task is complete.  
Contact Dell.  
a
b
c
Replace the drum cartridge. See "Replacing the Drum Cartridge."  
Click Reports on the Printer Setting Reports tab.  
Click Demo Page  
The demo page is printed.  
Does this solve your problem?  
.
Jagged characters  
Action  
Yes  
No  
1
Set Screen to Fineness in the printer driver.  
On the Graphics tab, set Screen to Fineness  
The task is complete.  
Go to action 2.  
a
.
Does this solve your problem?  
2
Enable Print Page Mode in the printer driver.  
The task is complete.  
Go to action 3.  
Contact Dell.  
a
On the Others tab, set Print Page Mode under Image Options: to  
On  
.
Does this solve your problem?  
3
If using a downloaded font, ensure that the font is recommended for the The task is complete.  
printer, operating system, and the application being used.  
Does this solve your problem?  
Troubleshooting Guide  
515  
 
Banding  
Action  
Yes  
No  
1
Locate the cause of the problem using the Pitch Configuration Chart. Proceed to the action Contact Dell.  
corresponding to the  
location of the  
problem:  
a
Start the Tool Box from the Dell Printer Hub or Dell Printer  
Management Tool, and click Chart Print on the Diagnosis tab.  
b
Click Pitch Configuration Chart  
.
• Drum cartridge - 2  
• Fusing unit - 3  
The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed.  
Is the cause of the problem located?  
Replace the drum cartridge.  
2
The task is complete.  
Contact Dell.  
Contact Dell.  
a
b
Replace the drum cartridge. See "Replacing the Drum Cartridge."  
After you replace the drum cartridge, click Chart Print on the  
Diagnosis tab of the Tool Box  
Click Pitch Configuration Chart  
The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed.  
.
c
.
Does this solve your problem?  
3
Replace the fusing unit, the transfer unit, and the retard roller.  
The task is complete.  
a
b
c
Replace the fusing unit, the transfer unit, and the retard roller. See  
"Replacing the Fusing Unit, the Transfer Unit, and the Retard Roller."  
After you replace the fusing unit, the transfer unit, and the retard  
roller, click Chart Print on the Diagnosis tab of the Tool Box  
Click Pitch Configuration Chart  
The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed.  
Does this solve your problem?  
.
.
Auger mark  
Action  
Yes  
No  
1
Replace the drum cartridge. See "Replacing the Drum Cartridge."  
Does this solve your problem?  
The task is complete.  
Contact Dell.  
516  
Troubleshooting Guide  
   
Wrinkled/Stained paper  
Action  
Yes  
No  
1
Verify that the correct print media is being used. See "Supported Paper The task is complete.  
Types." If not, use the print media recommended for the printer.  
If printing on an  
envelope, go to action  
2.  
Does this solve your problem?  
If printing on print  
media other than  
envelopes, go to action  
5.  
2
3
Ensure that the printer is set to the envelope mode. See "Printing on  
Envelopes – Envelope Mode."  
The task is complete.  
Go to action 3.  
Does this solve your problem?  
Check the wrinkle. Is the wrinkle within 30 mm of the four edges of the  
envelope?  
This type of wrinkle is Go to action 4.  
considered normal.  
Your printer is not at  
fault.  
4
Load the envelopes in the MPF properly. For details, see "Loading  
Envelopes in the MPF."  
The task is complete.  
The task is complete.  
Go to action 5.  
Does this solve your problem?  
Adjust the paper guides properly.  
Does this solve your problem?  
5
6
Go to action 6.  
Contact Dell.  
Replace the print media with the freshly unpackaged, undamaged one. The task is complete.  
Does this solve your problem?  
Damage on the leading edge of paper  
Action  
Yes  
No  
1
Adjust the paper guides properly.  
Does this solve your problem?  
The task is complete.  
Go to action 2.  
Troubleshooting Guide  
517  
   
Action  
Yes  
No  
2
When you use the MPF, reverse the paper and then try again.  
The task is complete.  
(MPF)  
Go to action 3.  
When you use any of the trays, change the paper and then try again.  
Does this solve your problem?  
(trays)  
Contact Dell.  
3
4
Change the paper with another one and then try again.  
Does this solve your problem?  
The task is complete.  
The task is complete.  
Go to action 4.  
Use any of the trays in place of the MPF.  
Does this solve your problem?  
Contact Dell.  
Jam/Alignment Problems  
NOTE: Some of the following procedures that use the Tool Box can also be performed using the operator panel or Dell Printer  
Configuration Web Tool. For information on how to use the operator panel and Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, see  
"Understanding the Printer Menus" and "Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool."  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The top and side margins are incorrect  
Images are skewed  
Tray1/Optional 550-Sheet Feeder Misfeed Jam  
MPF Misfeed Jam  
Regi Jam (Exit Sensor On JAM)  
Exit Jam (Exit Sensor Off JAM)  
Tray1/Optional 550-Sheet Feeder Multi-feed Jam  
MPF Multi-feed Jam  
The top and side margins are incorrect  
Action  
Yes  
No  
1
2
3
Adjust the paper guides properly.  
Does this solve your problem?  
The task is complete.  
Go to action 2.  
Use any of the trays in place of the MPF.  
Does this solve your problem?  
The task is complete.  
Go to action 3.  
Contact Dell.  
Ensure that the margins are set correctly on the application being used. The task is complete.  
Does this solve your problem?  
518  
Troubleshooting Guide  
   
Images are skewed  
Action  
Yes  
No  
1
2
3
Adjust the paper guides properly.  
The task is complete.  
Go to action 2.  
Does this solve your problem?  
Use any of the trays in place of the MPF.  
Does this solve your problem?  
The task is complete.  
Go to action 3.  
Contact Dell.  
Replace the print media with the freshly unpackaged, undamaged one. The task is complete.  
Does this solve your problem?  
Tray1/Optional 550-Sheet Feeder Misfeed Jam  
Action  
Yes  
No  
1
Ensure that tray1 or the optional 550-sheet feeder is properly inserted. The task is complete.  
Does this solve your problem?  
Proceed to the action  
corresponding to the  
type of the print media  
being used:  
• Thick - 2a  
• Thin - 2b  
• Rough Surface - 2c  
If using paper other  
than the above, go to  
action 2d, 2e.  
2
2a Use thick paper that is 216 g/m or less.  
The task is complete.  
The task is complete.  
The task is complete.  
The task is complete.  
Go to action 3a.  
Go to action 3a.  
Go to action 3b.  
Go to action 3a.  
Does this solve your problem?  
2
2b Use thin paper that is 60 g/m or more.  
Does this solve your problem?  
2c Load rough surface paper one sheet at a time.  
Does this solve your problem?  
2d Ensure that the print media is not curled.  
Does this solve your problem?  
2e Is the print media damp?  
Go to action 3c.  
Go to action 3a.  
Go to action 3b.  
3a Fan the print media.  
The task is complete.  
Does this solve your problem?  
3b Wipe the retard roller in tray1 or the optional 550-sheet feeder with a  
The task is complete.  
Go to action 4b.  
cloth moistened with water.  
Does this solve your problem?  
Troubleshooting Guide  
519  
   
Action  
Yes  
No  
3c Turn over the print media.  
Does this solve your problem?  
4a Use print media that is not damp.  
Does this solve your problem?  
4b Replace the drum cartridge.  
Does this solve your problem?  
The task is complete.  
Go to action 4a.  
The task is complete.  
Go to action 3a.  
The task is complete. Contact Dell.  
MPF Misfeed Jam  
Action  
Yes  
No  
1
Ensure that the MPF is properly inserted.  
Does this solve your problem?  
The task is complete.  
Proceed to the action  
corresponding to the  
type of the print media  
being used:  
• Thick - 2a  
• Thin - 2b  
• Rough Surface - 2c  
• Envelope - 2d  
If using paper other  
than the above, go to  
action 2e.  
2
2a Use thick paper that is 216 g/m or less.  
The task is complete.  
The task is complete.  
The task is complete.  
Go to action 3a.  
Go to action 3a.  
Go to action 3b.  
Go to action 3c.  
Does this solve your problem?  
2
2b Use thin paper that is 60 g/m or more.  
Does this solve your problem?  
2c Load rough surface paper one sheet at a time.  
Does this solve your problem?  
2d Ensure that the envelope is properly loaded in the MPF as instructed in The task is complete.  
"Loading Envelopes in the MPF."  
Does this solve your problem?  
2e Is the print media damp?  
Go to action 3d.  
Go to action 3a.  
Go to action 3b.  
3a Fan the print media.  
The task is complete.  
Does this solve your problem?  
3b Wipe the retard roller in the MPF with a cloth moistened with water.  
Does this solve your problem?  
The task is complete.  
The task is complete.  
The task is complete.  
The task is complete.  
The task is complete.  
Go to action 4b.  
Go to action 3a.  
Go to action 4a.  
Go to action 3a.  
Contact Dell.  
3c If the envelope is deformed, correct it or use another envelope.  
Does this solve your problem?  
3d Turn over the print media.  
Does this solve your problem?  
4a Use print media that is not damp.  
Does this solve your problem?  
4b Replace the drum cartridge.  
Does this solve your problem?  
520  
Troubleshooting Guide  
 
Regi Jam (Exit Sensor On JAM)  
Action  
Yes  
No  
1
2
3
4
Ensure that the drum cartridge is installed correctly.  
Does this solve your problem?  
The task is complete.  
Go to action 2.  
Replace the drum cartridge. See "Replacing the Drum Cartridge."  
Does this solve your problem?  
The task is complete.  
The task is complete.  
The task is complete.  
Go to action 3.  
Go to action 4.  
Contact Dell.  
Ensure that the fusing unit is set properly.  
Does this solve your problem?  
Replace the fusing unit, the transfer unit, and the retard roller.  
a
Replace the fusing unit, the transfer unit, and the retard roller. See  
"Replacing the Fusing Unit, the Transfer Unit, and the Retard Roller."  
b
After you replace the fusing unit, the transfer unit, and the retard  
roller, press the  
(Information) button and tap  
Report/List  
.
c
Tap Demo Page  
The demo page is printed.  
Does this solve your problem?  
.
Exit Jam (Exit Sensor Off JAM)  
Action  
Yes  
No  
1
Ensure the fusing unit is installed correctly.  
Does this solve your problem?  
The task is complete.  
Go to action 2.  
2
Replace the fusing unit, the transfer unit, and the retard roller.  
The task is complete.  
Contact Dell.  
a
Replace the fusing unit, the transfer unit, and the retard roller. See  
"Replacing the Fusing Unit, the Transfer Unit, and the Retard Roller."  
b
After you replace the fusing unit, the transfer unit, and the retard  
roller, press the  
Report/List  
(Information) button and tap  
.
c
Tap Demo Page  
The demo page is printed.  
Does this solve your problem?  
.
Tray1/Optional 550-Sheet Feeder Multi-feed Jam  
Action  
Yes  
No  
1
Ensure that tray1 or the optional 550-sheet feeder is properly inserted. The task is complete.  
Does this solve your problem?  
If using rough surface  
paper, go to action 2.  
If using other type of  
print media, go to  
action 3.  
2
3
Load rough surface paper one sheet at a time.  
Does this solve your problem?  
The task is complete.  
The task is complete.  
Go to action 4.  
Use print media that is not damp.  
Does this solve your problem?  
Go to action 4.  
Troubleshooting Guide  
521  
     
Action  
Yes  
No  
4
Fan the print media.  
Does this solve your problem?  
The task is complete.  
Go to action 5.  
5
Wipe the retard roller in tray1 or the optional 550-sheet feeder where the The task is complete. Contact Dell.  
multi-feed occurred with a cloth moistened with water.  
Does this solve your problem?  
MPF Multi-feed Jam  
Action  
Yes  
No  
1
Ensure the media type you are using.  
-
-
If using rough surface paper, go to action 2.  
If using other type of print media, go to action 3.  
Load rough surface paper one sheet at a time.  
Does this solve your problem?  
2
3
4
5
The task is complete.  
The task is complete.  
The task is complete.  
Go to action 4.  
Go to action 4.  
Go to action 5.  
Go to action 6.  
Use print media that is not damp.  
Does this solve your problem?  
Fan the print media.  
Does this solve your problem?  
Wipe the retard roller in the MPF where the multi-feed occurred with a The task is complete.  
cloth moistened with water.  
Does this solve your problem?  
6
Decrease the number of print media to be loaded to the MPF.  
Does this solve your problem?  
The task is complete. Contact Dell.  
Noise  
Action  
Yes  
No  
1
Replace the fusing unit, the transfer unit, and the retard roller.  
The task is complete.  
Go to action 2.  
a
Replace the fusing unit, the transfer unit, and the retard roller. See  
"Replacing the Fusing Unit, the Transfer Unit, and the Retard Roller."  
b
After you replace the fusing unit, the transfer unit, and the retard  
roller, press the  
Report/List  
(Information) button and tap  
.
c
Tap Demo Page  
.
The demo page is printed.  
Does this solve your problem?  
2
3
Replace the drum cartridge.  
The task is complete.  
Go to action 3.  
Contact Dell.  
Does this solve your problem?  
Replace the toner cartridge. See "Replacing the Toner Cartridge."  
The task is complete.  
(The toner cartridge  
has been damaged.  
Replace it with a new  
one.)  
522  
Troubleshooting Guide  
   
Copy Problems  
Problem  
Action  
The copy is misaligned or skewed.  
Before loading the document(s) on the DADF, straighten the edges of the stack of  
the document(s).  
Load the document(s) correctly, and align the document guides to the  
document(s).  
A document loaded in the DADF cannot be Ensure that the DADF cover is firmly closed.  
copied.  
Ensure that the release lever is properly positioned.  
Vertical blanks or streaks appear on the  
output when scanned using the DADF.  
Clean the DADF glass.  
Vertical lines appear on the outputs when  
you copy using the DADF.  
Clean the DADF glass.  
Fax Problems  
Problem  
Action  
The printer is not working, there is no  
display and the buttons are not working.  
Unplug the power cable and plug it in again.  
Ensure that there is power to the electrical receptacle.  
No dial tone sounds.  
Check that the phone line is connected properly. See "Connecting to the  
Telephone Line."  
Check that the phone socket in the wall is working by plugging in another phone.  
Diagnose the fax connection. See "Diagnosing the Fax Connection."  
Faxes are not sent correctly to the numbers Print a Phone Book list and ensure that the numbers are stored in the memory  
stored in the memory.  
correctly.  
The document does not feed into the  
printer.  
Ensure that the document is not wrinkled and you are putting it in correctly.  
Check that the document is of the right size, not too thick or thin.  
Ensure that the DADF cover is firmly closed.  
The FAXmode should be selected.  
Faxes are not received automatically.  
Ensure that there is paper in the paper tray.  
Check to see if the display shows MFP Memory Full  
.
If the time interval specified for the following features is too long, change the time  
interval shorter such as 30 seconds.  
• Auto Rec Fax  
• Auto Rec TEL/FAX  
• Auto Rec Ans/FAX  
Diagnose the fax connection. See "Diagnosing the Fax Connection."  
Sending Faxshould show up on the display.  
Check the other fax machine you are sending to, to see if it can receive your fax.  
Check the dialing type for Tone or Pulse.  
The printer does not send faxes.  
Ensure that the document is loaded in the DADF or on the document glass.  
Diagnose the fax connection. See "Diagnosing the Fax Connection."  
Troubleshooting Guide  
523  
   
Problem  
Action  
The incoming fax has blank spaces or is  
received in poor quality.  
Check your printer by making a copy.  
The toner cartridge may be empty. Replace the toner cartridge. See "Replacing the  
Toner Cartridge."  
A noisy phone line can cause line errors. Set the fax modem speed to a slower  
speed.  
The fax machine sending you the fax may be faulty.  
Some of the words on an incoming fax are The fax machine sending you the fax had a temporary document jam.  
stretched.  
There are lines on the documents you send. Check the surface of the document glass and DADF glass for marks and clean it.  
See "Cleaning the Scanner."  
Vertical lines appear on the documents when Clean the DADF glass.  
you send using the DADF.  
The printer dials a number, but the  
The other fax machine may be turned off, out of paper, or cannot answer incoming  
connection with another fax machine fails. calls. Speak with the other machine operator and ask her/him to sort out the  
problem.  
Documents are not stored in the memory.  
There may not be enough memory to store the document. If the display shows a  
MFP Memory Fullmessage, delete any documents you no longer need from  
the memory and then restore the document, or wait for the job in progress (e.g., a  
fax transmission or reception) to complete.  
Blank areas appear at the bottom of each  
You may have chosen the wrong paper settings in the user option setting. See  
page or on other pages, with a small strip of "Print Media Guidelines."  
text at the top.  
The printer will not send or receive faxes.  
Ensure that the country code is set correctly. Press the  
and tap the Toolstab tap Admin Settings  
Fax Settings Fax Line Settings Country  
(Information) button  
.
Check the dialing type for Tone or Pulse.  
Check that the cables are connected properly.  
If the telephone line cord is connected to the printer via any device such as an  
answering machine and a computer, remove the device and directly connect the  
telephone line cord to the printer.  
Ensure that Junk Fax Setupis set to off  
Reduce the modem speed. Press the (Information) button and tap the  
Toolstab tap Admin Settings Fax Settings  
Modem Speed  
.
An error often occurs during a fax  
transmission or reception.  
Transmission Defaults  
.
The printer receive faxes, but it does not  
print.  
Check the toner level.  
Ensure that there is paper in the paper tray.  
Ensure that Received Fax Forwardis set to off  
.
Check whether the printer is in the secure receiving mode. If this mode is turned  
on, enter the correct password or turn off this mode to print faxes in memory.  
524  
Troubleshooting Guide  
Scanning Problems  
Problem  
Action  
The scanner does not work.  
Ensure that you place the document to be scanned facing down from the  
document glass, or facing up in the DADF.  
There may not be enough available memory to hold the document you want to  
scan. Lower the scan resolution rate and then try scanning again.  
Check that the USB or Ethernet cable is connected properly.  
Ensure that the USB or Ethernet cable is not defective. Switch the cable with a  
known good cable. If necessary, replace the cable.  
If using the network TWAIN or Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) driver, check  
that the Ethernet cable is connected properly and the IP address of the printer is  
set correctly. To check the IP address, see "Verifying the IP Settings."  
Check that the scanner is configured correctly. Check the application you want to  
use to make certain that the scanner job is being sent to the correct port.  
Ensure that the scanner sharing feature is disabled when you use Mac OS X before  
you scan documents via an ICA compatible application such as Image Capture.  
The printer does not support the scanner sharing feature of Mac OS X. Select a  
printer which is directly connected to the computer via USB or wired /wireless  
LAN and scan documents.  
The printer scans very slowly.  
Graphics are scanned more slowly than text when using the Scan to Email  
or Scan to Network Folderfeature.  
Communication speed becomes slow in scan mode because of the large amount of  
memory required to analyze and reproduce the scanned image.  
Scanning images at a high resolution takes more time than scanning at a low  
resolution.  
Document misfeeds or multiple feeds occur Check whether the DADF roller assembly is installed properly.  
in the DADF.  
Ensure the document’s paper type meets the specifications for the printer. See  
"Supported Paper Types" for more information.  
Check whether the document is properly loaded in the DADF.  
Ensure that the document guides are adjusted properly.  
Ensure that the number of document sheets do not exceed the maximum capacity  
of the DADF.  
Ensure that the document is not curled.  
Fan the document well before loading it in the DADF.  
Vertical blanks or streaks appear on the  
output when scanned using the DADF.  
Clean the DADF glass.  
Vertical lines appear on the output when  
scanned using the DADF.  
Clean the DADF glass.  
A smear appears at the same location on the Clean the document glass.  
output when scanned using the document  
glass.  
Images are skewed.  
Before loading the document(s) on the DADF, straighten the edges of the stack of  
the document(s).  
Ensure that the document is loaded straight in the DADF or on the document  
glass.  
Troubleshooting Guide  
525  
 
Problem  
Action  
Diagonal lines appear jagged when scanned If the document uses thick media, try scanning it from the document glass.  
using the DADF.  
Message appears on your computer screen: There may be a copying or printing job in progress. When the current job is  
complete, try the job again.  
• "Device can’t be set to the H/W mode you  
want."  
The selected port is currently being used. Restart your computer and try again.  
The cable may be improperly connected or the printer may be turned off.  
• "Port is being used by another program."  
• "Port is Disabled."  
The scanner driver is not installed or an operating environment is not set up  
properly.  
• "Scanner is busy receiving or printing data.  
When the current job is completed, try  
again."  
Ensure that the port is properly connected and the printer is turned on. Then  
restart your computer.  
• "Invalid handle."  
Check that the USB or Ethernet cable is connected properly.  
• "Scanning has failed."  
The printer does not properly transfer scan Check if the following settings have been set correctly on the Dell Printer  
data to a specified destination via the Scan Configuration Web Tool  
.
to Email or Scan to Network Folder feature.  
Scan to Network Folder  
Check the following settings under Address BookServer Address:  
• Server Address  
• Share Name  
• Server Path  
• Login Name  
• Login Password  
Scan to Email  
Check the following setting under Address BookE-Mail Address:  
• Address  
Cannot scan using Windows Image  
Enable Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) on the computer.  
®
Acquisition (WIA) on a Microsoft  
To enable Windows Image Acquisition (WIA):  
®
Windows Server 2003 computer.  
1
2
Click Start, point to Administrative Tools, and then click Services  
Right-click Windows Image Acquisition (WIA), and then click Start  
.
.
Cannot scan using TWAIN or Windows  
Image Acquisition (WIA) on a Windows  
Server 2008 or Windows Server 2008 R2  
computer.  
Install the Desktop Experience feature on the computer.  
To install Desktop Experience:  
®
®
1
2
3
4
Click Start, point to Administrative Tools, and then click Server Manager  
.
Under Features Summary, click Add Features  
.
Select the Desktop Experience check box, click Next, and then click Install  
Restart the computer.  
.
526  
Troubleshooting Guide  
Problem  
Action  
Cannot scan using TWAIN or Windows  
Image Acquisition (WIA) on a Windows  
Server® 2012 or Windows Server® 2012 R2  
computer.  
Install the Desktop Experience feature on the computer.  
To install Desktop Experience:  
1
Click Server Manager from the Start screen.  
The Server Manager screen appears.  
2
Under Manage, click Add Roles and Features  
.
Add Roles and Features Wizard appears.  
3
4
Click Next to skip the Before you begin page.  
Ensure that Role-based or feature-based installation is selected, and then click  
Next  
Ensure that Select a server from the server pool is selected, select the server under  
Server Pool, and then click Next  
.
5
.
6
7
Click Next to skip the Select server roles page.  
Select the Desktop Experience check box under User Interfaces and  
Infrastructure, and then click Next  
.
8
9
Click Confirmation from the list on the left.  
Select the Restart the destination server automatically if required check box, and  
then click Install  
.
10 Restart the computer.  
Digital Certificate Problems  
Symptom  
Cause  
Action  
The certificate import button is  
disabled.  
SSL/TLS communication is  
disabled.  
Create a self-signed certificate and enable SSL/TLS.  
The certificate details button is  
disabled.  
The certificate cannot be imported. The time setting is incorrect.  
Confirm validity period of the certificate as well as  
the time setting of the device.  
The certificate file is incorrect.  
Confirm whether the password is correct.  
Confirm whether the file type is PKCS#7/#12 or  
x509CACert (extension: p7b/p12/pfx/cer/crt).  
Confirm whether the attribute information (key  
Usage/Extended key usage) of the certificate to be  
imported is set correctly.  
®
The browser is incorrect.  
Use Internet Explorer .  
016-404 is displayed when trying to The certificate data stored in  
Import the certificate and enable the security  
settings again.  
use security functions that require  
certificates.  
internal memory is either deleted,  
corrupt, or is not readable.  
Troubleshooting Guide  
527  
   
Symptom  
Cause  
Action  
A certificate cannot be set with  
"Certificate Details".  
The validity period is invalid.  
The validity period of the certificate is invalid.  
Confirm whether the time setting of the machine is  
correct, and whether the validity period of the  
certificate has expired.  
The certificate path is invalid.  
The certificate chain (path validation) of the  
imported certificate may not be correctly validated.  
Confirm whether all of the high-level certificates  
(Trusted/Intermediate) have been imported and are  
not deleted, and whether the validity period has  
expired.  
Although a certificate was imported, The type of the certificate is  
To import a certificate for use with the device (own  
device), import the secret key and a certificate of  
the PKCS#12 (p12/pfx) format as a pair.  
it is not displayed when selecting  
with "Local Device".  
incorrect.  
Server validation is not operating  
correctly.  
The certificate chain is incorrect  
when importing.  
Although importing a root certificate (Trusted) to  
use for server authentication, an Intermediate  
certificate may be required when validating the  
path.  
When executing a certificate file with the  
certification authority, create the certificate with a  
format including all paths and then import that  
certificate.  
Problems With Installed Optional Accessory  
If an option does not operate correctly following installation or stops working:  
•
•
•
Turn off the printer, wait for 10 seconds, and then turn on the printer. If this does not fix the problem, unplug the  
printer, and check the connection between the option and the printer.  
Print the system settings report to see if the option is listed in the Printer Options list. If the option is not listed, re-  
install it. See "Report / List."  
Ensure the option is selected in the printer driver you are using.  
The following table lists printer's option and corrective action for related problem. If the suggested corrective action  
does not correct the problem, call customer service.  
Problem  
Action  
550-sheet feeder  
• Ensure the 550-sheet feeder is correctly installed on the printer. Re-install the  
feeder. See "Removing the Optional 550-Sheet Feeder" and "Installing the  
Optional 550-Sheet Feeder."  
• Ensure the print media is loaded correctly. See "Loading Print Media in Tray1 and  
the Optional 550-Sheet Feeder" for more information.  
Wi-Fi Direct Problems  
Problem  
Action  
The device cannot discover the printer.  
The printer may be connected to another device via Wi-Fi Direct. Disconnect the  
printer and the device. See "Disconnecting Wi-Fi Direct Network."  
528  
Troubleshooting Guide  
   
Problem  
Action  
The printer cannot disconnect from the  
device even when the procedure in  
"Disconnecting Wi-Fi Direct Network" has  
been performed.  
The device may be automatically reconnecting to the printer. Reset the passphrase  
for Wi-Fi Direct and disconnect the device. See "Resetting the Passphrase."  
The network mode of the printer cannot be Ensure that Wi-Fi Direct is set to Disable.  
set to Ad-hoc mode.  
Wi-Fi Direct cannot be set to Enable.  
Ensure that the network mode is set to Infrastructure mode.  
Ensure that the IP mode is set to a mode other than IPv6.  
Scanner Driver/Printer Utility Problems  
Problem  
Action  
Unable to retrieve the Address Book data  
from the printer on the Address Book Editor.  
Check that the USB or Ethernet cable is connected properly.  
Ensure that the printer is turned on.  
Ensure that the scanner driver is installed on your computer. (The Address Book  
Editor retrieves the Address Book data via the scanner driver when the printer is  
connected using a USB cable.)  
The TWAIN driver cannot connect to the  
printer.  
Check that the USB or Ethernet cable is connected properly.  
If using the network connection, check that IP address of the printer is set  
correctly. To check the IP address, see "Scanning Using the TWAIN Driver."  
Check whether the printer is turned on. If the printer is turned on, reboot it by  
turning off the printer and then on again.  
If a scan application is running, close the application once, restart the application,  
and then try scanning again.  
The scanner driver has not been registered Install the scanner driver. If the scanner driver is installed, uninstall it and then re-  
on your computer.  
Other Problems  
Problem  
install it again.  
Action  
Condensation has occurred inside the  
printer.  
This usually occurs within several hours after you heat the room in winter. This  
also occurs when the printer is operating in a location where relative humidity  
reaches 85% or more. Adjust the humidity or relocate the printer to an appropriate  
environment.  
A problem has occurred when using the Dell Visit www.dell.com/dochub for information about the Dell Document Hub.  
Document Hub.  
Contacting Service  
When you call for printer service, be prepared to describe the problem you are experiencing or the error message that  
appears.  
You need to know the model type and Service Tag number of your printer. See the label located inside the front cover  
of your printer and write down the Service Tag number. For details on the location of the Service Tag, see "Express  
Service Code and Service Tag."  
Troubleshooting Guide  
529  
     
530  
Troubleshooting Guide  
Appendix  
Appendix..................................................................................... 533  
531  
 
532  
Appendix  
Dell™ Technical Support Policy  
Technician-assisted technical support requires the cooperation and participation of the customer in the  
troubleshooting process and provides for restoration of the operating system, software program and hardware drivers  
to the original default configuration as shipped from Dell, as well as the verification of appropriate functionality of  
the printer and all Dell-installed hardware. In addition to this technician assisted technical support, online technical  
support is available at Dell Support. Additional technical support options may be available for purchase.  
Dell provides limited technical support for the printer and any Dell-installed software and peripherals. Support for  
third-party software and peripherals is provided by the original manufacturer, including those purchased and/or  
installed through Software & Peripherals (DellWare), ReadyWare, and Custom Factory Integration (CFI/DellPlus).  
Online Services  
You can access Dell Support through the following websites:  
•
Product support and manuals  
www.dell.com/support  
www.dell.com/support/manuals  
www.dell.com/printer  
Warranty and Return Policy  
Dell Inc. ("Dell") manufactures its hardware products from parts and components that are new or equivalent to new  
in accordance with industry-standard practices. For information about the Dell warranty for your printer, see  
dell.com/support.  
Recycling Information  
It is recommended that customers dispose of their used computer hardware, monitors, printers, and other peripherals in an environmentally  
sound manner. Potential methods include reuse of parts or whole products and recycling of products, components, and/or materials.  
For specific information on Dell’s worldwide recycling programs, see www.dell.com/recyclingworldwide.  
Contacting Dell  
You can contact Dell electronically using the following addresses:  
•
World Wide Web  
www.dell.com/contactdell  
Appendix  
533  
             
New Zealand PTC200 Warnings  
General warning  
"The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the  
item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product  
by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work  
correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it  
imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services"  
Warnings taken from Specification text  
2.11.1 Compliance testing (6) & (7) (Functional tests)  
"This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it  
is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances"  
4.5.1 Off-hook line impedance  
(4) "This equipment does not fully meet Telecom's impedance requirements. Performance limitations may occur  
when used in conjunction with some parts of the network. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties  
arise in such circumstances"  
4.9.3 Non-voice equipment  
(4) "This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct at the higher speeds for which it is  
designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances"  
5.6.1 General requirements (automatic dialling devices)  
(3) "This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom '111' Emergency Service  
5.5.5 User instructions  
(4) If a charge for local calls is unacceptable, the 'Dial' button should NOT be used for local calls. Only the 7-digits of  
the local number should be dialled from your telephone. DO NOT dial the area code digit or the '0' prefix  
8.1.7 User Instructions (automatic call set-up)  
(b) This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom '111' Emergency Service  
8.2.1(b) Call answering  
When this equipment is set up call answering not within 3~30 sec., the telephone or answering machine shall  
answer incoming call with 3~30sec.  
534  
Appendix  
 
USA/Canada Wi-Fi Warnings  
Class B:  
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION INTERFERENCE STATEMENT  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15  
of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a  
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed  
and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However,  
there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause  
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on,  
the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:  
-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
-Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
-Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.  
-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/ TV technician for help.  
CAUTION:  
Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the grantee of this device could void the user's authority to  
operate the equipment.  
Labeling Requirements  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this  
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including  
interference that may cause undesired operation.  
RF Exposure Warning  
This equipment must be installed and operated in accordance with provided instructions and the antenna(s) used  
for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not  
be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. End-users and installers must be  
provide with antenna installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure  
compliance.  
Canada, Industry Canada (IC) Notices  
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003 and RSS-210.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device  
must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.  
Appendix  
535  
 
Radio Frequency (RF) Exposure Information  
The radiated output power of the Wireless Device is below the Industry Canada (IC) radio frequency exposure  
limits. The Wireless Device should be used in such a manner such that the potential for human contact during  
normal operation is minimized.  
This device has also been evaluated and shown compliant with the IC RF Exposure limits under mobile exposure  
conditions. (antennas are greater than 20cm from a person's body).  
This device has been certified for use in Canada. Status of the listing in the Industry  
Canada's REL (Radio Equipment List) can be found at the following web address:  
http://www.ic.gc.ca/app/sitt/reltel/srch/nwRdSrch.do?lang=eng  
Additional Canadian information on RF exposure also can be found at the following web address:  
http://www.ic.gc.ca/eic/site/smt-gst.nsf/eng/sf08792.html  
Canada, avis d'Industry Canada (IC)  
Cet appareil numérique de classe B est conforme aux normes canadiennes ICES-003 et RSS-210.  
Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) cet appareil ne doit pas causer d'interférence et  
(2) cet appareil doit accepter toute interférence, notamment les interférences qui peuvent affecter son  
fonctionnement.  
Informations concernant l'exposition aux fréquences radio (RF)  
La puissance de sortie émise par l'appareil de sans fil Dell est inférieure à la limite d'exposition aux fréquences radio  
d'Industry Canada (IC). Utilisez l'appareil de sans fil Dell de façon à minimiser les contacts humains lors du  
fonctionnement normal.  
Ce périphérique a également été évalué et démontré conforme aux limites d'exposition aux RF d'IC dans des  
conditions d'exposition à des appareils mobiles (les antennes se situent à moins de 20 cm du corps d'une  
personne).  
Ce périphérique est homologué pour l'utilisation au Canada. Pour consulter l'entrée correspondant à l'appareil dans  
la liste d'équipement radio (REL - Radio Equipment List) d'Industry Canada rendez-vous sur:  
http://www.ic.gc.ca/app/sitt/reltel/srch/nwRdSrch.do?lang=eng  
Pour des informations supplémentaires concernant l'exposition aux RF au Canada rendez-vous sur :  
http://www.ic.gc.ca/eic/site/smt-gst.nsf/eng/sf08792.html  
Canada IC Statement  
NOTICE:  
•
This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada Terminal Equipment Technical Specifications. This is  
confirmed by the registration number. The abbreviation, IC, before the registration number signifies that  
registration was performed based on a Declaration of Conformity indicating that Industry Canada technical  
specifications were met. It does not imply that Industry Canada approved the equipment.  
•
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this terminal equipment is 0.0. The REN assigned to each terminal  
equipment provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone  
interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the  
requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not exceed five.  
536  
Appendix  
Avis :  
•
Le présent matériel est conforme aux spécifications techniques d'Industrie Canada applicables au matériel  
terminal. Cette conformité est confirmée par le numéro d'enregistrement. Le sigle IC, placé devant le numéro  
d'enregistrement, signifie que l'enregistrement s'est effectué conformément à une déclaration de conformité et  
indique que les spécifications techniques d'Industrie Canada ont été respectées. Il n'implique pas qu'Industrie  
Canada a approuvé le matériel.  
•
L'indice d'équivalence de la sonnerie (IES) du présent matériel est de 0.0. L'IES assigné à chaque dispositif  
terminal indique le nombre maximal de terminaux qui peuvent être raccordés à une interface téléphonique. La  
terminaison d'une interface peut consister en une combinaison quelconque de dispositifs, à la seule condition que  
la somme d'indices d'équivalence de la sonnerie de tous les dispositifs n'excède pas 5.  
Appendix  
537  

York Yuhc 07 18 User Manual
Xerox Docucolor 12 User Manual
Samsung Awt24f1mb User Manual
LG 29LY340C User Manual
KENWOOD KR V7060 User Manual
DIGIUM TE120P User Manual
DELL VOSTRO 3350 User Manual
DATAVIDEO ZEK 2 User Manual
CRAFTSMAN 247.37787 User Manual
ACER ASPIRE 4715Z User Manual